Home

PCL 5 Printer LanguageTechnical

1. DIMENSIONS at 300 DPI double for 600 DPI PAPER SIZE JA B C D E F G H LETTER 3300 2550 3180 60 0 50 150 Legal List 1 4200 2550 4080 60 0 50 150 LEDGER 5100 3300 4980 60 0 50 150 EXECUTIVE 3150 2175 3030 60 0 50 150 A4 3507 2480 3389 59 0 50 150 A3 4960 3507 4842 59 0 50 150 COM 10 2850 1237 2730 60 0 50 150 MONARCH 2250 1162 2130 60 0 50 150 C5 2704 1913 2586 59 0 50 150 B5 2952 2078 2834 59 0 50 150 DL 2598 1299 2480 59 0 50 150 2 8 The Page EN Notes EN The HP LaserJet printers perform pixel level clipping When printing characters or graphics if any portion of the character cell or graphic is outside the printable area only that portion outside the printable area is clipped see Figure 2 4 Resulting Print Physical Page Character Cell Position Partial Character Clipped ps t t p i H H 2 t H z H pa pi H H Printable Area Printable Area Figure 2 4 Printable Area Character Cell Positioning Pixel level clipping can also occur at the logical page for PCL when the page is positioned using the Left Registration command Pixel level clipping also occurs at the picture frame for HP GL 2 Characters are clipped if they fall across a margin left right top and bottom Refer to Text Area in Chapter 5 for additional information Printable Area 2 9 2 10 The Page EN Note EN The
2. 00 eee eee eee 9 8 Contents 4 EN User Defined Symbol Sets Symbol Set ID Code Command 0 0 ene 10 2 Define Symbol Set 0 0 000060 cee ee 10 4 Header Size UI 1 ete 10 5 Encoded Symbol Set Designator Ul ee ee eee 10 6 Format UB is ics etek evs eee dad aoe A Pee ide teed ones 10 6 Symbol Set Type UB 0 000 cece ee 10 6 First Code UI 06 ec eee 10 7 Last Code U iactata ai iraa iaa o a ete eee ante dees 10 7 Character Requirements Array of UB and character requirement 10 7 Symbol Map Array of Ul 2 6 ee 10 11 Symbol Set Control Command 0 00 c eens 10 12 User Defined Symbol Set Examples 000 cee eee eee 10 13 Unicode Symbol Index Example 0 00 c eee eee eee 10 13 MSL Symbol Index Example 00 0000 e eee 10 14 Soft Font Creation Font Classifications os 6 ee 1 1 2 Coordinate System 006 tenes 11 4 Bitmap Fons cs iace2cebi4 6 eee nba tee eich badd WA Ve Ree Sag be 11 4 Intellifont Scalable Fonts 00 0 eee 11 4 TrueType Scalable Fonts 6 eee 11 5 Font Header Command 00 060 t eee 11 6 Font Header Format 0 00 c cece 11 6 Data Types 0 0 eee 11 14 Font Descriptor Size Ul 22 ee 11 15 Header Format UB 00 e eee 11 15 Font Type UB 0 0 ee eee 11 15 Style MSB Ul 6 tte 11 16 Baseline Position Ul 0 0 11 18 Gell Width
3. 11 38 Soft Font Creation EN Note Note EN Table 11 29 continued frffffffoffffffe Font indexed in Unicode and is compatible only with East Europe Latin character sets Checksum The Checksum field is over bytes 64 through the end of the header The checksum should contain a value which when added to the sum of byte 64 through the reserved byte equals a value which when divided by 256 modulo 256 arithmetic results in a remainder of 0 For example if the sum 10 234 then 10 234 mod 256 250 Therefore the checksum should 6 since 250 6 256 which would produce 0 mod 256 In the Format 15 Font Header for TrueType Scalable Fonts this field is located at the end of the Segmented Font Data section immediately following the descriptor data See Segmented Font Data later in this chapter Copyright This field contains ASCII data and is optional In the Format 15 Font Header for TrueType Scalable Fonts this field is located in the Segmented Font Data section immediately following the descriptor data See Segmented Font Data later in this chapter Segmented Font Data Format 15 The Segmented Font Data section immediately follows the main body of a Format 15 Header for TrueType Scalable Fonts Each segment contains three parts a Segment Identifier Segment Size and Data Segment The Segmented Font Data section is terminated by the Null Segment In the deviant case where
4. 2 1 ZL Y S9 LSLS lt gt RQ SRK Kx xX gt SERRE SS NINII OD RRR L lt 2 S gt S lS lt gt oe lt gt oe SS lt gt S lt 2 1 SL lt Q lt gt lt LLS lt 2 lt lt lt gt Ne lS oS roses pes g 14 2 Cross hatch Patterns F igure EN 14 8 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics Fill Rectangular Area Command Notes EN This command fills prints a rectangular area of the specified width and height with the specified area fill Ea o P 0 Black fill rule 1 Erase white fill 2 Shaded fill 3 Cross hatch fill 4 User defined pattern fill 5 Current pattern fill Default Range 0 0 5 values outside the range are ignored Black fill fills the rectangular area with black fill White fill erases any fill in the rectangular area it fills the rectangular area with white fill Shaded fill fills the rectangular area with one of the eight shading patterns as specified by the Pattern ID command Cross Hatch fill fills the rectangular area with one of the six cross hatched patterns as specified by the Pattern ID command User defined fill fills the rectangular area with custom pattern data as specified by the Pattern ID command and downloaded by the User Defined Pattern command Current Pattern fills the
5. Checksum Table 11 6 Format 15 Font Header for TrueType Scalable Fonts Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB O 0 Font Descriptor Size minimum 72 2 Header Format 15 Font Type 4 Style MSB Reserved 6 Baseline Position 8 Cell Width 10 Cell Height 12 Orientation Spacing 14 Symbol Set 16 Pitch default HMI 18 Height 20 x Height 22 Width Type Style LSB 24 Stroke Weight Typeface LSB 26 Typeface MSB Serif Style 28 Quality Placement 30 Underline Position Underline Thickness Distance Font Header Format 11 13 Table 11 6 Format 15 Font Header for TrueType Scalable Fonts continued 32 Text Height 34 Text Width 36 First Code 38 Last Code Number of Characters 40 Pitch Extended Height Extended 42 Cap Height 44 47 Font Number 48 63 Font Name 64 Scale Factor 66 Master Underline Position 68 Master Underline Thickness 70 Font Scaling Technology Variety 72 additional data may be inserted here Desc Segmented Font Data Size 2 Reserved 0 Checksum Data Types In the font header and character descriptor information that follows the abbreviations shown below are used to define the data type of each field Table 11 7 Font Header Field Data Type Notation B Boolean 0 1 UB Unsigned Byte 0 255 SB Signed Byte 128 127 Ul Unsigned Integer 0 65535 11
6. SC 3000 3000 2000 2000 1 Specify scaling mode making P1 equal to 3000 2000 user units and P2 equal to 3000 2000 user units Isotropic scaling is specified PA 1700 2000 Cl750 45 Specify absolute plotting and move to 1700 2000 the center of the circle to be drawn Draw a circle with a radius of 750 user units and a chord angle of 45 PA300 2000 CI750 30 Specify absolute plotting and move to 300 2000 to draw another circle Draw this circle with a radius of 750 user units and a chord angle of 30 20 26 The Vector Group EN Table 20 16 Example Effects of Chord Angle on Circle Smoothness continued PA 1700 200 C1750 15 Specify absolute plotting and move to 1700 200 the center point of a third circle Draw this circle with a radius of 750 user units and a chord angle of 15 PA300 200 C1I750 Specify absolute plotting and move to 300 200 the center of the fourth circle Draw this circle with a radius of 750 user units and a chord angle of 5 default E A Enter the PCL mode EXE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 45 Degree chord angle 30 Degree chord angle 15 Degree chord angle Figure 20 16 EN 5 Degree chord angle Cl Circle 20 27 Table 20 17 Example Drawing Circles with Different Radii and Line Types EOE Reset the printer EL B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode
7. Some scalable typefaces are provided with the printer for example CG Times and Univers Additional scalable typefaces can be obtained on disk cartridge or SIMM modules Bitmap Fonts and Scalable Typefaces 7 9 Figure 7 11 Bitmap Character Ee ae Figure 7 12 Scalable Character 7 10 Fonts EN Internal Fonts Internal fonts are those fonts that are provided with the printer Both internal bitmap and scalable font formats are provided Internal bitmap and scalable fonts and symbol sets for current models of HP LaserJet family printers are listed in Chapter 2 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Font and symbol set listings for earlier printer models can be found in the User s Manual for each printer Special Effects EN HP PCL 5 printers allow you to create special effects when printing characters These effects are achieved through the use of the print model feature or through the use of HP GL 2 vector graphics refer to Chapter 13 The PCL Print Model or to the HP GL 2 information in Chapters 17 23 The print model provides a simple means for printing patterned or shaded characters using the printer s predefined cross hatch shading patterns or user defined patterns HP GL 2 vector graphics provide the additional ability to print characters in any direction angle on a page and to print outlined
8. 21 10 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 7 continued PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up RT Relative Arc Three Point PM1 PM2 Polygon Mode The Polygon Group Drawing Subpolygons While in polygon mode you can define either one polygon or a series of subpolygons Like a polygon a subpolygon is a closed sequence of connected line segments For example the block letter C is one complete polygon However the block letter D is actually two subpolygons the outline and the hole One One polygon subpolygon One subpolygon Figure 21 7 Drawing Subpolygons To create one polygon for example the letter C move the pen to the starting location for the polygon then use the Polygon Mode PM command to enter polygon mode Define the shape of the C using the appropriate commands and coordinates then exit polygon mode Now draw the polygon using either the Edge Polygon EP or Fill Polygon FP command Drawing Polygons 21 11 To create a series of subpolygons for example the letter D move the pen to the starting location of the first subpolygon then enter polygon mode Define the outer shape of the letter D using the appropriate commands and coordinates then close the subpolygon staying in polygon mode Define the inner shape of the D then exit polygon mode Now draw the subpolygons using either the Edge Polygon EP or Fill Polygon FP command For more information on entering and exiting polygon mode refer to
9. 7 2 Fonts EN Symbol Set Symbol set identifies the specific collection of symbols provided by a font Each symbol set is defined with a specific application in mind For example the legal and math symbol sets were designed to support legal and scientific applications The following figure shows two common symbol sets PC 8 and Roman 8 The PC 8 symbol set contains some special symbols and line draw characters not included in the Roman 8 symbol set while the Roman 8 set contains European characters not contained in the PC 8 symbol set Note User defined symbol sets are supported by some HP LaserJet printers See Chapter 10 for more information Symbol Set Roman 8 I SSE amp 4 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopgrstuywxyz amp AAEEEII UUE Yy CONT eME S FS ee ANASA Symbol Set PC 8 OOV ARAOS AA oY Sm ET eea Y I H SSE amp 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Re Tee A F Cu addac eil AARAROO00Y OUGE Pt ALOUMN rnay rit i sears cm ha P ABIT TL OU ThOQ6npen tes tee Figure 7 2 Symbol Sets EN Symbol Set 7 3 Spacing Another characteristic that differentiates fonts is spacing Fonts have either fixed or proportional spacing Fixed spaced fonts Figure 7 3 are those in which the inter character spacing is constant Proportionally spaced fonts Figure 7 4 are those in which the inter
10. keyword apply to the font identified by that SELECT keyword Bitmap Fonts For bitmap fonts the SELECT line is returned which identifies the font selection characteristics as described above For example the printer s internal bitmap Roman 8 Line Printer font would be returned as shown below PCL INFO FONTS SELECT lt Esc gt 8U lt Esc gt s0p16 67h8 5v0sOb0T Also see soft font description below Scalable Fonts For bound scalable fonts two underscores s1p__vOs in the SELECT line indicate that the font is a bound scalable In addition only the relevant characteristics are listed Depending on whether the font is proportional or fixed spaced only either height or pitch is listed For example the printer s internal scalable Symbol font proportionally spaced would be returned as shown below PCL INFO FONTS SELECT lt Esc gt 19M lt Esc gt slp__v0s0Ob16686T Also see the soft font description below 16 12 Status Readback EN EN Unbound Scalable Fonts For unbound fonts since multiple symbol sets can be associated with an unbound font the SYMBOLSETS keyword is added to list the available symbol sets and the symbol set sequence is no longer present in the SELECT line For example the printer s internal unbound scalable Courier medium fixed spaced font and CG Times bold italic proportional spaced fonts would
11. 3 Select Default Font as Primary 8 27 B boolean 10 5 11 14 11 51 f W Define Symbol Set 10 4 ID Primary Symbol Set 8 6 s H Primary Pitch 8 10 s P Primary Spacing 8 9 s S Primary Style 8 14 s T Typeface Primary 8 18 s V Primary Height 8 12 s W Character Descriptor Data 11 50 SB signed byte 10 5 SI signed integer 10 5 SLI signed long integer 10 5 UB unsigned byte 10 5 UI unsigned integer 10 5 ULI unsigned long integer 10 5 1 3 Glossary 4 X Secondary Font Selection by ID 8 26 amp amp amp ell 5 2 3 Select Default Font as Secondary 8 27 ID Secondary Symbol Set 8 6 s B Secondary Stroke Weight 8 16 s H Secondary Pitch 8 10 s S Secondary Style 8 14 s T Typeface Secondary 8 18 s V Secondary Height 8 12 s W Font Header 11 6 s1P Secondary Spacing 8 9 b M Set Compression Method 15 16 b W Transfer Raster Data 15 29 b Y Raster Y Offset 15 15 c A Horizontal Rectangle Size PCL Units 14 3 c B Vertical Rectangle Size PCL Units 14 4 c D Font ID assign 9 4 c E Character Code 11 49 c F Font Control 9 5 c H Horizontal Rectangle Size Decipoints 14 3 c P Fill Rectangular Area 14 9 c Q Pattern Control 13 23 c R Symbol Set ID Code 10 2 c S Symbol Set Control 10 12 Index 17 Index 18 c V Vertical Rectangle Size Decipoints 14 4 c W User Define
12. ENVELOPES 80 Monarch Letter 3 7 8 x 71 in 81 Com 10 Business 4 1 8 x 9 in 90 International DL 110mm x 220mm 91 International C5 162mm x 229mm 100 International B5 176mm x 250mm Default 2 Configurable from Control Panel Range 1 2 3 6 26 27 80 81 90 91 100 Other values ignored Note Refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide or the printer User s Manual for lists of supported paper and or envelope sizes on specific printers Upon receipt of this command any unprinted pages are printed the top margin text length and left and right margins are set to their user defaults and any automatic macro overlay is disabled The cursor is moved to the left edge of the logical page at the top margin on the following page see Figure 5 5 Also certain HP GL 2 state variables are reset refer to Table 5 1 under Sending a Page Size Command The factory default Page Size is Letter A4 for 220v option printer however a user default Page Size may be selected from the control panel The Page Size command takes precedence over the printer s control panel FORM setting 5 2 Page Control Commands EN Note EN If the Page Size command selection differs from that of the installed paper tray size and the requested page size is not currently available in another non secure source then a message is displayed on the control panel requesting ins
13. IP Xpy Y pyl Xpa Y pai or IP Parameter Format Functional Range Default Xp1Ypi Xp2 Yp2 integer 2 to 29 1 see below The default location of P1 is the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame the default location of P2 is the upper right corner as shown in Figure 19 9 The default picture frame extends from the top margin to the bottom margin and from the left edge to the right edge of the logical page Physical Les 8128 10160 Plotter Units PCL Picture Frame 0 0 Plotter Units Figure 19 9 The Default P1 P2 Locations EN IP Input P1 and P2 19 23 e No Parameters Sets P1 and P2 to their default locations adjusted by any current axis rotation Note If an IP command without parameters is executed after the axes are rotated with the RO command P1 and P2 locations change to reflect the rotation If the coordinate system orientation subsequently changes e g by sending an RO command the plotter unit position is maintained with respect to the new orientation e X Y Coordinates Specify the location of P1 and optionally P2 in plotter units Specifying P2 is not required If P2 is not specified P2 tracks P1 and its coordinates change so that the X Y distances between P2 and P1 stay the same This tracking process can locate P2 outside the effective window Used carefully the tracking function can be useful for preparing more than one
14. Notes EN PCL lt CR gt lt LF gt FO FONTS lt CR gt lt LF gt ECT lt Esc gt 8U lt Esc gt s0p10 00h12 00v0sOb3T lt CR gt lt LF gt I 5 SELECT lt Esc gt ON lt Esc gt s0p16 67h8 5v0s0bOT lt CR gt lt LF gt SELECT lt Esc gt slp_v1s0b4101T lt Esc gt 78X lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 S YMBOLSETS 0D 0I ON 0S OU 1E 1F 1G lt CR gt lt LF gt ELECT lt Esc gt 8U lt Esc gt slp__v0s3b4148T lt CR gt lt LF gt In the example listings lt CR gt lt LF gt and lt FF gt identify the Carriage Return decimal 13 Line Feed decimal 10 and Form Feed decimal 12 control codes The lt Esc gt following the SELECT keyword is a five character representation the printable characters lt E s c and gt and does not identify an escape control code decimal 27 The examples in the remainder of this chapter do not show the status response line termination lt CR gt lt LF gt control codes or the termination lt FF gt control code Example responses in this chapter for SYMBOLSETS do not list the complete list of internal available symbol sets only a partial list OD 01 0N 0S 0U 1E 1F 1G The internal symbol sets are printer dependent and may vary from printer to printer Refer to the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for printer specific information Status Resp
15. Specify 2000 8000 4000 2000 and 5000 5000 as the second third and fourth control points E A Enter the PCL mode 20 8 The Vector Group EN Table 20 5 Example Drawing Bezier Curves continued EOE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 2rd een Point 2000 8000 F f 1 j 7 Ath Control Point X3 Y3 1000 5000 6000 5000 fd 1st Control Point i Current Pen i Pasition 1 i amp 4000 2000 3rd Control Point X2 Y2 Figure 20 6 Bezier Curves AA Arc Absolute This command draws an arc using absolute coordinates which starts at the current pen location and pivots around the specified center point AA Xcenter Ycenter sweep angle chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default XcenterY center current units 230 to 230 1 no default sweep angle clamped real 32768 to 32767 no default chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5e The AA command draws an arc starting at the current pen location using the current pen up down status and line type and attributes After drawing the arc the pen location remains at the end of the arc EN AA Arc Absolute 20 9 Note Do not use an adaptive line type when drawing arcs with small chord angles The printer attempts to draw the complete pattern in every chord there are 72 chords in a circle using the default chord angle e XCenter YCenter Specify the
16. Those font header fields identified as reserved should be set to zero Table 11 2 Format 0 Font Header for PCL Bitmapped Fonts Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Font Descriptor Size 64 2 Header Format 0 Font Type 4 Style MSB Reserved 6 Baseline Position 8 Cell Width 10 Cell Height 12 Orientation Spacing 14 Symbol Set Font Header Format 11 7 Table 11 2 Format 0 Font Header for PCL Bitmapped Fonts 16 Pitch Default HMI 18 Height 20 x Height 22 Width Type Style LSB 24 Stroke Weight Typeface LSB 26 Typeface MSB Serif Style 28 Quality Placement 30 Underline Position Distance Underline Thickness Height 32 Text Height 34 Text Width 36 First Code 38 Last Code 40 Pitch Extended Height Extended 42 Cap Height 44 47 Font Number 48 63 Font Name 64 Copyright optional Table 11 3 Format 20 Font Header for Resolution Specified Bitmapped Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Font Descriptor Size 68 Header Format 20 Font Type 2 4 Style MSB Reserved 6 Baseline Position 11 8 Soft Font Creation EN EN Table 11 3 Format 20 Font Header for Resolution Specified Bitmapped continued 8 Cell Width 10 Cell Height 12 Orientation Spacing 14 Symbol Set 16 Pitch Default HMI 18 Heigh
17. When configured for 300 dpi resolution the printer automatically expands raster graphics transferred at resolutions less than 300 dots per inch to 300 dots per inch during printing illustrates how a single bit is translated into the corresponding printed dots in various graphics resolutions when the printer is configured for 300 dpi iP Only available if the printer is configured for resolution 600 dpi 15 6 Raster Graphics EN Note EN 300 dpi 1 dot 150 dpi 1 dot e6e8 100 dpi a 1 dot 75 dpi 1 dot xX Reference Position Figure 15 3 Raster Graphics Expansion at 300 dpi Rectangular area fills and character data are not affected by changes in resolution Rectangular Area fills and character data always print at the maximum resolution regardless of the resolution setting When configured for 600 dpi resolution the printer automatically expands raster graphics transferred at resolutions less than 600 dots per inch to 600 dots per inch during printing illustrates how a single bit is translated into the corresponding printed dots in various graphics resolutions when the printer is configured for 600 dpi 600 dpi 1 dot 300 dpi 1 dot XxX Referenc Position E 100 dpi 1 dot 75 dpi 1 dot Figure 15 4 Raster Graphics Expansion at 600 dpi Raster Graphics Resolution Command 15 7 Raster Graphics Presentation Mode Command The Raster Graphics Presentation command
18. optional x bytes added to header data Application Support optional x bytes added to header data Intellifont Scalable Example To download an Intellifont scalable header for an HP Roman 8 upright medium CG Times scalable font with an ID number of one send Ec c1D set Font ID to 1 E s W 80 bytes of font descriptor data x bytes of Global Intellifont data x bytes of optional data 11 44 Soft Font Creation EN EN Table 11 33 FIELD NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION Descriptor Size 80 Bytes Header Format 10 Scalable Font Format Font Type 1 Eight Bit Style MSB 0 Reserved 0 Baseline Location 5380 Y reference in Design Window Cell Width 0 not defined for Intellifont Cell Height 0 not defined for Intellifont Orientation 0 not defined for scalable fonts Spacing 1 Proportional Symbol Set 277 8U Roman 8 Pitch 2602 29 63 Em Default HMI Design Height 2000 250 Points 8 x Height 4009 45 65 Em 68 52 Cap Height Appearance 0 Normal Width Style LSB 0 Upright Normal Width Solid 0 0 0 Stroke Weight 0 Medium or Text Weight Typeface LSB 5 Times Roman generic design family Typeface MSB 16 Agfa Serif Style 134 Serif Bracketed 2 6 Quality 0 not defined for scalable fonts Font Header Examples 11 45 Table 11 33 continued Placement 0 not defined for scalable
19. 24 2 Programming Hints EN Job Control Note EN Printer Reset Hewlett Packard strongly recommends the use of both the EE command and the E c 12345X command Universal Exit Language Start of PJL also referred to as the UEL Command at the beginning and end of each job The order of these commands is critical refer to Table 24 1 for an example This allows the next job to start with the default settings as a known base Starting with the default environment at the beginning of each print job eliminates the need to set every feature each time a job is run Table 24 1 Structure of a Typical Job E c 12345X UEL Command exit language EOE Printer Reset Command Preamble Job Control Commands Page 1 Page Control Commands Data Page n Page Control Commands Data ELE Printer Reset Command E c 12345X UEL Command exit language 1 If a number of consecutive pages within a job have the same format such as margins VMI HMI etc the associated page control commands only need to be sent once for that group of pages The UEL Command Ec 12345X has the same effect as the E command and also enters PJL Mode of operation for printers that support PJL The ECE command should be included to ensure backward compatibility the UEL command is ignored if received by a printer that does not support PJL Do not perform a printer reset within a job Job Control 24 3 PCL Page Control
20. CA eackarD Expanding Possibilities EH Pcr PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual HP Part No 5961 0509 Printed in USA First Edition October 1992 Notice HEWLETT PACKARD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Company The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice EN Printing History This manual was created using HP Tag Vectra software on an HP Vectra Personal Computer The body text is printed in Helvetica fonts The camera ready copy was printed on an HP LaserJet IIISi printer with Resolution Enhancement technology REt and was then reproduced using standard offset printing First Edition October 1992 NOTICE This document is the current edition of the technical reference manual for PCL 5 and earlier printers It replaces the September 1990 edition of th
21. FP Fill Polygon The Polygon Group FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Attributes Group WG Fill Wedge 21 51 21 52 The Polygon Group EN EN The Line and Fill Attributes Group Introduction The information in this chapter enables you to achieve the following results in your HP GL 2 applications e Enhance your drawings with various line types e Enhance your drawings with different fill types e Position fill type patterns The following commands are described in this chapter Table 22 1 The Line and Fill Attribute Commands Command Summary AC Anchor Corner Specifies the starting point for fill patterns FT Fill Type Selects the pattern to use when filling polygons LA Line Attributes Specifies how line ends and joins are shaped LT Line Type Selects the line pattern to use for drawing lines PW Pen Width Specifies a new pen width RF Raster Fill Definition Defines a pattern for use as area fill SM Symbol Mode Draws a symbol at each coordinate location SP Select Pen Selects a pen for plotting Introduction 22 1 Table 22 1 The Line and Fill Attribute Commands SV Screened Vectors Selects the type of area fill to be applied to vectors lines cross hatch lines arcs circles edges of polygons rectangles and wedges TR Transparency Mode Defines how the white areas of the source graphics image affect the destination graphics image
22. PAO 2000 LBNEW P1 AND P2 CHANGE LABEL SIZE Move P1 to 0 0 and P2 to 5500 5500 then move the pen to 0 2000 Print NEW P1 AND P2 CHANGE LABEL SIZE PAO 1000 SR2 5 2 5 Move to 0 1000 and set the character size to 2 5 by 2 5 of the P1 P2 rectangle LBNEW SRm INSTRUCTION CP Print NEW SR INSTRUCTION and send CP for Carriage Return Line Feed LBCHANGES Print CHANGES LABEL SIZE LABEL SIZE E 0A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page SR Relative Character Size 23 83 RELATIVE LABEL SIZE 0 2700 NEW P1 AND P2 CHANGE LABEL SIZE 0 2000 NEW SR 0 1000 Figure 23 40 Table 23 52 Related Commands INSTRUCT CHANGES LABEL SI ION Fi Group CP Character Plot SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 SI Absolute Character Size The Character Group 23 84 The Character Group EN SS Select Standard Font This command selects the standard font already designated by the Standard Font Definition SD command for subsequent labeling Use the SS command to shift from the currently selected alternate font to the designated standard font SS 7 The SS command tells the printer to print subsequent labeling commands using characters from the standard symbol set designated by the SD command The
23. Refer to Appendix E of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide or the printer User s Manual to determine the default print resolution for a specific HP LaserJet printer The printer s physical dot size has no direct bearing on the size of PCL Units used in cursor movements PCL Units were previously referred to as PCL dots but should not be confused with the printer s physically printed dots The size of PCL Units can also be specified see the Unit of Measure Command in Chapter 4 for more information Printed Dots 2 3 PCL Coordinate System The PCL coordinate system is defined as shown in Figure 2 2 X Logical Page Top Margin S Physical Page Figure 2 2 X Y PCL Coordinates The point 0 0 is at the intersection of the left edge of the logical page and the current top margin position Note Since the point 0 0 is always at the intersection of the left edge of the logical page and the current top margin position it moves if the top margin is changed and rotates around the page if the orientation is changed 2 4 The Page EN Units of the PCL Coordinate System Note EN The units of the X axis of the PCL coordinate system may be PCL Units decipoints or columns The units of the Y axis may be PCL Units decipoints or rows PCL Units These are user definable units of measure which are used in PCL commands affecting various PCL cursor moves The number of units per inch used in PCL cursor moves is dete
24. Set the absolute character size to 17 cm wide by 26 cm high move to 0 500 PD 500 0 0 500 Set the pen down and draw 500 0 0 500 lines from 0 500 to 500 0 to 0 500 to 500 0 and then to 0 500 DT Define label terminator as character Cl10 L04 LBCentered on point Draw a small circle radius 10 plu to represent the label origin point specify a label origin of 4 and print Centered on point PU 500 0 C110 LO18 Lift the pen and move to 500 0 draw another small circle and specify a label origin of 18 LBLeft center offset Print Left center offset PUO 500 C110 LO13 Lift the pen draw another small circle and specify label origin number 13 LBRight offset from point Print Right offset from point PA500 0 C110 LO3 Move to 500 0 draw another small circle dot and specify label origin number 3 LBRight hang from point EQ 0A Print the last label Right hang from point Enter the PCL mode EOE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 23 64 The Character Group EN 0 500 Centered xyon point 500 0 Left center offset Right hang from point 500 0 Right offset from point 0 500 The pen position at the end of the label string depends on whether two successive LB commands concatenate together as though only one label was given The DV LO
25. The E E command prints any partial pages of data that may have been received The control panel RESET discards any formatted pages which have not yet been printed Both resets E E and the control panel R ESET return the HP GL 2 settings to their default values cE used in HP GL 2 mode returns the printer to PCL mode in addition to resetting the print environment The HP GL 2 IN Initialize command resets HP GL 2 settings to their default values without affecting the PCL settings refer to the Initialize command described in Chapter 19 The Configuration and Status Group for additional information Hewlett Packard storigly recommends the use of both the E E command and the Fc 12345X command Universal Exit Language Start of PUL also referred to as the UEL Command at the beginning and end of each job The order of these commands is critical Refer to Table 4 1 for an example of their usage The UEL Command ee 12345X has the same effect as the ELE command and also enters PUL Mode of operation for printers that support PJL refer to Universal Exit Language Command in Chapter 4 for more information The E E command should be included to ensure backward compatibility the UEL command is ignored if received by a printer that does not support PJL 3 8 The Print Environment EN EN Cold Reset A Cold Reset restores the Factory Default Environment which includes resetting the control panel items to their fact
26. The legal range for the top offset is 16384 to 16384 dots 11 56 Soft Font Creation EN Character Width Ul The Character Width used for bitmap fonts only identifies the width of the character in dots on the physical coordinate system Generally this width is from the farthest left black dot to the farthest right black dot Character width is orientation dependent The legal range for character width is 1 to 16384 dots Character Height UI Character Height specifies the height of the character in dots on the physical coordinate system Character height is orientation dependent The legal range for character height is 1 to 16384 dots Delta X SI Delta X specifies the number of quarter dots radix dots by which the horizontal position within the logical page coordinate system is incremented after printing the character This value is only used by the printer when the font is proportionally spaced The legal range for delta X is 32768 to 32767 quarter units Character Data Character data is a string of bytes containing the dot per bit image of the character or a run length encoding with line repetition compressed format Character Descriptor Formats 11 57 Paper Motion Byte Padding Boundary Raster Scan 31 09404609 Position After Printing Character RADA AAR SPEDE OAR poton gt darain Baseline Character Height Charact
27. When SB1 is active all fonts obey the same restrictions as bitmapped fonts regarding Character Fill Orientation Size and Slant see table on next page Scalable fonts respond more accurately to some HP GL 2 commands The choice of scalable or bitmap fonts can affect the performance of the following HP GL 2 commands SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts 23 67 Table 23 38 AffectedCommands Command Limitation CF Bitmapped characters cannot be edged DI DR Bitmapped characters can be printed only with orthogonal directions 0 90 180 or 270 SI SR Sizes of bitmapped fonts are approximate only SL The Slant command is ignored for bitmapped fonts AD SD CRLB Note The Fl and FN commands implicitly change the value of SB For example if SB 0 and FI selects a bitmap font SB is set to 1 SD Standard Font Definition Defines the standard font and its characteristics symbol set font spacing pitch height posture stroke weight and typeface SD kind value kind value Functional Range Default or SD 7 Parameter Format kind clamped integer value clamped real 1to7 no default kind dependent kind dependent Refer to the table following the parameter descriptions 23 68 The Character Group EN Note EN e No Parameters Defaults the standard font characteristics e Kind Specifies the characteristic for which you are set
28. character design data 11 57 coordinate system 11 4 header 11 7 11 8 status readback 16 12 black fill 14 9 black rule 13 12 block size adaptive compression 15 25 bold stroke weight 7 6 boolean B data type 10 5 11 14 11 51 bottom margin 24 4 bound font 9 8 Glossary 1 boundaries landscape page 2 8 limiting HP GL 2 17 19 PCL Picture Frame 19 6 portrait page 2 7 printable area 2 7 2 8 boundaries page 2 2 BR command 20 8 20 19 BS Backspace 6 7 buffer overflow ERROR 22 24 15 byte counts 15 29 BZ command 20 8 20 22 Cc C programming language HP GL 2 example 17 13 call macro 12 4 CAP current active position 2 2 6 1 17 21 cap height 23 74 cap height font header 11 31 Carriage Return CR control code 6 7 line termination modes 6 13 point HP GL 2 23 5 23 26 23 29 23 37 23 41 23 63 suppressing 24 7 cartridge fonts 7 2 fonts status readback 16 8 macro 12 1 CC Character Complement 11 41 cell height font header 11 18 cell width font header 11 18 centronics I O Glossary 2 CF command 23 20 example 23 22 chapter summaries vi character height 7 5 orientation 8 20 pitch font selection 8 10 positioning 2 9 spacing 24 5 character cell 11 4 23 12 illustration 11 19 Intellifont 11 4 TrueType 11 5 character clipping 2 8 character code and symbol index numbers 9 11 command 11 49 delete 9 5 character complement 10 7 font header field 11 35 numbers 9 10 character coordinates TrueType 11 5 c
29. type 0 anisotropic 19 41 type 1 isotropic 19 41 type two point factor 19 44 types 19 4 19 40 user units 17 20 EN EN user units pictured 19 5 Screened Vectors command 22 39 screening area fill 22 39 SD command 23 68 example 23 73 secondary font 8 5 Glossary 10 HP GL 2 23 56 HP GL 2 23 18 secured paper source 24 4 seed row 15 20 15 22 adaptive compression 15 27 raster graphic termination 15 15 segment identifier Format 15 11 40 segment size Format 15 font header 11 41 segmented font data Format 15 11 39 Select Alternate Font command 23 66 Select Current Pattern command 13 12 Select Default Font command 8 27 Select Pen SP command 22 5 22 38 Select Primary Font command 23 54 Select Secondary Font command 23 56 Select Standard Font command 23 85 SELECT status response 16 11 semicolon 17 9 separators HP GL 2 syntax 17 7 serial I O Glossary 13 serif style font header 11 27 Set Compression Method command 15 16 Set Pattern Reference Point command 13 13 13 22 Set Picture Frame Anchor Point command 18 10 Set Status Readback Location Type command 16 8 Set Status Readback Location Unit command 16 9 shaded fill 22 11 fonts 7 11 FT command 22 9 pattern selection 13 8 14 5 patterns 13 9 14 6 14 9 Shift In SI 8 5 23 8 Shift Out SO 8 5 23 8 23 66 short edge binding mode 4 5 shortening commands 1 8 SI Shift In 8 5 SI command 23 8 23 14 23 74 example 23 75 signed byte SB 10 5 11 14 cha
30. Control is then returned to the Printer Job Language PJL Both PCL 5 and HP GL 2 recognize this command The UEL Command has the same effect as the E command and also enters PUL Mode of operation for printers that support PJL refer to the section Universal Exit Language Command in Chapter 4 for more information Unicode This is a grouping of symbols a symbol index used by TrueType fonts An unbound font has the capacity to be bound to a set of symbols selected from a complementary symbol index such as the Unicode or MSL symbol indexes Each symbol in the index is identified by a unique Unicode number Appendix D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide contains the Unicode symbol index EN EN Unit of Measure The number of units per inch used in PCL cursor moves is deter mined by the current setting of the Unit of Measure command The current unit of measure setting affects all PCL Unit moves horizontal and vertical rectangle size bitmap and scalable font metrics how the cursor moves after printing a character See Unit of Measure Command in Chapter 4 User Default A default selectable through the printer s control panel For example user defaults may be selected for number of copies manual feed mode fonts and vertical form length VMI User Default Environment The User Default Environment consists of the user default settings any user default settings selected from the control panel with the remaind
31. For non zero values the Cap Height is calculated as follows Cap Height Data X 100 65535 Scalable Font Contains the cap height in design units Font Header Format 11 31 Font Number ULI The Font Number field uses four bytes byte 44 45 46 and 47 The lower three bytes 45 46 and 47 contain the font number in hexadecimal This is the number the vendor assigns to their typeface The most significant byte byte 44 consists of a flag in the most significant bit indicating whether the font is in its native 0 format or has been converted 1 from another format The remaining lower seven bits contain the ASCII decimal value for the first initial of the font vendor s name this is assigned by Hewlett Packard The following initials have been assigned Table 11 23 Initial HexValue Vendor Name A 41 Adobe Systems Inc B 42 Bitstream Inc C 43 amp AGFA H 48 Bigelow amp amp Holmes L 4C Linotype Company M 4D Monotype Corporation plc For example the number that Agfa assigns for a CG Times Bold Italic native format font is 92505 This number is converted to hexadecimal and used for the lower three bytes of the Font Number Bit 8 of byte 44 is 0 since the native format is used and the lower seven bits are the ASCII value for C C for Compugraphic 0100 0011 This process is summarized below 11 32 Soft Font Creation EN Company Intitial Compugraphic Native ie
32. LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width AR Arc Relative Note EN This command draws an arc using relative coordinates which starts at the current pen location and pivots around the specified center point AR Xincrement Yincrement Sweep angle chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default Xincrement Yincrement current 230 to 290 4 no default units sweep angle clamped 32768 to 32767 no default real chord angle clamped 0 5 to 180 5 real The AR command draws the arc starting at the current pen location using the current pen up down status line type and attributes After drawing the arc the pen location remains at the end of the arc Do not use an adaptive line type when drawing arcs with small chord angles The printer attempts to draw the complete pattern in every chord there are 72 chords in a circle using the default chord angle Xincrement Yincrement Specify the center of the arc relative to the current location The center of the arc is the center of the circle that would be drawn if the arc was 360 degrees Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If current scaling is not isotropic the arc drawn is elliptical rather than circular AR Arc Relative 20 13 e Sweep Angle Specifies in degrees the angle through wh
33. Refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for specifics ID number of user defined pattern Default Range 0 no pattern 0 32767 values outside the range are ignored For rectangular areas the pattern material is determined by both the pattern ID and the value of the Fill Rectangular Area command For other images the pattern material is determined by the pattern ID and the value of the Select Pattern command Figure 13 4 and Figure 13 5 illustrate the HP defined shading patterns and cross hatched patterns respectively 13 8 The PCL Print Model EN Notes EN This command is used for both the Select Pattern and Area Fill graphics it is also described in Chapter 14 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics It is duplicated here for convenience For user defined patterns this command sent prior to downloading a user defined pattern assigns an ID pattern number to the downloaded pattern For more information see User Defined Graphics later in this chapter Pattern ID Area Fill ID Command 13 9 81 99 100 Figure 13 4 Shading Patterns 13 10 The PCL Print Model EN EN Ox neg OR BOS 0 S IKS ORN SORE ROKK KS 3838902 lS SSS 0 x gt Figure 13 5 Cross Hatch P
34. Relative Character Size Note EN This command specifies the size of characters as a percentage of the distance between P1 and P2 Use SR to establish relative character size so that if the P1 P2 distance changes the character size adjusts to occupy the same relative amount of space SR width height or SR Functional Parameter Format Range Default width clamped real 32768 to 0 75 of P2X P1X 32767 height clamped real 32768 to 1 5 of P2Y P1Y 32767 While the SR command is in effect with or without parameters changes in P1 and P2 affect the size of characters in the currently selected font e No Parameters Defaults the relative character width to 0 75 of the distance P2X P1X and the height to 1 5 of the distance P2Y P1Y e Width Sets the character width to the specified percentage of the distance between the X coordinates of P1 and P2 A negative width parameter mirrors labels in the right to left direction Changing character size also changes the apparent stroke weight of labels the printer adjusts characters relative to changes in P1 P2 As long as the aspect ratio remains the same with changes in P1 P2 characters will have the same appearance relative to the new P1 P2 rectangle e Height Sets the character height to the specified percentage of the distance between the Y coordinates of P1 and P2 A negative height parameter mirrors labels in the top to b
35. Status Response Syntax All status responses start with the letters PCL followed by a Carriage Return control code decimal 13 lt CR gt and a Line Feed control code decimal 10 lt LF gt In addition each remaining line of the response is terminated by a Carriage Return and Line Feed control code Finally status responses are terminated by a Form Feed control code decimal 12 lt FF gt The basic syntax for the status response is shown below PCL lt CR gt lt LF gt INFO TITLE lt CR gt lt LF gt KEYWORDn DATAn lt CR gt lt LF gt KEYWORDn DATAn lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FE gt TITLE KEYWORD n and DATAn are strings that vary depending on the particular status readback command being executed Each status readback response has one or more keyword lines associated with it A slight variation of this is the Echo command response This response is shown below PCL lt CR gt lt LF gt ECHO ValueField lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FF gt ValueField is the decimal number taken from the Echo command value field Note Keywords may be added for future printers that are not documented here Applications that use status readback should be designed to ignore lines with keywords they do not recognize Two example status responses are shown below PCL lt CR gt lt LF gt INFO MEMORY lt CR gt lt LF gt TOTAL 100000 lt CR gt lt LF gt LARGEST 25000 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FF gt 16 6 Status Readback EN
36. This command establishes relative plotting and moves the pen to specified points with each move relative to the current pen location PR X Y or PR Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y increments current 230 to 230 4 no default units PR and PE have extended ranges of 2 to 2 1 plotter units If the current pen position goes out of this range the printer ignores HP GL 2 commands until it receives an absolute PA or PE coordinate within the extended range The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameters Defaults to relative plotting mode for subsequent commands e X Y Increments Specify incremental moves relative to the current pen location When you include more than one relative coordinate pair the pen moves to each point in the order given relative to the previous point using the current pen up down status If the pen is up PR moves the pen to the point if the pen is down PR draws a line to the point Lines are drawn using the current line width type and attributes e When you use the symbol mode SM command PR draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you use the polygon mode PM command the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer and are used when the polygon is edged or filled e Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off 20 44 The Vec
37. This process is called initialization The reset command CE executes an Initialize IN command automatically so if a reset was sent at the beginning of your print job HP GL 2 command parameters are at their user selected default state when HP GL 2 mode is first entered See Chapter 3 for a more thorough discussion of the printer environment and how it is affected by the reset command HP GL 2 command parameters are set to their default values the first time HP GL 2 mode is entered during a print job assuming that an EOE reset is sent at the beginning of the job After commands have been sent to modify the current print environment the command parameters are no longer set to their defaults When re entering HP GL 2 mode immediately sending an IN command ensures that HP GL 2 features are set to their default conditions if that is desired The DF command is not as powerful as the IN command The conditions set by the DF and IN commands are described later in this chapter Establishing Default Conditions 19 3 The Scaling Points P1 and P2 When you scale a drawing you define your own units of measure ment which the printer then converts to plotter units Scaling relies on the relationship between two points P1 and P2 These two points are called the scaling points because they take on the user unit values that you specify with the Scale SC command You can change the locations of P1 and P2 using either the Input P1 and P2 IP
38. area then that portion of the image is not printed When the raster area reduction techniques are used in conjunction with the raster compression techniques a considerable savings in data can be realized This results in a saving of host storage and data transmission time However these reduction techniques do not reduce the amount of printer memory required for page formatting Introduction 15 3 Raster Graphics Command Sequence PCL raster commands include Start Raster Graphics and End Raster Graphics commands Transfer Raster Data by Row Raster Compression Raster Presentation Raster Resolution Raster Height and Raster Width which define the raster area and Raster Y Offset commands The normal sequence of execution for these commands is shown below Table 15 1 Raster Presentation Raster Resolution Raster Height Raster Width Start Raster Graphics Y Offset Raster Compression Transfer Raster Data Transfer Raster Data Y Offset Transfer Raster Data Y Offset Raster Compression Transfer Raster Data Raster Compression Transfer Raster Data End Raster Graphics The emphasis in the previous command sequence is that the Raster Presentation Mode Raster Resolution Raster Height and Raster Width are all set outside the start data end sequence of commands Also the entire image is sent during the start data end sequence choosing the most effective compression method for each raster row of data 15 4 Raster Gr
39. command c amp k6 76H to change HMI This value field is calculated as follows HMI units 120 Desired HMI Desired CPI 17 75 6 76 HMI Each character then occupies 6 76 120 inch or 1 17 75 inch To use Courier 12 point 10 cpi and print 80 characters across A4 paper requires adjusting the HMI value The HMI value is calculated as follows 2338 dots wide A4 Width inches _ 7 793 inches 300 dots in This value was obtained from Figure 2 3 which identifies the page sizes in 300 dpi dots 80 characters char inch 10 266 cpi 7 793 In 120 HMI units Desired HMI 11 689 HMI value 10 266 char inch Horizontal Motion Index HMI Command 5 21 Vertical Motion Index VMI Command The Vertical Motion Index VMI command designates the height of the rows The vertical distance the cursor moves for a Line Feed operation Ec amp LEC number of 1 48 inch increments between rows Default 8 Range 0 Current logical page length up to a maximum of 32767 If the specified VMI is greater than the current logical page length the command is ignored The value field is valid to 4 decimal places A in the value field indicates no vertical movement This command affects the Line Feed and Half Line Feed spacing The factory default VMI is 8 which corresponds to 6 lines per inch A user default VMI can
40. digit 20 38 The Vector Group EN Table 20 25 Terminator and non terminator characters Range Type 8 bit Range base 64 Non terminator 63 126 Terminator 191 254 7 bit Range base 32 63 94 95 126 Note Values following the fractional data or select pen flag also must be encoded while n amp geq base output CHR 63 n MOD base n n DIV base end if base 64 then n 191 n if base 32 then n 95 n output CHR n Table 20 26 Procedure for determining base range STEPS EXAMPLE Base 64 Encode all the low order 21 050 amp div 4096 5 digits into the ASCII range 63 to remainder 570 126 For a digit with value i use 570 amp div 64 8 remainder ASCII character CHR F 58 a CHR 63 i Encode the highest order digit or the single digit ina 5 4096ths place one digit number into the range gt 191 to 254 o gt Ts place Low order digit 1 s place 63 126 63 58 121 CHR 121 EN PE Polyline Encoded 20 39 Table 20 26 Procedure for determining base range continued Next order digit 64ths place 63 126 634 8 71 CHR 71 High order digit 4096ths place 191 254 1914 5 196 CHR 196 Base 32 Encode all the low order 21 050 amp div 1024 20 digits into the ASCII range 63 to remainder 570 94 For a digit with value i use nao ASCII character CHR 63 i oe ki Encode the highest order digit or the single digit in a one digit 20 1024ths
41. if the horizontal HP GL 2 plot size is specified as 12 inches and the PCL Picture Frame width is 4 inches the horizontal scaling factor would be 3 1 the horizontal component of the image would be reduced to one third its original size to fit into the PCL Picture Frame A parameter value of zero or a reset page length paper size or orientation command defaults the HP GL 2 plot size to the width of the currently selected picture frame resulting in no scaling Example If the original HP GL 2 drawing is 8 5 inches wide send E c8 5K HP GL 2 Plot Horizontal Size 18 11 HP GL 2 Plot Vertical Size This command specifies the vertical size of the HP GL 2 drawing being imported Ea GFL The vertical size in inches Default Range height of the currently selected picture frame 0 to 32767 valid to 4 decimal places The vertical HP GL 2 plot size value determines the vertical scaling factor used to fit the drawing into the PCL Picture Frame For example if the vertical HP GL 2 plot size is specified as 7 inches and the PCL Picture Frame height is 14 inches the vertical scaling factor would be 1 2 the vertical component of the image would be enlarged to twice its original size to fit into the PCL Picture Frame A parameter value of zero or a reset page length paper size or orientation command defaults the HP GL 2 plot size to the height of the currently selected picture frame resulting in no scaling Example I
42. resulting in an inaccurate polygon Approximating Polygon Buffer Use You can use the following formula to estimate how much buffer space a polygon consumes Each point in a polygon uses 8 bytes For example the minimum number of points the printer will hold is 512 21 14 The Polygon Group EN If you multiply 512 points by 8 bytes per point the result is 4096 bytes 4 Kbytes That means the minimum your printer can store in the polygon buffer is 4 Kbytes That is the worst case however Unless the printer has a substantial amount of fonts macros or graphics already downloaded into user memory you can put much more into the polygon buffer As we just calculated for every 4 Kbytes of extra unused user memory the polygon buffer can store 512 more points You can see how in most cases there is little chance of a polygon buffer overflow especially with the addition of optional printer memory The following formula explains how to calculate the buffer space used by a polygon number of points in polygon x 8 buffer space consumed by polygon Counting the Points in a Polygon The starting pen location and each subsequent point define a polygon As shown in the following illustration a rectangle is defined by five points not four This is because the starting location is counted again as the ending location 1 Start gt C1088 Figure 21 10 Drawing Polygons 21 15 Notes The following shape has seven points Fig
43. see Table 13 3 Set the eight bytes of header information to the following values Byte 0 Format 0 00 hex Byte 1 Continuation 0 00 hex Byte 2 Pixel Encoding 1 01 hex Byte 3 Reserved 0 00 hex Byte 4 5 Height in Pixels 0 16 00 10 hex Byte 6 7 Width in Pixels 0 32 00 20 hex Byte eight begins the first bytes of binary data The PCL code below downloads the user defined pattern and assigns it an ID number of 3 1 Specify the pattern ID number Eo c3G Assigns an ID number of 3 to the pattern data which follows 2 Send the User defined Pattern command EUtc72W Specifies that 72 bytes are to follow 8 bytes for header plus 64 bytes of pattern data 13 20 The PCL Print Model EN 3 Send the pattern header and binary data Table 13 6 00 00 01 00 00 10 00 20 FF FF FF FF TEF FF FF FE 3F FF FF FC 1F FF FF F8 OF FF FF FO O7 FF FF EO 03 FF FF CO 01 FF FF 80 00 FF FF 00 00 7F FE 00 00 3F FC 00 00 1F F8 00 00 OF FO 00 00 07 EO 00 00 03 CO 00 00 01 80 00 Notes There must be an even number of bytes in user defined pattern data hence the trailing zeros padding in the last eight data rows above The user defined pattern downloaded in the previous example is printed within a rectangular area in Chapter 14 under Rectangular Area Fill Examples In the previous example the raster data code is presented in hexadecimal however the numbers in the esca
44. terminator non printing LBABC CR LF Print ABC followed by a Carriage Return Line Feed CR LF LO1 LBDEF LF Print DEF followed by a Line Feed LBGHI LF Print GHI followed by a Line Feed LOS Change the label Origin to 3 the default LO1 was used prior to this LBJKL Print JKL Return to the default label Origin LO1 PA4000 3000 DVO Move to 4000 3000 and define the text path so that each character begins to the right of the previous one horizontal default text path LBABC CR LF Print ABC followed by CR LF LBDEF LF Print DEF followed by Line Feed LBGHI Print GHI without CR or LF DV Define Variable Text Path 23 49 23 50 The Character Group Table 23 24 Example Using the DV Command continued EL 0A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page us GDA DA LOSiLFK HEB 4000 3000 Je a an 3000 ha EF LO1 K Niin Be D L I cHI LF Figure 23 29 Table 23 25 Related Commands Group CP Character Plot The Character Group DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction LB Label LO Label Origin Used with specific LO Label Origin settings labels can be concatenated see LO command description later in this chapter EN ES Extra Space EN This command adjusts space between characters and lines of labels without affecting character size ES width he
45. the right of and relative to the current cursor position a minus sign indicates the new position is to the left of and relative to the current cursor position No sign indicates an absolute distance which is referenced from the left edge of the logical page The first column within a line is column 0 This sequence ignores margins and can therefore be used to set the current active position CAP to any location along the current line If a request is made for a location outside the printer s logical page the CAP is moved to the appropriate logical page limit EN Horizontal Cursor Positioning Columns Command 6 5 Horizontal Cursor Positioning Decipoints Command This Horizontal Cursor Positioning command moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis Ec amp a H Number of Decipoints 1 720 inch Default NA Range 0 logical page right bound rounded to the first decimal place A value field with a plus sign indicates the new position is to the right of and relative to the current cursor position a minus sign indicates the new position is to the left of and relative to the current cursor position No sign indicates an absolute distance which is referenced from the left edge of the logical page The left most position is 0 and the right most position is the right bound of the logical page If a request is made for a location outside the printer s logical page the current active posi
46. value of the ID character Symbol set ID selection values consist of a number and a letter such as 8U for Roman 8 or 7J for DeskTop etc For example Assume the ID selection value selected for this symbol set is 17Q then 17 32 81 64 561 The symbol set ID code is 561 10 2 User Defined Symbol Sets EN When selecting an ID code select one which is not being used currently If an ID code is selected which is already being used in the printer that symbol set is redefined The first step in selecting an ID code is to determine an ID selection value Since it may be difficult to determine which ID selection values are being used it is best to select one which has not been assigned Refer to Appendix C in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide to select a number letter ID selection value combination which has not been assigned After the ID selection value has been determined use the conversion formula shown above to convert the ID value to an ID code To create a user defined symbol set 1 Identify the symbols symbol index numbers for the symbol set from the MSL or Unicode list in Appendix D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide List them in the appropriate character code order 2 Identify the symbol collections and Character Requirement bits that contain the symbols Appendix D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide 3 Identify the Define Symbol Set command header information 4 Identify a symbol set ID selection value and conver
47. your current pen location plus two points you specify to calculate a circle and draw the appropriate arc segment of its circumference The arc is drawn with a positive angle of rotation so that it passes through the intermediate point before the end point Refer to the following illustration Drawing Arcs 20 7 Intermediate Intermediate point point End R Starting point a End point current point pen location i 1 1 N P N f S o a x s uo Figure 20 5 Drawing arcs 3 of 3 Drawing Bezier Curves The Bezier Absolute BZ and Bezier Relative BR commands use your current pen position as the first control point in the Bezier curve You specify the second third and fourth control points If you are drawing more than one curve the fourth control point of the first curve X3 Y3 becomes the first control point of the next curve The following example shows a simple command sequence using BZ to draw a Bezier Curve in the shape of a sine wave shown in the figure following the example Table 20 5 Example Drawing Bezier Curves EE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing PA1000 5000 PD Specify absolute plotting and move to position 1000 5000 pen down BZ2000 8000 Draw a Bezier curve with 1000 5000 as 4000 2000 5000 5000 the starting point first control point
48. 0 6 0 7 4148 SS select it SI Absolute Character Size 23 75 Table 23 46 Example Using the SI Command continued PA4000 3000 Move to 4000 3000 and print Print in LBPrint 12 point Univers PA4000 2000 Move the pen to 4000 2000 and specify SI1 1 5 LBPrint a character size of 1 cm by 1 5 cm then print Print EL 0A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Print Print 700 3000 4000 3000 700 2000 4000 2000 Figure 23 34 The following are examples of negative parameters producing mirror images of labels A negative width parameter mirrors labels in the right to left direction SI 6 9 LBPrint janga Figure 23 35 23 76 The Character Group EN A negative height parameter mirrors labels in the top to bottom direction SI 6 9 LBPrint bLIUS Figure 23 36 Negative width and height parameters together mirror labels in both directions causing the label to appear to be rotated 180 degrees SI 6 9 LBPrint JUL Table 23 47 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition CP Character Plot DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction LB Label SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SD Standard Font Definition SR Relative Character Size EN The Character Group SI Absolute Character Size 23 77 SL Character Slant This command specifies the slant at which labels are drawn
49. 1 Paper Source The primary use for the paper source command is to allow access to locked out Secured paper trays Page Size This command specifies the exact size of the page media to be used Text Area Margins Avoid setting the top margin or text length to values outside of the printable area This may cause data loss Top Margin and Text Length commands use the current line spacing the last VMI or Ipi commands Specifying the text length establishes the bottom margin When using both the Top Margin and Text Length commands send the Top Margin command before the Text Length command To address the entire logical page set the top margin to 0 set perforation skip mode OFF and position the cursor to the desired location The user default VMI is selectable from the control panel printing menu using the FORM menu item refer to the printer User s Manual HMI When a font is selected HMI is set automatically to correspond to the pitch of the selected font if fixed pitch or the recommended default word space if proportional Therefore when using a non standard HMI value the value must be re specified following each font selection 24 4 Programming Hints EN PCL Cursor Positioning Fonts EN Horizontal decipoint dot and column positioning ignores margins and therefore can be used to move the cursor anywhere along the present line When performing cursor positioning with decipoints PCL Uni
50. 10 7 symbol index Glossary 13 examples 10 13 10 14 number 10 11 numbers and character codes 9 11 symbol map 10 11 symbol mode 20 44 20 47 Symbol Mode SM command 22 35 symbol set 7 2 defined Glossary 14 7 bit ISO 8 7 entity 16 3 font header 11 20 Font Selection command 8 6 font selection command 8 23 HP GL 2 23 69 ID code 10 6 ID Code command 10 2 ID selection value 10 2 10 6 ISO 8 8 mapping table 9 12 status readback 16 10 16 18 user defined 8 7 user defined also see user defined symbol set 10 1 user defined definition Glossary 15 user defined soft control 10 12 user defined symbol set header 10 6 value calculating 11 20 Symbol Set command 8 6 Symbol Set ID Code command 10 2 SYMBOLSETS status response 16 11 syntax HP GL 2 17 6 status readback 16 6 T Tagged Image File Format TIFF Encoding raster compression 15 17 TD command 23 86 technical support line HP Customer Support 2 temporary fonts 9 5 soft 9 3 EN EN status readback 16 8 temporary macros 12 5 terminating labels 23 11 termination character 1 6 terminator HP GL 2 syntax 17 7 text angle varying with DI 23 9 area 5 11 5 18 24 4 character positioning HP GL 2 23 62 first line 5 16 height font header 11 29 length 24 4 length computing user default 5 18 orienting and placing 23 10 path 23 46 placing HP GL 2 23 9 positioning 4 7 4 8 printing 5 11 printing HP GL 2 23 59 Text Length command 5 18 width font header
51. 11 29 thickness character 8 16 TIFF adaptive compression 15 25 15 27 raster graphics compression 15 16 top margin 24 4 Top Margin command 5 16 Top Offset Registration command 4 8 top offset character descriptor 11 56 TR command 22 38 22 42 Transfer Raster Data command 15 25 15 29 transparency mode 13 1 effect on rectangular areas 14 11 example 13 4 pattern 13 2 13 7 rectangular area 14 10 source 13 2 13 6 Transparency Mode TR command 22 38 22 42 Transparent Data command 23 86 Transparent Print Data command 8 28 24 6 transparent print model mode 13 3 tray output 4 12 treatment Glossary 14 tree data Intellifont character descriptor 11 64 tree offset Intellifont character descriptor 11 64 troubleshooting auto continue mode 24 14 Troubleshooting command 24 12 TrueType data segment 11 41 font header 11 13 fonts character coordinates 11 5 glyph data 11 69 glyphs downloading 11 49 scalable fonts 11 3 two byte typeface value 11 24 type location status readback 16 3 user defined symbol set header 10 6 typeface 7 7 Glossary 14 base value 11 27 family value 11 27 font header 11 24 font header previous usage 11 26 font selection Family command 8 18 HP GL 2 23 72 in font selection 8 24 internal 7 2 one byte value 11 24 two byte value 11 24 Typeface Family command 8 18 typographic point vs PCL decipoint 6 4 vs PCL point 2 5 U UEL Universal Exit Language Glossary 14 UL command 22 44 unbound font 1
52. 12 6 macro overlay environment 3 1 manual overview v manuals related x Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format x PCL 5 Comparison Guide x Software Application Notes vi TrueType Font File Specification x margins bottom 5 18 clearing 5 15 left 5 13 resetting 5 15 right 5 14 text area 24 4 top 5 16 master font size 11 4 Master Symbol List MSL lsee also MSL 9 11 defined Glossary 8 master underline Index 29 Index 30 position field 11 34 thickness field 11 34 master x resolution pattern descriptor 13 18 master y resolution pattern descriptor 13 18 matching coordinates HP GL 2 and PCL 19 15 measure unit of Glossary 15 medium stroke weight 7 6 memory available 16 21 16 24 entity storage 16 3 font usage 7 8 16 22 macro 12 3 overflow avoiding 16 2 24 15 RAM 8 3 raster graphics usage 15 6 ROM 8 3 status readback free space 16 4 user 8 3 menu Glossary 7 metric data Intellifont 11 63 11 64 mirror image 19 8 creating 19 12 fonts 23 74 miter limit 22 19 mnemonic HP GL 2 syntax 17 7 Mode Enter command HP GL 2 18 13 Mode Enter command PCL 18 14 modified print environment 3 1 3 7 Glossary 7 MSL and Unicode numbers 9 11 character requirements 10 7 Master Symbol List defined Glossary 8 symbol index 11 35 11 36 symbol index example 10 14 symbol index numbers 9 11 N negative angle of rotation 20 7 Glossary 8 nesting macro 12 7 networking printer status 16 2 none status readb
53. 14 Soft Font Creation EN Table 11 7 Font Header Field Data Type Notation continued Sl Signed Integer 32768 32767 Unsigned Long Integer 0 292 1 SLI Signed Long Integer 231 231 1 ULI ASCxx ASCII string array 0 xx 1 of characters Font Descriptor Size Ul Specifies the number of bytes in the font descriptor See the font header figure for the appropriate font descriptor size Header Format UB The Header Format byte identifies the font to format see below Table 11 8 Header Format Values Value Format 0 PCL Bitmap 10 Intellifont Bound Scalable 11 Intellifont Unbound Scalable 15 TrueType Scalable bound or unbound 20 Resolution Specified Bitmap Font Type UB Font type describes the font s relation to symbol sets Table 11 9 Font Type Values Value Font Type 0 Bound font Character codes 32 to 127 decimal are printable Bound font Character codes 32 to 127 decimal and 160 to 255 decimal are printable EN Font Header Format 11 15 Table 11 9 Font Type Values continued 2 Bound font All character codes 0 to 255 are printable except 0 7 to 15 and 27 decimal see note below 10 Unbound font Character codes correspond to HP MSL numbers for Intellifont unbound scalable fonts 11 Unbound font Character codes correspond to Unicode n
54. 16 21 Half Line Feed 6 13 height font selection 8 12 horizontal cursor position columns 6 4 horizontal cursor position decipoints 6 6 horizontal cursor position Units 6 6 horizontal motion index HMI 5 20 Horizontal Rectangle Size decipoints 14 3 Horizontal Rectangle Size PCL Units 14 3 inquire status readback entity 16 10 job separation 4 11 left margin 5 13 left offset registration 4 7 line spacing 5 24 line termination 6 13 macro control 12 7 Macro ID 12 6 Number of Copies 4 4 orientation 5 5 output bin selection 4 12 page size 5 2 paper source 5 4 pattern control 13 23 pattern ID 13 8 14 5 pattern transparency mode 13 7 Perforation Skip 5 19 pitch command 8 10 print direction 5 9 push pop cursor position 6 14 raster graphics presentation 15 8 raster graphics resolution 15 6 raster graphics start 15 14 Raster Height command 15 11 Raster Width command 15 13 raster y offset 15 15 Right Margin 5 14 Select Current Pattern command 13 12 Index 21 Select Default Font 8 27 Set Pattern Reference Point 13 22 Set Raster Compression Method 15 16 set status readback location type 16 8 set status readback location unit 16 9 simplex duplex print 4 5 Source Transparency Mode 13 6 spacing 8 9 stroke weight font selection 8 16 Style Font Selection 8 14 symbol set 8 6 symbol set control 10 12 symbol set ID code 10 2 Text Length 5 18 top margin 5 16 Top Offset Registration 4 8 transfer
55. 2 2 a oe 8 l o 0 H Character Width Baseline H Character Plot Cell Width Figure 23 7 Stick Font Character Cell When you use the SI Absolute Character Size or SR Relative Character Size commands to change the size of the characters or use the ES Extra Space command to add extra space around them you alter the size of the CP Character Plot cell You can control almost all aspects of the label s appearance its position size slant spacing and direction This chapter explains the commands that control these features This chapter also tells you how to select fonts other than the default font 23 14 The Character Group EN Using Fonts In HP GL 2 mode the printer uses three different types of fonts Scalable fonts Characters can be displayed at any size The characters are defined as a set of points on the outline of a character and corresponding mathematical relationships describing the interaction between these outline points A scalable outline character can be resized using SI and SR rotated using DI and DR and distorted using SL Bitmap fonts Characters defined as an array of dots ina raster pattern A bitmap character cannot be transformed using SI SR or SL but they can be used with all of the other commands in this chapter see the SB command Bitmap characters are always placed in an orthogonal direction to the PCL page closest to the print direction established using the D
56. 255 and 2 for decimal 2 The raster data pattern bytes are represented as by the ASCII character Delta Row Compression Method 3 Delta row compression identifies a section of bytes in a row that is different from the preceding row and then transmits only that data that is different the delta data If a row is completely different from its preceding row then the entire row must be sent as the delta not very efficient if only one bit is different then only one byte is identified and sent To reassemble the raster data rows the printer takes the current row referred to as the seed row and makes the changes indicated by the delta data to create the new row The new row which becomes the new seed row is used by the next delta compression data to create another row A delta compression row consists of two parts a command byte and the replacement bytes as shown below Command byte 1 to 8 Replacement bytes The command byte identifies two things 1 the number of replacement delta bytes that follow and 2 where to position the replacement byte string the left offset The replacement bytes are some number up to eight bytes of consecutive bytes that are used to create the new row from the seed row 15 20 Raster Graphics EN Table 15 7 Command Byte 7 5 4 0 Number of bytes to replace 1 8 Relative offset from last untreated byte If more than eight replacement delta bytes are needed a
57. 3 again PA3000 1500 ACG3000 1500 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move to absolute location 3000 1500 move the anchor corner to location 3000 1500 fill a rectangle with the same dimensions as the previous three rectangles and edge its outline PA4000 1500 AC 4000 1500 FT4 400 45 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move to location 4000 1500 and specify the location as the anchor corner select fill type number 4 cross hatch fill and edge another rectangle PA5000 1500 AC5000 1500 FT3 400 45 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move to absolute location 5000 1500 and specify that location as the anchor corner select fill tyoe number 3 fill and edge another rectangle 2 0A E Enter the PCL mode Send a reset to end the job and eject the page AC Anchor Corner 22 7 4000 4000 6000 4000 j 3000 1500 Figure 22 5 Table 22 4 Related Commands Group FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Attributes Group RF Raster Fill Definition SV Screened Vectors FP Fill Polygon The Polygon Group RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge 22 8 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN FT Fill Type EN This command selects the shading pattern used to fill polygons FP rectangles RA or RR wedges WG or characters CF Use FT to enhance drawings using solid fill shaded fill parallel lines hatching cross hatch patterned raster
58. 5 20 vertical cursor positioning 6 13 control panel Glossary 3 coordinate pairs 17 16 coordinate system Agfa design window 11 4 HP GL 2 2 6 17 15 matching HP GL 2 and PCL 19 15 PCL 2 1 2 4 physical 11 4 Rotate RO command 19 34 TrueType 11 5 units 6 3 copies number of 4 4 copyright font header 11 39 CP Character Plot cell 23 8 23 14 CP Character Plot command 23 5 23 8 23 16 23 24 23 26 CP copyright field 11 41 CR Carriage Return 6 7 cross hatch 22 4 22 9 fill pattern 14 9 patterns 13 11 14 8 patterns selection 13 8 14 5 current active position CAP 2 2 6 1 17 21 Glossary 1 Glossary 3 current pattern 13 2 Current Pattern command 13 12 current units 17 11 currently selected status 16 3 cursor Glossary 3 cursor positioning 2 2 absolute 6 2 24 5 adaptive compression 15 27 and Unit Of Measure command 4 13 CAP Glossary 1 character printing 6 1 clipped character 24 12 columns 6 4 commands 6 1 EN EN control codes horizontal 6 7 control codes vertical 6 13 decipoints 6 6 6 11 End of Line Wrap 24 12 half line 6 13 hints 24 5 HP GL 6 1 PCL Units 6 6 6 12 printing characters 11 57 raster graphic 15 29 relative 6 2 24 5 rows 6 9 saving 6 14 stack 6 14 top margins 5 16 units 6 3 vertical 5 16 customer support Customer Support 1 D data block adaptive compression 15 25 data compression 15 2 bitmap character 11 53 class 2 character data 11 54 raster data 15 13 data offset scalable c
59. AC Anchor Corner 22 5 22 6 AD Alternate Font Definition 23 18 AR Arc Relative 20 5 20 13 AT Absolute Arc Three Point 20 16 BR Bezier Relative 20 8 20 19 BZ Bezier Absolute 20 8 20 22 CF Character Fill Mode 23 20 Cl Circle 20 4 20 25 CO Comment 19 19 CP Character Plot 23 5 23 8 23 16 23 24 DF Default Values 17 23 19 3 19 19 DI Absolute Direction 23 9 23 21 23 29 DR Relative Direction 23 9 23 21 23 37 DT Define Label Terminator 23 11 23 44 DV Define Variable Text Path 23 9 23 29 23 30 23 37 23 46 EA Edge Rectangle Absolute 21 3 21 17 EP Edge Polygon 21 21 ER Edge Rectangle Relative 21 3 21 23 ES Extra Space 23 8 23 16 23 51 EW Edge Wedge 21 27 EW Edge Wedge 21 7 FI Select Primary Font 23 54 EN FN Select Secondary Font 23 56 FP Fill Polygon 21 12 21 31 FT Fill Type 22 9 Horizontal Picture Frame Size 18 8 HP GL 2 Plot Horizontal Size 18 11 HP GL 2 Plot Vertical Size 18 12 IN Initialize 19 3 19 15 19 21 IP Input P1 and P2 19 23 19 36 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 19 26 IW Input Window 19 18 19 29 LA Line Attribute 22 2 LA Line Attributes 22 15 LB Label 23 3 23 59 LO Label Origin 23 10 23 62 LT Line Type 22 2 22 22 PA Plot Absolute 17 25 20 30 PD Pen Down 17 21 20 2 20 31 PE Polyline Encoded 20 34 PG Advance Full Page 19 33 PM Polygon Mode 21 34 PR Plot Relative 20 44 PU Pen Up 17 22 20 46 P
60. Bitmap Font The placement values for bitmap fonts are listed in the following table Table 11 21 Bitmap Font Placement Values Value Placement 1 Superior 0 Normal 1 Inferior Scalable Font Set the Placement field to zero 11 28 Soft Font Creation EN EN Underline Position Distance SB Bitmap Font Specifies the distance from the baseline to the top dot row of the underline in font design dots Zero specifies an underline position at the baseline A positive value specifies an underline position above the baseline A negative value specifies an underline position below the baseline Scalable Font Set Underline Position to zero The Master Underline Position field see below identifies this information for scalable fonts Underline Thickness UB Specifies the thickness of the underline in font design dots for a bitmap font Bitmap Font A bitmap font prints three dot thick underlines at 300 dpi six dot thick at 600 dpi Scalable Font Set Underline Thickness to zero The Master Underline Thickness field see below identifies this information for scalable fonts Text Height Ul Specifies the font s optimum inter line spacing This value is typically equal to 120 of the height of the font Bitmap Font Specified in quarter dots radix dots Scalable Fonts Specified in design units Text Width Ul Specifies the font s average lowercase character width This a
61. CONTEXT Current Pen Position Scaling Points Soft Clip Window Fill Attributes Hard Clip Limits Logical Page Boundaries Line Attributes Refer to Chapter 3 for descriptions of environments Note The current active position CAP or cursor position is not part of the modified print environment Therefore the cursor position is not saved when a macro is called nor is it restored upon completion The Push Pop Cursor Position command can be used to save and recall a cursor position Temporary Permanent Macros During its definition a macro is automatically designated as temporary A temporary macro is deleted from user memory during a printer reset A macro can be designated as permanent to prevent the printer from deleting it during a printer reset A macro is designated as temporary or permanent by reference to its ID number using the Macro Control command described later in this chapter Note Temporary and permanent macros are removed from user memory whenever the printer s power is turned off EN Temporary Permanent Macros 12 5 Deleting Macros There are several mechanisms provided by PCL macro control for explicit deletion of macros from user memory These include commands to delete all macros all temporary macros or an individual macro by reference to its macro ID number using the Macro Control command described later in this chapter Both temporary and permanent macros are deleted from memo
62. CR and Line Feed LF control code A Line Feed or Form Feed would be sent as is If a value of 3 is sent the printer interprets each Carriage Return CR received as a Carriage Return CR and Line Feed LF it interprets each Line Feed LF received as a Carriage Return CR and Line Feed LF and it interprets each Form Feed FF received as a Carriage Return CR and Form Feed FF 6 14 Cursor Positioning EN Push Pop Cursor Position Command Note EN The Push Pop Cursor Position command allows the current cursor position to be stored and recalled Ec amp T S 0 Push Store cursor position 1 Pop Recall a cursor position Default 0 Range 0 1 Values outside range are ignored A value field of 0 pushes the cursor position onto the stack leaving the current position unaffected A value field of 1 pops the position from the stack restoring it as the current cursor position The last item pushed is the first item popped Twenty positions may be pushed If you try to save more than 20 positions the command is ignored If you try to restore more positions than were pushed the command is ignored A printer reset restores the current active position stack to the top all saved positions are discarded The positions stored in the stack are not changed with an orientation change Therefore the positions are relative to the top left corner of the current orientation Also a position pushed in one orienta
63. Character Group EN When printing proportional fonts the Character Plot CP command uses the width of the Space control code to determine horizontal spaces and the Line Feed height for determining vertical spacing The Extra Space ES command uses the horizontal escapement distance a font metric to compute horizontal spaces and the Line Feed height for determining vertical spacing Both of the character size commands SI and SR use cap height and average character width in calculating character size Otherwise these commands behave the same as they do with fixed spaced fonts Designating and Selecting Fonts EN If you intend to label with the default fixed spaced font Stick you do not need to use the SD or AD commands for designating standard and alternate fonts However if you intend to use a different font for example to match accompanying PCL text you must use the SD or AD commands to designate fonts before you can select those fonts for labeling using either SA or SS Standard and Alternate Fonts The following outlines some of the principles to use when labeling with different fonts e Designate the standard and alternate fonts using the SD and or AD commands before labeling If you are using the Stick font the default as your standard font you need specify only your alternate font e Select either the standard or alternate font using either the SS or SA command before labeling e Note that labeling always b
64. Continuation non zero 2 Raster Character Data in bytes Format UB This is the first byte of every character data block header It specifies the format of the character descriptor and data The format number used for bitmap fonts is 4 This format must match that of the Font Header Table 11 37 Value Format 4 LaserJet Family Raster 10 Intellifont Scalable 15 TrueType Scalable These are described later in this chapter If the format number is different from that expected by the device the character is discarded 11 52 Soft Font Creation EN Continuation B This is the second and last byte of every character data block header It specifies whether the following data is the first 0 data block of a new character definition or a continuation 1 block for a character definition which has already been received by the printer Because the value field in a Character Definition command is limited to 32767 bytes characters whose byte count exceed this must be sent in two or more blocks Descriptor Size UB This is the first byte of the character descriptor It specifies the size of the character descriptor in bytes The descriptor size used by the HP LaserJet printer family for bitmap fonts is 14 Class UB Specifies the format of the character data For bitmap fonts only values 1 and 2 are used as described below Table 11 38 Value Class 1 Bi
65. Coordinate Data refer to ntellifont Scalable Typeface Format For information on obtaining the ntellifont Scalable Typeface Format document refer to Related Documents in the front of this manual Checksum This is a checksum of all the contour character data The checksum value is contained only in the last character data block 11 64 Soft Font Creation EN Note EN Compound Character Escapement SI The escapement in design units of a compound character Number of Components UB The number of components of a compound character Component List This is a list of component descriptions The list contains Number of Components elements Each component descriptor consists of 6 bytes as described in Table 11 46 below Table 11 46 Component Descriptor Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Character Code 2 X Offset 4 Y Offset The Character Code is the character code number of a component of a compound character X offset is the offset of that component from the reference point origin in the x direction in design units Y offset is the offset in the y direction of a component from the reference point origin in design units The character code may be greater than the last code of the symbol set that is implied by the font type since a compound character can include components that are not part of the symbol set Character Descriptor and Data Format for TrueType Fonts Table 11 47 shows the format of th
66. Drawing equal size pictures on a page Note The P1 P2 frames are not windows or graphics limits the pen can print HP GL 2 images anywhere within the PCL Picture Frame Note that the new P1 and P2 retain their scaled values This allows you to use the same coordinates on both halves of the page In contrast if you do not assign a scale to P1 and P2 you must calculate the new plotter unit coordinates for the drawing on the second half of the page Creating Mirror Images For most drawings you will probably set P1 and P2 so that P1 is in the lower left corner and P2 is in the upper right corner of the scaling area However you can change the relationship of P1 and P2 to produce a mirror image effect You can mirror image any scaled drawing those drawings using the SC command by changing the relative locations of P1 and P2 or changing the coordinate system by using SC You can mirror image labels using the Absolute Direction and Relative Direction DI and DR commands the Relative Character Size SR command or using the Absolute Character Size SI command The DI DR and SR commands are discussed in Chapter 23 The Character Group 19 12 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN The following example uses a subroutine to draw the same picture an arrow four times Because the program changes the relative locations of P1 and P2 the direction of the arrow is different in each of the four drawings The program sets P
67. Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1500 1500 Specify absolute plotting and move to 1500 1500 PMO0 CI1000 60 PA1500 1500 C1500 PM2 Enter the polygon mode store a circle with radius of 1000 plu and a 60 chord angle store a pen move to 1500 1500 and another circle with a 500 plu radius and a 5 default chord angle Close the current polygon and exit polygon mode LT4 FT3 50 45 Select line type 4 and fill type 3 Specify a 50 plu distance between the fill lines and slant the lines at a 45 angle FP Using even odd fill method fill the polygon currently in the polygon buffer with the line and fill types just specified 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 21 32 The Polygon Group EN EN YhHyyy Figure 21 20 Table 21 18 GW 1500 1500 Related Commands Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge PM Polygon Mode RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group FT Fill Type LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group FP Fill Polygon 21 33 PM Polygon Mode Command This command enters polygon mode for defining shapes such as block let
68. Figure 13 4 or one of the six cross hatch patterns see Figure 13 5 or a user defined pattern When printing a page text and raster images are printed using the current pattern The default current pattern is 100 black The print model allows the current pattern to be changed to white to one of the six predefined cross hatch patterns to one of the eight shading patterns or to a user defined pattern Once the current pattern is changed it stays in effect until another is selected or the printer is reset A reset returns the current pattern to its default value 100 black The current pattern does not always apply to rectangular area fill which uses patterns defined by the rectangular area fill pattern commands Refer to Transparency Mode and Rectangular Area Fills at the end of this chapter for additional information Source Image An image in which the black 1 bits are replaced by the specified pattern This is like a stencil through which the pattern is applied to the destination image The source image may be defined as a rectangular fill area a raster graphics image or characters Destination Image The image onto which the source image pattern combination is placed The destination image is the result of any previous operations Source Transparency Mode The transparency or opaqueness of the source image s white pixels the 0 bits as they are applied to the destination image Setting the source t
69. Guide in addition to the information in this document Experienced Users This manual was written for people with some programming experience Many of the concept discussions assume some programming knowledge When writing a PCL language program you should know the PCL language concepts and commands presented in this manual and should be aware of the differences in implementation of the PCL 5 printer language for the various HP LaserJet printers as described in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Non technical Users Many software applications word processing software spreadsheets etc allow you to embed printer commands as escape sequences in the body of your documents This manual presents the full syntax and explanation of all the commands supported by PCL 5 LaserJet printers These commands enable you to take advantage of the LaserJet printer s advanced feature set Note vi Since actual implementation of printer commands within software applications varies from package to package specific examples are not given For examples of printer command usage with many popular software packages refer to HP s Software Application Notes provided with the printer The most current versions of software application notes can be obtained through the HP Forum on CompuServe by fax using the HP FIRST fax service or through HP s literature distribution Refer to Appendix A for more information Chapter Summaries A brief description of e
70. HMI command designates the width of the columns Eo amp K H Number of 1 120 inch increments Default Determined by the pitch value in the default font header Range 0 32767 valid to four decimal places The value field is valid to 4 decimal places A value of zero 0 indicates no horizontal motion When fixed pitch fonts are selected all printable characters including the Space and Backspace characters are affected by HMI When proportional fonts are selected the HMI affects only the Space control code character HMI is reset to match the new font when any of the font characteristics are changed and when switching between primary and secondary fonts with Shift In and Shift Out HMI is equal to the pitch value in the font header The factory default font s HMI is 12 12 120 1 10 inch per character or 10 characters per inch Note When HMI is not specifically set using the HMI command PCL cursor moves are rounded to the nearest full increment determined by the current unit of measure setting For example if the unit of measure is set to 96 one PCL Unit 1 96 inch then the HMI is rounded to the nearest 1 96 inch If the unit of measure is set to 300 one PCL Unit 1 300 inch the HMI is rounded to the nearest 1 300 inch 5 20 Page Control Commands EN EN Example To print the printer s resident 16 66 pitch Line Printer font at 17 75 cpi send c s16 66H to select the Line Printer font then send the
71. HP GL 2 image To assist in determining the most efficient approach to creating an image several points are identified below e When using line caps and joins e Most efficient Round join with butt cap e Least efficient Round join with triangular cap e When using text if you want the character to be printed at the same location as it would in PCL use label origin position 21 see Label Origin command in Chapter 23 e Default pen widths 5 dots wide or less produce the highest speed e Hewlett Packard recommends using polygon mode when the number of points in a polygon is 1000 or less e The Polyline Encoded command can reduce data by 60 to 70 e When drawing shapes use a command that was designed to draw that shape For example to draw a rectangle use the ER command to produce it instead of stroking the shape line by line e When drawing arcs or circles use the Bezier commands to eliminate the need to compute the chord angle thus resulting in better quality and efficiency e To Scale text use the HP GL 2 font selection commands such as SD or AD that use Intellifont or TrueType to scale the text Scaling text in HP GL 2 using the SR or SI commands is much less efficient e Font transformations in HP GL 2 such as mirroring scaling slanting rotating and outlining are very processing intensive An ERROR 21 print overrun may occur The error can be controlled by using the HP LaserJet Page Pr
72. HP printer to HP printer helps to minimize printer support problems and protect HP printer customer investment in applications and printer driver software PCL PRINTER LANGUAGE HISTORY 1 1 PCL Printer Language Architecture PCL printer language structure has been useful to guide language functionality growth and command syntax definition The PCL printer language has evolved through five major levels of functionality driven by the combination of printer technology developments changing user needs and application software improvements The five phases of the PCL printer language evolution are PCL 1 Print and Space functionality is the base set of functions provided for simple convenient single user workstation output PCL 2 EDP Electronic Data Processing Transaction functionality is a superset of PCL 1 Functions were added for general purpose multi user system printing PCL 3 Office Word Processing functionality is a superset of PCL 2 Functions were added for high quality office document production PCL 4 Page Formatting functionality is a superset of PCL 3 Functions were added for new page printing capabilities PCL5 Office Publishing functionality is a superset of PCL 4 New publishing capabilities include font scaling and HP GL 2 graphics The PCL printer language model succeeds because the following points are observed e All HP LaserJet printers implement PCL printer langu
73. IN is the Initialize command SP is the Select Pen command and Cl is the Circle command Parameters are used with certain HP GL 2 commands to tell the printer to complete the command in a particular way Understanding HP GL 2 Syntax HP GL 2 commands have four components a mnemonic parameter s Separator s and a terminator Refer to the following illustration of a typical HP GL 2 command and the description of its components 17 6 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN EN Mnemoni Separator Terminator PA30 130 Parameters Figure 17 1 Typical HP GL 2 Command e Mnemonic The two letter mnemonic reminds you of the command s function The mnemonic can be uppercase or lowercase e Parameter s Some commands have no parameters for those commands which have them parameters can be either required or optional as indicated in the description of that command e Separator s When you use parameters you must separate them with a comma or space or in the case of a numeric parameter with a or sign Commas are recommended because some computers eliminate spaces especially when sending variables e Terminator All commands require a terminator Most HP GL 2 commands are terminated by a semicolon or the first letter of the next mnemonic a white space or a tab exceptions LB uses a user defined terminator PE cannot use the first letter of the next mnemonic The last command prior to exiting HP GL 2 mode must
74. PA2000 2000 Specify absolute plotting and move to location 2000 2000 FT RR2500 300 ER2500 300 PRO 300 FT3 80 30 RR2500 300 Select the default fill type solid black fill a rectangle using solid black fill with the lower left corner being the current pen location and the upper right corner a point 2500 plu to the right and 300 plu up edge the rectangle that was just filled Specify relative plotting and move the pen up 300 plu select fill tyoe number 3 parallel lines with 80 plu between each line with each line tipped 30x fill a rectangle with the just specified fill using the rectangle bounded at the lower left corner by current the pen location and a point 2500 X units and 300 Y units away as the upper right corner PRO 300 FT 10 36 Move the pen position up 300 plu specify RR2500 300 the fill type as 36 shading fill a rectangle ER2500 300 with 36 shading with the lower left corner being the current pen location and the upper right corner 2500 plu to the right and 300 plu up from there edge the outline of the same rectangle 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Figure 22 10 22 14 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Table 22 7 RF Raster Fill Definition Related Commands Group LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill
75. PCL Logical Page HP GL 2 Graphic Resulting HP GL 2 Image Scaled to fit within PCL Picture Frame Figure 18 1 The Picture Presentation Directives 18 2 The Picture Frame EN Automatically Adjusting Image Size to Fit the PCL Picture Frame EN Framelmported HP GL 2 drawings can be adjusted automatically to fit the size of the PCL Picture Frame without changing the locations of P1 and P2 in Scale mode as described earlier This is called picture frame scaling When using picture frame scaling specify the HP GL 2 plot size unless the drawing is page size independent described below If a drawing is not page size independent the printer will not adjust the size of the image to fit the picture frame without the HP GL 2 plot size command the drawing and the picture frame are assumed to be the same size If a drawing is page size independent it automatically enlarges or reduces to fit within the picture frame without specifying an HP GL 2 plot size Creating a Page Size Independent Plot As mentioned if an imported HP GL 2 drawing is page size independent it is adjusted automatically to fit different page sizes without specifying the HP GL 2 plot size For a drawing to be page size independent it must not specify any parameters in absolute units This implies that e No parameter of any command is in plotter units The scaled mode SC command must be used exclusively either the default locations of P1 and P2 are used
76. Pa j 0 2000 1500 1500 Figure 20 10 Table 20 9 Related Commands Group AA Arc Absolute The Vector Group AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute CI Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width EN AR Arc Relative 20 15 AT Absolute Arc Three Point This command draws an arc segment using absolute coordinates from a starting point through an intermediate point to an end point Use AT when you know these three points of an arc AT Xinter Yinter Xend Yena chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default Xinter Yinter current units 29 to 290 4 no default Xena Yend current units 290 to 230 4 no default chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5e The AT command uses the current pen location and two specified points to calculate a circle and draw the appropriate arc segment of its circumference The arc starts at the current pen location using the current pen line type line attributes and pen up down status You specify the intermediate and end points After drawing the arc the pen location remains at the end of the arc XinterYinter Specify the absolute location of an intermediate point of the arc The arc is drawn in a positive or negative angle of rotation as necessary so that it passes through the inter mediate point before the end po
77. Print Model feature allows images and characters to be filled with any of the printer s predefined shading or cross hatch patterns or with a user defined pattern Images include any raster graphic such as one created with PCL raster graphics commands as described in Chapter 15 Raster Graphics a rectangular fill area as described in Chapter 14 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics or a character or characters selected from any font Print model operation defines a pattern source image and destination image These images are applied to each other using the print model s transparent and opaque modes to produce a resulting image that is a combination of the others The print model features listed below are illustrated in Figure 13 1 and Figure 13 2 and described on the following pages Figure 13 1 Print Model Imaging Pattern Source Image Destination Image Source Transparency Mode Pattern Transparency Mode Pattern Source Image Sos j i OONN a Ny Nex ea i x x x 9 iY CY x lt gt SSS Opaque Transparent imagex gt gt Resulting Image iy AAAA NI he h it Se MAAA Introduction 13 1 Notes Pattern The design which is painted through the black 1 bits area of the source image onto the destination image For patterns the Print Model uses one of the printer s internal predefined eight shading patterns see
78. R set the printer 27 0B REM Enter HP GL 2 Mode REM Initialize HP GL 2 Mode PA10 10 REM Select Pen amp move to 10 10 500 10 10 1500 10 10 REM Pen down amp draw 27 S0A REM Enter PCL Mode 27 E REM Reset to end job eject page Figure 17 3 EN Picture Frame 7 Using HP GL 2 With Programming Languages 17 13 Example C Programming Language This example uses the C programming language to print the same three lines shown on the previous page Table 17 6 include lt stdio h gt main prn fopen PRN wb f prn 033E f prn 033 gt 0B f prn IN fprintf prn SP1PA10 10 f prn PD2500 10 10 1500 10 10 f prn 0333304 f prn 033E 17 14 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics open the printer EE to reset printer Enter HP GL 2 Initialize HP GL 2 Mode Select pen 1 amp move to 10 10 Pen down amp draw enter PCL at previous CAP Reset to end job eject page EN The HP GL 2 Coordinate System Note EN Both PCL and HP GL 2 use a Cartesian Coordinate System The Cartesian coordinate system is a grid formed by two perpendicular axes usually called the X axis and Y axis refer to Figure 17 4 The intersection of the axes is called the origin of the system and has a locatio
79. Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge FP Fill Polygon The Polygon Group CF Character Fill Mode The Character Group SV Screened Vectors The Line and Fill Attributes Group LA Line Attributes Specifies how line ends and line joins are physically shaped Use this command when drawing lines thicker than 0 35 mm LA kind value kind value kind value or LA Parameter Format Functional Range Default kind clamped integer 1 through 3 1 value clamped integer Kind 1 1 4 1 Butt clamped integer Kind 2 1 6 1 Mitered clamped real Kind 3 1 to 32 767 5 EN LA Line Attributes 22 15 There are three line attributes line ends line joins and the miter limit The LA command parameters are used in pairs the first parameter kind selects a line attribute and the second parameter value defines the appearance of that attribute The printer uses the current line attributes when the optional parameter pairs are omitted e No Parameters Defaults the line attributes to butt ends mitered joins and a miter limit of 5 Equivalent to LA1 1 2 1 3 5 e Kind Specifies the line attribute for which you are setting a value Attributes and kind parameter values are listed in the following table e Value Defines the characteristics of the attribute specified by the kind parameter The available values are listed in the following table and described und
80. Response 0 00 c eee eens 16 17 Symbol Set Response 000 c cece eee tee eee 16 18 Entity Error Cod Sy 2 0 24encee deeb ee SEO nee ee eee i dee es 16 19 Free Space Command 0 0 e eee 16 21 Memory Status Response 0000 e eee 16 22 Memory Error Response 0 000 cece eee 16 23 Flush All Pages Command 00 00 eee ee 16 24 Echo COMMAaNG 2c si s0regeaekeg eps beet ee eae Pee Boe oe ee gee 16 25 Echo Response es crani dant Glee ida Sd ee ois aa eee ed Oe See ease 16 26 Status Readback Programming Hints 0000 cee eee 16 27 Contents 8 EN An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics Learning HP GL 2 0 2 ete 17 2 HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 2 0 cee ee 17 3 Understanding HP GL 2 Syntax 0 c cece eee 17 6 Notations Used to Express Syntax 0 00 c eee eee 17 8 Omitting Optional Parameters 00 000 ccs 17 9 Parameter Formats 0 cece eee eee eee ens 17 10 Using HP GL 2 With Programming Languages 00 5 17 13 Example BASIC 0 000s ee eee 17 13 Example C Programming Language 00 cece eee eeee 17 14 The HP GL 2 Coordinate System 0 0 c cee 17 15 HP GL 2 amp PCL Orientation Interactions 0 000 17 17 The Vector Graphics Limits 0 0 0 0 0 00 ee nae 17 19 HP GL 2 Units of Measure 0 ees 17 20 Plotter UNS sri 220 lt vwdaae teed ae eee wed aaa S
81. Return Point to Current Location continued Shift In 15 Space 32 1 Equivalent to Select Alternate Font SA command 2 Equivalent to Select Standard Font SS command Default Label Conditions The following label default conditions are established when the printer is initialized or set to default conditions To change these settings refer to the appropriate chapter or command EN Symbol Set Character Set Roman s8 Font Spacing Fixed Pitch 9 characters per inch Height 11 5 point Posture Upright Stroke Weight Medium Typeface HP GL 2 Stick Label terminator ASCII end of text character ETX decimal code 3 Refer to the Define Label Terminator DT command Label starting point Current pen location LO1 Refer to the Label Origin LO command Label direction Horizontal Refer to the DI DR and DV commands Space between characters and lines Normal no extra space Refer to the Extra Space ES command Character Slant None vertical Refer to the Character Slant SL command Character Fill Mode Solid fill no edging Default Label Conditions 23 7 Enhancing Labels You can enhance your labels by changing such aspects as the character size and slant the space between characters and lines and the orientation and or placement of the label on the page To effectively use these enhancements you should understand the properti
82. Rows3 00001111 11111111 11110000 10101010 10101010 EQ rlA The start raster graphics command initializes the seed row to all zeros Row 1 bh3m2W 00000001 11111111 The 3m selects the delta row compression method and the 2W indicates that 2 bytes of data to follow The first three bits of the first data byte the command byte signify a single byte replacement all three bits are 0 The next five bits indicate an offset of 1 byte from the current position The replacement byte follows and contains 11111111 Row 2 E b2W 0000001 0 11110000 The first three bits of the command byte indicate that one byte will be replaced and the next five bits indicate a relative offset of 2 so the replacement will occur 2 bytes from the current position The replacement byte follows and contains 11110000 Row 3 b5W 00000000 00001111 00100010 10101010 10101010 As in the other rows the first three bits of the command byte are zero indicating a single byte replacement The five offset bytes indicate a relative offset of zero bytes The replacement byte follows and is 00001111 The third byte is another command byte and the first three bits signify the replacement of two bytes the top three bits are 001 The offset bits indicate an offset of two bytes from the current position The fourth and fifth bytes are the two replacement bytes 15 24 Raster Graphics EN EN Adaptive Compression Metho
83. SP pen number or SP 7 Parameter Format Functional Range Default pen number integer Oor 1 No pen Although your printer does not have physical pens for the purpose of compatibility it has a logical pen which you must select to print your drawing e No Parameters Cancels pen selection subsequent plotting commands are not drawn Equivalent to SPO e Pen Number Selects the printer s logical pen The printer will not draw unless an SP is sent e 0 Selects the white pen To see a white pen on a non white background you must set transparency mode to OFF TR0O e 1 Selects the black pen numbers greater than 1 are also interpreted as 1 Use the Pen Width PW command to change the line width You may change widths as often as you like without sending an SP command again Note If you are not using the Transparency Mode TR command white is always transparent For more information on the Transparency Mode command see the TR command description later in this chapter 22 38 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Table 22 20 Related Commands Group PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group WU Pen Width Unit Selection TR Transparency Mode SV Screened Vectors EN This command selects the type of screening area fill to be applied to vectors Options include lines hatching patterns fill types 3 and 4 arcs circles edges of polygons r
84. SS command is equivalent to using the Shift In control character SI ASCII decimal code 15 within a label string The default designated standard font is the Stick font and uses symbol set 277 Roman 8 This font is in effect when the printer is initialized or set to default conditions The SS command remains in effect until an SA command is executed Table 23 53 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The Character Group DT Define Label Terminator Fl Select Primary Font FN Select Secondary Font LB Label SA Select Alternate Symbol set SD Standard Font Definition EN SS Select Standard Font 23 85 TD Transparent Data This command specifies whether control characters perform their associated function or print as characters when labeling Use the TD command to print characters that function only as control characters in normal mode TD modef or TD Table 23 54 Parameter Format Functional Range Default mode clamped integer 0 or 1 0 normal The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameters Defaults the labeling mode to normal Equivalent to TDO e Mode Selects the normal or transparent data mode for labeling e 0O Normal Conitrol codes with an associated functionality perform their function and do not print Refer to the symbol set tables in Appendix B of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide e 1 Transparent All characters print and pe
85. Simple Drawing continued Physical 0 100 100 100 Page gt 0 0 100 0 PU50 50 C125 Lift the pen and move to the center of the PCL Picture Frame 50 50 draw a circle with a radius that is 25 of the picture frame width E 1 A Enter the PCL mode with the cursor at the current HP GL 2 pen position ELE Reset the printer to end the job and eject a page Physical Page gt N oa j NY Radius 25 User Units Note Any line drawn along the border of the effective window will cause the line to be clipped producing a line width one half of the defined pen width For example all the lines drawn in the above example are half the width of the other lines since they are clipped at the window borders 18 18 The Picture Frame EN EN The Configuration and Status Group Introduction The configuration and status group commands help you Establish default conditions and values for HP GL 2 features Scale images in the dimensional units you want to use Enlarge reduce images for different media sizes Establish a window soft clip limits Draw equal sized and mirror imaged drawings Rotate the HP GL 2 coordinate system Add comments to your HP GL 2 command sequence Table 19 1 lists the commands described in this chapter Introduction 19 1 Table 19 1 The Configuration and Status Group Commands Command Summary CO Comment Allows comments to be included in an HP G
86. Size command specifies the rectangle width in decipoints EO c H Number of decipoints 1 720 inch Default Range 0 0 32767 valid to 4 decimal places The printer converts the specified width to printer dots by rounding up to an integral number of dots For example 5 decipoints which corresponds to 2 08 dots in 300 dpi mode is converted to 3 dots Horizontal Rectangle Size PCL Units Command Note EN This Horizontal Rectangle Size command specifies the rectangle width in PCL Units EO CHA Number of PCL Units Default Range 0 0 32767 For example if the unit of measure is set to 300 units per inch to specify a two inch wide rectangle send the command E c600A The same command specifies a one inch wide rectangle if the unit of measure is set to 600 units per inch The number of units per inch used in PCL dot moves is determined by the current setting of the Unit of Measure command see Unit of Measure Command in Chapter 4 Horizontal Rectangle Size Decipoints Command 14 3 Vertical Rectangle Size Decipoints Command This Vertical Rectangle Size command specifies the rectangle height in decipoints Eat o V Number of decipoints 1 720 inch Default Range 0 0 32767 valid to 4 decimal places The printer converts the specified width to printer dots by rounding up to an integral number of dots For example 5 decipoints which corresponds to 2 08 dots in 300
87. Size commands Table 18 2 Example Creating a Simple Drawing ELE Reset the printer E amp amp I2A Set the page size to letter E amp amp 100 Specify portrait orientation E c3600x3600Y Specify a 5 inch wide by 5 inch high PCL Picture Frame 5in x 720 decipoints in 3600 decipoints E p450x675Y Move the cursor to the point you desire as the picture frame anchor point Physical Page Anchor Point 450 675 PCL Picture E cOT Set the picture frame anchor point to the cursor position 18 16 The Picture Frame EN Table 18 2 Example Creating a Simple Drawing continued E 1B IN SP1 SCO0 100 0 100 PD100 0 100 100 0 100 0 0 Enter HP GL 2 mode with the cursor pen at the PCL cursor position In this example the cursor is at the picture frame anchor point 450 dots 1 5 in down from the top margin and 675 dots 2 25 in to the right of the left logical page boundary Initialize HP GL 2 command values and select pen number 1 black The IN command moves the pen position from the anchor point to the HP GL 2 origin the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame Set up user scaling so that P1 is 0 0 and P2 is 100 100 these points are the lower left and upper right corners of the PCL Picture Frame respectively 100 by 100 User Scaling 100 User Units Draw a box marking the perimeter of the PCL Picture Frame Default Settings 18 17 Table 18 2 Example Creating a
88. Slant command using a tangent value listed in the previous table Many languages require that tangents be calculated in radians Consult your programming language documentation if you are not familiar with your language s tangent function Table 23 49 Example Using the SL Command ESE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing D1 21 2 1 4 25 Designate the 25 point CG Times font as 5 0 6 0 7 4101 the standard primary font SI 7 1 PA1000 1000 Set the absolute character size to 7 cm wide by 1 cm high establish absolute plotting and move to 1000 1000 DT 1 Specify a label terminator SL 36 LBSlant Set the slant angle for 20 from vertical forward slant and print Slant SL Character Slant 23 79 Table 23 49 Example Using the SL Command continued PA1000 300 Move to 1000 300 change the slant SL 36 LBSlant angle to 20 from upright and print Slant EQ 0A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Slant 1000 1000 Slant 1000 300 Figure 23 39 Table 23 50 Related Commands Group SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts The Character Group DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction LB Label 23 80 The Character Group SR
89. Status Readback Location Unit Command Location Type 0 1 2 3 4 Default Range Location Unit Invalid location z Currently selected i All Locations 0 All internal 0 All downloaded 1 Temporary downloaded 2 Permanent downloaded 0 All cartridges 1 Highest priority cartridge n Lowest priority cartridge 0 All SIMMs 1 Highest priority SIMM n Lowest priority SIMM 0 0 through n where n is printer dependent Refer to the PCL 5 Comparison Guide For location type values 0 1 and 2 the unit value is ignored it may be any value EN Set Status Readback Location Unit Command 16 9 Note A value of 0 indicates all units of the location type A printer reset EcE returns the location unit to its default value 0 The printer retains the location unit setting If this command is not sent to change the setting for an entity request then the existing location unit setting is used The location type and unit may be set in any order Invalid combinations are not determined until the Inquire Entity command is received Therefore even if the unit value is out of range the unit is set to that value so that an appropriate error response is sent when the Inquire Entity command is received Inquire Status Readback Entity Command The Inquire Entity command identifies the entity type and causes the printer to create a status response for the entity specified in the status readback locatio
90. Summary AD Alternate Font Definition Specifies an alternate font for labeling CF Character Fill Mode Specifies how outline fonts are rendered CP Character Plot Moves the pen the specified number of character cells from the current pen location DI Absolute Direction Specifies the slope of labels independent of P1 and P2 locations Introduction 23 1 Table 23 1 The Character Group Commands continued DR Relative Direction Specifies the slope of labels relative to P1 and P2 locations DT Define Label Terminator Defines the character or code that turns off labeling DV Define Variable Text Path Specifies the label path as right left up or down ES Extra Space Increases or reduces space between label characters and lines Fl Select Primary Font Selects as standard a font previously assigned a PCL font ID number FN Select Secondary Font Selects as alternate a font previously assigned a PCL font ID number LB Label Prints text using the currently selected font LO Label Origin SA Select Alternate Font Positions labels relative to the current pen location Selects the font designated by AD for labeling SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SD Standard Font Definition Specifies the type of fonts to be used for labels Specifies the standard font for labeling SI Absolute Character Size SL Character Slant Specifies
91. Text Length in Lines logical page length in inches top margin in inches 1 2 inch X F Factory Default Text Length in Lines togal page length in inches 1 inch X 3 The user default VMI is selectable using the control panel VMI is calculated from the FORM menu setting Example To select a text length of 60 lines send Ec amp L60F 5 18 Page Control Commands EN Perforation Skip Command Note EN The perforation region is the distance from the bottom of the text area of one page to the top of the text area top margin of the next page When perforation skip is enabled a Line Feed or Half Line Feed which would move the cursor beyond the bottom of the text area causes the cursor to move to the top of the text area on the next page When perforation skip is disabled a Line Feed or Half Line Feed allows the cursor to move to the next line or half line in the perforation region allowing printing to continue there Ec amp L L 0 Disable 1 Enable Default 1 Range 0 1 Other values ignored Whenever the perforation skip mode is changed the top margin and page length are returned to their default values When perforation skip is disabled some print lines can fall outside the printable area and be lost If lines of data could fall into the unprintable area perforation skip should be enabled Perforation Skip Command 5 19 Horizontal Motion Index HMI Command The Horizontal Motion Index
92. UL User Defined Line Type Defines a line pattern WU Pen Width Unit Selection Specifies whether the pen width is defined in millimeters or as a percentage of the P1 P2 distance Using Line Attributes and Types You can change the appearance of the lines you draw by using the Line Attribute LA and Line Type LT commands The Line Attribute command lets you specify whether the ends of lines and corners of joined lines should appear as square triangular round or beveled Square Round ends ends ee Beveled join Round join Figure 22 1 Line Ends Attribute Line types are repeated patterns of dots and or dashes including solid lines The following shows some examples of line types Note that you can also vary the width of the lines and line types you draw by using the Pen Width PW command 22 2 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN PW 13 oe PW 5 ae PW1 5 aa Figure 22 2 Line Types Attribute Once you specify a line type and line attributes all lines created by the following commands are drawn using the new line type and attributes Line types and their interactions with fill patterns are discussed later in this chapter Table 22 2 Commands Affectedby Line Types Command AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative RT R
93. Window The Configuration Status Group RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width WU Pen Width Unit Selection DR Relative Direction The Character Group LB Label SR Relative Character Size An IR command remains in effect until another IR command is executed an IP command is executed or the printer is initialized 19 28 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 14 Related Commands Group IP Input P1 and P2 The Configuration Status Group IW Input Window RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale IW Input Window EN This command defines a rectangular area or window that establishes soft clip limits Subsequent HP GL 2 drawing is restricted to this area Use IW to restrict printing to a specified area on the page IW Xib YL Xur Yuni or IW Parameter Format Functional Range Default XLLYLLXUR Yur current 280 to 29 1 PCL Picture Frame units The printer interprets the command parameters as follows e No Parameters Resets the soft clip limits to the PCL Picture Frame limits e X Y Coordinates Specify the opposite diagonal corners of the window area usually the lower left LL and upper right UR corners Coordinates are interpreted in the current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off When scaling is on subsequent chang
94. a font is already associated with this ID number in the printer the existing font is deleted during the download Several commands are required to define a font before downloading it to the printer These commands are described in detail in Chapter 11 Hewlett Packard font files include the necessary commands that define the symbols of a font Assigning a font ID number and then copying the font file to the printer downloads the font Scalable fonts and typefaces may be prepared by font management software such as HP s Type Director Once prepared scalable fonts are downloaded in much the same manner as bitmap fonts Once downloaded a soft font occupies a portion of user memory RAM The number of soft fonts that can be stored in user memory is limited only by the amount of available user memory 9 2 Font Management EN Temporary vs Permanent Fonts Note Once downloaded a font is automatically designated as temporary A temporary soft font is deleted from user memory during a printer reset or when a Typeface List a Font Printout or a self test is performed from the printer s control panel A soft font can be designated as permanent to prevent the printer from deleting it during a printer reset A soft font is designated as temporary or permanent by referencing its ID number and using the Font Control command refer to Font Control Command later in this chapter Both temporary and permanent fonts are deleted from user me
95. a parity bit e When you are in symbol mode refer to the SM command in Chapter 22 The Line and Fill Attributes Group PE draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you are in polygon mode refer to the PM command in Chapter 21 The Polygon Group the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer they are used when the polygon is edged or filled 20 36 The Vector Group EN Note EN Encoding PE Flag Values and X Y Coordinates Flag values and X Y coordinates are encoded into a base 64 default or base 32 equivalent 7 bit mode The following steps give a generic algorithm for encoding a number Assume x is the number to be encoded Use steps 1 and 2 only if you are encoding fractional data otherwise begin with step 3 When converting numbers to base 32 or 64 step 4 in the following instructions note that highest order digits are always in the high range all other digits are in the low range Therefore if there is only one digit in a number it is in the high range Table 20 24 Procedure to encode a number STEPS EXAMPLE 1 Fraction adjustment If you are X 82 83 using fractional data this step converts the number of decimal places in your data to the number of binary fractional bits Assume n is the number of fractional binary bits specified by the fractional data flag a Multiply the number of decimal 2 x 3 33 6 66 places contained in the data by 3 33 b Round that number up to th
96. absolute location of the center of the arc The center of the arc is the center of the circle that would be drawn if the arc was 360 degrees e Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If current scaling is not isotropic the arc drawn is elliptical rather than circular e Sweep Angle Specifies in degrees the angle through which the arc is drawn A positive angle is drawn in a positive direction angle of rotation a negative angle is drawn in the negative direction e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 degrees The chord angle specifies in degrees the maximum angle created when lines from each end of the chord intersect the center point of the circle see drawing below The smaller the chord angle the smoother the curve Arc Segment Chord Angle Drawn Chord Figure 20 7 Chord Angle 20 10 The Vector Group EN EN e Fora specific chord angle a circle or arc always has the same number of chords regardless of its size For example for the default chord angle a circle is always composed of 72 chords 360 5 per chord 72 chords This results in larger circles appearing less smooth than smaller circles with the same chord angle setting the chord angle to a smaller number will help large circles or arcs appear more smooth see Figure 20 8 Chord angle Default chord of 25 angl
97. accurately Labels are rendered using the bitmap font that most closely approximates the character height or width specified by SI character size is determined by height for proportional fonts and by width for fixed spaced fonts When SB1 is in effect characters cannot be mirrored with negative SI parameters Example Using the SI Command The following example demonstrates the SI command using both the default Stick typeface and the Univers typeface The samples on the left were printed using the Stick font first using the default 11 5 point and then specifying an absolute character size of 1 cm wide by 1 5 cm high On the right a Univers font was used first at 12 point and scaled to 1 cm by 1 5 cm using the SI command Table 23 46 Example Using the SI Command ESE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA700 3000 Enter absolute plotting mode and move to 700 3000 DT Define the label terminator as the character LBPrint Print the word Print in the default font PA700 2000 SI1 1 5 Move to 700 2000 specify an absolute LBPrint character size of 1cm wide by 1 5 cm high and print the word Print SI Send SI with no parameters to return to the default size SD1 21 2 1 4 12 Designate a 12 point Univers font and 5
98. an absolute character size in centimeters Specifies the slant at which labels are printed SR Relative Character Size Specifies the size of characters as a percentage of the P1 P2 distance SS Select Standard Font Selects the font designated by SD for labeling 23 2 The Character Group EN Table 23 1 The Character Group Commands continued TD Transparent Data Specifies whether control characters perform their function or are printed as characters when printing text Printing Labels Note EN Use the Label command LB to create text charts or to emphasize areas of a diagram or graph that need special attention or explanation You can control almost all aspects of the label s appearance its position size slant spacing and direction All labels are drawn using the font currently designated refer to the SD or AD commands and selected for use refer to the SS or SA commands If you are using a font other than the default use SD Standard Font Definition or AD Alternate Font Definition commands to designate a font that can be selected Then use the SS Select Standard Font or SA Select Alternate Font commands to select the designated font You can follow the LB Label command with virtually any characters including non printing control codes such as a Line Feed or Carriage Return Symbol mode is a special case of a Label At the end of a label you must use a
99. are drawn when HP GL commands are given until a pen is selected This can be done using the Select Pen SP command Most drawing commands require that the pen be lowered to produce marks on the page Once lowered with a Pen Down PD command the pen remains down for subsequent HP GL 2 printing commands until a Pen Up PU or Initialize IN command is issued The pen remains selected until a new SP command is received You must be aware of the pen s up down status to avoid drawing stray lines between parts of your picture Upon entry into HP GL 2 mode a good programming practice is to select a pen and command a pen up move to the initial starting position This ensures that a pen is selected and is in the proper position to begin drawing Every time you use a PU or PD commana the printer updates the pen up down status The following table shows the commands that include an automatic PD command as part of their function After performing their complete function they return the pen to its previous up down state Pen Status and Location 17 21 Notes Table 17 8 Commands That Include an Automatic Pen Down Command Group Cl Circle The Vector Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute The Polygon Group EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG _ Fill Wedge LB Label The Character Group SM
100. away and the seed row is left unchanged e For method 1 a row length value of zero increments the cursor and zero fills the seed row e For method 2 TIFF if row length terminates the data before the control byte value is satisfied literal byte count greater than row length the data following the control byte if any is printed as text The cursor is incremented e For method 2 If row length is equal to one the one byte is consumed from the I O and the cursor is incremented The data is ignored and the seed row is zeroed e For method 3 delta row compression within an adaptive compression block the seed row is updated by every raster compression method or type of row For example a row compressed with method 2 TIFF updates the seed row while the effect of an empty row initializes the seed row to zeros Maintaining the seed row allows method 3 to be mixed with other methods to achieve optimal compression performance Set Compression Method Command 15 27 e For method 3 Since delta row compression requires that the seed row be available whenever raster graphics mode is entered the seed row is initialized to zeros upon raster graphics mode entry Ec A The seed row is also initialized upon receipt and completion of each raster block e For method 3 If the row length terminates the data before the control byte value is satisfied literal byte count greater than row length the data following the control byte if a
101. axis However the relative position of the X axis to the Y axis can change as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of the sweep angle Also if you specify a start angle greater than 360 a start angle equal to the remainder of the start angle 360 is used e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 degrees Refer to the Arc Absolute AA command discussion in Chapter 20 for further information on chords and chord angles 21 28 The Polygon Group EN EN EW700 30 60 0 mae pe sweep angle 60 r A P Positive start angle 30 1804 OLL Ho Zero degree a A rT reference poine Current pen location 4 positive radius starting point 7 700 plotter units e a CPO u 270 Pi Positive Radius P2 EW 700 45 90 location ing point Zero degree H rence point 1 Negative radius 700 Plotter Units Ex gy Positive start angle 45 T Positive i t sweep angle Brax Negative Radius Figure 21 18 Table 21 14 Example Using EW to Draw a Pie Chart E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SC 3000 3000 Enter the scaling mode specifying P1 as 2000 2000 1 3000 2000 and P2 as 3000 2000 Use isotropic scaling PAO 0 S
102. be returned as shown below PCL INFO FONTS SELECT lt Esc gt sOp__h0s0b4099T SYMBOLSETS 0D 01 0N 0S 0U 1E 1F 1G SELECT lt Esc gt slp__v1s3b4101T SYMBOLSETS 0D 01I 0N 0S 0U 1E 1F 1G Soft Fonts For soft fonts bitmap bound scalable or unbound scalable the font ID number is also included at the end a font downloaded with an ID of 27 would be presented as lt Esc gt 27X For example a downloaded bitmap Courier with a font ID of 39 and a downloaded unbound scalable Dom Casual typeface with a font ID of 78 would be returned as shown below INFO FONTS SELECT lt Esc gt 8U lt Esc gt s0p10 00h12 0v0sOb3T lt Esc gt 39XK SELECT lt Esc gt slp__v1s0b4148T lt Esc gt 78X SYMBOLSETS 0D 0I 0N 0S 0U 1E 1F 1G Location Type 1 Currently Selected Font For a status location type 1 currently selected font only a single font the printer s currently selected font is returned The keywords and data returned are described as follows e LOCTYPE and LOCUNIT are returned after the SELECT line for each font e SELECT line changes for bound and unbound scalable fonts e For all scalable fonts the actual size either height or pitch is listed in place of the underscores e For unbound scalable fonts the symbol set currently bound
103. be selected the font must have been previously assigned a font ID number in PCL mode Also for scalable fonts the Fl command must be preceded by an SD command specifying the font s point size or pitch see the Using the Fl Command example FI font_ ID Parameter Format Functional Range Default font_ID integer 0 to 32767 no default When the printer receives this command and the requested font is present the primary font characteristics are set to those of the requested font If the selected font is proportionally spaced the pitch characteristic is not changed Notes This command does not select the font for label printing if you are currently using the alternate font The Fl and FN commands implicitly change the value of SB For example if SB 0 and FI selects a bitmap font SB is set to 1 This affects the performance of certain HP GL 2 commands Refer to SB command later in this chapter Example Using the Fl Command The following example demonstrates assigning a font ID number from within PCL mode entering HP GL 2 mode using the Fl command to select that font and printing a short line of text 23 54 The Character Group EN EN Table 23 28 Example Using the Fl Command EGE Reset the printer E c15D Specify a font ID number of 15 EU s1 p18v0s3b4148T Select an 18 point Univers Bold font as the primary font EU c6F Assign the currently selected font as a temporary fon
104. bitmap font header for a portrait HP Roman 8 10 pitch 12 point upright medium Courier font with an ID number of one send E eID set Font ID to 1 EQ s W 64 bytes of font descriptor data x bytes of optional data An example of the bitmap header is shown on the following page Table 11 32 FIELD NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION Font Descriptor Size 64 Bytes Header Format 0 Bitmap Font Format Font Type 1 Eight Bit Style MSB 0 Reserved 0 Baseline Position 40 Cell Width 30 Cell Height 53 Orientation 0 Portrait Spacing 0 Fixed Pitch Symbol Set 277 8U Roman 8 Pitch 120 Quarter Dots 30 00 Dots Height 200 Quarter Dots 50 00 Dots x Height 88 Quarter Dots 22 00 Dots Appearance Width 0 Normal Font Header Examples 11 43 Table 11 32 continued Style LSB 0 Upright Normal Width Solid 0 0 0 Stroke Weight 0 Medium Typeface LSB 3 Body Text Typeface MSB 0 No Font Vendor ID Serif Style 2 Serif Line Quality 0 amp empty Placement 0 amp empty Underline Position 10 amp empty Underline Thickness 3 amp empty Text Height 200 Quarter dots 50 00 Dots Text Width 120 Quarter Dots 30 00 Dots First Code 33 amp empty Last Code 254 amp empty Pitch Extended 0 amp empty Height Extended 0 amp empty Cap Height 36713 56 02 of Em Font Number 0 No Font Vendor Number Font Name Courier Copyright Statement
105. character spacing varies with the natural shape of a character Inter character Spacing equal Figure 7 3 Fixed Spacing Inter character Spacing varies Figure 7 4 Proportional Spacing 7 4 Fonts EN Pitch Height EN Pitch describes the number of characters printed in a horizontal inch Pitch only applies to fixed spaced fonts since the number of characters per inch varies for proportional fonts This pitch is 10 characters inch This pitch is 12 characters inch This pitch is 16 67 characters inch Inches 1 2 3 Figure 7 5 Pitch The height of a font is the measurement of the body of the type in PCL points A PCL point is 1 72 inch in bitmap fonts and approximately 1 72 inch in scalable fonts The body of the type is slightly larger than the distance from the bottom of a descender to the top of an unaccented capital letter 64 Point Century Schoolbook Font Height Baseline Figure 7 6 Height This loose measure from near the bottom of a descender to just above the top of an unaccented capital letter is sometimes referred to as the Em Pitch 7 5 Style Style is defined by three characteristics posture upright italic width condensed normal expanded etc and structure solid outline shadow etc Examples of upright and italic styles are shown Upright Italic Figure 7 7 Style Stroke Weight Stroke weight describes the thi
106. characters from the Math collection then bits 63 and 34 are set to one refer to Appendix D in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for information regarding the various symbol collections 9 10 Font Management EN EN TrueType example If a symbol set based on Unicode numbers requires one or more characters from the standard ASCII collection and some of the characters from the Latin 5 collection then bits 31 28 and 0 are set to one refer to Appendix D in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for information regarding the various symbol collections As stated above to determine which unbound scalable fonts contain the symbols for the specific symbol set the printer must identify those unbound fonts that contain the symbol collections of the requested symbol set To do this the printer accesses the Character Requirements number for the requested symbol set If for example the Roman 8 symbol set was requested the printer would access the Character Requirements number from the Roman 8 symbol set information in the printer This number is then compared with the Character Complement number of each unbound font in the printer If any matches are found those unbound fonts are included in the list of potential fonts for selection Final Font Selection After the process above is complete the printer contains a list of all fonts bitmap bound and unbound which support the requested symbol set If no fonts are found for the specified symbol set Roman 8 i
107. codes SI Shift In ASCII 15 is used to designate primary and SO Shift Out ASCII 14 is used to designate secondary The factory default state is primary font designated Font Resolution EN With the introduction of the LaserJet 4 printer fonts can be printed at 600 dpi resolution All scalable fonts automatically print at either 300 or 600 dpi resolution A bitmapped font which was designed at 300 dots per inch can be printed on the LaserJet 4 printer at 600 dpi However a bitmapped font which was designed at 600 dpi is not available for selection at 300 dpi resolution Primary and Secondary Fonts 8 5 Symbol Set Command Notes The Symbol Set command identifies the specific set of symbols in a font Symbols are the alphanumeric punctuation or any other printable characters or symbols which may be included Es ID Primary Symbol Set Command ID Symbol Set ID value see Appendix C in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Ea ID Secondary Symbol Set Command ID Symbol Set ID value see Appendix C in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Default 8U Range N A If the specified symbol set does not exist Roman 8 is selected However the specified symbol set is written into the font select table The factory default primary and secondary symbol set is Roman 8 However you may select a user default symbol set from the printer control panel see the printer User s Manual If the font is a scalable typefa
108. command provides a means for making user defined symbol sets permanent or temporary and for deleting them E c S O Delete all temporary and permanent user defined symbol sets 1 Delete all temporary user defined symbol sets 2 Delete current user defined symbol set last symbol set ID code specified 4 Make current user defined symbol set temporary 5 Make current user defined symbol set permanent Default Range n a 0 2 4 5 other values ignored Downloaded symbol sets default to temporary Internal symbol sets cannot be deleted or made temporary 10 12 User Defined Symbol Sets EN User Defined Symbol Set Examples EN The following two examples illustrate the concept of user defined symbol sets They create symbol sets for PC 8 in MSL and Unicode symbol indexes The necessary escape sequences are shown in each example Unicode Symbol Index Example Symbol Map Data E c341R PCL Symbol Set IDs 10U Eo f526W Symbol Set 526 bytes in length 00 12 Header Size 18 bytes 01 55 ID code 341 decimal 10U 03 Format 3 Unicode Symbol Index 02 Font Type 2 00 01 First code 1 00 fe Last code 254 00 00 00 00 c0 40 00 01 ASCII Latin 1 and PC Characters required 26 3a character code 1 Open Happy Face 26 3b character code 2 Solid Happy Face Solid Heart Card Suit 26 40 character code 4 Solid Diamond Card Suit 26 65 char
109. compressed raster data Figure 11 5 Class 2 Character Data EN Character Descriptor Formats 11 55 Orientation UB Orientation byte specifies the orientation of the character The orientation of the character must match the orientation of the font Table 11 39 Value Orientation 0 Portrait 1 Landscape 2 Reverse portrait 3 Reverse landscape If the orientation is not supported or is different from the orientation specified in the font header the character is discarded Left Offset SI Left offset specifies the distance in dots from the reference point to the left side of the character pattern on the physical page coordinate system this value is orientation dependent The left and top offsets locate the character reference point about the cursor position see Figure 11 6 and Figure 11 7 PCL 5 printers support kerning both negative left and right side bearings of both fixed pitch and proportionally spaced fonts Note that large offsets could place the character off the printable area of the page causing the character to be clipped The legal range for the left offset is 16384 to 16384 dots Top Offset SI Top offset specifies the distance in dots from the reference point to the top of the character pattern on the physical coordinate system this value is orientation dependent The left and top offsets locate the character reference point about the cursor position see Figure 11 6 and Figure 11 7
110. compression method it is possible to repeat or copy the previous raster row using the Raster Data Transfer command This is accomplished by setting the Raster Data Transfer command value field to zero Printing A Zeroed Row Setting the Seed Row to Zero E b1Y It is possible to print a row of all zeros using the Raster Y Offset command Sending a Raster Y Offset command with a value field of 1 sets the seed row to zero and prints the zeroed row Note that the next delta row is applied to a zeroed seed row Other cursor position moves set the seed row to zeros Remember non graphic cursor moves have the same effect as an end graphics command If the byte count of the Transfer Raster Data command value field is less than the number of bytes that can be replaced the byte count has precedence Also if the last byte is a control byte it is ignored Therefore amp esc b1W does not affect the seed row but causes the previous row to be replicated Set Compression Method Command 15 23 Example Delta Row Compression The following example demonstrates how to compress the following data using the delta row compression The bytes highlighted in italic type indicate those bytes needing replacement those bytes that are different from the previous row the seed row Table 15 8 Byte No 0 1 2 3 4 Row1 00000000 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 Row 2 00000000 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000
111. designate a 30 point CG Times Bold Italic font in the ASCII symbol set use the Select Alternate Font SA command to select this font after it is designated AD 1 21 2 1 4 30 5 1 6 Symbol Font Height Posture Stroke Typeface Set Spacing Weight Note that the pitch parameter is missing in the above command because the designated font is proportionally spaced Table 23 7 Related Commands Group FI Select Primary Font The Character Group FN Select Secondary Font LB Label AD Alternate Font Definition 23 19 Table 23 7 continued SA Select Alternate Font SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SD Standard Font Definition SI Absolute Character Size SR Relative Character Size SS Select Standard Font TD Transparent Data CF Character Fill Mode The Character Fill Mode command specifies the way scalable fonts are filled and edged bitmap and Stick fonts cannot be edged and can be filled only with raster fill shading or PCL cross hatch patterns Scalable characters may be filled with any of the fill patterns specified by the FT command shading hatching cross hatch and user defined raster fill patterns CF fill mode edge pen or CF Parameter Format Functional Range Default fill mode clamped 0 1 2 0r 3 O solid fill integer edge pen _ integer 2 80 to 230 14 0 no edging e No Parameters Defaults characters to solid fill with no edging
112. dpi mode is converted to 3 dots Vertical Rectangle Size PCL Units Command Note This Vertical Rectangle Size command specifies the rectangle height in PCL Units Eo c B lt BLD Number of PCL Units Default Range 0 0 32767 For example if the unit of measure is set to 300 units per inch to specify a two inch high rectangle send the command E c600A The same command specifies a one inch high rectangle if the unit of measure is set to 600 units per inch The number of units per inch used in PCL dot moves is determined by the current setting of the Unit of Measure command see Unit of Measure Command in Chapter 4 14 4 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics EN Pattern ID Area Fill ID Command EN The Pattern ID command formerly called Area Fill ID identifies the specific shading cross hatch or user defined pattern see Figure 14 2 to be used when filling a rectangular area we c G Table 14 1 Selecting Cross Hatch Selecting Shaded Patterns patterns 1 thru 2 1 2 shade 1 Pattern 1 3 thru 10 3 10 shade 2 Pattern 2 11 thru 20 11 20 shade 3 Pattern 3 21 thru 35 21 35 shade 4 Pattern 4 36 thru 55 36 55 shade 5 Pattern 5 56 thru 80 56 80 shade 6 Pattern 6 81 thru 99 81 99 shade 100 100 shade Selecting User Defined patterns ID number of user defined pattern 1 Not supported on all LaserJet fa
113. encode coordinates for increased print speed Chapter 21 The Polygon Group This chapter explains the polygon mode and how it is used to draw polygons subpolygons and circles The commands for drawing and filling wedges and rectangles are also described in this chapter Chapter 22 The Line and Fill Attributes Group This chapter describes the commands used to vary the line types and fill patterns used to create HP GL 2 graphics Chapter 23 The Character Group This chapter contains information about the commands used to print text labels in HP GL 2 mode This allows you to print HP GL 2 labels in almost any size slant and direction using proportional or fixed spaced scalable fonts Chapter 24 Programming Hints This chapter provides programming information for use during the development of PCL software Related Documentation The following related manuals provide further information about HP LaserJet printers including their features and functions PCL 5 Comparison Guide This document contains supplemental information for programming PCL 5 LaserJet printers It identifies how different HP PCL 5 LaserJet printers implement the commands described in the HP PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual t provides printer specific information on feature sets paper handling fonts and the printer s control panel Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format This document provides information for designing scalable f
114. equal sized drawing on a page For an example refer to Drawing Equal Sized Pictures on a Page earlier in this chapter e Neither X Y coordinate of P1 can equal the corresponding coordinate of P2 If either coordinate of P1 equals the corres ponding coordinate of P2 the coordinate of P2 is incremented by 1 plotter unit The locations of P1 and P2 interact with the following commands Table 19 11 Commands Affected by P1 P2 Command Group IW Input Window The Configuration Status Group RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width WU Pen Width Unit Selection DR Relative Direction The Character Group LB Label SR Relative Character Size 19 24 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN An IP command remains in effect until another IP command is executed an IR command is executed or the printer is initialized Table 19 12 Related Commands IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale Group The Configuration Status Group IP Input P1 and P2 19 25 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 This command establishes new or default locations for the scaling points P1 and P2 relative to the PCL Picture Frame size P1 and P2 are used by the Scale SC command to establish user unit scaling IR can also be used in advanced techniques such as printing mirror images enla
115. family 12 15 Patterned with Shadow 16 Inverse 17 Inverse in Open Border 18 30 Reserved 31 Unknown Structure Font Header Format 11 17 Note The reserved bits 15 10 should be set to zero If a value is requested and a match not made the request is ignored and the current font selection process continues as if the parameter was never requested but it is saved in the attribute table Example Assuming a font style of italic compressed contour is desired the value would be 1 2x4 3x32 105 Baseline Position Ul Bitmap Font Specifies the distance from the top of the cell to the baseline The baseline is the dot row on which all of the characters in a given line appear to stand see The measurement of this distance is in font resolution dots as defined in the Resolution Field of a Format 20 font header default 300 dpi Intellifont Scalable Specifies a Y coordinate in the design window refer to Figure 11 2 TrueType Scalable Baseline Position must be set to zero Cell Width UI Specifies the width of the cell The cell must be wide enough to accept the widest character The cell width range is 1 to 65535 Bitmap Font Specified in PCL coordinate system dots Scalable Font Specified in design units Cell Height UI Specifies the height of the cell The design cell for a font must be tall enough to accept the tallest cha
116. fonts Underline 0 not defined for scalable Position fonts Underline 0 not defined for scalable Thickness fonts Text Height 0 not defined for Intellifont Text Width 4391 Width of En Space First code 33 Last Code 273 Compound Pieces Present n255 Pitch Extended 0 not defined for scalable fonts Height Extended 0 not defined for scalable fonts Cap Height 5851 66 7 Em Font Number hex 43 01 69 54 Native Agfa CG Times 0 C 92500 Position Font Name CG Times 16 character ACSII field Scale Factor 8782 X Resolution 2540 Y Resolution 2540 Master Underline 1747 Data Size Master Underline 449 Thickness OR Threshold 176 Global Italic 0 Angle Global Intellifont 112 11 46 Soft Font Creation EN EN Table 11 33 continued Global 112 bytes added to Intellifont Data header data Copyright x bytes added to header Statement data optional Application x bytes added to header Support data optional Font Header Examples 11 47 Character Definitions Notes Following the font header the individual characters must be defined Every PCL character definition contains a character descriptor and a body of character data The character definition always consists of one or more character data blocks Each character data block begins with its own header The character data block header a
117. from the printer s control panel User default settings are stored in the User Default Environment and are retained even if the printer is turned OFF Some of these features are listed below for a complete set of the control panel user default features refer to Chapter 3 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Number of Copies Font Selection Font Source Font Number Pitch or Point Size Duplex Simplex Binding Edge Tray Paper Page Size Paper and Envelopes Manual Feed Orientation Symbol Set Refer to Horizontal Motion Index HMI Command in Chapter 5 for the implications of setting the user default font source number pitch or point size Refer to the printer User s Manual for instructions on how to select these user defaults from the control panel The PJL Printer Job Language SET command overrides the PCL user default environment for the duration of a PJL job If PUL is not active then the PCL user default environment has precedence Refer to PCL Commands in Chapter 1 for more information 1 For scalable typefaces fixed space typefaces are selected only by pitch and proportionally spaced typefaces are selected only by point size 2 Selectable only if duplex is On 3 6 The Print Environment EN Modified Print Environment The current printer feature settings constitute the Modified Print Environment Whenever a feature setting is altered using escape sequences the new setting is recorded in
118. has three optional parameters type pattern length and mode The following command shows all three being used type 6 pattern length 25 mode 1 LT6 25 1 HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 9 If you omit the second parameter you must also omit the third parameter as shown below LT6 The printer uses the most recently specified pattern length and mode If you have not specified a length or mode since sending a Default Values DF or Initialize IN command the printer uses the parameter s defaults For example if you send the following command omitting the second parameter the printer interprets the 1 as the second parameter LT6 1 Parameter Formats You must give parameters in the format type of units required by each HP GL 2 command The required format is stated in the parameter table of each command s description and is described as follows 1 Integer An integer from 1 073 741 823 2 1 to 1 073 741 823 22 1 The printer automatically rounds fractional parameters to the nearest integer within the range Sending a number outside the parameter range may produce unexpected results 2 Clamped Integer An integer from 32 768 2 to 32 767 215 1 The printer automatically rounds fractional parameters to the nearest integer Sending a number outside this range does not cause an error but the number is clamped to the limits of the range For example when parsing a cla
119. highest priority location Priority of Locations Soft Font Lowest ID first Highest Cartridge Font SIMM Font Internal Font Lowest 1 In printers with two cartridge slots one slot has priority over the other Refer to Appendix E of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for cartridge slot priority information for the different HP LaserJet printers In 600 dpi mode A 600 dpi font has priority over a 300 dpi font For example a 600 dpi bitmap soft font is highest then a scalable soft font followed by a 300 dpi bitmapped soft font Finally for bitmap fonts the orientation of a font is considered If there are two fonts which are similar in all the above characteristics and which reside at the same location the font with the orientation that matches the orientation of the page is selected If only one font remains and its orientation is different than the current page the printer rotates the font to the orientation of the page Summary of Font Selection by Characteristic on page 23 later in this chapter summarizes font selection by characteristic Introduction 8 3 Font Select Table The initial font specification in a job should be made using all of the font characteristics To select a Roman 8 fixed spaced 10 pitch 12 point upright bold Courier font for the current page orientation specify each of the characteristics using font selection escape sequences Once the characteristics have b
120. if relative e Width Specifies the line width When the parameter is zero the printer assumes the thinnest line width 1 dot wide e Metric widths are scaled by the ratio of the size of the PCL Picture Frame to the HP GL 2 plot size For example if the HP GL 2 plot size is twice as large as the PCL Picture Frame WU PW 3 sets the width of vectors to 0 15mm If the ratios are different for the X and Y axes the smaller ratio is used If the width is less than the thinnest available then the thinnest width is used PW Pen Width 22 29 Note Pen Specifies the pen number to which the new width applies If the pen parameter is not specified the printer applies the width to both pens Specifying pen numbers other than 0 or 1 causes the printer to ignore the command Pen width does not set the width of lines for drawing labels unless the stroke weight value is set to 9999 Stick Arc fonts only The width of character lines is determined by the stroke weight attribute of the Alternate Font Definition AD or Standard Font Definition SD commands A PW command remains in effect until another PW command or a WU command is executed PW is not defaulted by the Default Values DF command Table 22 14 Example Using the PW Command 2 E Reset the printer 2 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to en
121. in a given line appear to stand see Chapter 11 When floating position underline is enabled the underline position is determined by the greatest underline distance below the baseline of all of the fonts printed on the current line The underline distance for a font is defined in the font header see Chapter 11 The underline and the underscore character may not necessarily be aligned or be the same thickness Underline Command 8 29 8 30 PCL Font Selection EN EN Q Font Management Introduction Font management provides mechanisms for manipulating soft fonts It provides the means for controlling which soft fonts are saved in user memory RAM or deleted This is accomplished by assigning a font as either temporary or permanent or deleting a soft font In addition font management includes the command for assigning ID numbers to RAM fonts It also provides a mechanism for copying ROM fonts internal cartridge or SIMM to RAM for the purpose of assigning ID numbers Introduction 9 1 Downloading Soft Fonts The process of transferring soft fonts from a host computer to the printer s user memory RAM is called downloading Designate a unique identification ID number prior to the download of a font This number is then associated with the soft font This number is assigned using the Font ID command described later in this chapter Subsequent manipulation of the soft font is accomplished using the font s ID number If
122. information With the information provided in the section for bitmap fonts it is possible to format a PCL bitmap character font for the printer However to format an Intellifont or TrueType scalable font additional information is required Intellifont scalable fonts are formatted to use Agfa Scaling Technology Intellifont scalable fonts are described in detail in the document ntellifont Scalable Typeface Format available from Agfa Division Miles Inc Refer to Related Documents located in the front of this manual for information on how to obtain this document 11 2 Soft Font Creation EN TrueType scalable fonts are described in detail in the document True Type Font Files Refer to Related Documents located in the front of this manual for information on how to obtain this document Note The documents ntellifont Scalable Typeface Format and True Type Font Files do not contain descriptions of scalable PCL fonts Instead they contain descriptions of files from which PCL fonts can be built EN Introduction 11 3 Coordinate System Note Both bitmap and scalable characters are designed in an area referred to as a cell or window and each has its own coordinate system and set of units Bitmap Fonts Characters of a bitmap font are designed within a rectangular area referred to as a cell The bitmap character cell is illustrated in Figure 11 3 Figure 11 6 and Figure 11 7 The physical coordinate system is defined in te
123. italic Downloaded bound scalable CG Palacio Font status PCL INFO FONTS ECT lt Esc gt 8U lt Esc gt s0p16 67h8 5v0s0Ob0T ECT lt Esc gt slp__v1s0b4101T YMBOLSETS 0D 0I ON 0S OU 1E 1F 1G ECT lt Esc gt 1U lt Esc gt slp__v0s0b4111T lt Esc gt 21X nnn wn t HE In a font status response individual fonts are identified by the SELECT keyword line as shown in the example above This line identifies the font by specifying the font selection characteristics symbol set spacing pitch height style stroke weight and typeface The characteristics are listed as they would be sent to the printer to select the font in priority order highest priority to lowest SELECT is returned for all font types Entity Status Responses 16 11 Notes As mentioned variations in the font response occur as a result of the font being a bitmap bound scalable unbound scalable soft downloaded font or the location type set to 1 currently selected These variations include slight differences in the information included in the SELECT line with the addition of different keywords SYMBOLSETS LOCTYPE and LOCUNIT These variations are described in detail in the following paragraphs In the status response an escape character is represented by the five characters amp Keywords which follow a SELECT
124. location All parameter values other than zero are ignored but if you do not send a Set Picture Frame Anchor command the printer defaults the anchor point to the left edge of the logical page and the default top margin The print direction command does not affect the physical location of the anchor point or the picture frame Using this command defaults the location of P1 and P2 resets the soft clip window to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries clears the polygon buffer and updates the HP GL 2 pen position to the lower left corner of the picture frame if entered with 0B as viewed from the current orientation Example To set the picture frame anchor point to a position 6 inches from the left logical page boundary and 5 inches below the top margin send E p1800x1500YEc cOT In this example the cursor is first moved to the desired location 6 inches x 300 dots inch 1800 dots 5 inches x 300 dots inch 1500 dots Then the Eo c0T command sets the picture frame anchor point to that location 18 10 The Picture Frame EN HP GL 2 Plot Horizontal Size EN This command specifies the horizontal size of the HP GL 2 drawing being imported Eat c K The horizontal size in inches Default Range width of the currently selected picture frame 0 to 32767 valid to 4 decimal places The horizontal HP GL 2 plot size determines the horizontal scaling factor used to fit the drawing into the PCL Picture Frame For example
125. move to user unit position 0 0 Select fill type 3 parallel lines with 75 user units between lines and the lines slanted 45 Fill a wedge with the current fill pattern use a radius of 1000 user units a starting angle of 90 and a sweep angle of 180 The zero degree reference point is on the left side of the circle indicated by the negative radius parameter 1000 EW 1000 90 180 Draw an outline edge around the same wedge FT4 60 45 WG 1000 330 120 Select fill type 4 cross hatching specifying 60 user units between lines and with the lines tilted at 45 Fill a wedge that has the same radius and center point but with a starting angle of 330 and a sweep angle of 120 EW 1000 330 120 Edge the same wedge PR 60 110 FT1 Specify relative plotting and move the pen 60 user units to the left and 110 units up Select fill type 1 solid black WG 1000 270 60 Fill a wedge with a radius of 1000 user units a start angle of 270 anda sweep angle of 60 EW 1000 270 60 Edge the outline of the wedge that was just filled 21 48 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 26 Example Filling then Edging vs Edging then Filling Chart continued 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Figure 21 28 The center point of the above circle is located at 0 0 Note When transparency mode TR command is opaque fill
126. must be used see Chapter 11 Bound and Unbound Fonts The terms bound and unbound refer to the symbol set capacity of a font A bound font identifies a font which is restricted bound to a single symbol set An unbound font or unbound typeface indicates the capacity to be bound to a set of symbols selected from a complementary symbol index such as the Master Symbol List MSL or the Unicode symbol index Font Selection and Unbound Fonts When a font is requested for printing the printer selects a font which most closely matches the current font selection characteristics symbol set spacing pitch height style stroke weight and typeface Refer to Summary of Font Selection by Characteristics in Chapter 8 for detailed font characteristic selection information Since symbol set is the highest font selection priority and typeface is the lowest the printer searches for the symbol set first A list of all fonts that match the requested symbol set is made This includes bitmap bound and unbound fonts Since bitmap and bound scalable fonts contain only one symbol set they can be easily identified However determining which unbound fonts match a symbol set is more complex Symbol set compatibility for unbound fonts is determined by identification of groups of symbols referred to as symbol collections 9 8 Font Management EN Note EN Symbol Collections The symbols in an unbound font typeface can be divi
127. next page The text area is shown in Figure 5 4 In general characters are printed when they fall within the text area However characters can be printed between the bottom of the text area and the top of the text area on the next page only if perforation skip is disabled Characters are printed outside the text area if a cursor move escape sequence positions the cursor outside the text area but within the printable area Characters that fall on or outside a margin as a result of printing a character string are clipped not printed Attempting to print characters across a margin results in the characters being discarded The default text area and the default HP GL 2 picture frame are the same Text Area 5 11 Right Margin Left Margin Top Margin Text Length ones Perforation Region Text Area Figure 5 4 Text Area Within the Page 5 12 Page Control Commands EN Left Margin Command EN The Left Margin command sets the left margin to the left edge of the specified column Eo amp a L Column number Default Column 0 Left bound of logical page Range 0 Right margin The first column within a line is column 0 which is located at the left edge of the logical page the HMI setting defines the distance between columns which thereby defines the maximum number of columns on the logical page If the value field specifies a column greater than the current right margin the co
128. no Null Segment is encountered prior to the end of the font header amp emdash as defined in the Font Header command amp emdash the font is invalidated A font also is invalidated in the event that a Null Segment is encountered too soon Font Header Format 11 39 Table 11 30 below shows the structure of the Segmented Font Data section Table 11 30 Segmented Font Data Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 x 0 First segment Segment Identifier X 2 First segment Segment Size x 4 First segment Data Segment X 4 1st seg size Second segment Segment Identifier Size Data Segment 6 Null Segment Identifier FFFF hex 4 Null Segment Size 0 2 Reserved x Font Descriptor Size Font header length as defined in Font Header command Checksum Segment Identifier Ul Each entry in the Segmented Font Data Section has its own unique identification number The following values are defined Table 11 31 Value Mnemonic Data Segment 17219 CC Character Complement 17232 CP Copyright 18260 GT Global TrueType Data 18758 IF Intellifont Face Data 20545 PA PANOSE Description 22618 XW XWindows Font Name 65535 Null Segment 11 40 Soft Font Creation EN EN Data segments with an unrecognized identifier are ignored Segment Size Ul For each entry in the Segmented Font Data section the Segment Size indicat
129. numbers for the font products of various vendors however will consider the typeface number to be composed of two distinct fields a vendor field consisting of the four most significant bits and a typeface family field consisting of the 12 least significant bits The following diagram illustrates this scheme 11 24 Soft Font Creation EN EN Table 11 15 Typeface Family Value Current 15 12 11 0 Vendor Typeface Family Vendor Number Bits 15 12 This value is assigned by HP and is between decimal values 0 and 15 Table 11 16 Current Vendor Number Values Value Vendor 0 Reserved 1 Agfa Division Miles Inc 2 Bitstream Inc 3 Linotype Company 4 The Monotype Corporation plc 5 Adobe Systems Inc 6 15 Reserved Typeface Family Number Bits 11 0 This value is between 0 and 4095 See Appendix C in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Typeface Family Values are calculated according to the following formula Typeface Vendor Typeface Base Value Vane X 4096 Family Example The HP typeface number for Agfa Dom Casual typeface is 4157 vendor value 1 and typeface value 61 61 1 x 4096 4157 Font Header Format 11 25 Previous Usage The previous treatment of the Typeface field supported the LaserJet IIP IID and LaserJet III family printers It consisted of the Typeface Least Significant Byte LSB the original one byte typeface value used prior to the
130. of the paper P2 automatically tracks P1 so the printing area retains the same dimensions as the first drawing The printed rectangle around the second area shows P2 in its new location 19 10 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 3 Example Drawing Equal Size Pictures on a Page EVE Reset the printer Eo amp l1 O Select landscape orientation E c 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode using the default picture frame size and anchor point IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode IP500 500 5450 7500 Set P1 to be 500 500 and P2 to be 5450 7500 SCO 10 0 15 Set up user unit scaling to range from 0 0 to 10 15 SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PAO 0 Begin absolute plotting from the origin 0 0 PD10 0 10 15 0 15 0 0 PU Pen Down and print from 0 0 to 10 0 to 10 15 to 0 15 to 0 0 then Pen Up PD10 0 10 15 0 15 0 0 PU IP5550 500 Input a new P1 and allow P2 to automatically track it PAO O Begin absolute plotting from the new origin Pen Down and print from 0 0 to 10 0 to 10 15 to 0 15 to 0 0 then Pen Up EQ 0A ELE Enter PCL Mode Reset the printer to complete the job and eject the page Using Scaling Effectively 19 11 Original P2 New P2 10 15 user units 10 15 user units Original P1 New P1 0 0 user units 0 0 user units Figure 19 5
131. or Input Relative P1 and P2 IR command P1 and P2 always represent an absolute location in relation to the PCL Picture Frame defined in plotter units They designate opposite corners of a rectangular printing area within the picture frame You can change the size of the rectangular printing area and move it anywhere within the picture frame or even outside the picture frame depending on the plotter unit coordinates you specify using the IP or IR commands Using the Scale Command Scaling allows you to establish units of measure with which you are familiar or which are more logical to your drawing The Scale command SC determines the number of user units along the X and Y axes between P1 and P2 The actual size of the units depends on the locations of P1 and P2 and the range of user units set up by the SC command There are three types of scaling e Anisotropic e Isotropic e Point factor Anisotropic scaling indicates that the size of the units along the X axis may be different than the size of the units on the Y axis Isotropic scaling then indicates that the units are the same size on both axes Point factor scaling sets up a ratio of plotter units to user units The Scale command does not change the locations of P1 and P2 only their coordinate values Also scaling is not limited to the rectangular area defined by P1 and P2 but extends across the entire printing area within the PCL Picture Frame 19 4 The Configuratio
132. place number into the range 95 to 126 17 32nds place 26 1 s place Low order digit 1 s range 63 94 63 26 89 CHR 89 Next order digit 32 s place 63 94 63 17 80 CHR 80 High order digit 1024ths place 95 126 95 20 115 CHR 115 20 40 The Vector Group EN Note EN When using PE in the default relative mode the application program does not know the current pen location after printing a label normally the current pen location is updated to the end of the label If this presents a problem in your program follow these steps 1 Create a flag called lost in your program 2 After labeling or any command which updates the current pen location set lost to true 3 If lost true at the beginning of the PE command use an absolute flag for the first coordinate pair only subsequent coordinates are interpreted as relative 4 Set lost to false At the beginning of your application program set lost to true Then specify the next coordinate in absolute mode PA or PE When converting and encoding data note the following e n DIV 64 n shift right 6 bits You can optimize your application by shifting 6 bits to the right since shifting is faster than division e n MOD 64 n AND 63 The number is logically AND d with 63 Example Using the PE Command The following BASIC program converts three relative real coordinates to base 64 10 LPRINT CHRS 27 E Reset the Print
133. printed again The row can be duplicated the number of times indicated by the value contained in the lt of bytes row gt byte Duplicate Row updates the cursor position but does not change the seed row 15 26 Raster Graphics EN Note EN Adaptive Compression Operation Hints Some HP LaserJet printers perform internal compression techniques to support full page graphics Refer to Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for specifics e The compression methods cannot be mixed within one raster row A raster row must be compressed using only one method e The cursor position is updated with each row of the raster block The cursor position is also incremented when a block count of less than 3 is sent e A Raster Y Offset command moves the entire block of raster data and initializes the seed row to zeros The seed row is set to zero even if the y offset is zero e Block size takes precedence over row length If the row length of any line exceeds the block size the row length is truncated to the block size e For duplicate and empty rows a row length value of zero does not update the cursor however the seed row is initialized to zero e f an unsupported command byte for a raster row is encountered the remaining bytes for the block are skipped the seed row is cleared and the cursor is not incremented e For method 1 run length encoded if the row length is odd the cursor is incremented and the row data is skipped thrown
134. proportionally spaced bitmap or scalable font but is saved in the font select table and available when a fixed spaced font is selected Eg s H Primary pitch Pa s H Secondary pitch Pitch incharacters inch Default 10 Range 0 00 The value field is valid to two decimal places If a pitch is specified that is not available the next greater available pitch is selected If no greater value is available the closest available lesser value is selected The factory default primary and secondary pitches are ten characters per inch The user default primary and secondary pitches are implicitly set by selection of a users default font from the printer s control panel refer to the printer User s Manual The range of valid pitch selections for a fixed spaced scalable font is 576 to 10 characters inch however not all valid pitches are available since the pitch value is actually converted to a corresponding point size height value which is scaled by the printer The effective pitch ranges are thus limited by height constraints The lower end of the pitch range is limited as a result of the font height limitation of 999 75 points For example the smallest available pitch for the internal Courier typeface would be about 0 12 The upper end of the pitch range is similarly limited by the minimum recommended font height of 4 points For Courier this translates to a maximum recommended pitch of 30 30 cpi while for
135. rectangular area with the current pattern The order in which data patterns rules text raster is received is the order in which it is processed during the rasterization of the page The current pattern is not applied to a rectangular area unless specified by this command The fill or pattern used as the current pattern is selected using the Select Current Pattern Ec v T command For a detailed description of the Select Current Pattern command refer to Chapter 13 The PCL Print Model Black fill value field 0 also known as black rule and the white fill value field of 1 patterns do not have a choice of different patterns and thus do not require a pattern specification using the Pattern ID command Fill Rectangular Area Command 14 9 The upper left corner of the rectangular area is located at the cursor position when printing a rectangular area After printing the rectangular area the cursor is returned to the upper left corner the cursor position does not change positions as a result of printing a rectangular area Rectangular areas are independent of the text area and perforation skip mode these boundaries are ignored rectangles are not clipped at these boundaries Addressable rectangular areas are limited to the logical page Rectangular areas that extend outside the logical page are clipped at the logical page boundaries refer to Figures 2 3 and 2 4 for logical page and printable area boundary specifications
136. s design style which gives the font its distinctiveness Typefaces can only be printed if the printer has access to them if they are internal fonts are soft fonts that are downloaded to the printer or if they reside in a font cartridge or SIMM that is plugged into the printer PCL 5 LaserJet printers have at least three internal scalable typefaces Univers 4148 CG Times 4101 and the Stick font 48 For more information about the printer s internal fonts refer to Chapter 2 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide 23 72 The Character Group EN EN Example Using the SD Command The following example shows the SD command used to designate a 25 point Univers Bold font in the ASCII symbol set use the Select Standard Font SS command to select this font after it is designated SD 1 ae Ti 4 25 5 0 6 3 7 4148 Symbol Font Height Posture Stroke Typeface Set Spacing Weight Note that the pitch parameter is missing in the above command because the designated font is proportionally spaced Table 23 45 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The Character Group DT Define Label Terminator FI Select Primary Font FN Select Secondary Font LB Label SA Select Alternate Font SI Absolute Character Size SR Relative Character Size SS Select Standard Font SD Standard Font Definition 23 73 SI Absolute Character Size Note This command specifies the size of labeling characters in centimeters Use SI to
137. same image shown in the EA command example Compare this example with the EA example to understand the differences between the coordinates used Table 21 12 Example Using ER to Draw Rectangles 7E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing SC0 150 0 150 1 Specify user scaling with P1 being 0 0 and P2 150 150 the 1 indicates isotropic scaling 21 24 The Polygon Group EN EN Table 21 12 Example Using ER to Draw Rectangles continued PA75 105 ER40 25 Enter absolute plotting mode and move to 75 105 Draw a rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner and a point 40 25 user units away as the upper right corner PR20 0 PD0 10 Specify relative plotting and move the pen 20 user units to the right Place the pen down and draw a line to a point 10 user units down PD 30 0 0 5 With the pen down move 30 user units to the left and 5 units down PU 20 0 ER40 25 Lift the pen and move 20 user units to the left then draw the outline of a rectangle with the current pen location as one corner and a point 40 25 user units away as the opposite corner PU50 5 PD30 0 0 5 Lift the pen and move 50 user units to the right and 5 units up Place the pen down and draw a line 30 user units to the right then 5 units down PU2
138. soft font as primary Ec X Designates soft font as secondary font ID number 0 Range 0 32767 Default If the designated font is present the font is selected as the primary secondary font and all primary secondary font characteristics in the printers Font Select Table are set to those of the selected font However if the selected font is proportionally spaced the pitch characteristic is not changed If the designated font is not present the current font is retained If a scalable font is selected using an ID number send the Height or Pitch command Height for proportional Pitch for fixed to specify the height or pitch otherwise the characteristic is determined by the value of the former font as listed in the font select table If the font is a scalable typeface symbol set is determined from the values contained in the printer s font selection table To specify a different symbol set send a symbol set selection command prior to the Font Selection ID command For shared or multi user environments Hewlett Packard recommends that soft fonts be selected by characteristics rather than ID number 8 26 PCL Font Selection EN Examples To specify the font associated with ID number 7 as the primary font send E 7X To specify the font associated with ID number 5 as the secondary font send E 5X Select Default Font Command Note The Default Font command sets all of the font characteristics to tho
139. special label terminator to signify the end of text The default terminator is the ASCII end of text character ETX decimal code 03 or you can define a terminator using the DT command Without the label terminator in place your printer continues to label your picture with all subsequent HP GL 2 commands and parameters The following example demonstrates printing a simple label using the SD command to designate a font the SS command to select that font the DT command to define a label terminator and the LB command to print the label including Carriage Returns and Line Feeds Printing Labels 23 3 Note In the examples in this chapter the left column identifies the command sequence data for the plot If the label command text is too wide for the column width is it continued on a second line which might indicate a Carriage Return in the text In actual use the text should be presented on one line with no carriage returns If a Carriage Return is required in the example it is indicated as CR LF Table 23 2 Example Printing Labels EOE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1500 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to 1500 2500 D1 21 2 1 4 25 Designate the 25 point Univers Italic font LBThis is Univers Italic 5 1 6 0 7 52 as the
140. standard font DT 1 Define the asterisk character as the label terminator the 1 indicates the terminator shouldn t be printed SA Select the alternate font for printing Since an alternate font hasn t been designated the default 11 5 point Stick font is selected LBThis is the Print the first line of text followed by two Stick Font Default Carriage Returns and two Line Feed CR LF CR LF control codes Notice how the asterisk terminates the label SS Select the standard font Print the next line of text in the newly specified font EQ 0A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 23 4 The Character Group EN This is the Stick Font Default 1500 2500 This ts Univers Italic Figure 23 1 Moving to the Carriage Return Point When you begin labeling the current pen location is the Carriage Return point the beginning of your line of text is the point at which the pen is returned when a Carriage Return control code is sent to the printer When the printer encounters a Character Plot CP command or a Carriage Return control code within a Label command the pen moves to the Carriage Return point adjusted up or down by any line feeds The Character Plot command is described later in this chapter The following commands update the Carriage Return point to the current pen location Table 23 3 Commands Updating Carriage Return Point to Current
141. status and job status PUL also can be used to change the printer s control panel settings and modify the message displayed on the control panel The PJL language is designed to be used by application developers and technical support personnel only Introduction to HP PCL EN Syntax of Escape Sequences EN There are two forms of PCL escape sequences two character escape sequences and parameterized escape sequences Two Character Escape Sequences Two character escape sequences have the following form Ec X where X is a character that defines the operation to be performed X may be any character from the ASCII table within the range 48 126 decimal 0 through see Appendix A For a list of the two character escape sequences supported by the printer refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Following are examples of two character escape sequences Ec E atwo character escape sequence used for resetting the printer Ec 9 a two character escape sequence used for resetting the left and right margins to the printer s default settings Syntax of Escape Sequences 1 5 Parameterized Escape Sequences Parameterized escape sequences have the following form Ec X y z1 z2 23 Zn data where y zi z1 Z2 z3 and data may be optional depending on the command X Parameterized Character A character from the ASCII table w
142. the amp cguide for specifics HP GL 2 commands as well as the PCL command Enter HP GL 2 mode Ec B and the PCL picture frame directives are not recommended within a macro PCL macro control commands are not allowed while in HP GL 2 context Macro Control 12 7 ROM Based Macros Macros can be supplied in ROM read only memory such as custom macro cartridges or on SIMM modules The following considerations apply to all ROM based macros e ROM based macros include the macro ID numbers for their macros These numbers cannot be changed It is possible for a downloaded macro to be assigned the same ID number as a ROM macro If this occurs the downloaded macro has precedence To access the ROM macro the downloaded macro must be deleted e The ID numbers for ROM based macros range from 0 32767 e Incase of conflicting ID numbers in ROM based macros the following priorities apply 1 Cartridge macros In printers that have two cartridge slots one cartridge has priority over the other This priority depends on the printer Refer to Appendix E of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for the macro cartridge priority 2 SIMM macros SIMM 1 highest then SIMM 2 etc Example To define a macro with an ID of 7 send E amp f7y0X C y escape sequences control codes and data To stop the macro definition send EO amp f1X To make the macro with an ID of 7 permanent send E amp f7y10X c amp i y 12 8 Macros EN To enable th
143. the upper right corner However these points can be in any two opposite corners depending on the coordinates used 21 42 The Polygon Group EN EN XY increment location Current pen location starting point Figure 21 24Fill Rectangle Relative The only difference between the RR command and the ER Edge Relative Rectangle command is that the RR command produces a filled rectangle and ER an outlined one The RR command clears the polygon buffer and then uses it to define the rectangle before drawing A rectangle requires enough buffer space to hold five points The following example uses RR with three different fill types refer to the FT command description to create rectangles such as those you might use in a bar chart The rectangles in the right bar are edged using the ER command Table 21 24 Example Using the RR Command with Different Fill Types E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA400 400 Specify absolute plotting and move to location RR400 800 400 400 Fill a rectangle with the default fill black with 400 400 as the lower left corner and the upper right corner 400 plu to the right and 800 plu up from there RR Fill Rectangle Relative 21 43 Table 21 24 Example Using the RR Command with Different Fill Types contin
144. the Fl Command 0000 cece eee eee 23 54 FN Select Secondary Font 0 00 c cece eee ee eens 23 56 Example Using the FN Command 02 000ee eee eee 23 57 LB Labele aicc receettian a aoneal MR deta ae Gaeeoa ale Malas Oae 23 59 LO Label Origin 0 0 ccc eee een ees 23 62 SA Select Alternate Font 0 0000 cee 23 66 SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts 0 000 nee 23 67 SD Standard Font Definition 00 0 0 eee 23 68 Kind 1 Symbol Set 1 0 0 000000 cee 23 69 Kind 2 Font Spacing 2 2 i2eeeteeev eed ddan be bega ve ned bags 23 70 Kind 3 PRCI vsc2ve erecseiek a Sede eee Sted Oak bie VA EEEE aes 23 70 Kind 4 Height 2 2 ee 23 71 Kind 5 Posture seeasa4 2856 tev eweaugad been Peed ex RE a 23 71 Kind 6 Stroke Weight 0 0 00 cece eee 23 71 Kind 7 Typeface 6 ee 23 72 Example Using the SD Command 0 00e eee eee 23 73 SI Absolute Character Size 0 2 ee 23 74 Example Using the SI Command 0000 cece eee eee 23 75 SL Character Slant 20 0 0 cee es 23 78 Example Using the SL Command 0 0000ee eee eaeee 23 79 Contents 12 EN SR Relative Character Size 2 ee 23 81 Example Using the SR Command 00 0 0c eee eee 23 83 SS Select Standard Font 0 00 ccc eee eee 23 85 TD Transparent Data 0 0 cee eens 23 86 Programming Hints PCL Command Parsing 00 cee t
145. the Modified Print Environment The Modified Print Environment is saved during a macro call or overlay and restored upon its completion A Modified Print Environment consists of the current settings for the items listed in Table 3 1 and Table 3 2 with the exception of the items listed in Table 3 3 below Table 3 3 Items Not Included in Modified Print Environment PCL Context HP GL 2 Context Overlay environment HP GL 2 overlay environment Current cursor position Duplex registration Cursor position stack Downloaded fonts macros User defined patterns Polygon buffer Note Not all of the Modified Print Environment features are applicable to every printer To identify variations and default settings for specific printers refer to the PCL 5 Comparison Guide EN Modified Print Environment 3 7 Resetting the Print Environment Notes Resets are used to return the printer to a known environment Depending on the type of reset performed the printer returns to either the User Default Environment or the Factory Default Environment Printer Reset A Printer Reset restores the User Default Environment and deletes temporary fonts macros user defined symbol sets and patterns A Printer Reset is performed by sending the E E command or through the printer s control panel see the printer User s Manual The Printer Reset command is described in Chapter 4 PCL Job Control Commands
146. the diagonal distance between P1 and P2 Specifying type 1 defaults all pen widths to 0 1 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 If the specified type parameter is not 0 or 1 the printer ignores the command A WU command remains in effect until another WU command is executed or the printer is initialized WU is not defaulted by the Default Values DF command Table 22 27 Related Commands Group PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group SP Select Pen WU Pen Width Unit Selection 22 47 22 48 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN The Character Group Introduction When you create an HP GL 2 graphic and want to add text you can either enter PCL mode to add text to your image or you can print text from within HP GL 2 mode If this is your first experience with HP GL 2 you should know that the term label is used throughout this chapter to indicate the printing of text This chapter discusses the various ways you can label your images using the printer s vector graphics commands The information in this chapter enables you to perform the following Position and print labels using any LaserJet font Change label size slant and direction Designate and select standard and alternate fonts Print with proportional and fixed spaced fonts Work with the character cell The following commands are described in this chapter Table 23 1 The Character Group Commands Command
147. the extra space setting to default no extra space LBES CAUSES Print ES CAUSES PA2500 1800 CP LBTHIS Send a CP command as a CR LF and print SPACING THIS SPACING PA2500 2500 Move to 2500 2500 ES 1 25 Decrease the inter character spacing by 1 LBES 1 25 and the inter line spacing by 25 print CAUSES ES 1 25 CAUSES CP LBTHIS Send CP in place of CR LF and print THIS SPACING SPACING Move to 2500 1800 ES 2 25 LBES 2 25 Increase the inter character spacing by 2 CAUSES and the inter line spacing by 25 of the Space control code print ES 2 25 CAUSES CP LBTHIS Send CP in place of CR LF and print THIS SPACING SPACING EL OA Enter the PCL mode EOE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 23 52 The Character Group EN ES CAUSES THIS SPACING ES 1 29 CAUSES THIS SPACING Eve neo CAUSES THIS SPACING Table 23 27 Related Commands Group CP Character Plot The Character Group LB Label EN ES Extra Space 23 53 Fl Select Primary Font This command allows any accessible font that has been assigned a font ID number to be selected as the primary standard font the font characteristics are assigned to the standard font As mentioned the font must be accessible to the printer as either a resident font a downloaded font or a loaded cartridge font To
148. the logical page using the cursor positioning commands see Chapter 6 Cursor Positioning The PCL cursor cannot be moved outside of the logical page bounds The size of the logical page for the media paper transparencies labels etc is defined in Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 EN Printed Dots Note EN The high quality output achieved by HP LaserJet printers is due in part to the ability to lay down a fine grid of dots on the page The density of this grid is referred to as the printer s resolution From the first HP LaserJet the LaserJet Classic until recently all HP LaserJet family printers printed at a resolution of 300 dots per inch In a one inch square the printer could print a dot anywhere in a grid of up to 300 dots horizontally by 300 dots vertically for a total of 90 000 possible dot locations per square inch 300 x 300 90 000 The LaserJet 4 printer is capable of printing at either 300 or 600 dpi resolution At 600 dots per inch it becomes possible to print up to 360 000 dots per square inch 600 x 600 360 000 Print resolution of LaserJet 4 is selectable and can be specified either from the printer s control panel or programmed through PJL commands 1 600 1 600 1 600 1 600 1 300 1 300 a z Q 2 Q a gt a e P m Q a F 8 e 600 DPI DOTS 300 DPI DOTS Figure 2 1 300 vs 600 DPI Dot Sizes
149. the page on which the plot is defined 4 4 PCL Job Control Commands EN Simplex Duplex Print Command Note EN This command designates either simplex or duplex printing mode for duplex printers Simplex mode prints an image on only one side of a sheet page Duplex mode prints images on both sides of a sheet Ec amp L S 0 Simplex 1 Duplex Long Edge Binding 2 Duplex Short Edge Binding Default 0 Range 0 2 Other values ignored Long Edge bound duplexed pages are bound along the length of the physical page see Figure 4 2 Short edge bound duplexed pages are bound along the width of the physical page see Figure 4 3 Selecting long edge binding usually results in font rotation This may be aconcern if available user memory is critical If this command is received by a printer which does not contain the duplex feature it is ignored Printers which do not contain the duplex feature print in simplex mode front side of sheet only Simplex Duplex Print Command 4 5 PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE Portrait Portrait pa Print Print Front Back S Side Side a3 2 8 a3 T 2 O on a Bue Be EES FES Jau jam A C Long edge Binding a a o a a D w 5 2 3 a Landscape Print Back Side Portrait as Portrait Print P Print Back gt Front See p e HHHH IL Landscape Print Front Side Bound Bound Figure 4 2 Long Edge Binding Mode PORTRAIT L
150. to the font is listed Entity Status Responses 16 13 e For all fonts if the font is a secondary font then the characters are replaced by characters in the SELECT line LOCTYPE identifies the location type of the currently selected font The value returned corresponds to the value field of the Set Status Readback Type command LOCUNIT identifies the location unit of the currently selected font The value returned corresponds to the value field of the Set Status Readback Unit command For example if the printer s currently selected font is a bold 14 point Presentation bitmap font selected from a cartridge and a font entity request with the location type set to 1 is made the response would be returned as shown below PCL INFO FONTS SELECT lt Esc gt 1U lt Esc gt s0p10 00h14 0v0s3b11T KOCTYPE 5 LOCUNIT 1 For example assume the printer s currently selected font is unbound scalable Dom Casual font with the following characteristics e downloaded font ID of 78 e temporary e Roman 8 specified for printing e secondary font e 18 point If an entity request is made with the location type set to 1 currently selected the following response is returned PCL INFO FONTS SELECT lt Esc gt 8U lt Esc gt s1p18 00v1ls0b4148T lt Esc gt 78X OCTYPE 4 LOCUNIT 1 16 14 Status Readback EN Note EN Font Ext
151. two characters after Ec the parameterized and group character must be the same in all of the commands to be combined In the example above these are amp and 2 All alphabetic characters within the combined printer command are lower case except the final letter which is always upper case In the combined example above O becomes o The final character in the printer command must always be upper case to let the printer know that the command is complete The printer commands are performed in the order that they are combined from left to right Be sure to combine commands in the order that they are to be performed EN EN The Page Introduction This chapter describes the PCL coordinate system It defines the logical page and the printable area it introduces the HP GL 2 vector graphics picture frame and identifies the boundaries of each Introduction 2 1 Logical Page 2 2 The Page The PCL logical page also referred to as the PCL addressable area defines the area in which the PCL cursor can be positioned Although the printer does not actually have a cursor like the blinking underline character used on most computer terminals the cursor position refers to the Currently Active Position of the cursor also referred to as the CAP The location of the cursor is the position on the logical page where the next character will be positioned The cursor can be moved to different points on
152. upward from and relative to the current cursor position No sign indicates the new position is absolute from the top margin The top position defined by the top margin is 0 and the bottom position is determined by the bottom of the logical page Since the top margin can be changed using a printer command the physical location of the point 0 0 may change This affects the cursor position on the page If a request is made for a location outside the printer s logical page the current active position CAP is moved to the appropriate logical page limit 6 10 Cursor Positioning EN Vertical Cursor Positioning Decipoints Command Note EN This Vertical Cursor Positioning command moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis Eo amp a V Number of Decipoints 1 720 inch Default NA Range 32767 to 32767 rounded to the first decimal place A value field with a plus sign indicates the new position is downward from and relative to the current cursor position a minus sign indicates the new position is upward from and relative to the current cursor position No sign indicates an absolute distance from the top margin The top position defined by the top margin is 0 and the bottom position is determined by the bottom of the logical page Since the top margin can be changed using a printer command the physical location of the point 0 0 may change This affects the cursor position on the
153. use with HP Specials symbol sets and is not recommended for general use Symbol set ID s of and X do not have a corresponding Symbol Set selection command sets marked as such can be selected only with the Font ID This field must have a value of 56 for a type 10 or 11 font unbound Intellifont scalable to be valid Pitch UI Bitmap Font Specifies the pitch of the font in quarter dots four quarter dot units also known as radix dots equal one dot It combines with Pitch Extended to specify the pitch of the font in 1024 dots Pitch defines the default HMI for the font For example a a 17 cpi font designed at 300 dpi has a pitch value of 70 radix dots as calculated 1 inch 300 dots 4 radix dots 17 char inch dot 70 588 radix dot The remainder 0 588 is converted back to dots and then to 1024t dots as shown below 0 588 radix dot 1024 units 4 radix dot dot 150 units dot Pitch Extended is set to 150 1024 S ynits For a proportional font the width printed for a control code Space is determined by the pitch value unless an HMI command is received following the selection of the font Scalable Fonts Contains the master design space width escapement of the font in design units Font Header Format 11 21 Height UI Bitmap Font Specifies the design height of the font in quarter dots radix dots This value converted to points is used as the height characteristic val
154. with negative user unit values Note that the framework set by the scaling points P1 and P2 is not a graphics limit The user unit coordinate system extends across the entire PCL Picture Frame area You can print to a point beyond P1 or P2 as long as you are within the PCL Picture Frame In Figure 19 3 P1 is in the X and Y quadrant Note You can use coordinate points that are outside of the PCL Picture Frame boundaries or even off of the page but only that portion of the vector graphics image that falls within the effective window is printed For example you can draw a small portion of the circumference of a circle with a 5 foot radius by moving the pen 5 feet from the page and issuing a Cl command specifying a 5 foot radius only the portion of the arc that falls within the effective window is printed 19 6 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN Physical Page PCL Picture Frame C 15 15 15 20 IPO 0 8128 9144 Figure 19 3 New P1 and P2 User Unit Scaling with Negative Values Refer to the Scale SC command at the end of this chapter for more information on scaling drawings Using the Scale Command 19 7 Using Scaling Effectively Note The following sections describe how to combine scaling and P1 P2 concepts to do the following e Enlarge or reduce the size of a drawing e Draw equal size pictures on the same page e Create mirror imaged pictures Enlarging or Reducing a Picture The basic technique for ch
155. 0 units per inch 4 Specify the Pattern ID EU c25G This sets the Pattern ID to 25 1 Print the rectangular shaded area EUtc2P This example prints the following 300 400 Figure 14 5 Shaded Fill Example EN Rectangular Area Fill Examples 14 15 Cross hatch Fill To print a 900 by 1500 Unit rectangular area 3 inches by 5 inches at 300 units per inch filled with a horizontal cross hatch pattern perform the following steps 1 Position the cursor E p300x400Y Moves the cursor to PCL Unit position 800 400 within the PCL coordinate systems 2 Specify the width of the rectangle EU c900A Sets the rectangle width to 900 PCL Units 3 inches at 300 units per inch 3 Specify the height of the rectangle E c1500B Sets the rectangle height to 1500 PCL Units 5 inches at 300 units per inch 4 Specify the Pattern ID Eel G Sets the Pattern ID to 1 5 Print the rectangular pattern filled area E c3P 14 16 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics EN EN This example prints the following 300 400 Figure 14 6 Patterned Fill Example User defined Pattern Example This example shows how to print a user defined pattern which has already been downloaded to the printer For this example we will print the pattern of triangles which was downloaded in the example in Chapter 13 under User Defined Pattern Command The following commands define a 600 PCL Unit square rectangular area select ID number 3 and print
156. 0 0 ER 40 25 Lift the pen and move 20 user units to the right Draw a rectangle from that point with the current pen location being one corner and the opposite corner being 40 user units to the left and 25 units down 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page ER Edge Rectangle Relative 21 25 Start 75 105 40 25 Figure 21 16 Table 21 13 Related Commands 20 0 60 5 Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative The Polygon Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group 21 26 The Polygon Group EN EW Edge Wedge This command outlines any wedge Use EW to draw sections of pie charts EW radius start angle sweep angle chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default radius current units 230 to 230 4 no default start angle clamped real 32768 to 32767 no default modulo 360 sweep angle clamped real 360 no default chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5e The EW command defines and edges a wedge using the current pen line type and attributes The EW command includes an automatic pen down When the command execution is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored The only difference between t
157. 00 Figure 19 19The Left and Bottom Parameters For Scaling Type 2 The third form of scaling point factor scaling sets a specific ratio of plotter units to user units and establishes the user units coordinate of P1 Table 19 21 Scaling Form Type Syntax Point Factor 2 SCXivin XFactor Yuin YFactor typel 19 44 The Configuration and Status Group EN o XMIN XFACTOR Y MIN Y FACTOR Establish the user unit coordi nates of P1 and the ratio of plotter to user units Xm and YMiN are the user unit coordinates of P1 Xfactor sets the number of plotter units per user unit on the X axis Y factor sets the number of plotter units per user unit on the Y axis e Type Must be 2 for this type of scaling An SC command remains in effect until another SC command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Examples The following examples explain the effect of several parameter selections SCO0 40 0 40 2 allows scaling in millimeters since 1 millimeter 40 plotter units Each user unit is 1 millimeter SCO 1 016 0 1 016 2 allows scaling in thousandths of an inch since 1 inch 1016 plotter units While scaling is on after any form of the SC command has been executed only those HP GL 2 commands that can be issued in current units are interpreted as user units the commands that can be issued only in plotter units are still interpreted as plotter units The comman
158. 00 Set P1 to be 0 0 and P2 to be 2000 2000 SCO0 10 0 10 Set up user unit scaling to range from 0 0 to 10 10 SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA5 5 Begin absolute plotting from the center of the square 5 5 CI3 Print a circle with a radius of 3 user units IP2500 500 3500 1500 Input a new P1 and P2 position for printing the smaller circle PA5 5 Begin absolute plotting from the center of the new square 5 5 CI3 Print the second circle with a radius of 3 user units EQ 0A Enter PCL Mode EGE Reset the printer to complete the job and eject the page EN Using Scaling Effectively 19 9 Original P2 New P2 New P1 Original P1 Figure 19 4 Changing the size of a drawing Drawing Equal Size Pictures on a Page You may occasionally want to print more than one drawing on the same page for a side by side comparison This can be useful for comparing parts assemblies layouts or other similar information The easiest way to draw equal sized pictures on one piece of paper is to take advantage of the fact that P2 follows P1 whenever you change the location of P1 The following example illustrates this feature The example locates P1 and P2 on the left side of the paper and scales the area for the first image Then for the second image only the P1 location is moved to the right side
159. 00 1200 as the upper right corner PA400 1200 FT3 50 RA800 1600 Move the pen to 400 1200 select fill type 3 parallel lines with a 50 plu space between lines and draw a rectangle with 400 1200 as the lower left corner and 800 1600 as the upper right corner PA400 1600 FT4 RA800 2000 Move to 400 1600 and specify fill type 4 cross hatching Draw a rectangle with a lower left corner of 400 1600 and an upper right corner of 800 2000 PA1200 400 FT RA1600 1200 EA1600 1200 Move to location 1200 400 and select the default fill type Solid black Fill and edge a rectangle using 1200 400 as the lower left corner and 1600 1200 as the upper right corner 21 40 The Polygon Group EN EN Table 21 22 Example Using the RA Command with Different Fill Types continued PA1200 1200 FT3 50 RA1600 1600 EA1600 1600 Move to absolute position 1200 1200 and select fill type 3 with a 50 plu distance between each line Draw a rectangle with 1200 1200 as the lower left corner and 1600 1600 as the upper right Using the default line type edge the rectangle just drawn PA1200 1600 FT4 RA1600 2000 Move to 1200 1600 and select the cross hatch pattern fill type Draw a rectangle EA1600 2000 with the current pen location as one corner and 1600 2000 as the opposite corner 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the p
160. 011110 00000000 00000011 10000000 30 0 3 128 18 00011111 00000000 00000111 10000000 31 0 7 128 19 00011111 10000000 00001111 00000000 31 128 15 0 20 00011111 11000000 00011111 00000000 31 192 31 0 21 00011101 11110000 01111110 00000000 29 240 126 0 22 00011100 11111111 11111100 00000000 28 255 252 0 23 00011100 00111111 11110000 00000000 28 63 240 0 24 00011100 00001111 11000000 00000000 28 15 192 0 EN Character Definition Examples 11 71 Table 11 53 Portrait Character Data Example continued 25 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 28 0 0 0 26 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 28 0 0 0 27 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 28 0 0 0 28 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 28 0 0 0 29 11111111 11111100 00000000 00000000 255 252 0 0 30 11111111 11111100 00000000 00000000 255 252 0 0 31 11111111 11111100 00000000 00000000 255 252 0 0 Bitmap Landscape Character Example To download the character descriptor and data for a landscape 10 pitch 12 point upright medium Courier lower case p send Ec c112E 112 is the decimal character code for an ASCII lower case p Ec s120W character descriptor and data Table 11 54 Character Format Continuation and Descriptor FIELD NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION Format 4 LaserJet Printer Family Continuation 0 Not A Continuation Record Descriptor Size 14 Bitmap Clas
161. 1 10 Example Using the EP Command E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black PA2000 10 Specify absolute plotting and move to position 2000 10 PM0 PD10 2000 10 10 Enter polygon mode store a pen down 2000 10 PM1 command and then store points 10 2000 10 10 and 2000 10 Close the polygon PU610 610 CI500 PM2 While still in polygon mode lift the pen and move to 610 610 Draw a circle with a diameter of 500 plu then close the current subpolygon and exit polygon mode EP Edge Polygon 21 21 Table 21 10 Example Using the EP Command continued EP Outline the polygon that was just stored in the polygon buffer 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 10 2000 610 610 10 10 2000 10 Figure 21 14 Table 21 11 Related Commands Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute The Polygon Group ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge PM Polygon Mode RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width 21 22 The Polygon Group EN ER Edge Rectangle Relative Note EN This command defines and outlines a rectangle using relative coordinates Use ER when drawing charts or schematic diagrams that require rectangles ER x
162. 1 11111110 127 255 255 240 23 01111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 127 255 255 240 24 01110000 00000000 00000000 00001110 112 0 0 14 EN Character Definition Examples 11 73 Table 11 55 Landscape Character Data Example continued 25 01110000 00000000 00000000 00001110 112 14 26 01110000 00000000 00000000 00001110 112 14 11 74 Soft Font Creation EN Note EN P Macros Introduction A Macro is a group of PCL and H P GL 2 commands and or data created by the user that is downloaded and stored in the printer Once stored in the printer a macro can be invoked upon request using the assigned macro ID number using a single command When printing letters for example which include a company letterhead the letterhead is repeated for each letter This letterhead can be created as a macro and stored in the printer Thus whenever the letter is printed a macro command sent to the printer initiates the command sequence to print the letterhead HP GL 2 commands are not supported within macros on all HP LaserJet printers Refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for specifics Macros eliminate the need to download the same information repeatedly thus saving transmission time However the trade off is that they consume user memory If memory usage is a concern a possible solution might be an HP custom macro cartridge Custom macros can be wr
163. 1 and P2 draws the plot then returns to reset P1 and P2 using the IP command This continues until all four possible mirror images are plotted The original drawing is shown in each picture so you can compare the orientation of the mirror image Table 19 4 Example Creating a Mirror Image ELE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 You must use the SP command to enable printing IP1500 3600 3000 5100 SC 15 15 10 10 Specify the P1 P2 locations for the first arrow figure Set up user scaling 15 10 to 15 10 Run subroutine Run the subroutine below that prints the arrow image IP3000 3600 1500 5100 Change the physical locations of P1 and P2 to flip the image to the left Run subroutine Print the second image IP1500 5100 3000 3600 Change the physical locations of P1 and P2 to flip the image down Run subroutine Print the third image IP3000 5100 1500 3600 Change P1 P2 locations to flip the image to the left and down Run subroutine Print the fourth image EG 0A EE Enter the PCL mode Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Using Scaling Effectively 19 13 Table 19 4 Example Creating a Mirror Image continued SUBROUTINE Subroutine that prints the arrow figure on the next page PA1 2 PD1 4 3 4 3 7 2 7 4 9 6 7 5 7 5 4 12 4 12 5 14 3 1
164. 11 16 11 23 symbol set 11 19 11 20 text height 11 29 text width 11 29 typeface LSB 11 24 typeface MSB 11 24 typeface vendor version 11 26 typeface word 11 24 typeface previous usage 11 26 underline position distance 11 29 underline thickness 11 29 variety 11 35 width type 11 23 X resolution 11 33 xheight 11 22 Y resolution 11 34 font header formats of data segments AP Application Support Segment 11 41 CC Character Complement 11 41 IF Intellifont Face Data 11 42 PF PS Compatible Font Name 11 42 XW x windows font name 11 42 Font ID command 9 4 font name user designated ASC16 11 33 font number font header 11 32 font selection 8 1 by characteristic 8 1 23 68 24 5 by ID 8 26 24 6 escape sequence 8 21 example 8 21 8 22 final 9 11 font select table 8 1 HP GL 2 8 27 23 17 priority 8 2 8 3 8 24 23 19 short method 8 5 specifying 24 5 summary 8 23 unbound fonts 9 8 Form Feed FF 6 13 19 33 19 39 Format 0 font header bitmap 11 7 Format 10 font header Intellifont bound 11 10 Format 11 font header Intellifont unbound 11 11 Format 15 font header TrueType scalable 11 13 Format 20 font header resolution specified bitmap 11 8 format field character descriptor 11 52 character descriptor bitmap 11 52 character descriptor scalable 11 62 TrueType character descriptor 11 67 user defined pattern descriptor 13 17 user defined symbol set 10 6 FP command 21 12 21 31 example 21 32 EN EN Free
165. 1111110 11111100 11111000 11110000 11100000 11000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 10000000 11000000 11100000 11110000 11111000 11111100 11111110 11111111 11111111 11111110 11111100 11111000 11110000 11100000 11000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 E b4W 0 0 252 0 E lt b4W 0 0 254 0 EC b4W 0 0 255 0 E b4W 0 0 255 128 E b4W 255 255 255 192 EO b4W 255 255 255 224 EO b4W 255 255 255 240 EO b4W 255 255 255 248 EO b4W 255 255 255 252 E b4W 255 255 255 254 E b4W 255 255 255 255 EO b4W 255 255 255 255 E b4W 255 255 255 254 EO b4W 255 255 255 252 EO b4W 255 255 255 248 E b4W 255 255 255 240 EO b4W 255 255 255 224 Eo b4W 255 255 255 192 ES b4W 0 0 255 128 EC b4W 0 0 255 0 EC b4W 0 0 254 0 E lt b4W 0 0 252 0 E lt b4W 0 0 248 0 E b4W 0 0 240 0 E b4W 0 0 224 0 EC b4W 0 0 192 0 E lt b4W 0 0 128 0 The brackets and commas are not part of the raster data command they are used only to delineate the data 15 32 Raster Graphics EN EN 300 400 Figure 15 11 Example of Raster Graphic Image Data Raster Graphics Example 15 33 15 34 Raster Graphics EN EN Status Readback Introduction This chapter describes the PCL status readback features PCL status is requested from the printer with the commands described in this chapter Following a status request the printer
166. 2 1 12 2 1 2 PU P2 3000 5100 P2 1500 5100 P1 1500 3600 P1 3000 3600 First Image Second Image Normal P1 1500 5100 P1 3000 5100 P2 3000 3600 P2 1500 3600 Third Image Fourth image Figure 19 6 Creating a mirror image 19 14 The Configuration and Status Group EN Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System The following example uses the IP and SC commands to change HP GL 2 coordinate system to match the default PCL coordinate system The IP command is used to invert the Y axis so that the Y values increase as the pen moves down the page The SC command equates user units to dot positions 300 dots per inch The example draws a few lines in both PCL and HP GL 2 modes to demonstrate that the coordinate systems are lined up correctly the end points of the lines intersect Notes Sending an IN Initialize or DF Default command causes the coordinate system to revert to the HP GL 2 default Since this example is based on the default top margin and text length changing the top margin or the text length moves the two coordinate systems out of alignment Table 19 5 Example Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System in Portrait Orientation EOE Reset the printer EQ amp l2A Set the page size to letter E amp l00 Specify portrait orientation E amp l0E Set top margin to 0 EQ pOx0Y Move to position 0 0 E4 c5760x79
167. 2000 2500 set the pen down and draw to 5000 2500 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Pattern length a eae bes pare ee a A l E a Figure 22 24 UL User Defined Line Type 22 45 Table 22 25 Related Commands Group LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type Table 22 26 POSSIBLE ERROR CONDITIONS Condition Printer Response sum of gap parameters equals zero ignores command a gap is negative ignores command index 0 orlindex gt 8 ignores command WU Pen Width Unit Selection This command specifies how the width parameter of the Pen Width PW command is interpreted whether metric or relative units WU type or WU 7 Parameter Format Functional Range Default type clamped integer 0 to 1 O metric Since using WU with or without parameters defaults all pen widths send the WU command before a PW command which sets a new pen width e No Parameters Defaults type parameter to 0 metric and all pen widths to 0 35 mm 22 46 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN e Type Specifies how the width parameter of the Pen Width PW command is interpreted e 0 Metric Interprets the pen width parameter in millimeters Specifying type 0 defaults all pen widths to 0 35mm e 1 Relative Interprets the pen width parameter as a percentage of
168. 20Y Set picture frame to 8 x 11 size of logical page E COT Set picture frame anchor point to current PCL cursor position 0 0 E 1 B Enter HP GL 2 mode with the HP GL 2 cursor or pen at the PCL cursor position EN Using Scaling Effectively 19 15 Table 19 5 Example Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System in Portrait Orientation IN SP1 Initialize HP GL 2 command values and select pen number 1 black The IN command moves the pen position from the anchor point to the HP GL 2 origin the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame SC0 3 3867 0 3 3867 2 Set up a user scale with a user unit equal to 1 300 inch Scale command type 2 the scale is the ratio of plotter units user units 1016 plotter units per inch 300 dots per inch 3 3867 The minus 2 Y value changes the HP GL 2 Y direction to match that of the PCL coordinate system IRO 100 0 100 Place P1 point 0 0 at the top of the PCL picture frame PUO 0 Lift the pen and move to 0 0 upper left corner since HP GL 2 coordinate system now matches PCL coordinate system Every subsequent pen move can be specified using the same coordinate numbers in either mode The following commands demonstrate that the grids are synchronized PU300 300 PD600 600 Lift the pen and move it to 300 300 then draw a line to 600 600 This draws a line at a 45 angle down from the starting point EK 1A Enter the PC
169. 21 23 37 example 23 41 drawing arcs 20 14 arcs HP GL 2 20 5 Bezier curves HP GL 2 20 8 Bezier curves with absolute coordinates 20 22 Bezier curves with relative coordinates 20 19 circles 21 14 circles HP GL 2 20 4 20 25 circles with different radii and line types 20 28 equal size pictures 19 11 lines HP GL 2 20 2 pie charts using EW 21 29 pie charts using WG 21 49 polygons 21 10 rectangles 21 3 rectangles using EA 21 18 rectangles using ER 21 24 size HP GL 2 19 9 subpolygons 21 11 Index 23 Index 24 wedges 21 6 driver design for status 16 2 DT command 23 11 23 44 DTR polarity Glossary 4 Duplex Page Side Selection command 4 10 duplex printing 4 5 duplicate row adaptive compression 15 25 DV command 23 9 23 29 23 30 23 37 23 46 example 23 49 E E Printer Reset 4 2 EA command 21 3 21 17 Echo command 16 25 edge pen 23 21 Edge Polygon command 21 21 Edge Rectangle Absolute command 21 17 Edge Rectangle Absolute command 21 3 Edge Rectangle Relative command 21 3 21 23 Edge Wedge EW command 21 7 21 27 edging 21 3 effective window 17 19 19 30 20 2 eject page 19 33 Em defined 7 5 empty row adaptive compression 15 25 encoded symbol set user defined symbol set 10 6 encoding raster data 15 2 encoding X Y coordinates 20 34 20 37 End Raster Graphics command 15 30 ending labels 23 11 end of line wrap command 24 12 end of text character 23 11 23 44 enlarging reducing HP GL 2 images 19
170. 23 59 e Label Terminator Terminates the LB command You must use the special label terminator refer to the DT command to tell the printer to exit the label mode If you do not use the label terminator everything following the LB mnemonic is printed in the label including other commands The default label terminator is the non printing end of text character ETX decimal code 3 You can define a different terminator using the DT command Table 23 32 Example Printing Text with the LB Command PA2500 2500 EOE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing Move to absolute location 2500 2500 DT Specify the asterisk as the label terminator SD1 21 2 1 4 25 5 0 6 3 7 4148 SS Designate the 25 point Univers Bold font as the standard font and select it LBThis is a Label Prints This is a Label in the currently selected font EQ 0A Enter the PCL mode EOE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page This is a Label 2500 2500 Figure 23 32 23 60 The Character Group EN Table 23 33 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition CP Character Plot DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction DT Define Label Terminator DV Define Variable Text Path ES Extra Spa
171. 2500 DI1 1 LB Print the same word in the fourth quadrant and DIRECTIONCA return the carriage to the Carriage Return point DI Absolute Direction 23 33 Table 23 14 Example Using the DI Command continued DI 1 1 LB Print the same word in the third quadrant and DIRECTIONCA Carriage Return DI 1 1 LB Print the word in the fourth quadrant and DIRECTIONCA Carriage Return EL 0A Enter the PCL mode EOE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Quadrant II S Quadrant run rise Quadrant Ill Qn rise Quadrant IV a mn O AS Figure 23 19 Varying Print Direction with DI Command Parameter Sign The DI command remains in effect until another DI or DR command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions The following example illustrates the use of positive and negative parameters the use of the cosine and sine how the LB command updates the current pen location and how DI updates the Carriage Return point 23 34 The Character Group EN EN Table 23 15 Example Another DI Example EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA3500 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to 3500 2500 DT 1 Define the character as the label
172. 2500 then to 4000 2000 PU3500 2500 LA2 2 3 20 PD3000 2500 3000 2300 Lift the pen and move to 3500 2500 set the line join to mitered beveled and the miter limit to 20 set the pen down and draw a line to 3000 2500 then to 3000 2300 PU2500 2300 LA1 4 PD3500 2300 Lift the pen and move it to 2500 2300 specify round line ends and draw a line to 3500 2300 PU2700 2100 PD3300 2100 Lift the pen and move to 2700 2100 then set the pen down and draw a line to 3300 2100 PU2900 1900 PD3100 1900 Lift the pen and move to 2900 1900 then draw a line to 3100 1900 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 22 20 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN 4300 3000 Mitered join Round ends Figure 22 16 Table 22 10 Triangular ends Related Commands Group FT Fill Type LT Line Type PW Pen Width UL User Defined Line Type The Line and Fill Attributes Group AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point The Vector Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group LA Line Attributes 22 21 L
173. 4 Height Values Height Values Description 0 to 32 767 9999 font point size default 11 5 Kind 5 Posture Posture defines the character s vertical posture The default posture is upright Table 23 43 Kind 5 Posture Values Posture Values Description 0 Upright Default 1 Italic 2 Alternate Italic Kind 6 Stroke Weight The stroke weight characteristic defines the line thickness used in the font s design The default stroke weight is medium When relative sizing is in effect changes in P1 and P2 cause the relative stroke weight to change in relation to the change in P1 P2 If the aspect ratio of the P1 P2 rectangle is maintained as P1 and P2 are moved a medium stroke weight font still looks medium after it is enlarged or reduced Available stroke weights are the same as those available within PCL SD Standard Font Definition 23 71 Table 23 44 Kind 6 Stroke Weight Values Stroke WeightValue Description 7 Ultra Thin 6 Extra Thin 5 Thin 4 Extra Light 3 Light 2 Demi Light 1 Semi Light 0 Medium Book or Text 1 Semi Bold 2 Demi Bold 3 Bold 4 Extra Bold 5 Black 6 Extra Black 7 Ultra Black 9999 Stick font only 1 When the Stick font typeface 48 is selected the value 9999 renders it using the current pen width Kind 7 Typeface The typeface characteristic selects the font
174. 4 4 and Figure 4 5 The value is absolute with respect to the default position of the logical page along the width of the physical page It is not relative to the present location The registration commands may cause data loss by moving the logical page outside the printable area This command has the same effect regardless of orientation This command can be used in both simplex and duplex modes Left Offset Registration Command 4 7 Top Offset Registration Command Notes The Top short edge Offset Registration command designates the position of the logical page along the length long side of the physical page Ec amp L HZ The number of decipoints 1 720 inch Default 0 Range 32767 to 32767 The value is a signed number valid to 2 decimal places The units are decipoints Positive values cause the logical page regardless of orientation to move down along the length of the physical page except on the backside of sheets printed in short edge binding duplex mode where positive values cause it to move up refer to Figure 4 4 and Figure 4 5 Negative values cause the logical page regardless of orientation to move up along the length of the physical page except on the backside of sheets printed in short edge binding duplex mode where negative values cause it to move down refer to Figure 4 4 and Figure 4 5 The value is absolute with respect to the default position of the logical page al
175. 4 5 Left Offset Registration Command 0 00 c cece een eee eee 4 7 Top Offset Registration Command 0 0c e eee eee eee 4 8 Duplex Page Side Selection Command 0000 eee eee 4 10 Job Separation Command 000 cece eee 4 11 Output Bin Selection Command 0 00 eens 4 12 Unit of Measure Command 0 00 cee ee 4 13 Page Control Commands Page Size Command 0 00 cee 5 2 PAPER SOURCE COMMAND 000 0 cece eee teens 5 4 Logical Page Orientation Command 000 0c eee eee eee 5 5 Print Direction Command 000 ccc eee 5 9 TEXTA Oa sec eck eae oor e eee Eee SA A Pe ee dea eee aol Pee ae 2 5 11 Left Margin Command aaaea 5 13 Right Margin Command 0 0000 eee 5 14 Clear Horizontal Margins Command 00 0 cece eee eee 5 15 Top Margin Command 00 0 cee ee 5 16 Text Length Command 00 0 cece eee 5 18 Perforation Skip Command 0000 cece 5 19 Horizontal Motion Index HMI Command 00000 cece eee 5 20 Vertical Motion Index VMI Command 0 000 eee eee eee 5 22 Common VMI Settings 00 0 cee eee 5 23 Line Spacing Command 00 0 cece eee 5 24 Contents 2 Cursor Positioning Absolute vs Relative Cursor Positioning 2 cece eee eee 6 2 Cursor Positioning Units wk ee 6 3 PGE UNITS sick aa iaaa a ee nw cis Eee eee ede ee ee ORR we ee 6 3 DOCIPOI
176. 5 inches at 300 units per inch then white fill a small area inside the black rectangle perform the following steps 1 1 Position the cursor E p300x400Y This moves the cursor to PCL Unit position 300 400 within the PCL coordinate system 2 2 Specify the width of the rule E c900A This sets the rule width to 900 PCL Units 3 inches at 300 units per inch 3 3 Specify the height of the rule E c1500B This sets the rule height to 1500 PCL Units 5 inches at 300 units per inch 4 4 Print the rule EUtcOP This example prints a black filled rectangular area 5 5 Position the cursor inside the rectangular area E p600x700Y Rectangular Area Fill Examples 14 13 6 6 Specify the width and height for the smaller white fill rectangular area E c300a600B 7 7 Select the white fill and print Efe P 300 400 600 700 Figure 14 4 Solid Fill Example Shaded Fill To print a 900 by 1500 Unit 25 shaded rectangle 3 inches by 5 inches at 300 units per inch perform the following steps 1 Position the cursor E p300x400Y This moves the cursor to PCL Unit position 300 400 within the PCL coordinate system 2 Specify the width of the rectangle E c900A This sets the rectangle width to 900 PCL Units 3 Inches at 300 units per inch 14 14 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics EN 3 Specify the height of the rectangle E c1500B This sets the rectangle to 1500 PCL Units 5 inches at 30
177. 6 Specify the Y component of the label direction Together the parameters specify the slope and direction of the label EN DI Absolute Direction 23 29 You can express the parameters in measured units as rise and run or using the trigonometric functions cosine and sine according to the following relationship Where run and rise number of measured units 0 the angle measured in degrees sin O cos 9 rise run tan rise run and tan 0 sin cos 0 Note that the run and rise determine the slope or angle of an imaginary line under the base of each character in the label Refer to the following illustration Pa Pai a 4 Run a Figure 23 15Character Slope Rise and Run When plotting in horizontal mode you have not used the DV command the run and rise appear to determine the slope of the entire label However if you have used the Define Variable Text Path DV command to label in a vertical path the label appears to slant in the opposite direction even though the base of each letter is plotted on the same slope The following illustration compares how labels plotted with the same run and rise parameters appear with horizontal DVO and vertical DV1 text paths 23 30 The Character Group EN Note EN Figure 23 16Effect of Horizontal and Vertical Text Paths If an SB1 command has been sent the printer draws the label along the nearest perpendicular In the case of bisection the angle is rounded
178. 6 and sin 30 0 5 Your DI command using the sine and cosine would be DI 866 5 Whichever set of parameters you use the label is drawn in the same direction as shown in the previous illustration 23 32 The Character Group EN EN When using either method at least one parameter must not be zero The ratio of one parameter to the other is more important than the actual numbers The following table lists three common label angles produced by using 1 s and 0 s Table 23 13 DI Command Label Direction DI 1 0 horizontal DI 0 1 vertical DI 1 1 or DI 0 7 0 7 45 angle or any parameters equal to each other The relative size and sign of the two parameters determine the amount of rotation If you imagine the current pen location to be the origin of a coordinate system for the label you can see that the signs of the parameters determine which quadrant the label is in Table 23 14 Example Using the DI Command EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA3500 2500 Enter absolute plotting mode and move to 3500 2500 DT Define as the label terminator Dl1 1 LB Print the word DIRECTION in the first DIRECTIONCA quadrant and send a Carriage Return to return the pen to the Carriage Return point 3500
179. 6 13 Glossary 1 character complement 10 7 character complement numbers 9 10 character requirements number 9 10 creation 9 8 downloading 9 8 scalable also see unbound font 9 8 scalable fonts and user defined symbol sets 10 1 selection 9 8 status readback 16 13 symbol collections 9 9 symbol set mapping 9 11 typeface 9 8 underline fixed 8 29 floating 8 29 position distance font header 11 29 thickness font header 11 29 Underline command 8 29 unencoded adaptive compression 15 25 Unicode Glossary 14 and MSL numbers 9 11 character requirements 10 9 symbol index example 10 13 10 14 unit of measure Glossary 15 Unit Of Measure command 4 13 unit location status readback 16 3 Index 37 units coordinate system 6 3 cursor positioning 6 3 design window 11 4 internal printer 2 5 of measure HP GL 2 17 20 PCL coordinate system 2 5 Universal Exit Language UEL Glossary 14 Universal Exit Language command 4 3 unsigned byte UB 10 5 11 14 character descriptor 11 51 unsigned integer Ul 10 5 11 14 character descriptor 11 51 unsigned long integer ULI 10 5 11 14 upright style 7 6 user default Glossary 15 computing text length 5 18 environment 3 1 Glossary 15 environment settings 3 6 symbol set 8 6 user memory 8 3 user defined fill definition raster 22 32 fill patterns 14 9 22 13 fill types HP GL 2 22 4 fonts naming ASC16 11 33 symbol set 8 7 User Defined Line Type command 22 44 user defined pattern lintro
180. 8 Enter HP GL 2 Mode command 18 13 Enter PCL Mode command 18 14 entity 16 3 entity status readback 16 3 environment factory default 3 1 3 2 macro overlay 3 1 modified print 3 1 3 7 reset 3 8 user default 3 1 3 6 4 2 EP command 21 21 example 21 21 ER command 21 3 21 23 erase pattern 14 9 error clearing automatic 24 14 error codes entity status readback 16 19 ES command 23 8 23 16 23 51 escape character amp esc 1 3 Glossary 4 escape sequences defined 1 3 Glossary 4 example 1 7 group character 1 6 parameter character 1 6 parameterized 1 5 printer commands 1 1 spacing 1 7 syntax 1 5 termination character 1 6 value field 1 6 escape sequences PCL amp esc 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 7 4 8 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 5 2 5 4 5 5 5 9 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 22 5 24 6 4 6 6 6 9 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 8 6 8 9 8 10 8 12 8 14 8 16 8 18 8 26 8 27 8 28 8 29 9 4 9 5 10 2 10 4 10 12 11 6 11 49 11 50 12 6 12 7 13 6 13 7 13 12 13 16 13 22 13 23 14 3 14 4 14 9 15 6 15 8 15 11 15 13 15 14 15 15 15 16 15 29 15 30 16 8 16 9 16 10 16 21 16 24 16 25 24 12 ETX 23 11 23 44 even odd fill method for polygons 21 12 EW command 21 6 21 7 21 27 execute macro 12 4 exit language universal UEL Glossary 14 exponential format 17 11 Extra Space ES command 23 8 23 16 23 51 F factory default Glossary 4 factory default environment 3 2 Glossary 5 HP GL 2
181. ANDSCAPE r Short edge Binding LOUTH jl Portrait tint au PRS RAB n g a o 3 Front Side o o as opis g 8 yoeg Beg ud BES yeod ami LY Paran E Short edge Binding Print Back Side Landscape Landscape Print Print Back Side Front Side Print Front Bound Bound Figure 4 3 Short Edge Binding Mode 4 6 PCL Job Control Commands EN Left Offset Registration Command Notes EN The Left long edge Offset Registration command designates the position of the logical page across the width short side of the physical page This command can be used to adjust the text position on the page to allow additional room for the page binding Ec amp L U The number of decipoints 1 720 inch 0 Range 32767 to 32767 Default The value is a signed number valid to 2 decimal places The units are decipoints Positive values cause the logical page regardless of orientation to move right along the width of the physical page except on the back side duplex print of sheets printed in long edge binding duplex mode where positive values cause it to move left refer to Figure 4 4 and Figure 4 5 Negative values cause the logical page regardless of orientation to move left along the width of the physical page except on the back side of sheets printed in long edge binding duplex mode where negative values cause it to move right refer to Figure
182. C i cnet tee eebaa he Peo wd ee te es Bhd A enews eee Daas 8 17 Typeface Family Command 000 0c eee eee 8 18 EXAMPICG kerais ead anea naked ee weeded 6 dade Ea aes 8 19 Orientation e300 es bowed ase A E en deans e baad Fede e ade a 8 20 Font Selection Examples naasa auaa ae 8 21 Bitmap Fixed Spaced Font 0000 cece eee ee eee 8 21 Scalable Proportional Spaced Font 000 e eens 8 22 Summary of Font Selection by Characteristic 020002 eae 8 23 Font Selectionby ID Command 0000 cee ee 8 26 Examples nananana ccc et eee ee 8 27 Select Default Font Command 000 0c eee 8 27 HP GL 2 Font Selection 0 00 cee tee 8 27 Transparent Print Data Command 0 00 00 cee ee nas 8 28 Example ee o0 256 ister dead EAEE Si aaa a A E een ars 8 28 Underline Command 00 00 cece ee 8 29 Font Management Downloading Soft Fonts 0 0 06 c cee 9 2 Temporary vs Permanent FontS 0000 cece eee ee eee eee 9 3 Deleting FontS 0 00 tees 9 3 F nt ID COMMANA a aae oriana nra a iea E a E A E e Ea 9 4 EXAMDIE a ais ui a a naa n a a ra kod a d Dae eae 9 4 Font Control Command sasssa aaaeeeaa 9 5 EXAMpICS ieai raa Pieri ad e de bac ee tho hd ee RSE a a 9 5 Font Management Example 0000 eee eee 9 7 Unbound Scalable FontS 0 000 c eee 9 8 Bound and Unbound Fonts 0 00 c eee eee 9 8 Font Selection and Unbound Fonts
183. CALE 2 IN 0 10 IN Figure 4 6 Cursor Moves at Different Unit of Measure Settings The printer s physical dot size has no direct bearing on the size of PCL Units used in cursor movements In addition PCL Units are not affected by the current control panel or PJL resolution setting Note If no other unit of measure value has been specified then the default is one Unit equals 1 300 inch In this case a cursor movement of 450 Units moves the cursor 1 5 inches whether printed at 300 or 600 dpi print resolution EN Unit of Measure Command 4 15 4 16 PCL Job Control Commands EN Page Control Commands Introduction Page control commands and data are associated with each printed page of a job These commands determine such features as page source size orientation margins and text spacing This chapter describes the commands providing page format control Note If a number of consecutive pages within a job have the same format the associated page control commands should be sent only once for that group of pages Remember once a PCL command is set it remains in effect until changed by another command EN Introduction 5 1 Page Size Command The Page Size command designates the size of the paper which in turn defines the size of the logical page ECR LHA PAPER 1 Executive 71 x 10 in 2 Letter 8 x 11 in 3 Legal 81 x 14 in 6 Ledger 11 x 17 in 26 A4 210mm x 297mm 27 A3 297mm x 420mm
184. Character Group LB Label SA Select Alternate Font SD Standard Font Definition SS Select Standard Font 23 58 The Character Group EN LB Label EN Table 23 31 E c E c6F Font Control Copy Assign Eo X Designate Font as Primary E A HX Designate Font as Secondary c D Font ID assign PCL Commands This command prints text using the currently defined font Use LB to annotate drawings or create text only charts LB text text label terminator Parameter Format Functional Range Default text text character any character s no default The LB command includes an automatic pen down function When the command is completed the original pen up down status is restored text text ASCII characters are drawn using the currently selected font Refer to AD SA SD and SS commands for details on specifying and selecting fonts You can include non printing characters such as the Carriage Return CR decimal code 13 and Line Feed LF decimal code 10 These characters invoke the specified function but are not drawn Refer to Appendixes A and B of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for a list of ASCII characters The label begins at the current pen location unless altered by LO After each character is drawn the pen location is updated to be the next character origin Refer to Working With the Character Cell earlier in the chapter LB Label
185. D code Next use the Define Symbol Set command to download the list of characters character codes and related symbol index numbers for the symbol set Once this is accomplished you may select the symbol set for printing in the same manner as any symbol set using the symbol set selection sequence E D Once a user defined symbol set is downloaded the Symbol Set Control command can be used to assign symbol sets as either temporary or permanent and to delete them Introduction 10 1 Symbol Set ID Code Command The Symbol Set ID Code command assigns a symbol set ID code to a user defined symbol set This ID code is used by the Symbol Set Control command for symbol set management The ID code corresponds to the symbol set ID selection value which is used to identify the symbol set during font selection Eo c R Symbol Set ID Code decimal Default 0 Range 0 32 767 larger values are outside the legal range When downloading a symbol set the symbol set ID value must match the Encoded Symbol Set Designator field in the user defined symbol set header As mentioned above the symbol set ID code is related to a symbol set ID value The relationship between the ID code and the symbol set ID selection value is shown by the following formula Symbol Set ID code 32 ID 64 where represents the number portion of the ID selection value which may range from 0 1023 and ID represents the ordinal decimal
186. DUM orto increase or decrease space between every line of text such as double spacing 23 8 The Character Group EN Note EN You can use the Character Plot CP command to move the pen a specific number of lines or spaces character cells from the current pen location Use the CP command for example to indent a label a certain number of spaces Label Orientation and Placement You can place your labels anywhere on the page in any orientation The Absolute Direction DI command specifies the angle at which you want to print the characters independent of the location of P1 and P2 The Relative Direction DR command specifies the angle at which you want to print the characters as a function of the P1 and P2 distance thus when you change P1 and P2 the label angle changes to maintain the same orientation The DI and DR commands allow you to print text at any angle with the letters in their normal side by side orientation XNOILIUSYIC g Sa NOITLIJAHIA DIRECTION DIRECTIONx Figure 23 2 Label Orientation and Direction Bit map characters are always printed orthogonally to the page refer to Figure 23 17 Scalable characters print in the direction specified Enhancing Labels 23 9 The Define Variable Text Path DV command allows you to specify the text path right left up or down and the direction of Line Feeds with respect to the text path P U TFEL RIGHT D 0 W N Figure 23 3 Define V
187. Data Offset 8 Character Intellifont Data Offset 10 Contour Tree Offset 12 XY Data Offset 14 Metric Data Character Intellifont Data 11 60 Soft Font Creation EN Table 11 41 Intellifont Scalable Contour Data Format Contour Tree Data XY Coordinate Data Table 11 42 Intellifont Scalable Character Descriptors Data Continuation Block Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 2 Format 10 in bytes see Table 11 41 1 Continuation 1 Contour Character Data resumed 2 Reserved Checksum 1 Continuation is supported for Intellifont scalable fonts for class 3 only 2 This byte appears only on the last continuation Table 11 43 Intellifont Scalable Compound Character Descriptor and Data Format Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Format 10 Continuation 0 2 Descriptor Size Class 4 4 Compound Character Escapement Component List see Table 11 46 for Com Number of Components ponent List Data 2 Reserved Checksum EN Character Descriptor Formats 11 61 Format UB This is the first byte of every character data block header It specifies the format of the character descriptor and data The format number for Intellifont scalable fonts is 10 Table 11 44 Value Format 4 LaserJet Family Raster 10 Intellifont Scalable 15 TrueType Scalable Thes
188. E Reset IN or DF commands Note For more information on the transparency mode see the discussion of the Source Transparency Mode in Chapter 13 The PCL Print Model EN TR Transparency Mode 22 43 UL User Defined Line Type This command creates line types by specifying gap patterns which define the lengths of spaces and lines comprising a line type UL index gap7 gap20 or UL Parameter Format Functional Range Default index clamped 1 through 8 integer gaps clamped 0 to 32767 default line real types The UL command allows you to define and store your own line types The command does not itself select a line type Use the LT command to select the line type once you have defined it with UL No Parameters Defaults all line types refer to the LT command Index Identifies the number of the line type to be redefined Specifying an index number without gap parameters sets the line type identified by the index to the default pattern for that number The index number may not be 0 e The index parameter uses absolute values so UL n is the same as ULn Redefining a standard fixed line type automatically redefines the corresponding adaptive line type Gaps Specify alternate pen down and pen up stretches in the line type pattern if gaps are numbered starting with 1 odd numbered gaps are pen down moves even numbered gaps are pen up moves The first gap is a pen down
189. Equivalent to CFO 0 23 20 The Character Group EN Note EN Fill mode Specifies how the printer renders filled characters according to the following parameter values 0 Specifies solid fill using the current pen and edging with the specified pen or current pen if the edge pen parameter is not specified 1 Specifies edging with the specified pen or current pen if the edge pen parameter is not specified Characters are filled only if they cannot be edged bitmap or stick characters using the edge pen 2 Specifies filled characters using the current fill type refer to the FT command in Chapter 20 The Line and Fill Characteristics Group The currently selected pen is used Characters are not edged If the edge pen parameter is specified it is ignored 3 Specifies filled characters using the current fill type refer to the FT command in Chapter 20 The Line and Fill Characteristics Group The currently selected pen is used Characters are edged with the specified pen or current pen if the edge pen parameter is not specified Edge pen For characters that are to be edged this parameter indicates the pen that is used to edge the character black or white O No edging 1 Black edging The outline pen width is not selectable but varies in thickness in proportion to the point size of the font Note that the Absolute Direction DI and Relative Direction DR commands do not cause rotation of fill pat
190. F Default Values The Configuration Status Group IN Initialize AA Arc Absolute The Vector Group AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up RT Relative Arc Three Point PM1 PM2 Polygon Mode The Polygon Group The polygon buffer stores the lines vectors that define your polygon These vectors are accessed later when you exit polygon mode and fill and or edge the polygon While in polygon mode the Cl command is interpreted differently than other graphics commands Refer to Drawing Circles in Polygon Mode earlier in this chapter for more details When you define a polygon the pen location before the PMO command is the first point vertex of the polygon and the first point stored in the polygon buffer For example if you execute the PM Polygon Mode Command 21 35 commands PAO 1750 PMO the absolute coordinates 0 1750 specify the first point of your polygon Each subsequent pair of coordinates defines a point or vertex of the polygon You can define points with the pen up or down However the EP command only draws between points that are defined when the pen is down On the other hand the FP command fills the area s between all vertices regardless of whether the pen is up or down when defined It is good programming practice to close the polygon b
191. Figure 22 3 Fill Types When you use HP GL 2 hatching or cross hatch fill types the lines are drawn using the currently selected line width type and attributes For example if you have selected a dashed line type and a hatched fill type your figure is filled with dashed parallel lines All fill types have an anchor corner the starting point of the fill pattern Its default location is in the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame Conceptually the fill type replicates out from the anchor corner in the plus X directions and plus Y directions as shown in the following illustration Figures are filled by that portion of the fill type resident to the area refer to rectangles 1 and 2 22 4 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EEE EEEL Ae N Anchor corner 7 Figure 22 4 Fill Area Anchor Corner Use the AC Anchor Corner command to position the fill type in relation to the figure Rectangle 3 has an anchor corner set in its the lower left corner Rectangle 4 has an anchor corner set below the lower left corner to alter the pattern s position and give contrast to the adjacent figure Selecting a Pen and Changing Line Width EN Even though the printer does not print with a physical pen as a plotter does the printer uses a logical pen which emulates the action of a physical pen You must use the SP1 Select Pen command to draw black lines on the paper You can change the width of the logical p
192. Files for more information EN Coordinate System 11 5 Font Header Command The Font Header command is used to download font header data to the printer Default Range Bs s W font header data 0 0 32767 The value field identifies the number of bytes in the font header The font header fields are described under Font Header Format later in this chapter Note Two examples for downloading a Font Header are provided under Font Header Examples after the Font Header Format section later in this chapter Font Header Format The font header describes those characteristics of a font which are common to all its characters Five font headers are included here Format 0 Font Header for PCL Bitmapped Fonts This font header shown in Table 11 2 is not recommended for LaserJet 4 and later printers It is included in this manual to maintain backward compatibility with earlier versions of PCL Format 20 Font Header for Resolution Specified Bitmapped Fonts This header replaces the previous bitmap header and has the added capability to specify a font s resolution This font header is shown in Table 11 3 Format 10 Font Header for Intellifont Bound Scalable Fonts For creating Intellifont scalable fonts which are restricted bound to a single symbol set This font header is shown in Format 11 Font Header for Intellifont Unbound Scalable Fonts For creating Intellifont scalable fonts which are not bound to a single s
193. Font Header header includes a 64 bit field bytes 78 85 which contains the Character Complement number For TrueType fonts in the Format 15 Font Header for Scalable Fonts unbound the Character Complement number is included in the accompanying Segmented Font Data section of the header The Character Complement number identifies the symbol collections in the font Each bit in this field corresponds to a symbol collection not all bits are currently defined refer to Appendix D in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Intellifont example If bits 63 and 34 are cleared set to zero it indicates that the unbound font contains the Basic Latin bit 63 and Math bit 34 symbol collections and that the character index is in HP s MSL numbers bit 0 TrueType example If bits 31 30 and 0 are cleared set to zero it indicates that the unbound font contains ASCII Latin 1 extensions and is based on Unicode numbers Character Requirements Number The other number the printer uses to determine symbol set compatibility the Character Requirements number is provided as part of the information contained in the symbol set The Character Requirements number is a 64 bit number analogous to the Character Complement number however it identifies the symbol collections needed by the symbol set Intellifont example If a symbol set based on HP s MSL numbers requires one or more characters from the standard Latin collection and some of the
194. Group EN EN Table 19 15 Example The IW Command continued SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SI 2 35 Set Absolute Character Size to 2 x 35 cm PA2000 3200 Specify absolute plotting and move to location 2000 3200 plotter units DT 1 Define label terminator to be the character without printing the character LBTHIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF IW IW3000 1300 4500 3700 Print a label beginning at 2000 3200 The label on the left is shown on two lines with a Carriage Return in the middle of the text for convenience in this example In an actual command sequence this label text should be all on one line to print as shown in the plot at the end of this example Specify a soft clip window in plotter units PD2000 1700 Pen Down print a line from the current pen position to 2000 1700 Current pen position at start of command is at the letter W baseline LBTHIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF IW Print the same label at 2000 1700 This label should not contain carriage returns to print as shown in the plot for this example PU3000 1300 Pen Up and move to position 3000 1300 PD4500 1300 4500 3700 PD3000 3700 3000 1300 Pen Down and begin drawing box indicating the soft clip window Finish drawing the soft clip window box PU Pen Up EG 0A EVE Enter PCL M
195. I and DR commands see Figure 23 17 Stick and Arc fonts Characters are drawn as a series of vectors The characters are defined as a set of endpoints You can resize using SI or SR rotate using DI and DR and distort using SL Stick fonts Stick fonts are defined on a dimensionless grid The main body of each character fits within a 32 by 32 unit box with descenders extending beneath The Stick font is fixed spaced and the Arc font is proportional Printing with Fixed Spaced and Proportional Fonts Proportional fonts by definition use different amounts of horizontal space for each letter This variation produces some differences in the definition of the character cell and in the way some of the labeling commands work with these fonts These differences are described in this section EN Using Fonts 23 15 Figure 23 8 and Figure 23 9 show the difference between fixed spaced and proportional fonts CP cells 1 Space Width of Space Control Code 1 linefeed Uppercase character height Character Character origin width fixed Subsequent character origins Figure 23 8 Fixed Spaced Font With proportional fonts the actual space occupied by each character varies according to the character s width Figure 23 9 CP cells 1 space is variable 1 linefeed Uppercase character height Character Character origin width varies Subsequent character origins Figure 23 9 Proportional Font 23 16 The
196. L 2 command sequence DF Default Sets most programmable HP GL 2 features to their default conditions IN Initialize Sets all programmable HP GL 2 features to their default conditions IP Input P1 and P2 Establishes new or default locations for the scaling points P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 Establishes P1 and P2 locations as a percentage of the PCL Picture Frame IW Input Window Sets up a window soft clip limits PG Advance Full Page This command is ignored RO Rotate Coordinate Rotates the HP GL 2 coordinate system System RP Replot This command is ignored SC Scale Establishes a user unit coordinate system 1 These commands useful in plotter applications are not the optimal solution for PCL 5 printers Other PCL commands perform similar functions see the Number of Copies and Form Feed command descriptions 19 2 The Configuration and Status Group EN Establishing Default Conditions Note EN Whether you are using HP GL 2 mode or strictly the PCL printer language mode you should establish default conditions at the beginning of each print job to prevent unexpected results due to leftover command parameters from a previous job From within HP GL 2 mode there are two ways to establish default conditions using the Initialize IN command or using the Default DF command Using the IN command sets the printer to its user selected defaults
197. L mode 7E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page P2 2500 3500 PA Figure 21 5 The following example uses different fill types with wedges and circles Table 21 6 Example Filling Wedges and Circles E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black PA1400 2500 Select absolute plotting mode and move to 1400 2500 WG600 150 120 Fill a wedge with radius 600 plu a start angle of 150 and a sweep angle of 120 Since no fill type was specified the wedge is black solid black is the default fill type 21 8 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 6 Example Filling Wedges and Circles continued PA2300 2500 FT3 75 45 Specify absolute plotting and move to 2300 2500 Select fill type number 3 hatching parallel lines with 75 plu between hatching lines and hatching lines tilted at 45 WG600 90 180 FT1 0 0 WG600 270 60 Fill a wedge with the current fill type use a radius of 600 plu a start angle of 90 and a sweep angle of 180 Specify a fill type of solid black and fill a wedge using the same center and radius as the previous wedge Start the wedge at 270 with a sweep of 60 FT4 60 45 WG600 330 120 Specify fill tyoe number 4 cross hatching with 60 plu between lines and the lines tilted at 45 Fill a wedge using the same center and radius as the previous two wedges Sta
198. L mode with HP GL 2 s pen position being inherited as PCLs CAP 600 600 E e300a4b0P Draw a horizontal line rule that is 300 PCL units wide by 4 PCL units Note that the cursor position after a rule is printed is at the beginning of the rule in this case 600 600 19 16 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 5 Example Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System in Portrait Orientation E4 1BPU PR300 0 PD PRO 500 Enter HP GL 2 mode inheriting PCLs CAP and lift the pen move to a point 300 user units dots to the right place the pen down and print a line 500 user units down EBM 1A EOE Enter the PCL mode with the CAP at the current HP GL 2 pen position Reset the printer to end the job and eject a page Physical Page Border Logical Page Border 600 600 Pa PCL 300 300 900 600 900 1100 P2 Figure 19 7 Adapting the HP GL 2 coordinate system to match the PCL system in portrait orientation EN Using Scaling Effectively 19 17 Windowing Setting Up Soft Clip Limits Soft clip limits temporarily restrict pen movement to a rectangular area or window When you initialize or set the printer to default conditions the soft clip limits are the same as the PCL Picture Frame limits To create a window you use the Input Window IW command The printer does not draw outside the window The followin
199. LaserJet IID printer and the Typeface Most Significant Byte MSB in the font header The previous typeface family value field is shown below It included a 4 bit field to specify the vendor number a 2 bit field for the version number and a 9 bit field which contained the typeface base number The most significant bit of the MSB was always zero Table 11 17 Typeface Family Value Previous 15 14 10 8 0 0 Vendor Version Typeface Base Value Table 11 18 Previous Vendor Number Values Value Vendor 0 1 Reserved 2 Agfa Division Miles Inc 4 Bitstream Inc 6 Linotype Company 8 The Monotype Corporation plc 10 Adobe Systems Inc 3 5 7 9 11 15 Reserved Vendor Version The Vendor version bits 10 and 9 value was from 0 to 3 It changed when the vendor changed the width or design of the characters in a font 11 26 Soft Font Creation EN Note EN Typeface Base ValueThe Typeface Base Number bits 0 through 8 ranged from 0 to 511 Some of these values referred to the styles that vary by structure and appearance width such as Helvetica Condensed Helvetica Outline etc Do not use these values in new designs since they are being deleted Refer to Appendix C in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for a list of typeface families and their typeface base values For future compatibility use the two byte typeface MSB LSB typeface family value All scalable fonts use the larger typeface f
200. Letter Gothic the maximum recommended pitch is 36 When requested pitch values are outside of HP s recommended limits unsatisfactory results can occur 8 10 PCL Font Selection EN Note EN The following formula can be used to as a rule of thumb for computing a maximum recommended pitch otal pace X 4 points 72 points inch The character contour width in the above formula is expressed as a percentage of an Em For example the width of characters in Courier is very close to 60 of an Em and 30 1 0 64 72 The width of characters in Letter Gothic is approximately 50 of an Em For other fonts refer to the font metric data supplied by the font vendor If a scalable fixed space font is selected using an ID number send the Pitch command to specify the size otherwise the size is determined by the pitch characteristic value of the former font as listed in the font select table See Font Selection by ID Command later in this chapter for more information Example To specify 10 pitch for the primary font send E s10H To specify 16 66 pitch for the secondary font send E s16 66H Pitch Command 8 11 Height Command The Height command specifies the height of the font in points This characteristic is ignored when selecting a fixed spaced scalable font however the value is saved and available when a bitmap font or a proportionally spaced scalable font is selected Ea s V Primary Height Ec s V S
201. Location Mnemonic Command Name AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BZ Bezier Absolute BR Bezier Relative DF Default Values DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction Printing Labels 23 5 Table 23 3 Commands Updating Carriage Return Point to Current Location continued DV Define Variable Text Path IN Initialize LO Label Origin PA Plot Absolute PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative RO Rotate Coordinate System RT Relative Arc Three Point 1 APD or PU command with parameters also updates the Carriage Return point The CP command with a nonzero lines parameter updates the Carriage Return point s vertical location The Label LB command does not update the Carriage Return point to the current pen location but continues labeling from the current pen location This feature allows you to issue several label commands that write one long label and still use a Carriage Return to get to the beginning of the entire label Control Codes You can effectively use the following control characters in labels All other control codes are ignored Table 23 4 Commands Updating Carriage Return Point to Current Location Control Code DecimalCode Backspace 8 Horizontal tab 9 Line feed 10 Carriage return 13 Shift Out 14 23 6 The Character Group EN Table 23 4 Commands Updating Carriage
202. NONE 16 20 Flush All Pages command 16 24 font extended 16 10 font status 16 10 Free Space command 16 21 IDLIST 16 16 16 17 16 18 inquire entity command 16 10 LARGEST 16 22 location type 16 3 location unit 16 3 LOCTYPE 16 14 16 17 LOCUNIT 16 14 16 17 macro status 16 10 memory 16 2 memory response 16 22 NAME 16 16 response 16 5 response buffer 16 5 response syntax 16 6 response font 16 11 response font extended 16 15 response macro 16 16 response symbol set 16 18 response user defined pattern 16 17 scalable fonts 16 12 SELECT 16 11 Set Status Readback Location Type command 16 8 Set Status Readback Location Unit command 16 9 soft fonts 16 13 symbol set status 16 10 SYMBOLSETS 16 13 TOTAL 16 22 unbound scalable fonts 16 13 user identification 16 25 user defined pattern status 16 10 status readback error internal 16 19 Stick font 23 74 Stick Arc fonts 23 15 stroke weight 7 6 defined Glossary 13 font header 11 23 Font Selection command 8 16 HP GL 2 23 71 in font selection 8 24 table 8 16 style Glossary 13 defining characteristics 7 6 font 7 6 font header 11 23 font selection command 8 14 fonts pictured 8 15 in font selection 8 24 italic pictured 7 6 MSB font header 11 16 upright pictured 7 6 values table 8 14 style word 11 16 subpolygons 21 11 summaries chapter vi support HP customer assistance Customer Support 1 SV command 22 39 sweep angle 21 6 in wedges 21 28 symbol collection 9 9
203. NS orraa eee eed ded es we eelgan dated dee heen bod bon 6 4 Columns amp ROWS 6 pameni iait inaa na n ea 6 4 Horizontal Cursor Positioning Columns Command saasaa asasan 6 5 Horizontal Cursor Positioning Decipoints Command _ 6 6 Horizontal Cursor Positioning PCL Units Command 6 7 Horizontal Cursor Positioning Control Codes 0 0200 eee 6 8 CR Carriage Return 2 ee 6 8 SP SPaCe asic eea oe Peewee gap eany dere ed ea See eae Pee E oe 6 8 BS Backspace s4 cnr nn daa eee edad ei wh oad dee bea ee eked bak 6 9 HT Horizontal Tab ccs drasa ee eee Se eee Ake he wad BY ew ee 6 9 Vertical Cursor Positioning Rows Command 000 00e 6 10 Vertical Cursor Positioning Decipoints Command 40 6 11 Vertical Cursor Positioning PCL Units Command _ 2 45 6 12 Half Line Feed Command 6 ee 6 13 Vertical Cursor Positioning Control Codes 0 0c eee 6 13 LF Line Feed 24 2232 creeks o whee oak Be wee Oe ee 6 13 FF F rm Feed iwi ana ce wer es bea dan a ee ee ae daa s 6 13 Line Termination Command 00 00 cece eee tees 6 14 Push Pop Cursor Position Command 0000 cee eee eee 6 15 Fonts FONUSOUICES iiei iritare dtaa Ge Sheba ae Adee ta eee ead eee 7 2 SYMDOl Set sksins eiA E Pewee eee Se Pe sR ee eee ed ee eae e eee ed 7 3 SPACING sas assaka lies eee eee esas oe eae eee ee eee 7 4 Pithi sfaceieos be
204. P LaserJet printers Not all of the features are applicable to every printer To identify variations and default settings for specific printers refer to Chapter 3 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Introduction 3 1 Factory Default Environment Note A factory default is a feature setting programmed into the printer at the factory The group of all of the printer s feature settings set to their factory settings is referred to as the Factory Default Environment These features are described in this manual Since the HP GL 2 features are used for HP GL 2 operation only the print environment features are separated for convenience into two lists or contexts PCL and HP GL 2 Table 3 1 lists typical PCL print environment features and Table 3 2 lists typical HP GL 2 print environment features he factory default settings for the printer features are not shown here since they differ depending on the printer model To identify variations and default settings for specific printers refer to Chapter 3 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Table 3 1 Factory Default Print Environment Features PCL Context JOB CONTROL FONTS Number of Copies Symbol Set Duplex Spacing Binding 3 Pitch Registration Height Tray Style Manual Feed Stroke Weight User defined Units Typeface Underlining Mode 1 The font characteristics are determined by the default font The default font can be the factory default font or the u
205. Position The PCL cursor position refers to the Current Active Position CAP like the blinking underline character cursor used on most computers This cursor identifies the current position on the page the pointer where a printing command begins laying out page data The cursor can be moved anywhere within the logical page using a combination of horizontal and vertical cursor positioning commands and control codes see Chapter 6 Cursor Positioning Glossary 1 Glossary 2 Centronics I O An industry standard parallel input output I O interface Also see Parallel I O Character Descriptor The character descriptor is a block of data that identifies the characteristics for a specific character such as its position and the cursor position after printing The character data which follows defines the shape of the character Chapter 11 describes the character definition and descriptor formats for PCL bitmap fonts as well as Intellifont and TrueType scalable fonts Column The width of a column is defined by the current Horizontal Motion Index HMI Compression raster graphics Raster graphics compression methods reduce the amount of code needed to generate a raster graphic image and improve the efficiency with which the image is printed The Set Compression Method command allows you to code raster data in one of four compressed formats Run length encoding tagged imaged file format TIFF rev 4 0 delta row co
206. Print Environment Introduction The group of all of the printer s current feature settings collectively is referred to as the print environment The printer maintains four print environments the Factory Default Environment the User Default Environment the Modified Print Environment and the Overlay Environment This chapter describes the Factory Default Environment the User Default Environment and the Modified Print Environment the Overlay Environment is described in Chapter 12 Macros Default settings refer to the settings programmed into the printer at the factory or settings selected using the control panel The term default simply refers to the settings the printer uses unless printer commands select other settings Each time a job is printed some of the printer s feature settings may be changed from their default values to produce the desired printed output for that job After the job prints the job specific feature settings are longer be required since the next job is likely to have different output requirements The next job should clear all previous job settings by performing a reset This allows a job to start with the default settings as a known base set and vary only those settings that are needed Starting with the default environment at the beginning of each print job eliminates the need to set every feature each time a job is run The print environment features presented in this chapter are for a variety of H
207. RE ee SORE ERAS 17 20 Wser unitS lt iaaseeebaans ee NI ESES PAIE EPEIROSE 17 20 Pen Status and Location a anaa aaan aea 17 21 Pen Status ox gect riesaa d mie EERE AAE Sake wiry sad AAO E A E 17 21 Pen Location s rrss cridaras TAA AAEE add eS Se EEEE nS 17 23 SCdING eege hed vee PEASE ee eee Be a Aaa E D AnA a 17 24 Absolute and Relative Pen Movement anann a nanana 17 25 The Picture Frame Defining the Image Area PCL Picture Frame 000000 eee 18 2 Automatically Adjusting Image Size to Fit the PCL Picture Frame 18 3 Creating a Page Size Independent Plot 0 00 00s 18 3 Typical HP GL 2 PlotCommand Sequence 00 cee eens 18 5 Horizontal Picture Frame Size 0 0 0 00 ee 18 8 ExXampl 2s2 2 sda 09 Ye wiidd is ot EE a a EEA E ange 2 18 9 Vertical Picture Frame Size Decipoints 0 0000 c eee eee 18 9 Example To specify a vertical picture frame size of 6 5 inches send 18 9 Set Picture Frame Anchor Point 00 00 cee ee 18 10 Example vied vas doe non eae aa als ba winger ta a ee 18 10 HP GL 2 Plot Horizontal Size 0 ee 18 11 Example ananunua aana 18 11 HP GL 2 Plot Vertical Size 1 eee 18 12 gt 2 105 s pame a ean ee ee 18 12 Enter HP GL 2 Mode 0 00 ccc eee 18 13 EX MDpIG 2 cv2cstcereeiaand peo usao Tee kode eee EY Cee ee ee 18 13 Enter PGL M0d6 isc2 sis cc mdb bade gonad EEE ba dhe awrea er eee baad 18 14 Exam
208. SD Stick Font 11 5 pt 9 cpi Definition upright medium Absolute Character Sl Turns off size Size transformation Character Slant SL No slant Symbol Mode SM Turns off symbol mode Select Standard Font SS Standard font selected 19 20 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 7 Default Conditions continued Transparency Mode TR1 Transparency mode on Transparent Data TD Normal printing mode User Defined Line UL Defaults all 8 line types Type In addition the printer updates the Carriage Return point for labeling to the current pen location See Chapter 23 The Character Group for more information on the Carriage Return point The DF command does not affect the following HP GL 2 conditions Locations of P1 and P2 Current pen its location width width unit selection and up down position HP GL 2 drawing rotation Table 19 8 Related commands Related Commands Group IN Initialize The Configuration Status Group IN Initialize Notes EN This command resets all programmable HP GL 2 functions to their default settings Use the IN command to return the printer to a known HP GL 2 state and to cancel settings that may have been changed by a previous command sequence The EOE Reset issues an automatic IN command IN 7 In this manual all command sequence examples begin with IN to clear unwanted conditions from the previous command sequence e
209. SP1 Select pen number 1 black SC 75 75 75 75 1 Set up user scaling with 75 75 as P1 and 75 75 as P2 the 1 parameter specifies isotropic scaling PAO 0 Specify absolute plotting and move to user unit location 0 0 LT CI5 Specify a default line type solid and draw a circle with a radius of 5 user units LTO Cl 12 Select line type 0 dotted and draw a circle with a radius of 12 user units the minus sign indicates starting at the 180 point LT1 C119 LT2 Cl 26 Select line type 1 and draw a circle with a radius of 19 user units Then select line type 2 and draw a circle with a radius of 26 user units LT3 C133 LT4 Cl 40 Select line type 3 draw a circle with a radius of 33 user units Then select line type 4 and draw a circle with radius of 40 user units LT5 C147 LT6 C154 Draw the outer two circles the first with a line type of 5 and a radius of 47 user units the second with a line type of 6 and a radius of 54 user units EQ OA Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 20 28 The Vector Group EN EN Current pen location starting point 4200 2900 Figure 20 17 Table 20 18 Sh AN 4600 2500 Related Commands Group EW Edge Wedge WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group SC Scale The Configuration Status Group AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc T
210. Space command status readback 16 21 FT command 22 9 G gaps in user defined line types 22 44 GI Global Intellifont Data 11 35 11 41 global italic angle font header 11 35 glyph ID TrueType 11 69 glyphs TrueType downloading 11 49 graphic patterns 13 8 14 5 graphics cross hatch patterns 14 1 14 8 errors 24 15 limits HP GL 2 17 19 19 12 patterns 14 1 raster 15 1 resolution 14 2 shading 14 1 14 6 special effects 13 1 transparency mode 13 1 user defined patterns 13 13 vector Glossary 15 group character PCL command 1 6 GT Global TrueType Data 11 41 H Half Line Feed 6 13 Half Line Feed command 6 13 hard clip limits 17 19 hatching patterns 22 9 header font 11 6 user defined symbol set 10 4 Header Size field user defined symbol set 10 5 height defined Glossary 5 character descriptor 11 57 extended font header 11 31 font header 11 22 11 23 font selection 8 24 pixels user defined pattern descriptor 13 18 Height command font selection 8 12 help customer support Customer Support 1 HMI Horizontal Motion Index 6 3 Glossary 6 command 5 20 defining column width 2 5 hints 24 4 HMI command 5 20 setting affected by unit of measure 4 13 horizontal character spacing 7 5 horizontal cursor positioning columns command 6 4 decipoints command 6 6 PCL Units command 6 6 control codes 6 7 horizontal escapement 23 16 Horizontal Picture Frame Size command decipoints 18 8 horizontal rectangle size deci
211. Symbol Mode The Line and Fill Attributes Group Whenever the printer receives a Pen Down command it produces a dot at the current pen location If the pen is already down when the printer receives a command with an automatic Pen Down the unnecessary dot can mar your final output For best results include a Pen Up PU command before any command with an automatic Pen Down Only the portion of the pen falling within the effective window is printed The pen is centered on a line between the beginning and end points with half of the pen width falling on either side of this line The definition of each command tells you whether it has an automatic pen down If you find that part of your image is not drawn make sure your command sequence uses the PD command before the affected commands 17 22 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN EN Pen Location Pen location refers to the X Y coordinates of the current active position CAP the point at which the next HP GL 2 command begins Most commands when completed update the pen location The next command then begins at that location Some commands do not update the current pen location The definition of each command tells you whether the current pen location is updated or restored Use the Pen Up PU command with the desired X Y coordinates to lift the pen and move it to a new location The Default Values DF command does not reset the current pen location the Ini
212. T Line Type This command specifies the line pattern to be used when drawing lines Use LT to vary lines and enhance your plot Note that the ends of dashed line segments in a line pattern are affected by current line attributes refer to the LA command earlier in this chapter LT ine typef pattern length mode or LT 7 or LT99 Functional Parameter Format Range Default line type clamped integer 8 to 8 solid line 99 restores previous line type pattern length clamped real gt 0 4 of the distance between P1 and P2 mode clamped integer 0 or 1 0 relative The LT command applies to lines drawn by the AA AR AT Cl EA EP ER EW FP PA PD PE PR RA RR RT and WG commands Line types are drawn using the current line attributes set by the Line Attribute LA command For example if you have used LA to specify rounded ends the printer draws each dash in a dashed line pattern with rounded ends e No Parameters Defaults the line type to solid and saves the previous line type pattern length and any unused portion of the pattern residue e Line Type Subsequent lines are drawn with the corresponding line pattern Line patterns can be of fixed or adaptive type 22 22 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN e Positive line types 1 8 are fixed line types and use the specified pattern length to draw lines Any unused part of the pattern the residue is carried over into the nex
213. TC Tiffany is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation Futura is a U S registered trademark of Fundicion Tipografica Neufville S A Serifa is a trademark of Fundicion Tipografica Neufville S A Letraset is a registered trademark of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation Revue and University Roman are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation Helvetica and Times Roman are trademarks of Linotype AG and its subsidiaries Univers is a U S registered trademark of Linotype AG and its subsidiaries Antique Olive is a trademark of Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Arial and Gill Sans are registered trademarks of The Monotype Corporation plc Inside This Manual EN What You Can Learn From This Manual Hewlett Packard has developed a standard set of printer features for use in all HP printers Printer features are accessed through the corresponding commands of Hewlett Packard s PCL language This manual describes the PCL 5 printer language This includes descriptions of the commands available for Hewlett Packard PCL 5 LaserJet printers and the basic requirements of PCL language programming With the release of new LaserJet family printers there are new features added which supplement the existing PCL base set Features of future printer releases are not covered in this document The new features are described in the latest version of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Programmers should familiarize themselves with the information provided in the PCL 5 Comparison
214. Transparency mode described in Chapter 13 controls how the area fill pattern is applied to the page Refer to the following section for a description of how transparency mode affects the rectangular fill area A white fill erases any data placed within the rectangular area prior to receipt of the white fill regardless of the transparency mode settings Data placed in a previously erased area is visible 14 10 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics EN Pattern Transparency for Rectangular Area Fill Note EN Pattern transparency described in Chapter 13 under Pattern Transparency Mode Command affects how a pattern is applied to the rectangular fill area Rectangular areas are special case images for transparency mode The pattern and pattern type are selected by the Pattern ID command Ec c G and the Fill Rectangular Area Ec cHP command described earlier in this chapter Source transparency has no effect on the rectangular fill area since the rectangular area is viewed as all 1 s solid black source image When applying a pattern area fill to the rectangular area the usual transparency mode settings apply The pattern transparency mode determines the effect white pixels of the pattern have on the destination for value fields 0 black fill 2 shaded fill 3 cross hatch fill or 5 current pattern fill of the Fill Rectangular Area command The 0 bits of the area fill are either applied opaque or ignor
215. UI aar cceeatarde desde eet ease cee ee PP ne Re Eee me 11 18 Cell Height Ul 2 0 cc tees 11 18 Orientation UB sisas ee 11 19 Spacing B ser venice eee neieee set Kee eee Eee eee eek Dees 11 20 Symbol Set Ul wk eee 11 20 Pitch UI sseanaeteed teasa nys airaa aina a E A ete eee ax 11 21 Height UD vane d ae neve hewn tanada ne eben ee Dees a eo em 11 22 XHeight U cee eee eee Ge oe eee Eaa 11 22 Width Type SB airspeed ce eeata ered and peewee ee eda es 11 23 Style LSB UB 245284 piaga kanra ered PAN ERTE de ERE baa 11 23 Stroke Weight SB 0 000 eee 11 23 Typeface UB iw tte 11 24 Serf Style UB or seed o24 beens aa even oian ikenen de ema aE 11 27 Quality UB veecee ee ee iow ede oe wi See Ea ee oe oe Cee eS 11 28 Placement SB nanunua 00 cece eee 11 28 EN Contents 5 Underline Position Distance SB 0000 cece eee eee 11 29 Underline Thickness UB 0 0000 cece eee eee 11 29 Text Height Ul 2 eae 11 29 Text Width Ul 244 5 c00ceked ded aokee baad boo Sede ee eae 11 29 First Code WI wessekeh asar eek peak atake ced Ske Oe ehh ee ee 11 30 Last Code Number of Characters Ul 0000 00 eeeaee 11 30 Pitch Extended UB 0 0000 cee eee 11 30 Height Extended UB 00000 e cee 11 31 Cap Height UI 22 2cceorncce de edb eeeee areca Pee tar be Geen 11 31 Font Number ULI 0000 000 cee eee 11 32 Font Name ASC16 ww tee 11 33
216. Use SL to create slanted text for emphasis or to re establish upright labeling after an SL command with parameters has been in effect Note that the SL command has no effect when an SB1 command is in effect SL tangent of angle or SL Table 23 48 Parameter Format Functional Range Default tangent of angle clamped real 32768 to 32767 0 The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameter Defaults the slant to zero no slant Equivalent to SLO e Tangent of Angle Interpreted as an angle from vertical The base of the character always stays on the horizontal as shown in the following illustration H g y Positive Slant Figure 23 38 Character Slant 23 78 The Character Group Negative Slant EN Note EN The SL command only affects each character relative to an imaginary line beside the label The direction or placement of the label on the drawing does not affect the SL command neither do the settings of P1 and P2 The DI and DR commands however do affect the slant direction since the base of a character always stays on the baseline of the label You can specify the actual tangent value or you can use the TAN function available in most computer languages An SL command remains in effect until another SL command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Example Using the SL Command The following example illustrates the
217. Vendor Format Font Number 7 bit ASCII Value 92505 Decimal 43H Byte 44 Byte 45 Byte 46 Byte 47 4 3 Hex L L69 59 Hex 01H 69H 59H Figure 11 4 This field is ignored by the printer for bitmap fonts Font Name ASC16 This is a 16 character ASCII field to which you may assign a font name The font name is used in the Typeface List or Font List printout under Name or Typeface if the printer does not have a name string assigned to the typeface family code in its font selection table X Resolution Ul The X Resolution field is the pixel resolution in the X scan direction at which the font was designed Note This field is not present in the Format 15 Font Header and is not necessary for TrueType fonts EN Font Header Format 11 33 Y Resolution Ul The Y Resolution field is the pixel resolution in the Y scan direction at which the font was designed Note This field is not present in the Format 15 Font Header and is not necessary for TrueType fonts Scale Factor Ul The Scale Factor field indicates the number of design units per Em and is the unit used for all scalable metrics in the font header It is used for TrueType and Intellifont scalable soft fonts Master Underline Position Sl The Master Underline Position is the top of the PCL floating underline with respect to the baseline in design units Note For scalable fonts the Master Underline Position field replaces the 1 byte Underline Position
218. W Pen Width 22 29 23 21 PW Pen Width 22 5 RA Fill Rectangle Absolute 21 39 RF Raster Fill Definition 22 32 RO Rotate Coordinate System 17 17 19 24 19 28 19 34 RP Replot 19 39 RR Fill Rectangle Relative 21 42 RT Relative Arc Three Point 20 48 SA Select Alternate Font 23 66 SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts 23 31 23 67 SC Scale 17 24 19 4 19 15 19 40 Scale SC 17 20 SD Standard Font Definition 23 68 Set Picture Frame Anchor Point 18 10 SI Absolute Character Size 23 8 23 14 23 74 SL Character Slant 23 8 23 78 SM Symbol Mode 22 35 SP Select Pen 22 5 22 38 SR Relative Character Size 23 8 23 14 23 81 SS Select Standard Font 23 85 SV Screened Vectors 22 39 TD Transparent Data 23 86 TR Transparency Mode 22 38 22 42 UL User Defined Line Type 22 44 WG Fill Wedge 21 45 WG Fill Wedge 21 27 WU Pen Width Unit Selection 22 46 commands HP GL 2 listing of 17 3 commands PCL 2 c G Pattern Area Fill ID 13 8 14 5 ee nana ay i ea aS area fill ID see also pattern ID 13 8 14 5 character code 11 49 character descriptor 11 50 define symbol set 10 4 Disable Underline command 8 29 duplex page side selection 4 10 echo 16 25 End Raster Graphics 15 30 Enter HP GL 2 Mode 18 13 Enter PCL Mode 18 14 fill rectangular area 14 9 Flush All Pages 16 24 Font Control 9 5 font header 11 6 Font ID 9 4 font selection by ID 8 26 Free Space
219. X Resolution Ul 0 0 0 eee 11 33 Y Resolution Ul 6 0 0 eee 11 34 Scale Factor UI 2csvi vena cues weyers dd een dee ae Pee kaw e 11 34 Master Underline Position SI 0 00 00 e eee 11 34 Master Underline Thickness Height Ul 2 0005 11 34 Font Scaling Technology UB 00 c cee 11 34 Variety UB 2itadevneidicncderigat ied badaueresad deal baae 11 35 OR Threshold UI 22decceeer bees vied ew tad di direnei kieki 11 35 Global Italic Angle SI 0 2 0 ee 11 35 Global Intellifont Data Size Ul 2 6 eee 11 35 Global Intellifont Data 0 0 eee 11 35 Character Complement Array of UB 000 eee eee 11 35 CHECKSUM evi sek eae ee chow bea ane ad ewan Pee bows 11 39 COpyniQht xicectad he eae sae Bo on oR eke vs doin E 11 39 Segmented Font Data Format 15 0 2 00 cece eee eee 11 39 Font Header Examples 00000 c cee eee eee 11 43 Character Definitions 00000 c eee 11 48 Character Code Command 00000 e eee eee 11 49 Character Definition Command 000 00 eee eee 11 50 Character Descriptor Formats 0 00000 c eee eee 11 51 Character Descriptor and Data Format for PCL Bitmap Fonts 11 51 Character Descriptor and Data Format for Intellifont Scalable Fonts 11 60 Character Descriptor and Data Format for TrueType Fonts 11 65 Character Definition Examples 0 00 00 c eee ee 11 70 Ma
220. Y Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y increments current 230 to 230 4 no default units The ER command defines and edges a rectangle using relative coordinates and the current pen line type and line attributes The ER command includes an automatic pen down When the command operation is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored e X Y Increments Specify the opposite corner of the rectangle from the current pen location The current pen location is the starting point of the rectangle Increments are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off The following illustration shows the current pen location in the lower left corner and the command s X Y increment location in the upper right corner When drawing a rectangle these points can be in any two diagonally opposite corners ER Edge Rectangle Relative 21 23 X Y increment location Current pen location starting point Figure 21 15Edge Relative Rectangle Command The only difference between the ER command and the RR Fill Relative Rectangle command is that the ER command produces an outlined rectangle and RR a filled one The ER command clears the polygon buffer and then uses it to define the rectangle before drawing Refer to Drawing Polygons earlier in this chapter for more information The following example uses relative coordinates to draw the
221. a sasaaa aaaea 15 13 Start Raster Graphics Command 000 cen eens 15 14 Raster Y Offset Command 00 0c cece eee eee 15 15 Set Compression Method Command 2000e eee eee eee 15 16 Unencoded Method 0 00 00 cee eee 15 16 Run length Encoding Method 1 00 c eee eee ee eee 15 16 Tagged Image File Format Encoding Method 2 sacs cstaase bie eden bbe pa a i bodes bee eae ees 15 17 Delta Row Compression Method 3 0 cece eee eee 15 20 Example Delta Row Compression 00 00 cece eee eeee 15 24 Adaptive Compression Method 5 200 0c ce eee eee 15 25 Transfer Raster Data Command 0 000 cece eee eee 15 29 End Raster Graphics Command 000 0 cee eee eee eee 15 30 Raster Graphics Example 00 00 eee eee 15 31 Status Readback Memory Status Request 0 00 c eee eee 16 2 Entity Status kts 16 3 Status Response 2 0 00 eee 16 5 Status Response Syntax 2 0 0 ccc tees 16 6 Set Status Readback Location Type Command 02 000 16 8 Set Status Readback Location Unit Command 000000 16 9 Inquire Status Readback Entity Command 002000 eee 16 10 Entity Status ReSponseS 00 ccc eee eee 16 11 Font Response 00 e eee tee ee 16 11 Font Extended Response 0 0 cece eee eee eee 16 15 Macro Response 0 020 cece tenes 16 16 User Defined Pattern
222. able printing PA3500 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move the pen PW1 5 PD4500 2800 4500 1800 3500 1500 3500 2500 to 3500 2500 Select a pen width of 1 5 mm Set the pen down and draw a line from the current position to 4500 2800 then 4500 1800 next to 3500 1500 and then to 3500 2500 PW 8 PD2300 2900 2300 1900 3500 1500 Set the pen width to 8 mm Place the pen down and print a line to 2300 2900 then to 2300 1900 and finally to 3500 1500 PW 5 PU2300 2900 PD3300 3200 4500 2800 Set the pen width to 5 mm lift the pen and move to 2300 2900 Set the pen down and draw a line to 8300 3200 and then another line to 4500 2800 PW 25 PU4500 1800 PD3500 2100 Set the pen width to 25 mm lift the pen and move to 4500 1800 Set the pen down and print a line to 3500 2100 22 30 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN Table 22 14 Example Using the PW Command continued 2 0A Enter the PCL mode 7E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 2300 2900 83500 2500 Figure 22 19 Table 22 15 Related Commands Group SP Select Pen SV Screened Vectors WU Pen Width Unit Selection Group The Line and Fill Attributes PW Pen Width 22 31 RF Raster Fill Definition This command defines a rectangular pattern that may be used as area fill and for screened vectors see the SV command Use RF to cr
223. ach chapter is provided below Chapter 1 Introduction to HP PCL This chapter gives a brief history of the development of the PCL language describes the PCL language levels architecture and describes the PCL command structure control codes and escape sequences Chapter 2 The Page This chapter introduces the idea of the logical page and identifies the area in which printing can occur It also describes the PCL coordinate system and the HP GL 2 picture frame Chapter The Print Environment This chapter introduces the printer s feature settings collectively as the print environment It includes descriptions of the factory default environment user default environment and the modified print environment The effect of printer reset functions is also described Chapter 4 PCL Job Control Commands This chapter describes the commands which provide job control Job control commands are usually grouped together and sent at the beginning of a job Job control includes restoration of the User Default Environment selection of the number of copies of each page to be printed duplex print commands and unit of measure specification EN EN Chapter 5 Page Control Commands This chapter describes the commands providing page format control Page format control allows you to select the page source size orientation margins and text spacing Chapter 6 Cursor Positioning This chapter describes how to position the curso
224. ack commands to identify a location type and a location unit and then send the entity request command Location type refers to the memory locations which store entities These memory locations include internal ROM RAM for downloaded entities cartridges user installable ROMs SIMMs and one additional location identified as currently selected Currently selected identifies the entity which is active such as the font or user defined pattern last selected Currently selected does not apply to macros or symbol sets Location unit refers to a specific location or device within the location type For example location unit 1 for location type cartridge identifies the left cartridge on a printer with two cartridges or unit 1 for location type downloaded identifies the temporary fonts as opposed to permanent The location type and unit are described in detail under the location type and unit status readback command descriptions provided later in this chapter Once the location type and unit are specified the status can be requested using the Inquire Status Readback Entity command This command identifies the entity font symbol set macro or user defined pattern and causes the printer to send the response Introduction 16 3 A basic entity status request is shown in the example below This example identifies a status request for downloaded permanent fonts The example also includes a status readbac
225. ack error 16 19 non volatile RAM Glossary 8 non zero winding fill method for polygons 21 13 number of characters font header 11 30 Number of Copies command 4 4 19 39 O off line on line Glossary 8 offset print job 4 11 one byte typeface value 11 24 opaque print model mode 13 3 OR threshold font header 11 35 orientation 7 8 Glossary 8 character descriptor 11 56 effect on HP GL 2 17 17 font header 11 19 fonts 7 8 8 20 HP GL 2 labels 23 9 in font selection 8 25 raster graphics 15 8 Orientation command 5 5 origin 17 15 outline font 7 9 output bin selection command 4 12 overlay environment 3 1 12 4 Glossary 8 macro 12 4 12 5 overview manual v P P1 and P2 19 4 19 12 19 26 23 81 commands affected by table 19 24 19 28 default location 19 23 input command 19 23 input relative command 19 26 printing beyond 19 45 scaling points 17 24 specifying location 19 26 X Y Coordinates 19 26 PA Panose format of data segment 11 42 PA command 17 25 20 30 page binding 4 7 4 8 boundaries 2 2 2 8 control 24 4 control commands 5 1 eject 16 24 19 33 19 39 format commands 5 1 length 24 4 orientation 5 5 7 8 Page Size command 5 2 page size independent image 18 3 printing boundaries 2 7 2 8 protection 24 10 size 24 4 size in PCL Units 2 7 size independent image 18 3 page size command 5 2 paper landscape size 2 8 output control 4 12 portrait size 2 7 selection 24 4 Source command 5 4 24 4 parallel I O Glos
226. acter code 3 26 63 character code 5 Solid Spade Card Suit 25 bc character code 31 Down Solid Arrowhead ff ff character code 32 Space Code no character 00 21 character code 33 Exclamation Mark User Defined Symbol Set Examples 10 13 Symbol Map Data continued 00 41 character code 65 Uppercase A 00 61 character code 97 Lowercase A 20 7f character code 252 Superior Lowercase N 00 b2 character code 253 Superior Numeral 2 25 a0 character code 254 Small Solid Square Box E c3411r5S PCL Symbol Set ID 10U Make this symbol set permanent MSL Symbol Index Example Symbol Map Data E c341R PCL Symbol Set ID 10U Ec f528W Symbol Set 528 bytes in length 00 12 Header Size 18 bytes 01 55 ID code 341 decimal 10U 01 Format 1 MSL Symbol Index 02 Font Type 2 00 01 First code 1 00 ff Last code 255 80 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 Basic Latin and PC Characters required 00 cb character code 1 Open Happy Face 00 cc character code 2 Solid Happy Face 00 cd character code 3 Solid Heart Card Suit 00 ce character code 4 Solid Diamond Card Suit 10 14 User Defined Symbol Sets EN EN Symbol Map Data continued 00 cf character code 5 Solid Spade Card Suit 00 e7 character code 31 Down Solid Arrowhead 00 00 character code 32 Spa
227. age 6 Signify the end of the raster graphic image transfer Eo rC This example prints the arrow as shown in Figure 15 11 Table 15 11 Example of Raster Graphic Image Data Raster Image Data Command Data Dot Row byte1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 Decimal Equivalent 1 00000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 E b4W 0 0 128 0 2 00000000 00000000 11000000 00000000 E b4W 0 0 192 0 3 00000000 00000000 11100000 00000000 EO b4w 0 0 224 0 4 00000000 00000000 11110000 00000000 EO b4w 0 0 240 0 5 00000000 00000000 11111000 00000000 Ec b4W 0 0 248 0 EN Raster Graphics Example 15 31 Table 15 11 Example of Raster Graphic Image Data continued 6 00000000 7 00000000 8 00000000 9 00000000 10 11111111 11 11111111 12 11111111 13 11111111 14 11111111 15 11111111 16 11111111 17 11111111 18 11111111 19 11111111 20 11111111 21 11111111 22 11111111 23 11111111 24 00000000 25 00000000 26 00000000 27 00000000 28 00000000 29 00000000 30 00000000 31 00000000 32 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 11111100 11111110 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 1
228. age 800 2000 1 600 2000 400 400 1200 400 Figure 21 23 Table 21 23 Related Commands Group EP Edge Polygon FP Fill Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative RR Fill Rectangle Relative EA Edge Rectangle Absolute The Polygon Group RA Fill Rectangle Absolute 21 41 Table 21 23 continued FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type RF Raster Fill Definition RR Fill Rectangle Relative This command defines and fills a rectangle using relative coordinates Use RR to fill rectangular shapes in drawings To outline a rectangle using relative coordinates use the ER command RR X Y Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y increments current units 280 to 230 4 no default The RR command defines and fills a rectangle using the current pen the current line and fill tyoes and relative coordinates The RR command includes an automatic pen down After the command is executed the original pen location and up down status are restored e X Y Increments Specify the corner of the rectangle that is diagonally opposite from the current pen location which is the starting point of the rectangle Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Note The following illustration shows the current pen location in the lower left corner and the command s X Y increments in
229. age features consistently e HP printers implement the above language feature groups in very cost effective formatters e HP printers have the ability to ignore most unsupported commands 1 2 Introduction to HP PCL EN What are Printer Commands Note EN PCL printer commands provide access to printer features There are four general types of HP printer language commands control codes PCL commands HP GL 2 commands PJL commands Control Codes A control code is a character that initiates a printer function for example Carriage Return CR Line Feed LF Form Feed FF etc PCL Commands PCL commands provide access to the printer s PCL control structure The PCL structure controls all of the printer s features except those used for vector graphics which are controlled by the HP GL 2 commands PCL printer commands consist of two or more characters The first character is always the ASCII escape character identified by the Ec symbol Ec is a special control code which identifies the subsequent string of characters as a printer command As the printer monitors incoming data from a computer it looks for this character When this character appears the printer reads it and its associated characters as a command to perform and not as data to print PCL printer commands other than single character control codes are also referred to as escape sequences The terms printer command and escape sequence are used in
230. amily value Older bitmap fonts use the smaller typeface base value Serif Style UB Specifies one of the following defined serif styles Serif Style values 0 63 the lower six bits of the style field are ignored by the printer for bitmap fonts However the upper two bits bits 6 and 7 are used by a scalable font header to determine the serif style of the typeface insensitive characters to complement the font Serif style values for the lower six bits are listed in the table below Serif style values for the upper two bits are listed in the following table Table 11 19 Serif Style Values Value Serif Style 0 Sans Serif Square Sans Serif Round Serif Line Serif Triangle Serif Swath Serif Block Serif Bracket Rounded Bracket Flair Serif Modified Sans oO OC N ODO a BR OJN Script Nonconnecting e oO Script Joining Font Header Format 11 27 Table 11 19 Serif Style Values continued 11 Script Calligraphic 12 Script Broken Letter 13 63 Reserved Values for bits 6 amp 7 64 Sans Serif 128 Serif 192 Reserved Quality UB This field specifies the quality of the font Table 11 20 Quality Values Value Quality 0 Data processing draft 1 Near Letter Quality 2 Letter Quality Placement SB Placement specifies the position of character patterns relative to the baseline
231. ands 0 0 00 cc ee ee ee ees 1 4 Syntax of Escape SequenceS 0 00 cee eee 1 5 Two Character Escape Sequences 00 0c 1 5 Parameterized Escape Sequences 00 0c ce eee eee eee 1 6 The Page Logical Page 2 ee 2 2 Printed Dots s wcs 82se0de405 8 eee Seed bowed aoa ee ek dae Peed awed We 2 3 PCL Coordinate System 0 00 ccc ee 2 4 Units of the PCL Coordinate System 0000 cee ee 2 5 PCL Units iei naana e eee eens 2 5 DOCIPOINS 4 ngeras rae bhai Whe rad EER RS bad ames ROP Re Oda 224 2 5 Columns amp ROWS 0 ccc ce eee ee ee ee ee ee eens 2 5 Printer Internal Units 1 0 0 0 00 cc ee ees 2 5 HP GL 2 Picture Frame 2 ee ee ees 2 6 Printable Area rene 224 4 cae SOR an Re ek fet Pa ah ele ah ay Sat cate 2 7 EN Contents 1 The Print Environment Factory Default Environment 0 0000 cee 3 2 User Default Environment 0 0 0 0 00 eee eee 3 6 Modified Print Environment 0 0 000000 ee ees 3 7 Resetting the Print Environment 000 00 eee ee 3 8 Printer Re SeCtax esas o ranea we Brie o cack AN wh ia a ee aa ie dd oc EX 3 8 Gold RESEb win eee epodan ds ee edb ate boon cel eed bee b ba a8 3 9 PCL Job Control Commands Printer Reset Command 0 cece eens 4 2 Universal Exit Language Command 6 000 cece ee 4 3 Number of Copies Command 00 0c cece eee 4 4 Simplex Duplex Print Command 00 0c eee
232. ands shown in the examples to a programming language see Using HP GL 2 with Programming Languages later in this chapter As you see unfamiliar commands find the page number of the command description in the index and read about the command Think of an application that you would like to program and then look for an example that uses some of the elements you desire After trying some examples and seeing how the commands interact you should be well on your way to learning the HP GL 2 language This chapter describes the interaction between the PCL printer language and HP GL 2 modes and introduces the following topics HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax Using HP GL 2 with Programming Languages The HP GL 2 Coordinate System HP GL 2 and PCL Orientation Interactions The Vector Graphics Limits Units of Measure Pen Status and Location Defining the Image Area PCL Picture Frame Scaling Automatically Adjusting Image Size e Absolute and Relative Pen Movement Chapter 18 covers more HP GL 2 fundamentals and Chapters 19 through 23 discuss HP GL 2 commands and their syntax 17 2 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax There are two classes of commands used to print vector graphics PCL printer language commands and HP GL 2 commands As the name implies the PCL printer language commands are used when in the PCL printer language mode They define the area on the page where HP GL 2 graphics are printed a
233. anging a picture s size is to scale the printing area defined by P1 and P2 then move the locations of P1 and P2 to define a smaller or larger area This is especially useful when you want to print the picture on any portion of the page Only scaled drawings those using the SC command are enlarged reduced when the P1 P2 locations change Use PCL Picture Frame scaling when importing HP GL 2 images created without the SC command see Automatically Adjusting the Image Size in Chapter 18 To maintain the proportions of scaled plots set P1 and P2 to define an area with the sameaspect ratio as the original scaling rectangle For example if the area defined by P1 and P2 is 3000 x 2000 plotter units its aspect ratio is 3 2 To enlarge the plot set P1 and P2 to define a larger area that maintains a 3 2 ratio The following example illustrates this technique using a square P1 P2 scaling rectangle with a scale of 0 to 10 for both axes By definition a square always has an aspect ratio of 1 1 After drawing a circle within the scaled area the locations of P1 and P2 move to form a new square area that maintains the 1 1 ratio Note that the circle printed in the new area is smaller but is proportionately identical 19 8 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 2 Example Changing the Size of a Drawing E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode using the default picture frame size and anchor point IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode IP0 0 2000 20
234. aphics EN Raster Presentation Raster Resolution Raster Height Raster Width and Raster Compression are all true modes Once specified the printer remains in that mode unless explicitly changed by issuing the command again or reset to default values by a soft reset self test font printout or power cycle Note Only raster data appearing within the intersection of the logical page the printable area the raster width and height is printed If raster width and or raster height have not been set are defaulted then the intersection of the logical page and the printable area determines where raster graphics appear raster data is clipped to the printable area EN Raster Graphics Command Sequence 15 5 Raster Graphics Resolution Command Note Raster graphics can be printed at various resolutions This command designates the resolution of subsequent raster data transfers in dots per inch EOtt R 75 75 dots per inch 100 100 dots per inch 150 150 dots per inch 200 200 dots per inch 300 300 dots per inch 600 600 dots per inch Default 75 Range 75 100 150 200 300 600 This command must be sent prior to the start graphics command The factory default resolution is 75 dots per inch Lower resolution graphics occupy less user memory For example the number of bits required to represent a two inch by three inch image at 75 dots per inch is 33 750 The same image at 300 dots per inch requires 540 000 bits
235. aracter When this character appears the printer reads it and its associated characters as a command to be performed and not data to be printed Escape Sequence or PCL Command PCL escape sequences consist of two or more characters The first character is always the escape character which is identified by the symbol This character is a control code used specifically by the printer to identify a string of characters as a printer command As the printer monitors incoming data from a computer it is looking for this character When this character appears the printer reads it and its associated characters as a command to be performed and not as data to be printed Also see PCL commands Factory Default These are the settings that are programmed into the printer at the factory These settings are in use unless you override them using either the control panel or by sending printer commands Glossary 4 EN EN Factory Default Environment A factory default is a setting programmed into the printer at the factory The group of all the printer s factory settings is referred to as the factory default environment The factory default symbol set is selectable from the control panel configuration menu refer to the printer User s Manual Font A font is a set of characters that have similar characteristics A font has an assigned name typeface and is further described by its spacing height pitch style stroke weigh
236. are the fonts resident in the printer when shipped Landscape See Orientation Logical Page The PCL logical page also referred to as the addressable area defines the area in which the cursor can be positioned Although the printer does not actually have a cursor like the blinking underline character used on most computer terminals the cursor position refers to the currently active printing position CAP In other words the location of the cursor is the position on the logical page where the next character is positioned You can move the cursor to different points on the logical page using the cursor positioning commands however the cursor cannot be moved outside of the logical page bounds Macro A macro is a collection of escape sequences control codes and data downloaded to the printer whose execution can be initiated using a single command Menu A list of configurable items In the nomenclature of this document an item is one particular configurable entity such as Copies a value is an item s particular configuration Such as Copies 10 Modified Print Environment The current printer feature settings constitute the modified print environment Whenever a feature setting is altered using escape sequences the new setting is recorded in the modified print environment Glossary 7 Glossary 8 MSL Master Symbol List This is a group of symbols a symbol index An unbo
237. ares with fill patterns anchored at the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame The fill pattern is continuous across each of the squares In the set of squares below that each square has an anchor corner set in its own lower left corner Notice how this helps distinguish between the adjacent figures Table 22 3 Example Changing the Anchor Corner 7E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode 22 6 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN Table 22 3 Example Changing the Anchor Corner continued RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing PA3000 3000 Specify absolute plotting and move to location 3000 3000 FT3 400 45 Specify fill tyoe number 3 parallel lines with each line 400 plu apart and set at a 45 angle fill a rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner and a point 1000 plu to the right and 1000 plu up as the upper right corner edge the outline of the rectangle just filled PR1000 0 FT4 400 45 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move 1000 plu to the right select fill type number 4 cross hatch create a rectangle the same size as the first one fill it with cross hatch and edge its outline PR1000 0 FT3 400 45 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move to the right another 1000 plu and create another rectangle of the same size this time filled with pattern number
238. ariable Text Path Command The Label Origin LO command simplifies placing labels on a drawing Normally the first character origin is the current pen location when the Label command is issued The LO command allows you to specify that the label be centered and or right or left justified from the current pen location For example the following illustration shows four centered lines of text Lines of any length can easily be centered without cumbersome calculations Figure 23 4 Label Origin Command 23 10 The Character Group EN EN These lines use one X Y coordinate pair one LO command to center labels and a Carriage Return and Line Feed after each line Without this command an alternative method would involve calculating the length of the line in CP Character Plot cells dividing by two and using the CP command to Backspace the required number of cells The LO command saves calculation decreases the number of characters sent to the printer and allows you to take advantage of proportional fonts when the character widths are not known to the software Terminating Labels LB tells the printer to print every character following the command rather than interpreting the characters as graphics commands In order to allow the normal terminator the semicolon to be used in text the command is defined so that you must use the special print label terminator mode to tell the printer to once again interpret charac
239. as the label terminator FT3 50 45 Specify a hatching fill type with 50 plotter units between each line with the lines set at a 45 angle CF1 1 LBA Select character fill mode 1 edge and edge with pen number 1 black print the letter A PR127 0 Move the pen position 127 plu to the right 23 22 The Character Group EN EN Table 23 8 Example Using the CF Command continued PW 1 CF3 1 LBB Set the pen width to 1 mm select character fill mode 3 fill amp edge and edge with pen number 1 black print the letter B PW 5 LBC Set the pen width to 5 mm to change the thickness of the fill lines print the letter C EL 0A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 1000 3000 Figure 23 11 Table 23 9 Related Commands Groups DI Absolute Direction The Character Group DR Relative Direction SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Characteristics Group CF Character Fill Mode 23 23 CP Character Plot This command moves the pen the specified number of spaces and lines from the current pen location Use CP to position a label for indenting centering etc CP spaces lines or CP 7 Parameter Format Functional Range Default spaces clamped real 32768 to 32767 no default lines clamped real 32768 to 32767 no de
240. as used for selection of a scalable font the actual font would be scaled to 14 5 points Height Command 8 13 Style Command The Style command identifies the posture of a character its width and structure of the font symbols Ba s S Primary Style Ec s S Secondary Style Default Range Style values for the most common typefaces are listed in Table 8 1 0 32767 values greater than 32767 are set to 32767 Additional style values may also be obtained from the related font documentation provided with HP s font products Table 8 1 Common Font Styles Value Font Styles 0 upright solid 1 italic 4 condensed 5 condensed italic 8 compressed or extra condensed 24 expanded 32 outline 64 inline 128 shadowed 160 outline shadowed 8 14 PCL Font Selection EN Notes EN With the introduction of the HP LaserJet IID printer Hewlett Packard expanded the style values in the Font Header style value field from a one byte to a two byte value field expanding the style range from 0 255 to 0 32767 This expansion allows for additional styles Style values can be obtained by calculating the Style Word as described under Style MSB in Chapter 11 For selecting style an exact match is required If there is no match this characteristic is ignored but stored in the font select table available for the next selection Example To specify an upright style for
241. aster X and Master Y Resolution fields can be used to specify 600 dpi resolution for a pattern originally designed at 300 dpi However a pattern which was designed at 600 dpi is not available for selection at 300 dpi resolution Patterns are identified by some value ID number This is the current pattern ID number If the Pattern ID command is not used to assign an ID number to the user pattern the existing current pattern ID value is used If a pattern is already associated with the ID that pattern is replaced with the new pattern Format Byte 0 This field byte 0 must be set to 0 Continuation Byte 1 This field byte 1 must be set to O This byte is for future printer support and does not currently provide any continuation operation Pixel Encoding Byte 2 This field byte 2 should be set to 1 This byte is reserved for future printer operation User Defined Pattern Command 13 17 Reserved Byte 3 This field byte 3 is not currently used and must be set to 0 Height in Pixels Bytes 4 and 5 This field bytes 4 and 5 identifies the number of rows height of the pattern Width in Pixels Bytes 6 and 7 This field bytes 6 and 7 identifies the number of pixels width of the pattern Pattern Image This field contains the raster data for the pattern Master X Resolution Ul The Master X Resolution field is the pixel resolution in the X scan direction at which the pa
242. aster width and left raster graphics margin are fixed until an end raster graphics command is received 15 14 Raster Graphics EN Notes Once in Raster Graphics Mode PCL commands and text imply an End Raster Graphics Ec rC except for the following commands e Transfer Raster Data e Set Raster Compression Method e Raster Y Offset In addition the following commands are ignored i e locked out while in Raster Graphics Mode and do not imply an End Raster Graphics command Start Raster Graphics Set Raster Width Set Raster Height Set Raster Presentation Mode Set Raster Graphics Resolution An implied End Raster Graphics resets the Raster Compression Method 3 seed row but does not reset the Raster Compression Method nor the left raster graphics margin If source and or transparency modes have been set frequent start end graphics commands in an image can result in a memory overflow condition Raster Y Offset Command EN The Raster Y Offset command moves the cursor position vertically the specified number of raster lines from the current raster position in the raster area Ec b Y Number of raster lines of vertical movement N A 0 32767 Default Range This command is recognized only while in raster graphics mode and only within the raster area Raster Y Offset Command 15 15 Set Compression Method Command Note The Set Compression Method command allows you to code raster data in one of four compre
243. ates are drawn EN PE Polyline Encoded 20 35 Note Because SP is not allowed in polygon mode if you select a pen within PE while in polygon mode the Select Pen command is ignored e Value Specifies data according to the preceding flag For example a value following a select pen flag should be a pen number Flag values are encoded in the same manner as coordinate data Instructions for encoding flag values follow the parameter descriptions e Pen Number Specifies the pen to be selected black 1 or white 0 The pen number must be encoded into a base 64 or base 32 equivalent e Number of Fractional Binary Bits Specifies the number of fractional binary bits contained in the coordinate data The number of fractional binary bits must be encoded into a base 64 or base 32 equivalent see the explanation on the next page Table 20 23 Value Format Range pen number integer 0 to 1 number of fractional binary bits integer 26 to 26 1 PR and PE have extended ranges of 280 to 230 1 plotter units If the current pen position goes out of this range the printer ignores plotting commands until it receives an absolute PA or PE coordinate within the extended ranges e X Y Coordinates Specifies a coordinate pair encoded into a base 64 default or a base 32 equivalent Use base 64 if your system can send 8 bits of data without parity Use 7 bit mode and base 32 coordinate values if your system requires
244. ath LB Label SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SI Absolute Character Size SL Character Slant SR Relative Character Size The Character Group IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 The Configuration Status Group DR Relative Direction 23 43 Table 23 22 POSSIBLE ERROR CONDITIONS Error Condition Printer Response or both parameters 0 number out of range ignores command DT Define Label Terminator This command specifies the character to be used as the label terminator and whether it is printed Use DT to define a new label terminator if you desire a different one or if your computer cannot use the default ETX decimal code 3 DT abel terminator mode or DT Parameter Format Functional Range Default label label text any character except ETX terminator NULL LF Eo and decimal code 3 decimal codes 0 5 27 and 59 respectively mode clamped 0Oor 1 1 non printing integer The character immediately following DT is interpreted to be the new label terminator You must terminate all Label LB commands following a DT command with the specified label terminator e No Parameter Defaults the label terminator to ETX not a semicolon and the mode to non printing 1 e Label Terminator Specifies the label terminator as the character immediately following the DT mnemonic If you use a space between the mnemonic and the label t
245. ath 23 26 Vertical Cursor Positioning command decipoints 6 11 PCL Units 6 12 rows 6 9 Vertical Motion Index VMI 2 5 6 3 command 5 22 vertical motion index VMI Glossary 16 Vertical Picture Frame Size Decipoints command 18 9 Vertical Rectangle Size command decipoints 14 4 PCL Units 14 4 VMI common settings 5 23 designating and computing example 5 22 VMI command 5 22 Ww wedges drawing in HP GL 2 mode 21 6 EN EN wedges and circles filling example 21 8 WG command 21 6 21 27 21 45 white fill 14 9 14 10 white rule 13 12 width character descriptor 11 57 lines 22 5 pixel user defined pattern descriptor 13 18 type font header 11 23 windowing 19 18 WU command 22 46 X X resolution font header 11 33 X Y axis ranges user units in scaling 19 41 coordinate pairs 17 16 X axis 17 15 PCL coordinate system 2 5 units 6 3 xHeight font header 11 22 XW x windows font name format of data segment 11 42 XY coordinate data character descriptor 11 64 data offset character descriptor 11 64 Y Y Display Functions Enable 24 12 Y resolution font header 11 34 Y axis 17 15 PCL coordinate system 2 5 units 6 3 Y offset adaptive compression 15 27 Z Z Display Functions Disable 24 12 zero degree reference 21 6 zeroed rows in raster graphics 15 2 Index 39 Index 40 EN GQ HEWLETT PACKARD Expanding Possibilities Copyright 1999 Printed on Hewlett Packard Co Recycled Paper Pr
246. ation and the result of rotating the orientation without relocating P1 and P2 Default v J 180 270 Figure 19 15Using the RO Command Without Using the IP Command 19 36 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN Figure 19 16 shows the locations of P1 and P2 when you follow the rotation with the IP command P2 P1 Rogo IP P RO270 IP P2 Figure 19 16 Using IP after the RO Command When you set up a soft clip window see the IW command RO also rotates the window If a portion of a window rotates outside the hard clip limits it is clipped Note that P does not affect the window limits Use W to reset the window to the size of the PCL Picture Frame RO Rotate Coordinate System 19 37 P2 o PCL mp Picture Frame and i Soft Clip Window Y Soft Clip Window gt X ae x Y peii o P1 Default RO90 P1 P2 P2 os se PCL r al Picture gt l Frame and Soft Clip Soft Clip Window x Window Only if x defined Ra lt i aa RO90 IP Roso IP iw P Figure 19 17 Using IP and IW after the RO Command Table 19 17 Related Commands Group IP Input P1 and P2 The Configuration Status Group IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window 19 38 The Configuration and Status Group EN RP Replot Note EN This command is ignored by the printer to eject a page the printer must be in PCL printe
247. ative to this point 5081016 x Points 4 5 and 6 x relative to this point O 2540 508 e l i 1 M 872 0 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 iT l T l T T i 1 l BR0 3048 4572 0 3556 2032 508 1016 2540 508 2540 5080 12540 5080 Figure 20 13 Table 20 13 Related Commands Group AA Arc Absolute BZ Bezier Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point Cl Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN BR Bezier Relative 20 21 BZ Bezier Absolute This command draws bezier curves using absolute coordinates The BZ command uses the current pen position as the first control point and specifies the other three control points as absolute coordinates BZ X4 Y4 X Y2 X3 V5 Vo Yall Parameter Format Functional Range Default X4 Y4 control points current 2 3 to 2 3 1 no default units The BZ command uses the current pen location and three specified control points to draw a bezier curve After each new Bezier the last control point of the previous curve becomes the first control point of the next Bezier All curve control points are specified as absolute coordinates Bezier curves are drawn with the current pen line type current line attributes and pen state up down The c
248. ats Note EN Character definition formats for PCL Bitmap Intellifont Scalable and TrueType Scalable fonts are shown on the following pages The following notation is used to define the data type of each field in the character descriptors Table 11 34 Character Descriptors Data Continuation Block B Boolean 0 1 UB Unsigned Byte 0 255 SB Signed Byte 128 127 Ul Unsigned Integer 0 65535 SI Signed Integer 32768 32767 Character Descriptor and Data Format for PCL Bitmap Fonts The descriptor of a PCL bitmap character is at least 14 bytes long and contains information such as the character s width and height The character data is binary raster data that identifies the shape of the character Table 11 35 shows the format of the bitmap character descriptor and data Table 11 35 PCL Bitmap Character Descriptor and Data Format Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Format 4 Continuation 0 2 Descriptor Size 14 Class 1 4 Orientation Reserved 0 Character Descriptor Formats 11 51 Table 11 35 PCL Bitmap Character Descriptor and Data Format continued 6 Left Offset 8 Top Offset 10 Character Width 12 Character Height 14 Delta X 16 Raster Character Data in bytes Table 11 36 PCL Bitmap Continuation Character Descriptor and Data Format Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Format 4
249. atterns Pattern ID Area Fill ID Command 13 11 SORES SS RRL LS ies S RSS SSS 562605 l Nos X lt gt Kx Oe OOD RRRS w OQS RLL Select Current Pattern Command Notes The Select Current Pattern command identifies the type of pattern to be applied onto the destination Ec v T 0 Solid black default 1 Solid white 2 Shading pattern 3 Cross hatch pattern 4 User defined pattern 0 0 4 values outside of range are ignored Default Range This command selects which type of pattern is applied For values 2 3 and 4 the shading level Figure 13 4 cross hatch pattern Figure 13 5 or user defined pattern number is identified by the Pattern ID command described earlier in this chapter For selecting or changing the current pattern the Select Current Pattern Ec v T and the Pattern ID c c G commands work together Sending the current Aired i Select Current Pattern command alone does not change the current pattern the Pattern ID must be sent first However when selecting solid white white rule or solid black black rule only the Select Current Pattern command is required Once a current pattern is selected that pattern applies to all images placed on the page until a new pattern is selected 13 12 The PCL Print Model EN User Defined Pattern Graphics In addition to the eight shading patterns and six cross hatch patterns
250. aws a rectangle using the current pen location as one corner and the specified relative coordinates as the opposite corner Absolute pen movement is the default mode coordinates received within a PU Pen Up or PD Pen Down command are interpreted as absolute plotter units unless a PR Plot Relative command establishes relative mode As with absolute coordinates the relative units can be either user units or plotter units depending on whether the SC command is in effect Relative increments add to the current pen location The printer automatically converts the new relative location to absolute coordinates and updates the current pen location Using relative coordinates can be faster in cases where the I O speed limits your print speed since relative coordinates are generally smaller numbers and therefore transmit less data over the I O 17 26 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN EN The Picture Frame Introduction When importing an existing HP GL 2 file or creating an HP GL 2 image within an application you use several PCL commands to set up the picture frame size choose the picture frame location and enter and exit HP GL 2 mode This chapter explains these PCL commands The following terms are used in this discussion Picture presentation directives are a group of PCL commands which e Provide the means to enter and exit HP GL 2 context Define a delimiting rectangle for the graphic image Specify a scali
251. axis and Y axis can change as a result of the scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive or negative angle of rotation 21 6 The Polygon Group EN P2 90 Positive Pis sweep angle 7 7 f Positive start angle 180 0 Zero degree reference point Y positive radius 7 N S Pa baa oa oO fy 270 P1 X Figure 21 4 Drawing Wedges The following example draws a wedge using the EW command The radius of the wedge is 600 plotter units the wedge begins 90 from the zero degree reference point and the wedge sweeps for 60 Note In the example plots some reference points are added which are not part of the example plot These reference points are added for clarification Table 21 5 Example Drawing Wedges E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA2500 3500 Specify absolute plotting and move to location 2500 3500 EN Drawing Wedges 21 7 Table 21 5 Example Drawing Wedges continued EW600 90 60 Draw the outline of a wedge using the current pen location 2500 3500 as the point of the wedge The wedge has a radius of 600 plotter units begins at 90 from the default zero degree reference point and sweeps for 60 2 0A Enter the PC
252. be selected from the control panel using the FORM menu item refer to the printer User s Manual for additional information Example To designate a VMI of 6 8 lines per inch send Ec amp 6C 6 48 1 8 inch line The following equation converts lines per inch spacing to VMI 1 VMI 48 X F of desired lines per inch Note A change in the control panel FORM setting results in a modification of VMI If the Page Length command amp c amp P follows a VMI change the physical size of the page is recalculated Therefore depending on the VMI modification made the printer may request a different paper size 5 22 Page Control Commands EN EN Common VMI Settings To print 66 lines per page on letter size paper in portrait orientation with one half inch top and bottom margins send Ec amp 7 27C 7 27 10 66 x 48 To print 66 lines per page on letter or legal size paper in landscape orientation with one half inch top and bottom margins send Ec amp 5 45C 5 45 7 5 66 x 48 Vertical Motion Index VMI Command 5 23 Line Spacing Command The Line Spacing command sets the number of lines printed per inch Only the values listed below are valid Ec amp L D 1 1lpi 2 2 pi 3 3 Ipi 4 4 lpi 6 6 lpi 8 8 lpi 12 12 Ipi 16 16 Ipi 24 24 Ipi 48 48 Ipi Default 6 Range 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 48 Other values are ignored This command performs the same function as the Vertica
253. be terminated with a semicolon The following illustration shows the flexibility of the syntax Each variation of the two command sequence is permissible however the method shown on the left is recommended in most instances The recommended method uses the first letter of the next mnemonic to terminate commands uses no space between the mnemonic and its parameters and separates parameters with a comma For clarity examples in this HP GL 2 section of the manual use semicolons as terminators as shown in the middle example below PDPUIO 20 PD PULO 20 PD PU 10 20 Recommended Figure 17 2 Illustration of Syntax Flexibility HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 7 The next section explains how the syntax of individual commands is presented Notations Used to Express Syntax The following describes the notations used in the syntax section of each command description Mnemonic For readability the mnemonic is shown in uppercase and separated from the parameters and or terminator parameters Parameters are shown in italic Parameters in square brackets are optional param1 param2 param1 param2 These optional parameters must be paired params params These parameters may be given the number of times specified in the command description text text This parameter indicates that you can type in a range of ASCII characters such as in the Label LB command Indicates that you can use a ran
254. ble is then built in RAM to accommodate the maximum number of glyphs to be downloaded to the given font with 2 or 4 bytes of offset and 2 bytes of length per glyph This maximum number of glyphs is obtained from the numGlyphs field of the maxp table Entries in the gdir table are filled in by the TrueType rasterizer as characters are downloaded Font Header Format 11 41 The optional cvt fpgm and prep tables as defined in True Type Font Files typically appear in the Global TrueType Data Segments of hinted TrueType soft fonts but should not appear in unhinted fonts IF Intellifont Face Data Reserved for future use PA PANOSE Description This data segment of variable length may be used for the purpose of font selection and substitution Its definition continues to evolve A 10 field 10 byte version sufficient for the description of most Latin fonts appears under the OS 2 table in True Type Font Files PF PS Compatible Font Name Reserved for future use XW x windows font name This ASCII field contains standard X Windows font names Checksum The value of this byte when added to the sum of all of the bytes from byte 64 of the descriptor through the Reserved byte should equal 0 in modulo 256 arithmetic 11 42 Soft Font Creation EN Font Header Examples EN Two examples for downloading a Font Header are provided below one for a bitmap font and one for an Intellifont scalable font Bitmap Example To download a
255. buffer The response is saved in this buffer until it is either read by any user or the printer is turned off In addition to clearing the status buffer by reading the status response or by turning off the printer status responses are cleared if one the following settings are changed e Printer resolution 600 300 e Page protection e Language personality Status requests and their associated response are processed in the order in which they are received The number of responses the printer can buffer varies depending on internal printer operations When requesting status especially in the case where multiple applications or users are sharing one printer HP recommends that you request one item and then read its response prior to making another request Since the printer may contain a status response requested by a previous application s operation it is important to use the Echo command described later in this chapter to synchronize your application s request with the printer s responses Refer to the Echo command description and to the Programming Hints section at the back of this chapter for additional information The number of status responses a printer can buffer varies from printer to printer The HP LaserJet 4 printer can store 5 responses Refer to the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for printer specific information A status response is returned to the printer I O port from which it was requested Introduction 16 5
256. c s0p16 66h8 5v0s0b0T EN Font Selection Examples 8 21 Scalable Proportional Spaced Font This example illustrates how to select a primary scalable CG Times proportional spaced font with the following characteristics note that all of the font characteristics are specified except pitch which is not required for a proportional font ESCAPE CHARACTERISTIC VALUE SEQUENCE Symbol set ASCII E OU Spacing Proportional Ec s1P Height 14 25 point E c s14 25V Style Upright E c s0S Stroke weight Bold E c s3B Typeface family CG Times Ec s4101T The following escape sequences can be sent to the printer to select a primary font with the above characteristics E 0UEc s1PEc s14 25VEc s0SEc s3BEc s4101T Combining the above sequences results in E 0UEc s1p14 25v0s3b4101T Notes If an escape sequence does not contain a value field the printer assumes a value of Zero therefore the command E sB can be sent to the printer instead of sOB Sending shortened font selection commands can result in selection of an unexpected font This is due to failure to track previously specified characteristics and their selection priority in relation to the current font selection Thus it is recommended that all of the characteristics be sent to ensure that the correct font is selected 8 22 PCL Font Selection EN Summary of Font Selection by Characteristic Note EN The following summarizes the procedure the p
257. ce Fl Select Primary Font FN Select Secondary Font LO Label Origin SA Select Alternate Font SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SD Standard Font Definition SI Absolute Character Size SL Character Slant SR Relative Character Size SS Select Standard Font TD Transparent Data The Character Group LB Label 23 61 LO Label Origin This command positions labels relative to the current pen location Use the LO command to center left justify or right justify labels The label can be drawn above or below the current pen location and can also be offset by an amount equal to 25 times the point size or 16 grid units 0 33 times the point size for the Stick font LO position or LO 7 Parameter Format Functional Range Default position clamped integer 1to9 1 11 to 19 21 The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameters Defaults the label origin Equivalent to LO1 e Position The position numbers are graphically illustrated below Each dot represents the current pen location The label positions LO 11 through LO 19 differ from LO 1 through LO 9 only in that the labels are offset from the current pen location The label position 21 provides a PCL compatible label origin The character s are printed at the same location as in PCL Notes Label origins do not change text path To change the text path use the Define Variable Text Path DV command Label pos
258. ce symbol set is determined from the values contained in the printer s font selection table To specify a different symbol set send a symbol set selection command prior to the Font Selection ID command Also see Font Selection by ID Command later in this chapter 8 6 PCL Font Selection EN A few symbol sets are listed below For a more complete list refer to Appendix C in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Typical Symbol Set Values Symbol Set Name Symbol Set ID ISO 69 French 1F ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 ECMA 94 ON ISO 6 ASCII OU Legal 1U Roman 8 8U PC 8 10U 3 of 9 Barcode OY Windows 3 1 Latin 1 ANSI 19U Note User defined symbol sets are supported in some HP LaserJet printers To specify a user defined symbol set use the symbol set ID value as defined by the Symbol Set ID Code Command See Chapter 10 for more information Example To specify ASCII as the symbol set for the primary font send Ec U To specify Roman 8 as the symbol set for the secondary font send Eo 8U EN Symbol Set Command 8 7 7 bit ISO Symbol Sets The HP LaserJet printers provide several 7 bit ISO International Organization for Standardization or keyboard symbol sets to support European languages Each ISO symbol set is a unique ordering of symbols contained within the Roman 8 symbol set see Appendix B in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide The printer automatically generates the requested ISO font from an HP R
259. ce Code 00 01 character code 33 Exclamation Mark 00 22 character code 65 Uppercase A 00 43 character code 97 Lowercase A 01 4c character code 252 Superior Lowercase N 00 c5 character code 253 Superior Numeral 2 01 31 character code 254 Small Solid Square Box 00 00 character code 255 No Break Space E c34115S PCL Symbol Set ID 10U User Defined Symbol Set Examples 10 15 10 16 User Defined Symbol Sets EN EN Soft Font Creation Introduction A font that is downloaded transferred from a computer to a printer is called a soft font A PCL soft font contains a font header and a set of character definitions The font header and character definitions contain all the information needed to format a font for use in the HP LaserJet printers Every PCL font header begins with a font descriptor which identifies the basic characteristics common to all characters of a font such as font type baseline position character cell width and height character orientation symbol set etc Every PCL character definition contains a character descriptor and a body of character data Furthermore the character definition always consists of one or more character data blocks Each character data block begins with its own character data block header The character descriptor is a block of data that identifies the characteristics for a specific c
260. characters HP GL 2 also allows anisotropic non linear scaling of scalable fonts which produces characters that are stretched in one direction Internal Fonts 7 11 7 12 Fonts EN Note EN 8 PCL Font Selection Introduction Several characteristics identify a font as described in Chapter 7 Fonts Font characteristic selection commands described in this chapter are used to specify the desired font characteristics for printing Commands are included for the following characteristics symbol set spacing pitch height style stroke weight and typeface family The printer maintains a font select table in its operating code that contains the characteristic values of the current font Whenever the printer receives a font select command escape sequence specifying a new characteristic value the printer records that characteristic in the table After the table is updated receives new characteristic values and text is ready to be printed the printer performs a font select The printer searches the available fonts and scalable typefaces to select one that matches or most closely matches the characteristics as listed in the font select table A font must be in the printer to be selected for printing Introduction 8 1 Font Selection Priority The printer selects a font based on a prioritization of its design characteristics then its resolution then its physical location in the printer and finally its orientation Fo
261. cially useful when using an RS 232 C interface PE flag value coord_pair flag value coord_pair or PE Note Parameter values are self terminating do not use commas with this command Also you must use a semicolon to terminate PE Parameter Format Functional Range Default flag character lt gt or 7 no default value character flag dependent coordinate pair character 230 to 230 1 no default Refer to the table following the parameter description Lines are drawn using the current line type and current units The printer draws to all points with the pen down unless a pen up flag precedes the X Y coordinates If the final move is made with the pen up the pen remains in the up position otherwise the pen is left in the down position The PE command causes the printer to interpret coordinate pairs as relative coordinates unless they are preceded by an absolute value flag Relative integer coordinates produce the most compact data stream For best results scale your drawings so you use only integer coordinates and use relative plotting mode After PE is executed the previous plotting mode absolute or relative is restored 20 34 The Vector Group EN The PE command represents vectors in base 64 default or base 32 explained under Encoding PE Flag Values and X Y Coordinates In parameter value data all spaces delete characters control cha
262. ckness of the strokes that compose characters Examples of medium and bold stroke weights are shown in the figure below Medium Bold Figure 7 8 Stroke Weight 7 6 Fonts EN Typeface Family Typeface identifies the design of the symbols of the font Each typeface family has unique and distinguishing design characteristics The following example shows typefaces from various typeface families Braal Uncial Dom Casual CG Palacio University Roman Futura Book II Garamond Kursiv ITC Souvenir Light ITC Benguiat Book Microstyle Extended Figure 7 9 Typeface EN Typeface Family 7 7 Orientation Orientation defines the position of the logical page with respect to the physical page as shown in Figure 7 10 Physical Page Physical Page Top Margin 0 0 Top Margin Logical Page Portrait Landscape Figure 7 10 Orientation The HP LaserJet IID IIP 2000 and all PCL 5 LaserJet printers automatically rotate fonts to the current orientation all fonts are available in all four orientations Earlier printers required fonts in the orientation which matched the orientation of the page Thus orientation is not as important as it once was The orientation of a font is still a consideration when the amount of user memory RAM is a concern Internal and other ROM based fonts consume very little user memory On some printers downloaded fonts scaled fonts and rotated fonts are stored entirely in RAM For bitmap fonts select
263. combinations which permit concatenation are Table 23 35 Text Path Label Origin DVO right LO s 1 2 3 and 11 12 13 21 DV1 down LO s 3 6 9 and 13 16 19 DV2 left LO s 7 8 9 and 17 18 19 DV3 up LO s 1 4 7 and 11 14 17 21 The following two rules determine where the pen is positioned after a label string is drawn Rule 1 is for DV LO combinations which permit concatenation rule 2 clarifies other DV LO combinations 1 If aconcatenation combination is specified the pen position is updated to give the normal delta X space between the last character of the first label and the first character of the second label Note For proportional fonts that use a pair wise spacing table the pen position is updated using an average delta X space 2 If anon concatenation combination is specified the pen position that existed immediately prior to the LB command is restored EN LO Label Origin 23 65 Table 23 36 Related Commands Group CP Character Plot The Character Group DV Define Variable Text Path LB Label SA Select Alternate Font This command selects the alternate font already designated by the AD command for subsequent labeling Use the SA command to shift from the currently selected standard font to the designated alternate font SA The SA command tells the printer to draw subsequent labeling commands using characters from the alternate symbol set previously desi
264. command 23 8 23 78 character slope 23 29 character space 23 8 adjusting 23 51 character spacing 24 4 fixed spaced fonts 5 20 horizontal 7 5 character stroke weight 8 16 character style 8 14 character thickness 7 6 character parameter parameterized 1 6 characteristics font 8 1 24 5 characters designing large continuation 11 53 printable range 11 30 user defined symbol sets 10 4 characters per inch 7 5 8 10 checksum character descriptor 11 64 11 69 font header 11 39 11 42 chord angle 20 10 20 25 21 16 and circle smoothness 20 26 example 20 10 varying example 20 11 Cl command 20 25 circle and arc counting points in 21 16 and wedges filling 21 8 drawing in HP GL 2 mode 20 4 drawing in polygon mode 21 14 smoothness and chord angle 20 26 Circle command 20 4 20 25 clamped integer 17 10 clamped real number 17 10 class 2 character descriptor 11 54 class 3 character descriptor 11 63 class 4 character descriptor 11 63 class character descriptor 11 53 11 68 clear horizontal margins command 5 15 clearing status readback 16 5 clipping 2 8 raster area 15 11 CO command 19 19 coding efficiency raster compression 15 19 cold reset 3 9 column Glossary 2 columns 5 20 columns and rows 2 5 6 4 combining commands 1 8 comma 17 9 command parameter 1 3 parsing 24 2 processing time 24 10 commands 1 3 display functions 24 12 HP GL 2 1 4 PCL 1 3 PJL 1 4 unsupported PCL 1 2 commands HP GL 2 AA Arc Absolute 20 5 20 9
265. context table 3 5 PCL context table 3 2 faxback service HP FIRST Customer Support 2 feature settings 3 2 FF Form Feed 6 13 Fl command 23 54 fill and line types 22 1 fill examples rectangular area 14 13 fill patterns starting position 22 6 user defined 22 13 Fill Polygon FP command 21 12 21 31 fill procedure rectangular area 14 1 Fill Rectangle Absolute command 21 39 Fill Rectangle Relative command 21 42 EN EN Fill Rectangular Area command 14 9 Fill Type command 22 9 fill types 22 4 Fill Wedge WG command 21 27 21 45 filled rectangles 21 4 filling characters HP GL 2 23 20 filling polygons 21 12 final font selection 9 11 first code font header 11 30 user defined symbol set header 10 7 fixed underline 8 29 fixed spaced fonts character spacing 5 20 7 4 8 9 font selection 8 23 printing 23 15 floating underline 8 29 Flush All Pages command 16 24 FN command 23 56 font 7 1 defined Glossary 5 alternate font definition 23 18 auto rotation 8 20 bitmap 7 2 7 9 11 2 bitmap in HP GL 2 mode 23 15 bitmap vs scalable 7 2 bitmap coordinate system 11 4 bound 9 8 bound and unbound 9 8 Glossary 1 cache 16 22 cartridge 7 2 Glossary 5 character cell illustration 11 19 characteristic 23 19 characteristic priority 8 2 characteristics 7 1 8 4 24 5 classifications 11 2 Control command 9 5 control symbol sets 10 12 copy assign 9 5 data type 10 5 deleting 4 2 9 3 9 5 24 8 descriptor size 11 15 design coordi
266. coordinate system and units are described in detail in Chapter 17 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics and Chapter 18 The Picture Frame If no HP GL 2 picture frame size is specified using the commands described in Chapter 18 then the default HP GL 2 picture frame is used The default HP GL 2 picture frame is the current top and bottom margins and the left and right edges of the logical page The HP GL 2 picture frame rotates with the PCL page orientation but is not affected by the PCL print direction Physical Page Picture Frame Logical Page Anchor Point Picture Frame Figure 2 3 PCL Logical Page with HP GL 2 Picture Frame EN Printable Area The printable area is the area of the physical page in which the printer is able to place a dot The physical page refers to the size of the media letter legal etc installed in the printer The relationship between physical page logical page default picture frame and printable area is defined in Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 O Physical Page Printable Area Logical Page HP GL 2 Default Picture Frame A Physical Page Width B Paea Page Length C Logical Page Width D Maximum Logical Page Length E Distance Between the Side dag of the Physical Page and the Logical Page F Distance Between the TpprBotom Edge of the Physical Page and the Logical Page G Distance Between the Edge of the Physical Page and the Printable Area H Distance Bet
267. cros Macro Greation 20 42 iie papi e dd Shee iat Ree da bias cae 12 3 Macro Invocation 2 6 2 hne er seen reece eb eee eee Eee eee EE 12 4 Temporary Permanent Macros 0 0000 cece nee eee nes 12 5 Deleting Macros 0 000 c ett eens 12 6 Macho lb 0 0 eeed bee beemreeee tad anes pena d ede ee eee ees 12 6 Example raaa td Gawler a Gaetan a ETE an eee ae daa 12 6 Contents 6 EN Macro Control 2 05 eee b bd cei wegriac ele eb bas dlwkbeaa yee danke 12 7 Example 2s 1oee heer ae eevee ha cle oe ee hee ee hee eee 12 8 Macro Control Example 0000 ee 12 9 The PCL Print Model Command Sequence 0 00 eee 13 5 Source Transparency Mode Command 00000eee eee eaee 13 6 Pattern Transparency Mode Command 0000ce eee e eee eae 13 7 Pattern ID Area Fill ID Command 0000 cece eee 13 8 Select Current Pattern Command 0200 eee 13 12 User Defined Pattern Graphics 00 00 c cece eee 13 13 User Defined Pattern Implementation 000 ee aeee 13 13 User Defined Pattern Command 000 0 cece eee eee eee 13 16 Format Byte 0 sesi ece4 cede ea bees ee eee Ee ee Pee 13 17 Continuation Byte 1 aaua aaaea 13 17 Pixel Encoding Byte 2 0 0 00 ee 13 17 Reserved Byte 3 2 2 000s cee eee 13 18 Height in Pixels Bytes 4 and 5 0 00006 c cee 13 18 Width in Pixels Bytes 6 and 7 0 00 cece eee 13 18 Pat
268. ction 0 180 Landscape Mode 3 Raster height height of Logical Page _ _ Raster height Raster height height of width of Logical Page Logical Page Landscape Portrait Mode 0 Mode 0 Print Direction Print Direction 90 270 90 270 Figure 15 7 Maximum Raster Height 15 12 Raster Graphics EN Raster Width Command Note EN The Raster Width command specifies the width in pixels of the raster area Width is in the direction that the raster rows are laid down hence width is subject to the current raster presentation mode and print direction see Figure 15 8 ES r S Width in pixels of the specified resolution Default depends on raster presentation mode when presentation mode is 0 width width of logical page left graphics margin when presentation mode is 3 then width dimension of logical page along paper length left graphics margin Range 0 to logical page width left graphics margin Greater values default to the logical page width left graphics margin This command allows you to implicitly tell the printer to pad raster rows that are not specified for the full raster width with zeros Unspecified data maps to either white or transparent depending on the source transparency mode When a Transfer Raster Data command is received that specifies a row of data that is longer than the raster width the data that extends past the raster width is clipped This command is ignored af
269. cture Frame size Defaults the PCL Picture Frame anchor point Defaults the HP GL 2 plot size Defaults the PCL logical page orientation e A page size page length or orientation command Defaults the PCL Picture Frame anchor point Defaults the PCL Picture Frame Defaults the HP GL 2 plot size Defaults P1 and P2 IPR IR commands Resets the soft clip window to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries IW command Clears the polygon buffer PMO PM2 Updates the cursor to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 e Redefining the PCL Picture Frame Defaults P1 and P2 IP IR commands Resets the soft clip window IW to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries Clears the polygon buffer PM0O PM2 Updates the current pen position to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 e Setting the picture frame anchor point Defaults P1 and P2 IR IR commands Resets the soft clip window to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries IW command Clears the polygon buffer PMO PM2 Updates the current pen position to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 e Setting an HP GL 2 plot size Changes the picture frame scaling factor Default Settings 18 15 As the printer enters HP GL 2 mode for the first time since CE power on or control panel reset all HP GL 2 variables are at their default settings as determined by the Picture Presentation Directives the PCL Picture Frame Size Picture Frame Anchor Point and HP GL 2 Plot
270. current polygon or subpolygon and exit polygon mode Remember if you have not closed your polygon executing PM2 adds a point to close the polygon Refer to Pen Status and Location in Chapter 17 Introduction to HP GL 2 Graphics The following example draws the surface area of a 3 prong electrical receptacle as a series of subpolygons then fills and edges it using the FP and EP commands respectively Table 21 20 Example Using the PM Command 7E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA2000 2000 Specify absolute plotting and move to 2000 2000 PM0 PD3000 2000 3000 3000 Enter polygon mode store a Pen Down command and store locations 3000 2000 and 3000 3000 PD2000 3000 Store two more pen down locations PD2080 2660 2480 2660 2480 2840 2080 2840 2080 2660 2000 2000 2000 3000 and 2000 2000 PM1 Close the first polygon PD2080 2160 2480 Store 5 pen down locations for a 2160 2480 2340 subpolygon 2080 2340 2080 2160 PM1 Close the subpolygon Store pen down locations for another subpolygon PM1 Close the second subpolygon PM Polygon Mode Command 21 37 Table 21 20 Example Using the PM Command continued PD2920 2340 2920 2660 2720 2660 Begin a third subpolygon that
271. d value field 0 all complete pages it ejects pages A and B and retains page C If the printer received the flush all pages value field 1 it processes and ejects pages A B and C The printer resumes receiving processing data when the last page is processed and ejected from the paper path Using the Flush All Pages command significantly reduces printing performance If possible applications should use the Free Space command to check for available memory without using the Flush All Pages command If the memory status readback response indicates sufficient memory available to process a job the Flush All Pages command does need not be used If the memory response indicates insufficient memory available to run the job then the application should use the Flush All Pages command to make memory available and then check available memory a second time When possible use the Flush All Pages command only at the beginning of a print job prior to the receipt and processing of any data This minimized to minimize performance reduction 16 24 Status Readback EN Echo Command Notes EN The Echo command echoes its value field in ASCII format back to the host Eat sex Echo value ASCII Default Range 0 32767 to 32767 If multiple users are requesting status it can be difficult to distinguish one user s status response from another The Echo command provides the means to lab
272. d 5 Adaptive compression enables the combined use of any of the four previous compression methods 0 through 3 and it includes the ability to print empty all zeros rows or to duplicate rows Adaptive compression interprets a raster image as a block of raster data rather than as individual rows The result of this interpretation is that the Transfer Raster Data Ec b W command is sent only once at the beginning of a raster data transfer and the value field identifies the number of bytes in the block all rows For the other compression methods the Transfer Raster Data command is sent at the beginning of each row and the value field identifies the number of bytes for that row only The size of a block is limited to 32 767 bytes 32 767 bytes is the number of compressed bytes and not the size of the uncompressed data To transfer greater than 32 767 bytes send multiple blocks Adaptive compression uses three control bytes at the beginning of each row within the block The first of these bytes the command byte identifies the type of compression for the row The two following bytes identify the number of bytes or rows involved The format for adaptive compression raster rows is shown below lt command byte gt lt of bytes rows upper byte gt lt of bytes rows lower byte gt lt first raster row byte gt lt last raster row byte gt The command byte designates the compression method empty row or row duplica
273. d Pattern 13 16 p R Set Pattern Reference Point 13 22 p X Horizontal Cursor Positioning PCL Units 6 6 p Y Vertical Cursor Positioning PCL Units 6 12 r A Start Raster Graphics 15 14 r F Raster Graphics Presentation 15 8 r T Raster Height 15 11 r T Raster Width 15 13 rC End Raster Graphics 15 30 s M Free Space 16 21 s X Echo 16 25 t R Raster Graphics Resolution 15 6 v N Source Transparency Mode 13 6 v O Pattern Transparency mode 13 7 v T Select Current Pattern Command 13 12 amp Sp 6 13 ERROR 20 memoryoverflow 16 2 24 15 ERROR 21 printoverrun 24 10 24 15 ERROR 22 bufferoverflow 24 15 ERROR 40 datatransfer 24 15 Numerics 12345X Universal Exit Language 4 3 1T Job Separation 4 11 9 Clear Horizontal Margins 5 15 A AA command 20 9 Absolute Arc Three Point command 20 16 Absolute Character Size command 23 8 23 14 23 74 absolute cursor positioning 6 2 24 5 Absolute Direction command 23 9 23 21 23 29 absolute vs relative pen movement 17 25 AC command 22 5 22 6 AD command 23 18 adaptive compression block size 15 25 15 27 compression methods 15 25 control bytes 15 25 cursor position 15 27 data block 15 25 delta row 15 25 15 27 duplicate row 15 25 15 26 15 27 empty row 15 25 15 26 15 27 format 15 25 operation hints 15 27 row length 15 27 run length encoded 15 25 15 27 seed row 15 27 TIFF 15 25 15 27 y offset 15 27 addre
274. d eject the page BZ Bezier Absolute 20 23 o 1016 8128 hd l l l l i l l 1 1 i l Starting Point 1st Control Point 4064 8128 71127620 e I l l I l I l 1016 5080 5588 5080 C2 l l l I I 1 2 3 4 5 6 T l T l T T l T 5 1 BZ1016 8128 5588 5080 4572 7112 4064 8128 7112 7620 7112 2032 711220223 Figure 20 14 Table 20 15 Related Commands AA Arc Absolute BR Bezier Relative AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point CI Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width 20 24 The Vector Group Group The Vector Group The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Cl Circle This command draws the circumference of a circle using the specified radius and chord angle If you want a filled circle refer to the WG or PM commands Cl radius chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default radius current units 230 to 29 4 no default chordangle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5o The CI command includes an automatic pen down When a CI command is received the pen lifts moves from the center of the circle the current pen location to the starting point on the circumference lowers the pen draws the circle then returns with the pen up to the center of the circle After the circle
275. d pattern might appear as shown below PGE INFO PATTERNS IDLIST 88 OCTYPE 4 LOCUNIT 2 If the current pattern is set to one of the internal HP defined patterns no pattern ID number assigned then no number is available and the response ERROR NONE is returned PCL INFO PATTERNS ERROR NONE Entity Status Responses 16 17 Notes 16 18 Status Readback Symbol Set Response The response for symbol sets inquire entity value field 3 lists all of the symbol set IDs IDLIST for all of the symbol sets that can be bound to unbound scalable fonts in the specified location type and unit A symbol set response might appear as shown below PCL INFO SYMBOLSETS IDLIST 0U 2K 8M 8U 11U Status location type 1 currently selected is an invalid location for unbound font symbol sets and returns an error ERROR NONE Example responses in this chapter for SYMBOLSETS do not list the complete list of internal available symbol sets only a partial list OD 01 0N 0S 0U 1E 1F 1G The internal symbol sets are printer dependent and may vary from printer to printer refer to the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for printer specific information EN Entity Error Codes If you request out of range values in the command value fields or if the entity is unsupported or does not exist or if the request is inappropriate the printer responds with one of four possible errors Inval
276. d syntax discussion pertaining to each command tells you which kind of units each parameter requires The SC parameters are mapped onto the current locations of P1 and P2 P1 and P2 do not represent a graphic limit therefore the new user unit coordinate system extends across the entire range of the plotter unit coordinate system Thus you can print to a point beyond P1 or P2 as long as you are within the effective window For example you can print from the point 1 3 5 to the point 5 5 1 5 as shown in the following illustration SC Scale 19 45 PCL Picture Frame Pi 0 0 user units P2 5 5 user units Figure 19 20Example Printing point to point Table 19 22 Related Commands Group IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window The Configuration Status Group Table 19 23 Possible Error Conditions for SC Condition Printer Response no parameters turns scaling off more than 7 parameters executes first 7 parameters for types 0 or 1 6 parameters or less than 4 parameters ignores command for type 2 any more or less than 5 parameters ignores command Xwin Xmax OF Yuin YmMaxOr number out of range ignores command Xractor 0 or Yractor 9 ignores command 19 46 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN The Vector Group Introduction The information in this chapter enables you to achieve the
277. d that the first pixel in a row is white hence the second byte indicates how many white pixels start the row The third byte indicates how many black pixels the fourth byte indicates the number of white pixels again etc If the first pixel in a row is black the white pixel indicator the second byte is 0 If there are more than 255 pixels ina row of the same type there is a byte containing 255 followed by a 0 byte followed by a byte containing the count of remaining pixels of the current type The width of each row is determined by the character width in dots as specified in the character descriptor for the character The pixel count number of 1 s and 0 s bits for each row in the character cell must equal the character width For example in Figure 11 5 the cell width is 20 thus each row excluding the repetition count byte adds up to 20 Once the row has been filled the row is duplicated as indicated in its first byte then a new row is started 11 54 Soft Font Creation EN Padding for Byte Alignment Character Height Left Offset ERP Ne Bd Character Width Line white black white black white black Repetition pixels pixels pixels pixels pixels pixels 2 o 20 2 S 7 o o 2 6 4 6 2 8 8 1 7 4 7 1 12 8 4 8 1 5 10 5 z Uncompressed 60 Bytes Byte alignment is necessary only Compressed 25 Bytes for raster data i e Not necessary for
278. dditional command byte replacement bytes may be added as shown below Ec 3m W Command Byte 1 to 8 Replacement Bytes Command Byte 1 to 8 Replacement Bytes In the command byte the upper three bits identify the number of replacement delta bytes which can be 1 to 8 bytes The lower five bits identify the location the replacement bytes are to be positioned This position is identified as some number of bytes in from the first untreated byte referred to as the offset For example if there are 5 replacement bytes and the offset is 7 then the replacement bytes replace byte 7 8 9 10 and 11 the five bytes beginning at byte 7 from the seed row If there is more than one replacement in a row the second offset is counted from the next untreated byte in the row the first byte following the last replacement byte Indicates 2 Bytes Command Byte co ae i i ise aa 111111 i L Selects Delta Row Compression Mode Number of Data Replacement Bytes That Follow Byte Number of Bytes to Replace Relative Offset Figure 15 9 Set Compression Method Command 15 21 As mentioned the offset is contained in the lower five bits of the command byte allows for offset values from 0 to 31 Compression mode allows offsets larger than 31 bytes as follows e An offset value of 0 30 indicates that the replacement bytes are offset from the 1st byte to the 31st byte e A value of 31 indicates that the next byte fo
279. de EN RT Relative Arc Three Point 20 49 Table 20 31 Example Using the RT Command Relative Arc Three Point continued SP1 PA1000 100 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing Specify the absolute point 1000 100 as the starting location PR PD1500 0 Specify relative plotting pen down and draw 1500 0 relative plotter units from the current pen location 1000 100 PU 1850 1050 PD350 0 Lift the pen move 1850 1050 relative coordinates place the pen down and draw a line 350 plu in the X direction PU 350 700 PD350 0 Lift the pen move 350 700 plu from the current location place the pen down and draw a line 350 plu in the X direction PUO 350 PDO 1500 1500 0 Lift the pen move 350 plu to the left place the pen down draw a line 1500 plu up and then another line 1500 units to the right RT700 750 0 1500 Draw an arc from the current pen position through a point 700 750 plu away with an ending point 0 1500 plu from the beginning of the arc PU700 850 PD Lift the pen and move it 700 850 plu from the current pen position pen down 20 50 The Vector Group EN EN Table 20 31 Example Using the RT Command Relative Arc Three Point continued RT100 100 0 200 PU100 100 PD200 0 Draw an arc from the current pen position through a p
280. ded into symbol collections These symbol collections identify the symbols according to some language basis or special application usage Some symbol collections include Basic Latin East European Turkish Math Semi Graphic and Dingbats If a symbol collection is included in an unbound font all of the symbols of that collection are included See Appendix D in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide to identify symbols in the various collections The symbols within a symbol collection do not change from one unbound font to the next For example the Basic Latin collection always contains the same symbols Different fonts may contain different symbol collections For example the internal Univers typeface contains the Latin Math and Semi Graphic collections these collections contain all the symbols required for the 35 symbol sets that Univers supports The ITC Zapf Dingbats typeface on the other hand contains only the Dingbats collection which includes all the symbols required for the five supported symbol sets When searching unbound scalable fonts during font selection for those that match the requested symbol set the printer actually searches for symbol collections To identify symbol collections which meet the needs of the requested symbol set the printer uses two numbers the Character Requirements number and the Character Complement number Unbound Scalable Fonts 9 9 Character Complement Numbers The Intellifont Unbound Scalable
281. down e g 45 would round to 0 Refer to the following illustration Vector Font SBO Bitmap Font SB1 Figure 23 17Scalable Versus Bitmap Variable Text Path Printing Suppose you want your label plotted in the direction shown in the following illustration You can do this in one of two ways measure the run and rise or measure the angle DI Absolute Direction 23 31 018 5 4 9 D1 866 5 a A M a i E th _ URE eee Figure 23 18Label Print Direction Rise and Run To measure the run and rise first draw a grid with the lines parallel to the X and Y axis The grid units should be the same size on all sides but their actual size is irrelevant Then draw a line parallel to the label and one parallel to the X axis The lines should intersect to form an angle Select a point on the open end of your angle where another line would create a triangle On the line parallel to the X axis count the number of grid units from the intersection of the two lines to your selected point This is the run In the illustration above the run is 8 5 Now count the number of units from your selected point along a perpendicular line that intersects the line along the label This is the rise In the illustration above the rise is 4 9 Your DI command using the run and rise is DI8 5 4 9 If you know the angle 6 you can use the trigonometric functions sine sin and cosine cos In this example 30 cos 30 0 86
282. draws the ground plug portion of the receptacle AA2720 2500 180 PD2920 2340 Store a 180 arc that goes from 2720 2660 to 2720 2500 PM2 FP EP Close the subpolygon and exit polygon mode Fill even odd then edge the polygon and subpolygons currently stored in the buffer 2 0A Enter the PCL mode 7E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 38000 3000 2000 2600 Figure 21 21 Table 21 21 Related Commands Group EP Edge Polygon FP Fill Polygon The Polygon Group 21 38 The Polygon Group EN RA Fill Rectangle Absolute Note EN This command defines and fills a rectangle using absolute coordinates Use RA to fill rectangular shapes in drawings To outline a rectangle using absolute coordinates use the EA command RA X Y Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates currentunits 230 to 29 4 no default The RA command defines and fills a rectangle using the current pen the current line and fill types and absolute X Y coordinates The RA command includes an automatic pen down When the command operation is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored e X Y Coordinates Specify the corner of the rectangle that is diagonally opposite from the current pen location the starting point of the rectangle Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as
283. duction 13 13 defined Glossary 15 assign ID 13 8 14 5 base pattern 13 13 data 13 18 data see also descriptor 13 16 define pattern command 13 16 deleting 13 23 descriptor format header 13 16 entity 16 3 example 13 19 fill example 14 17 header fields see also user defined pattern descriptor fields 13 16 ID number 13 16 Pattern Control command 13 23 Pattern ID command 13 8 14 5 permanent 13 23 reference point 13 14 selecting ID 13 8 14 5 Set Pattern Reference Point command 13 22 status readback 16 10 16 17 temporary 13 23 User Defined Pattern command 13 16 user defined symbol set Wintroduction 10 1 defined Glossary 15 characters and character mapping 10 4 control command 10 12 creating 10 2 data symbol set format pictured 10 4 defining designing 10 1 definition command 10 4 encoded symbol set designator 10 6 examples 10 13 headers 10 4 ID code 10 6 ID Code command 10 2 used with unbound scalable fonts 10 1 user units 17 11 17 20 creating 17 24 in scaling parameters 19 41 scaling 19 5 19 40 X and Y axis ranges in scaling parameters 19 41 V value field PCL command 1 6 values allowed HP GL 2 17 10 variety font header 11 35 vector fill 22 39 vector graphics Glossary 15 vector graphics limits 17 19 Vector Group HP GL 2 20 1 commands 17 4 vendor version font header typeface 11 24 11 26 vertical character spacing 8 12 cursor positioning control codes 6 13 text p
284. e PM command the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer and are used when the polygon is edged or filled Table 20 20 Example Using the Pen Down Command ELE Reset the printer EL B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA10 10 Begin absolute plotting from coordinate 10 10 PD2500 10 10 1500 10 10 Set the Pen Down and draw lines between the specified points EQ OA Enter the PCL mode EOE 20 32 The Vector Group Send a reset to end the job and eject the page EN Note EN Intermediate Intermediate point point oN End Starting point End oint current point p pen location l Figure 20 18 If an odd number of coordinates is specified an X coordinate without a corresponding Y coordinate the printer ignores the last unmatched coordinate Table 20 21 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute The Vector Group PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up LA Line Attributes Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width SM Symbol Mode PD Pen Down 20 33 PE Polyline Encoded This command incorporates the PA PR PU PD and SP commands into an encrypted format that substantially decreases the size of your file and the time required for data transmission This command is espe
285. e see Table 5 1 Logical Page Orientation Command 5 7 pil 0 0 PCL Print Direction Picture Frame Anchor Point Logical Page Orientation Portrait X PCL Print Direction Picture Frame Anchor Point Picture Frame Logical Page Logical Page Orientation Landscape Figure 5 2 HP GL 2 Picture Orientation with Respect to Logical Page Orientation 5 8 Page Control Commands EN Print Direction Command The Print Direction command rotates the logical page coordinate system with respect to the current orientation without performing a page eject This rotation is performed in 90 increments in a counterclockwise direction This allows printing in four directions on the same page Default Ec amp a P 0 0 rotation 90 90 ccw rotation 180 180 ccw rotation 270 270 ccw rotation 0 Range 0 90 180 270 Other values ignored Changing the print direction causes the following e The print origin moves with the logical page rotation For example rotating a default page portrait orientation 0 print direction 90 causes data to print in the landscape direction across the portrait page e The margins are translated when the print direction changes by 90 the left margin becomes the new top margin the former top margin becomes the new right margin etc e The cursor position remains at the same physical location e All Subsequent printing characters area fill patt
286. e the circle and the surrounding square appears overlaid onto the destination The pattern however is allowed to pour through only onto the white pixeled area of the destination The circle is visible in the result but only two opposing quarters appeared patterned In the fourth example 1d both source and pattern modes are opaque The entire source image is overlaid onto the destination and the entire circle is patterned Introduction 13 3 qa 1b 1c 1d Source Transparency Mode Pattern Transparency Mode Source Image Pattern Source Transparency Mode Pattern Transparency Mode Pattern Source Transparency Mode Pattern Transparency Mode Source Image Pattern Source Transparency Mode O Transparent Transparent Destination Result 0 Transparent 1 Opaque gt E N Destination Result 1 Opaque OQ Transparent gt Destination 1 Opaque 1 Opaque gt Figure 13 3 Effect of Transparency Modes on Images 13 4 The PCL Print Model EN Command Sequence EN The following illustration shows the Print Model Command Sequence for selecting a current pattern and using it to fill a destination image Table 13 1 Operation Comments Download Page Data Prior raster and character data downloaded to the page is considered destination image Select Transparency Modes EU v N and or Fc v 0O Select Specific Patt
287. e 2 oriee isa eee eh oo daa Deer aa oie ead 19 44 The Vector Group Drawing Lin S 22 soari 024444 fine see boda 4 ee ba eee ae dz 20 2 Drawing CitcleS ices ure tose ned hae eee Sheed bed bed eee eee oe 20 4 Drawing AICS 0 cts 20 5 Angle of Rotation 0 0 00 c eee 20 7 Drawing Bezier CurveS auaa cece ete 20 8 AA AIC ADSOIULG i ic nieret sepie cee pianie ee ann cutee Oder dae ew ame d 20 9 AR Ate Relatives 225 si cnt lt ana shewa ee benbasaa ested anale eo aaa f 20 13 AT Absolute Arc Three Point 0 0 0c cc eae 20 16 BR Bezier Relative 0 0 0 eee eens 20 19 BZ Bezier Absolute 2 0 0 0 00 ee ee eee 20 22 Ch GU CIO nenea Gow wre de xraes Saeko ww eS we aon Sass Vane aha os 20 25 PA Plot Absolute 0 0 eee eens 20 30 PD Pen Down 2 0 cc ee eee eens 20 31 PE Polyline Encoded 0 ccc eee eens 20 34 Encoding PE Flag Values and X Y Coordinates 20 37 Example Using the PE Command 000e cece aneee 20 41 PR Plot Relative nre dacs tadan ox cae cacao oats Pe toon bees ta ed eae 2d 20 44 ePemMW D426 cree bad hPa eos Gans ee bane Merman ale wee bares 20 46 RT Relative Arc Three Point 0 0 0 0 ccc eee ee eee 20 48 Contents 10 EN The Polygon Group Using the Polygon Buffer Drawing Rectangles Drawing Wedges 00005 Drawing Polygons 0 5 Drawing Subpolygons Fi
288. e Class byte is used to distinguish compound characters from simple Intellifont contour characters All TrueType scalable characters are handed to the TrueType font scaler in the same format consequently the Class byte does not provide vital new information For TrueType set the Class value to 15 Table 11 51 Value Class 1 Bitmap 2 Compressed Bitmap 3 Contour Intellifont Scalable 4 Compound Contour Intellifont Scalable 15 TrueType Scalable These are described elsewhere in this chapter 11 68 Soft Font Creation EN Character Data Size Ul The value of the Character Data Size should equal the sum of the sizes of the Character Data Size Glyph ID and TrueType Glyph Data fields This value alerts the PCL interpreter when a continuation block is needed The minimum possible value is 4 The value of Character Data Size plus Descriptor Size plus 4 for the Format Continuation Reserved and Checksum bytes will never be less than the value given in the character download command If the sum is exactly equal to then no continuation block is to be expected for the given character However if the sum exceeds then a continuation block is needed A condition for the validity of a downloaded scalable TrueType character is that the sum of the values for all of that character s data blocks equals the sum of the Descriptor Size and Character Data Size and 2 for Reserved and Checksum plus 2 tim
289. e HP PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual p n 33459 90903 If you have ordered another PCL Technical Reference document this manual and the PCL 5 Comparison Guide are the updated replacement documents EN iii Trademark Credits Intellifont and Garth Graphic are U S registered trademarks of Agfa Division Miles Inc CG Triumvirate and Shannon are trademarks of Agfa Division Miles Inc CG Bodoni CG Century Schoolbook CG Goudy Old Style CG Melliza Microstyle CG Omega CG Palacio CG Times and CG Trump Mediaeval are products of Agfa Division Miles Inc CG Times a product of Agfa Division Miles Inc is based on Times New Roman a U S registered trademark of Monotype Corporation plc PCL and Vectra are U S registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company Resolution Enhancement is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company BM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation TrueType and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc Centronics is a U S registered trademark of Centronics Corporation ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Benguiat ITC Bookman ITC Cheltenham ITC Galliard ITC Korinna ITC Lubalin Graph ITC Souvenir ITC Zapf Chancery and ITC Zapf Dingbats are U S registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation I
290. e TrueType character descriptor and data when a continuation block is not required Table 11 49 next page shows the format of the TrueType character descriptor and data with multiple character data blocks Character Descriptor Formats 11 65 Table 11 47 TrueType Character Descriptor no continuation block required Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Format 15 Continuation 0 2 Descriptor Size Class 15 4 additional descriptor data may be inserted here 2 Character Data Size Desc Size 4 Glyph ID Desc Size 6 TrueType Glyph Data Desc Size 2 Reserved Checksum Character data block size as defined in Character Definition command Table 11 48 Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Format 15 Continuation 0 2 Descriptor Size Class 15 4 additional descriptor data may be inserted here 2 Character Data Size Desc Size 4 Glyph ID Desc Size 11 66 Soft Font Creation EN EN Table 11 48 continued 6 beginning of TrueType Glyph Data Desc Size Table 11 49 TrueType Character Descriptor multiple character data blocks Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Format 15 Continuation 1 2 conclusion of TrueType Glyph Data 2 Reserved Checksum Character data block size as defined in Character Definition command Format UB This is the first byte of every character data block
291. e and end point coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If current scaling is not isotropic the arc drawn is elliptical rather than circular Note the following about intermediate and end points If the intermediate point and end point are the same as the current pen location the command draws a dot If the intermediate point is the same as either the current pen location or the end point a line is drawn between the current pen location and the end point 20 48 The Vector Group EN e Ifthe end point is the same as the current pen location a circle is drawn with its diameter being the distance between the current pen position and the intermediate point e If the current pen position intermediate point and end point are collinear a straight line is drawn e If the intermediate point does not lie between the current pen location and the end point and the three points are collinear two lines are drawn one from the current pen location and the other from the end point leaving a gap between them Refer to the following illustration Both lines extend to the PCL Picture Frame limits or current window X oo Current intermediate pen point PCL Picture location 7 Frame Figure 20 21 Table 20 31 Example Using the RT Command Relative Arc Three Point ELE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mo
292. e are described elsewhere in this chapter If the format number is different from that expected by the device the character is discarded Continuation B This is the second and last byte of every character data block header It specifies whether the following data is the first 0 data block of a new character definition or a continuation 1 block for a character definition which has already been received by the printer Because the value field in a Character Definition command is limited to 32767 bytes characters whose byte count exceed this must be sent in two or more blocks Table 11 42 shows the continuation block for an Intellifont Scalable font Descriptor Size UB This is the first byte of the character descriptor It specifies the size of the character descriptor in bytes The typical descriptor size for Intellifont scalable fonts is 2 Class UB Specifies the format of the character data For Intellifont scalable fonts values 3 and 4 are used as described below 11 62 Soft Font Creation EN EN Table 11 45 Value Class 1 Bitmap 2 Compressed Bitmap 3 Contour Intellifont Scalable 4 Compound Contour Intellifont Scalable 15 TrueType Scalable These are described elsewhere in this chapter Class 3 Intellifont Scalable Character Contour Data Class 3 is for Intellifont scalable contour character data The contour character data is organized as described in Table 11 41 Byt
293. e coordinate pair mapped onto P2 Using the same example the coordinate location of P1 is 0 0 and P2 is 15 10 This is different from the IP command where the parameters are expressed as X Y coordinate pairs rather than as ranges Xmin Cannot be set equal to Xmax and Ymy Cannot be set equal to Y MAX As their names suggest you will normally want to specify XMIiN smaller than Xmax and Ym y smaller than Ymax If you specify Xin larger than Xmax and Ymy larger than Ymax your illustration is drawn as a mirror image reversed and or upside down depending on the relative positions of P1 and P2 The parameters of the SC command are always mapped onto the current P1 and P2 locations P1 and P2 retain these new values until scaling is turned off or another SC command redefines the user unit values Thus the size of a user unit could change if any change is made in the relative position and distance between P1 and P2 after an SC command is executed e Type Specifies anisotropic or isotropic scaling Table 19 20 0 Anisotropic scaling Allows a user unit along the X axis to be a different size than user units along the Y axis Printed shapes are distorted when you use anisotropic scaling For example a circle might be drawn as an ellipse oval shaped instead of round Left and bottom parameters are ignored for anisotropic scaling 1 Isotropic scaling Produces user units that are the same size on both the X and Y axes The fo
294. e is used to reference the character for printing Eo e E character code Default 0 Range 0 65535 For unbound fonts the character code for a given character equals its symbol index value For TrueType fonts a special code must be used to download glyphs which never stand alone as characters FFFF hex should be used for this purpose Example To designate the character code for an ASCII lower case p send Eel 12E Character Code Command 11 49 Character Definition Command Note The Character Descriptor and Data command is used to download character data blocks to the printer for both bitmap and scalable fonts Bs s W character descriptor and data Default Range N A 0 32767 The value field identifies the number of bytes in the immediately following character data block The maximum number is 32767 For a detailed description of the Character Descriptor fields for bitmap fonts refer to Character Descriptor and Data Format for PCL Bitmap Fonts For Intellifont scalables refer to Character Descriptor and Data Format for Intellifont Scalable Fonts For TrueType fonts refer to Character Descriptor and Data Format for TrueType Fonts Examples for defining a bitmapped portrait and landscape character are provided under Character Definition Examples after the Character Descriptor Formats section later in this chapter 11 50 Soft Font Creation EN Character Descriptor Form
295. e listed below The actual printer memory required to store an item varies slightly based on printer memory fragmentation and other internal printer conditions Different printer models use different methods to store data Thus the amount of memory required to store the same amount of data may be slightly different in different printers While the printer is processing page data the available memory is constantly changing due to the printer receiving new data processing existing data and adding new characters to the font cache etc Under these conditions the available memory may change by the time the memory response is returned If a PostScript SIMM is installed in the printer some memory is not reported for a Free Space command response This memory is not reported as part of the free memory for a PCL status readback response however this memory is available for PCL use Thus it is possible for all or part of the downloaded data to be stored in this section of unreported memory and not change the memory response size Free Space Command 16 21 Note Note Note If you determine there is insufficient memory to hold the data to be downloaded some action is required One method to make more memory available is to send the Flush All Pages command This causes the printer to clear process the current page data from memory without accepting any new data for processing refer to the Flush All Pages Command described late
296. e macro with an ID of 7 for automatic overlay send E amp f7y4X To delete the macro with an ID of 7 send E amp f7y8X Macro Control Example EN The following illustrates the definition of a letterhead macro Table 12 4 Ec amp f1Y Specify the Macro ID as one E amp f0X Start Macro Definition E amp a540h360V Position logo at 540 360 decipoints in the PCL coordinate system E t150R Set graphics resolution to 150 dots per inch Eu rlA Start raster image of logo EQ b60W Raster data Send the first raster line E b60W Raster data Send the last raster line E rC Stop raster graphics Ec amp a540h780V Position for lettering at 540 780 decipoints E X Select font with ID of 1 ABC Corp Text Post Office Box 15 Text Macro Control Example 12 9 12 10 Macros Table 12 4 continued Fred Texas 83707 Text E amp a540h960V Position first rule at 540 960 decipoints E e10v4680H Set rule height and width EV c0P Print the first rule E c amp a540h980V Position second rule at 540 980 decipoints Eo c amp zero P Print second rule Ec amp a54 amp zero h12 amp zero amp zero V Position for first line of text at 540 1200 decipoints Ec amp f1X Stop Macro Definition This macro now can be executed called or enabled for automatic overlay EN EN The PCL Print Model Introduction The
297. e mode Interprets the pattern length parameter as a percentage of the diagonal distance between P1 and P2 e When specified as a percentage the pattern length changes along with changes in P1 and P2 22 26 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN e 1 Absolute mode Interprets the pattern length parameter in millimeters e When specified in millimeters fixed line type patterns assume the specified length but adaptive line type pattern lengths are adjusted to fit an integral number of patterns per vector This is true for relative mode and absolute mode If you do not specify the pattern length and mode parameters then the printer uses their current values When using relative mode and isotropic scaling the pattern length changes with changes to Xmin Y min and Xmax Y max An LT command remains in effect until another LT command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Complete pattern lengths Fixed LT6 Dots LT Complete pattern lengths Adaptive LT 6 Dots LTO Figure 22 18Fixed and Adaptive Line Types Table 22 13 Related Commands Group FT Fill Type The Line and Fill PW Pen Width Attributes Group UL User Defined Line Type LT Line Type 22 27 Table 22 13 AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point Cl Circle PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative RT Relative Arc Three Point T
298. e next integer to get integer n n round decimal places amp times n 7 3 33 x x amp times 2 x 82 83 x 2 10 525 42 PE Polyline Encoded 20 37 Table 20 24 Procedure to encode a number continued 2 Round to an integer Round the results of step 1 to the nearest integer X round x x round 10 525 42 10 525 3 Set the sign bit If x is positive multiply it by two If x is negative multiply the absolute value of x by two and add one This sets the sign bit if x amp geq 0 X 2xX x 2 x 10 525 21 050 else x 2 x abs x 1 4 Convert the number to base 64 or 32 and encode the data Convert x to a base 64 number if your system sends 8 bits without parity Convert x to a base 32 number if your system sends 7 bits with parity Seven bit flag is sent Encode each base 64 or 32 digit into the ASCII character range as described below Output each character as it is encoded starting with the least significant digit The most significant digit is used to terminate the number and is encoded into a different ASCII character range than the low order digits Each number in a coordinate pair is represented as zero or more non terminator characters followed by a terminator character A character is a non terminator or terminator depending on the range it is in refer to the following table For example in base 64 there are 64 non terminator and 64 terminator characters Either kind represents a
299. e number of lines the pen moves up from the current pen position negative values specify the number of lines the pen moves down a value of 1 is equivalent to a Line Feed Up and down are relative to the current label direction The Line Feed distance is uniquely defined for each font use the Extra Space ES command to adjust the height When you move the pen up or down a specific number of lines the Carriage Return point shifts up or down accordingly The illustration below shows the interaction of label direction and the sign of the parameters Up Left Right O r te LABEL DL EN DI Down Down Right Left O 7F I0 NOTLISHIOG 138v1 Up Figure 23 12Interaction of Label Direction and Parameter Sign CP Character Plot 23 25 The following illustration shows the direction of labeling with a vertical text path set by DV1 or DV1 0 refer to the Define Variable Text Path DV command for more information Left ADmM lt Down lt I Up C A L Right Figure 23 13Labeling with a Vertical Text Path The following example produces lettering along a line but not directly on top of it and aligns labels along a left margin Movement of the Carriage Return point is demonstrated as well as different methods of placing the text The text is placed using the CP command with parameters then with a Carriage Return Line Feed CR LF combinati
300. e oe eka eles Belk woe ae ad ETI ake Hee ea age Foe 7 5 HOIQNt conte Sunda data ecet ay Bde e ide of ates aa ead foe edi ee 7 5 Style sewer nentida cheered e heehee eh aaa andes Pens ee ee emcee 7 6 Stroke Weight 0 cect tet A 7 6 Typeface Family asvaadeuk i praka deireanas Sei Mie tad fae cee eee 7 7 Orientation ocsem e sapa di aa EEE die seed ae doida bene ee eee Eee 7 8 Bitmap Fonts and Scalable Typefaces iw wg ds ee 7 9 Internal Fonts osre sec fee eae au eee ae eee dav eee WEA ee eee es 7 11 Special Effects 2 ceeceavevecsese ede eee bedw cue de dens eee edad 7 11 EN Contents 3 PCL Font Selection Primary and Secondary Fonts 0 0 00 eee eee eee 8 5 Font Resolution 5 2 0 2 208d bya eed OW a es pee ee EE Seo ew aes 8 5 Symbol Set Command 0 00 ccc ee 8 6 EXAMPIG 2 diana soe eo AEA ee ol ee ok Oe ee E 8 7 7 bit ISO Symbol Sets 0 0 0 eee 8 8 Spacing Command 0 000 teens 8 9 EXAMPIG ccd than ate eee eek ed See a Oe bee E ee non eee 8 9 Pitch COMMANG reame 08 faednceee eed ddd oe RRR eee dae i 8 10 Example 2 id tas se e a eee ee bode a oeeed bende 8 11 Height Command 000 cee eee 8 12 EXAMpIG 2 cciee ose s ovine ae de eee des fee Si aaa ee eStats Seabee i 8 13 Style Command 24 044 erns boadid onora evn ab bag Woke head eRad ba ee 8 14 EXAMPIG 2 ivan eee abd es Seles Oe MADR OE EE oe oe SAE eee ee 8 15 Stroke Weight Command 000 ccc tee 8 16 EXAMpI
301. e of 5 Ya Figure 20 8 Changing Arc Smoothness with the Chord Angle Table 20 6 Example Varying the Chord Angle EGE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA2000 0 Specify 2000 0 as the starting point PD AA0 0 45 25 With the pen down draw a 45 arc positive angle with center coordinates of 0 0 and a chord angle of 25 PU1050 1060 Lift the pen and move to 1050 1060 PD AA0 0 45 10 With the pen down draw a 45 arc negative angle using the same center point as the first arc but with a 10 chord angle AA Arc Absolute 20 11 Table 20 6 Example Varying the Chord Angle continued PU1000 0 Lift the pen and move to 1000 0 PD AA0 0 45 With the pen down draw another 45 arc positive angle with the same center point but with the default chord angle 5 E A Enter the PCL mode EOE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 25 10 1050 1060 7 5 0 0 i 1000 0 2000 0 Figure 20 9 Table 20 7 Related Commands Group AT Absolute Arc Three Point The Vector Group BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute AR Arc Relative CI Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point 20 12 The Vector Group EN Table 20 7
302. e of the P2 P1 distance Labels begin at the current pen location and thus are drawn parallel to the directional line not necessarily on it DR Relative Direction 23 41 Table 23 20 Example Using the DR Command ELE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black PA3500 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to 3500 2500 DT 1 Define the character as the label terminator DRO 1 LB__1990 Set the label direction and print 1990 DR1 1 LB__1991 Set the label direction and print 1991 DR1 0 LB__ 1992 Set the label direction and print 1992 DR 1 1 LB__1993 Change the label direction and print 1993 DR 0O 1 LB__1994 Set the label direction print __ 1994 CR and Carriage Return DR 1 1 LB__ 1995 Set the label direction and print CRH 1995 Carriage Return DR 1 0 LB__ 1996 Set the label direction and print CRH 1996 Carriage Return EL OA Enter the PCL mode EOE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 23 42 The Character Group EN EN op 1990 x n 1992 Zo _ 9661 i m nee return N F P g D 38500 2500 Figure 23 25 Table 23 21 Related Commands Group CF Character Fill Mode CP Character Plot DI Absolute Direction DV Define Variable Text P
303. e response received is the response to its last request If the application uses random numbers in the Echo command this type of mix up will not occur Echo Response The Echo command returns the following response PCL ECHO ValueField where ValueField is the Echo command value field value that was selected within the range 32767 to 32767 For example if the Echo command E s 999X was sent the status response would be PCL ECHO 999 16 26 Status Readback EN Status Readback Programming Hints The following hints can assist in using the status readback feature e PCL status readback is useful during the development of applications Status readback allows you to determine that fonts macros user defined patterns and symbol set resources you have downloaded were accepted by the printer e Ifthe printer does not contain sufficient memory to accept a downloaded entity the printer discards the data Status readback can be used to determine if the printer accepted a downloaded entity e Status responses are directed to the printer s I O port from which the request is received If the status is not read and the printer switches to another I O port the status response is not directed to that port The status response returns if the printer switches back to the original port see note on following page e Your application should work correctly when an unexpected status response is received For example when requ
304. e soft clip window Following the command execution the current pen position is updated to the end point of the curve The BR command is allowed in Polygon Mode The first chord after PM1 is not treated as a pen up move e X4 Y4 Specify the location of the second X4 Y4 third Xo Y2 and fourth X3 Y3 control points in relative increments relative to the first control point Table 20 12 Example Using the BR Command Bezier Relative 3556 2032 508 1016 2540 508 2540 5080 EOE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1016 5080 Specify the absolute point 1016 5080 as the starting location PR PD Specify relative plotting and pen down BRO 3048 4572 0 Draw a Bezier using the current position 1016 5080 as the first control point The specified control points for the first curve are 0 3048 4572 0 and 3556 2032 The second curve uses the last control point of the previous curve as the first control point 3556 2032 The other three control points for the second curve are 508 1016 2540 508 and 2540 5080 EG OA Enter the PCL mode EOE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 20 20 The Vector Group EN 7 1016 5080 Starting Point 1st Control Point Points 1 2 and 3 rel
305. e word Stroke Weight SB Specifies the thickness of the strokes used in designing the font The supported stroke weight values are 7 through 7 The thinnest stroke available is 7 the thickest stroke weight is 7 The standard stroke weight for a medium font is 0 the standard stroke weight for a bold font is 3 and the standard stroke weight for a light font is 3 Table 11 14 Stroke Weight Values Value Stroke Weight 7 Ultra Thin 6 Extra Thin 5 Thin 4 Extra Light Font Header Format 11 23 Table 11 14 Stroke Weight Values continued 3 Light 2 Demi Light 1 Semi Light 0 Medium Book or Text 1 Semi Bold 2 Demi Bold 3 Bold 4 Extra Bold 5 Black 6 Extra Black 7 Ultra Black Typeface UB This field specifies the HP typeface number of the font The current version of this field supported by the amp payette printer is described first Then a previous field supported in earlier printers is described Current Usage In the LaserJet 4 printer version of this field an unsigned short integer is assembled from the two unsigned bytes of data Printers when seeking to match a typeface request with available font resources may treat the typeface number as a single value If an exact match cannot be made the request may be ignored for selection purposes however the font select table is updated The procedure for allocating typeface
306. eate your own fill types and screen patterns RF index width height oen numbery 0en number or RF index or RF Functional Parameter Format Range Default index clamped 1to8 1 solid integer width clamped 1 to 255 integer height clamped 1 to 255 a integer pen integer Oor 1 number The RF command does not select a fill type use the Fill Type FT command with a type parameter of 11 and the corresponding raster fill index number for the second parameter for example FT11 3 for an index number of 3 e No Parameters Defaults all raster fill patterns to solid fill e Index Specifies the index number of the pattern being defined Eight patterns can exist concurrently e When you send RF with an index parameter only RFn the corresponding pattern is defaulted to solid fill e Width Height Specify the width and height in pixels of the pattern being defined 22 32 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Note EN A pixel is equal to the size of one dot at the current printer resolution e Pen Number Represents a pixel in the pattern being defined and indicates its color black or white 0 White gt 0 Black The pen number parameter defines pixels left to right top to bottom The total number of pen number parameters should be equal to the width times height parameters For example to define a pattern that is 8 x 16 pixels you need 128 pen number pa
307. econdary Height Height in points Default 12 Range 0 25 999 75 The value field is valid to two decimal places If the requested height is unavailable the closest height is selected All bitmap fonts whose heights are within a quarter point of the specified height are considered to have the specified height For scalable fonts the value field is from 25 to 999 75 points in increments of 0 25 point values are rounded to the nearest quarter point The factory default primary and secondary heights are 12 point In PCL bitmap fonts a point is 1 172 0 01389 inch For scalable fonts the definition of a point varies in TrueType a point is 1 172 inch while Intellifont fonts have 72 307 points to the inch The user default primary and secondary heights are implicitly set by selection of a user default font from the printer s control panel refer to the printer User s Manual 8 12 PCL Font Selection EN Note EN If a proportional spaced scalable font is selected using an ID number send the Height command to specify the point size otherwise the size is determined by the height characteristic value of the former font as listed in the font select table See Font Selection by ID Command later in this chapter for more information Example To specify a height of 12 points for the primary font send Ec s12V To specify a height of 14 4 points for the secondary font send F s14 4V If the above sequence w
308. ectangles wedges and PCL user defined patterns SV does not affect solid fill types stroked characters or edges of characters SV screen_type option option2 or SV Parameter Format Functional Range Default screen_type clamped 0 1 2 21 22 No screening solid integer option option2 clamped type dependent type dependent integer Refer to the table following the parameter descriptions There are four types of screen fill shaded fill HP GL 2 user defined raster fill predefined PCL cross hatch patterns and PCL user defined patterns e No Parameters Defaults to no screening solid fill same as SV0 SV Screened Vectors 22 39 e screen_type Selects the types of screening as follows e 0 No screening e 1 Shaded fill e 2 HP GL 2 User defined raster fill RF command e 21 Predefined PCL cross hatch patterns e 22 PCL user defined raster fill RF command Option1 Option2 The definition of these optional parameters depends on the screen type selected The following table lists the options available for each fill type Table 22 21 Screen Type Description Option1 Option2 1 Shaded Fill Shading Ignored 0 to 100 2 HP GL 2 Pattern Index 0 Pen 1 User defined 1 Current Pen Raster Fill 21 PCL Cross hatch 1 6 Ignored 22 PCL User defined Pattern ID Ignored Pattern Fill For Type 1 specify the shading perce
309. ed transparent based on the transparency mode setting see Figure 14 3 When a value field of 1 white fill is used pattern transparency mode is always treated as if it were opaque The effect of transparency modes on rectangular areas is illustrated in Figure 14 3 In both examples the source transparency mode is opaque regardless of the actual setting In the first example the pattern transparency mode is transparent the white pixels in the pattern are not applied to the destination so that the pattern is visible in only two quadrants of the destination In the second example the pattern transparency mode is opaque and the pattern is visible in the entire rectangular area Pattern Transparency for Rectangular Area Fill 14 11 O or 1 Transparent or Opaque Source Transparency Mode 0 Transparent Pattern Transparency Mode Pattern Rectangular Destination Result Area Source Transparency Mod 0 or 1 Transparent or Opaque Pattern Transparency Mode 1 Opaque OOD Yj Yj Uy gt gt Pattern Retangular Destination Result Area Figure 14 3 Effect of Transparency Modes on Rectangular Areas 14 12 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics EN Rectangular Area Fill Examples EN This section shows example usage of area fill commands to print pre defined patterns as well as user defined patterns Pre defined Pattern Examples Solid Fill Black White To print a 900 by 1500 Unit black rule 3 inches by
310. ed pattern descriptor 13 17 pixel level clipping 2 8 PJL Glossary 10 PJL commands 1 4 placement font header 11 28 placing text 23 10 Plot Absolute command 17 25 20 30 Plot Relative command 20 44 plot size horizontal 18 11 plot size vertical 18 12 plotter units plu 17 11 17 20 PM command 21 10 21 34 example 21 37 PM1 and PM2 21 36 21 37 point Glossary 10 point size defined 2 5 HP GL 2 23 71 bitmap 8 12 8 13 PCL 7 5 scalable fonts 8 12 TrueType 8 12 point factor scaling 19 4 19 41 19 44 polygon drawing in HP GL 2 mode 21 10 buffer 21 1 21 2 buffer use 21 14 counting points in 21 15 definition commands summary 21 10 drawing circles in polygon mode 21 14 filling 21 12 mode 21 1 21 10 Polygon Group HP GL 2 commands 21 1 Polygon Group HP GL 2 commands 17 4 Polygon Mode PM command 21 34 Polyline Encoded PE command 20 34 pop cursor positioning 6 14 portrait defined Glossary 8 character data example 11 71 orientation 5 5 print boundaries 2 7 position orientation of logical page 7 8 position rectangular area 14 10 positioning cursor 2 2 cursor defined Glossary 1 page data 6 1 text 23 24 positive angle of rotation 20 7 Glossary 10 posture HP GL 2 23 71 PR command 20 44 predefined shading patterns 14 1 primary font 8 5 Glossary 10 HP GL 2 23 85 print boundaries 2 7 2 8 print data processing time 24 10 print direction 17 17 Print Direction command 5 9 print environment 3 1 defined G
311. ed stroke weight is less than zero and is not available the next thinner available stroke weight is selected If no thinner stroke weight is available the closest available thicker stroke weight is selected The factory default primary and secondary stroke weights are zero medium The user default primary and secondary stroke weights are implicitly set by selection of a user default font from the printer s control panel refer to the printer User s Manual Example To specify a bold stroke weight for the primary font send E s3B To specify a medium stroke weight for the secondary font send E s0B Many typefaces were designed for advertising use and a medium was used to describe the standard treatment Later additional treatments were designed for text use Therefore the typeface treatment designation medium may not always take a PCL value of 0 This weight value may be assigned to book or text treatment instead Stroke Weight Command 8 17 Typeface Family Command Note The Typeface Family command designates the design of the font Ex s T Primary typeface family Eg s T Secondary typeface family Typeface family value see Appendix C in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for typeface values Default 14099 Body Text Range 10 65535 values greater than 65535 are set to 65535 If the value field specifies a typeface that is unavailable this characteristic is ignored dur
312. edge of the logical page column 0 and the right margin is set to the right edge of the logical page Ec 9 EN Clear Horizontal Margins Command 5 15 Top Margin Command Note The Top Margin command designates the number of lines between the top of the logical page and the top of the text area ECR LHE Number of lines Default 1 2 inch down from top of logical page Range 0 Length of logical page Other values ignored 1 If logical page length is lt Zinch then the top margin is set to top of logical page The Top Margin command is ignored if the value field is greater than the current logical page length or if the current VMI is 0 VMI defines the distance between lines of text Receipt of a Top Margin command resets the text length according to the following equation Text Length logical page length in inches top margin in inches 1 2 inch The top margin represents a physical position and once set does not change with subsequent changes in VMI or line spacing The vertical cursor position for the first line of print is determined by the current values of the top margin and VMI using the following equation first line in inches top margin in inches 0 75 X VMI The default cursor position is not located at the intersection of the top margin and the left bound of the logical page refer to Figure 5 5 The cursor is actually positioned down 75 of the VMI distance 0 75 x VMI from the top ma
313. ee next section Page Protection If enabled page protection reserves an amount of memory for the page image process allowing the printer to create the entire page image in memory before physically moving the paper through the printer 24 10 Programming Hints EN Note EN The page protection feature is available only with additional optional memory on many HP LaserJet printers One exception is the LaserJet 4 printer which supports page protection for letter size paper in 300 dpi mode with the standard 2 Mbytes memory Refer to the appropriate User s Manual for specific memory requirements The Page Protection feature can be used to prevent possible ERROR 21 conditions ERROR 21 is reported when data is too complex for the printer to process concurrent with actual physical printing A frequent cause of ERROR 21 when printing graphics is that the program sends commands to print a single point many times during the page run Page protection can be set for letter A4 or legal sized pages Set page protection for the page size most often used I O The Parallel Centronics I O has higher throughput than the RS 232C serial I O While text processing may not benefit from a faster I O raster graphics processing and soft font downloads will usually benefit from increased I O throughput Performance 24 11 Troubleshooting Commands End of Line Wrap The End of Line Wrap command defines the action that occurs
314. eed 6 13 line drawing HP GL 2 20 2 ends 22 17 fill types 22 1 joins 22 17 pen widths 22 5 screening 22 39 segments four types HP GL 2 19 18 thickness 23 21 types 22 2 types user defined 22 44 width 23 74 Line and Fill Attributes Group HP GL 2 commands 17 6 22 1 Line Attribute LA command 22 2 22 15 Line Feed LF 6 13 23 5 23 16 changing distance 23 8 specifying direction 23 46 Line Spacing command 5 24 Line Termination command 6 13 Line Type command 22 2 22 22 LO command 23 10 23 62 location type status readback 16 3 16 8 location unit status readback 16 3 16 9 location in font selection 8 24 LOCTYPE status response 16 11 LOCUNIT status response 16 11 logical page 2 2 17 19 Glossary 7 boundaries 2 7 2 8 orientation 7 8 17 17 logical pen 20 31 long edge binding mode 4 5 lost mode HP GL 2 17 11 LT command 22 2 22 22 M macro 12 1 24 8 defined Glossary 7 call 12 4 cartridge 12 1 cartridge ID number 12 8 Control command 12 7 creation 12 3 custom made 12 1 deleting 4 2 12 5 12 6 12 7 enabling 12 7 entity 16 3 execute 12 4 HP GL 2 mode 12 4 ID number assigning 12 3 invocation 12 4 12 7 letterhead example 12 9 Macro ID command 12 6 nesting 12 7 overlay 12 4 12 5 24 8 permanent 12 5 12 7 ROM based 12 8 SIMM 12 1 start definition 12 7 status readback 16 10 16 16 stop definition 12 7 temporary 12 5 12 7 using within another macro 12 7 Macro Control command 12 7 Macro ID command
315. eed Command The Half Line Feed command moves the cursor to the same character position one half line down The distance moved for a Half Line Feed is one half of the current line spacing defined by the last VMI or line spacing setting E Vertical Cursor Positioning Control Codes EN Two control codes can be used to position the cursor vertically These control codes are explained below LF Line Feed Advances the current active position CAP to the same horizontal position on the next line The distance to the next line is defined by the current line spacing defined by the last VMI or line spacing setting Refer to Line Termination Command later in this chapter FF Form Feed Advances the current active position CAP to the same horizontal position at the top of the text area on the next page Refer to Line Termination Command later in this chapter Half Line Feed Command 6 13 Line Termination Command The Line Termination command controls the way the printer interprets CR LF and FF control characters All CR LF and FF control characters received after the Line Termination Command are interpreted as shown below Ec amp kK G 0 CR CR LF LF FF FF 1 CR CR LF LF LF FF FF 2 CR CR LF CR LF FF CR FF 3 CR CR LF LF CR LF FF CR FF Default 0 Range 0 3 For example if a value field of 1 is sent the printer interprets each Carriage Return CR received as a Carriage Return
316. eed bees ea tee bas 23 3 Moving to the Carriage Return Point 00 cee ee eee 23 5 Control CodeS sasi iee as ma ioia eue i eee nee 23 6 Default Label Conditions 1 0 asuaan aae 23 7 Enhancing Labels sietan rak bea Yaa i eaa bee ran pa a a 23 8 Character Size and Slant wd ee 23 8 Character Spaces and Text Lines 6 ee 23 8 Label Orientation and Placement S 6 aaaea 23 9 Terminating Labels 0 00 tee 23 11 Working with the Character Cell 0 000000 cece eee eee eee 23 12 USING FOS 05 cece aeh eee ews eee eee ta ae peek ages ead kw ks 23 15 Printing with Fixed Spaced and Proportional Fonts 23 15 Designating and Selecting Fonts 00 0 cece eee eee 23 17 Standard and Alternate Fonts 0 00 c ce eee eee 23 17 AD Alternate Font Definition 0 0 0 0 ccc ee 23 18 CF Character Fill Mode 1 2 0 00 ccc ees 23 20 CP Character Plot 0 0 cc eee ees 23 24 DI Absoluit Directions crasas eta eh ew banca boda eee ad 23 29 DR Relative Direction 0 0 0 0 ee eee 23 37 Example Using the DR Command 00 2c eee nee 23 41 DT Define Label Terminator 0 0 0 0 cc ccc ee eee 23 44 DV Define Variable Text Path 0 0 eee 23 46 Example Using theDV Command 0 000e eee eens 23 49 ES Extra Space 0 eee eee 23 51 Fl Select Primary Font 0 0 c cece eee eee eee 23 54 Example Using
317. een P1 and P2 rise is expressed as a percentage of the vertical distance between P1 and P2 actual run run parameter 100 x P2y P1x actual rise rise parameter 100 x P2y P1y 23 38 The Character Group EN The following illustration shows the effects of using three different sets of run rise parameters Notice how the text baseline varies as the run percentage is greater than equal to and less than the value for rise Figure 23 22Effects of Different Rise Run Parameters If the P1 P2 rectangle is square the DR and DI commands have exactly the same effect The advantage of using the DR command is that as the locations of P1 and P2 change the slope of the baseline changes to match the stretching or compressing of the P1 P2 rectangle For example if the relative direction is set so that rise run the slope of the baseline is 45 as long as the P1 P2 rectangle is square If the P1 P2 rectangle stretches so that it is twice as high as it is wide the slope of the baseline remains parallel to an imaginary line running from P1 to P2 see illustration below EN DR Relative Direction 23 39 Figure 23 23Effects of Scaling on Label Direction Labels begin at the current pen location and thus are drawn parallel to the directional line not necessarily on it Also negative parameters have the same effect on direction as described for the DI command At least one parameter must not be zero The ratio of the parameter
318. een specified the font select table appears as follows Symbol Set Roman 8 Spacing Fixed Pitch 10 cpi Height 12 point Style Upright Stroke Weight Bold Typeface Family Courier To subsequently select a font with the same characteristics differing only in one aspect only the single characteristic must be specified For example to select a font differing only in stroke weight in this case medium rather than bold the printer s font select table could be changed as follows Symbol Set Roman 8 Spacing Fixed Pitch 10 cpi Height 12 point Style Upright Stroke Weight Medium Typeface Family Courier 8 4 PCL Font Selection EN Note At a minimum only the characteristics of the new font that differ from those of the previously designated font must be sent the short font selection method However HP recommends that all of the characteristics be sent to ensure that the correct font is selected PCL 5 printers can print any number of distinct fonts per page limited only by available memory Primary and Secondary Fonts The printer maintains two independent font select tables for use in selecting a primary font and a secondary font All of the characteristics previously described apply to both tables This provides access to two distinct fonts only one of which is selected at a given time To alternate between the primary and the secondary font the control
319. eens 24 2 Job Control 2 i 2 0iaave de barged lad evewd bad Lede rede need bangs 24 3 Printer Reset regus igeni i eed ee ee Dede ead eee ee ede eee 24 3 PCL Page Control 1 1 0 0 cee 24 4 Paper SOUC oras vx deb baw wees eee Red baad ea i eed badd 24 4 Page Size avegno asor eee ved bbe vase Ree ee ee be OE AE ii 24 4 Text Area MarginS 6 eee 24 4 HM c3 seed iostecele aad teed ta EEA a epee bad doe ewan ee 24 4 PCL Cursor Positioning 0 000 c cee eee 24 5 POMS aeaaee age A a dee teil E poset mde Seite aoae Aeon ale Mee te ay ee 24 5 PCL Raster Graphics 0 0 000 eee 24 7 MacroSi ae fess ea tanta ord ae ewe vad ae Ebates dad ee ae 24 8 HP GL 2 Vector Graphics 000 0 c eee 24 9 Performance 0000 eee 24 10 PGL COmmMandS 2 20 cc8 0000 Pees fae ch hod et eee ea a dene 24 10 Print Data icceescp anenessahe pede nee eodwecse dee ter bee beens 24 10 Print Overrun 2 eee ee 24 10 Page Protection 0 0 c ee eee 24 10 WO et bo ae Gas tean Cee eens Tee Pee Os ewes ce EA 24 11 Troubleshooting Commands 000 cece tees 24 12 End of Line Wrap 0 00 c cee tees 24 12 EXample satoisa Eae bad gddents tered badd dha eee Rat baie d 24 12 Display Functions Mode 6 ee 24 12 EXAMP ye nia cis oie ene Ee hee wala a ee ee 24 13 Auto Continue Mode 1 tee 24 14 COMMON EMO Ss rers rein kend Peed haw dad swt sete ee eed eh Pe ees 24 15 20 ERROR o4 50022echa du eee oe te aed dade ee ed
320. efer to ntellifont Scalable Typeface Format Character Complement Array of UB This 8 byte field qualifies the compatibility of a type 10 or 11 font with various character sets Each bit is independently interpreted with the exception of the least significant three bits Bit 63 refers to the most significant bit of the first byte and bit 0 refers to the least significant bit of the eighth byte Font Header Format 11 35 Note In the Format 15 Font Header for TrueType Scalable Fonts the data in this field is contained in the CC Character Complement field in the Segmented Font Data section immediately following the descriptor data See Segmented Font Data later in this chapter Table 11 25 MSL Symbol Index Bit Field Designated Use 58 63 Reserved for Latin fonts 55 57 Reserved for Cyrillic fonts 52 54 Reserved for Arabic fonts 50 51 Reserved for Greek fonts 48 49 Reserved for Hebrew fonts 3 47 Miscellaneous uses South Asian Armenian other alphabets bar codes OCR Math PC Semi graphics etc 0 2 Symbol Index field 111 MSL Symbol Index Table 11 26 Unicode Symbol Index Bit Field Designated Use 32 63 Miscellaneous uses South Asian Armenian other alphabets bar codes OCR Math etc 28 31 Reserved for Latin fonts 22 27 Reserved for platform application variant fonts 3 21 Reserved for Cyr
321. efore exiting polygon mode Closing a polygon means adding the final vertex that defines a continuous shape the last coordinates or increments represent the same location as the first If you have not closed the polygon executing PM7 or PM2 forces closure by adding a point to close the polygon You can also use the Initialize IN or Default Values DF commands while in polygon mode Both commands exit polygon mode clear the polygon buffer and begin executing subsequent commands immediately You must exit polygon mode to execute other HP GL 2 graphics commands Note Sending an E while in polygon mode causes the printer to exit polygon mode clear the polygon buffer exit HP GL 2 mode and eject a page Sending an E while in polygon mode is not recom mended but it performs an important function allowing you to recover from a previous job that left the printer in polygon mode PM1 Use PM1 to close the current polygon or subpolygon and remain in polygon mode the printer adds a closure point if necessary When you use PM1 the point after PM1 becomes the first point of the next subpolygon This move is not used as a boundary when filling a polygon with FP When drawing the polygon the pen always moves to this point in the up position regardless of the current pen status Each subsequent coordinate pair after PM7 defines a point of the subpolygon 21 36 The Polygon Group EN EN PM2 Use PM2 to close the
322. egins with the standard font unless you use the SA command before you begin your label or finish the previous label in the alternate font e Switch from the standard font to the alternate font either using SS and SA or the Shift In Shift Out method If you are changing fonts within a text string the Shift In Shift Out method is usually more efficient Switch from the standard font to the alternate font using the ASCII Shift Out control character SO decimal code 14 Switch from the alternate font to the standard font using the ASCII Shift In control character SI decimal code 15 Note that a Shift In or Shift Out outside of the label command string is ignored Designating and Selecting Fonts 23 17 AD Alternate Font Definition This command is similar to the Standard Font Definition SD command that defines the primary HP GL 2 font In addition the AD command defines an alternate HP GL 2 font and its characteris tics font spacing pitch height posture stroke weight and typeface It allows the font characteristics to be assigned to the secondary alternate font definition Use AD to set up an alternate font that you can easily access when labeling AD kind value kind value or AD Parameter Format Functional Range Default kind clamped 1to7 no default integer value clamped kind dependent kind dependent real Refer to the table following the parameter descriptions The AD comma
323. el status responses Since the user selected value for the value field is returned this command can be used as a user identification mark or place holder Sending the Echo command with a specific user selected value at the beginning of a status request enables users to identify their status response data Status readback requests are processed in the order they are received Status readback responses are returned to the printer port from which they were received When selecting an echo value it is important to select a number which is not likely to be used by another user such as a random number This example illustrates why using the Echo command with a random number is important Assume an application uses a fixed number each time the Echo command is sent Further assume the printer running the application was turned off after the application sent the Echo command followed by a Free Space command The printer generates the status readback responses to the Echo command and Free Space commands Since the host is not accepting data the data will be in the printer waiting for the host to accept it Now assume the host computer is turned on and the application is again executed Echo Command 16 25 If the application sends the Echo command and Free Space command the printer returns the response to the first Echo command and Free Space command along with the response to the second request The application will assume that th
324. elative Arc Three Point Group The Vector Group CI Circle EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative The Polygon Group Using Line Attributes and Types 22 3 Table 22 2 Commands Affectedby Line Types continued EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge Using Fill Types Using the Fill Type FT command adds detail to your drawings and increases their visual effectiveness The fill type affects the RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge FP Fill Polygon commands and CF Character Fill commands PCL 5 printers support solid parallel line hatching HP GL 2 cross hatch raster fill shading is a special type of raster fill and PCL cross hatch and PCL user defined fills Figure 22 3 shows the first four types The user defined fill type shown on the right can be printed using the HP GL 2 RF raster fill command User defined fills can also be selected with the FT Fill Type command after having been created in PCL context see User Defined Raster Graphics in Chapter 13 P RP RP HP HP HP KP HP HP HP HP P HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP f HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP PHP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HPHP P HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HPHP f HPHP HP HP HP HP HP HP KP HP f HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP P HPHP HP KP HP HP HP HP HP HP P HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP
325. en oe 24 15 2I ERROR 02442 e0bends dea e anes Made toed ead EEE aA 24 15 22 ERROR aae vat Oak i baa sateen oh baa ead wae EE 24 15 40 ERROR 000 ce eens 24 15 Customer Support Help From Your Organization 000 Customer Support 1 Help From Your Dealer 0 00000 eee eens Customer Support 1 Help from HP scien ceeded a tats bbe Lew na arhA NAA Customer Support 1 Index EN Contents 13 Contents 14 EN Introduction to HP PCL PCL PRINTER LANGUAGE HISTORY Hewlett Packard created the PCL printer language simply referred to as PCL elsewhere in this manual to provide an economical and efficient way for application programs to control a range of printer features across a number of printing devices HP has evolved both the definition and implementations of PCL to provide the optimal price and performance balance PCL 5 represents a new breakthrough in price performance leadership Its features were selected in direct response to customer requests HP will continue to lead enhancements to the PCL printer language to deliver powerful technology advances PCL commands are compact escape sequence codes that are embedded in the print job data stream This approach minimizes both data transmission and command decoding overhead HP PCL formatters and fonts are designed to quickly translate application output into high quality device specific raster print images PCL printer language commonality from
326. en using the Pen Width PW command Subsequent lines are drawn using the new width Use PW to vary line thicknesses and enhance your plots You may change widths as often as you like without sending an SP command again Pen line widths can be specified either in millimeters or as a percentage of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 Use the WU Pen Width Unit Selection command to select how the pen width is specified Since using the WU command defaults the width of both pens black and white send WU before a PW command Selecting a Pen and Changing Line Width 22 5 AC Anchor Corner This command positions the starting point of any fill pattern Use AC to ensure that the selected fill pattern is positioned as expected within the figure AC X Y or AC Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates current 230 to 230 4 no units default The anchor corner is the point at which any fill pattern starts Setting the anchor corner guarantees that a corner point of the selected fill pattern is at the specified coordinate aligned vertically and horizontally e No Parameters Defaults the anchor corner to the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame relative to the current coordinate system Equivalent to ACO 0 e X Y Coordinates The coordinate position defines the position of the starting point for any fill pattern The following example prints three adjacent squ
327. end a reset to end the job and eject the page EN 800 2000 1600 2000 iiss 400 400 1200 400 Figure 21 25 Table 21 25 Related Commands Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute The Polygon Group EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute WG Fill Wedge This command defines and fills any wedge Use WG to draw filled sections of a pie chart WG radius start angle sweep angle chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default radius current unit 230 to 230 4 start angle clamped real 32768 to 32767 sweep angle clamped real 360 chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5 EN WG Fill Wedge 21 45 The WG command defines and fills a wedge using the current pen fill type and line types The WG command includes an automatic pen down When the command operation is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored The only difference between the WG command and the EW Edge Wedge command is that the WG command produces a filled wedge and the EW an outlined one Always use isotropic scaling in any drawing that contains wedges to avoid drawing an elliptical wedge Refer to the discussion of scaling in Chapter 17 for more information Anisotropic Isotropic scaling scaling Figure 21 26Fill Wedge with Scaling e Radius Specifies the distance from the current pen loca
328. ended Response The font extended response inquire entity value field 4 provides a way to return the name and internal ID number of the font as well as the SELECT line It is the same as a font status response inquire entity value field 1 in that SELECT SYMBOLSETSs LOCTYPEs and LOCUNIT are returned in the same manner They are not re described here refer to the Font Response section for a description of their operation However for a font extended request two additional keywords DEFID and NAME are returned as described below DEFID identifies the font s internal ID number This is the number which appears on the font printout It is the number used to select the font as the default font from either the printer s control panel or from PJL refer to the Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual for information on PJL font selection The DEFID number consists of two parts a location and an ID number such as I 21 where I is the location and 21 is the font s internal ID number The possible locations are listed below Table 16 5 Internal C Cartridge single cartridge printers Cn Cartridge multiple cartridge printers where n is printer specific S Permanent soft fonts Mn SIMMs where n is the number of the SIMM slot for example M2 is SIMM in 2 slot NONE Temporary soft fonts The cartridge Cn and SIMMs Mn loca
329. er E h a adda tooeoeoeoot Character Width 26 Delta X 30 All values are in dots Figure 11 6 Portrait Character Example 11 58 Soft Font Creation EN EN Character Height 26 x uonoyy Jadeg ULOS J9 Sey 31 Left Offset 22 Character Width Character A Reference lt toeooooteoeo Eaa aaa Point Byte Padding Boundary Baseline ub Position After i Printing Character Delta X 30 All values are in dots Figure 11 7 Landscape Character Example Character Descriptor Formats 11 59 Character Descriptor and Data Format for Intellifont Scalable Fonts The character header contains a block of bytes that identify character outline data Table 11 40 and Table 11 41 show the format of the Intellifont scalable character descriptor and data Table 11 40 Intellifont Scalable Character Descriptor and Data Format 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 1 Format 10 Continuation 0 Descriptor Size Class 3 Contour Character Data in bytes see Table 11 41 for Contour Character Data 2 Reserved 0 Checksum 1 Continuation is supported for classes 1 2 3 and 15 only 2 These bytes appear only on the last continuation Table 11 41 Intellifont Scalable Contour Data Format Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 4 Contour Data Size 6 Metric
330. er 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 0B Enter HP GL 2 Mode 30 LPRINT IN SC1 20 1 20 1 P1 PU5 5 j 40 PRINT Input number of fractional decimal places in data 50 INPUT F In this example 2 decimal places line 290 60 Calculate Number of Fractional Binary Bits 70 F F 3 33 80 F INT F IAs p 100 IF F gt 0 THEN F 2 ABS F ELSE F 2 ABS F 1 110 F 191 F 120 LPRINT 1 PE gt CHR F gt O PE Polyline Encoded 20 41 130 Convert coordinate data to base 64 140 FOR J 1 to 6 Yy150 READ C 160 C 2A 1 170 C INT C 47 180 IF C 0 THEN C 2 C ELSE C 2 ABS C 1 190 WHILE C 64 200 LPRINT CHRS 63 C MOD 64 210 C Co4 220 WEND P230 C LI 240 LPRINT CHR C 250 NEXT J 9260 LPRINT p 4 270 LPRINT CHR 27 0A Enter PCL Mode 280 LPRINT CHR 27 E Reset to eject page 290 DATA 10 58 0 5 58 10 67 5 10 67 300 END 5 58 10 67 Start 5 5 ee 10 58 0 Figure 20 19 20 42 The Vector Group EN EN Table 20 27 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width SM Symbol Mode Line and Fill Attributes Group PE Polyline Encoded 20 43 PR Plot Relative
331. er 17 10 Intellifont coordinate system 11 4 font header 11 10 11 11 global data size 11 35 scalable character descriptor 11 60 Intellifont manual x interface connector Glossary 6 interface throughput 24 11 internal fonts 7 2 7 11 Glossary 7 status readback 16 8 internal unit 2 5 invalid entity status readback error 16 19 invalid location status readback error 16 19 IP command 19 23 19 36 IR command 19 26 ISO symbol sets 8 8 isotropic scaling 19 4 19 41 19 42 italic style 7 6 IW command 19 29 J job control commands PCL 4 1 hints 24 3 job separation 4 11 K Kind 1 symbol set 23 69 2 font spacing 23 70 3 pitch 23 70 4 height 23 71 5 posture 23 71 6 stroke weight 23 71 7 typeface 23 72 L LA command 22 2 22 15 label default conditions HP GL 2 23 7 EN EN direction 23 29 orientation and placement 23 9 terminator 23 11 23 44 text 17 11 text HP GL 2 23 1 23 3 23 8 Label LB command 23 3 23 59 Label Origin LO command 23 10 23 62 labeling pen movement 23 24 landscape defined Glossary 8 character data example 11 73 orientation 5 5 print boundaries 2 8 LaserJet customer assistance Customer Support 1 printer features v last code 10 7 font header 11 30 layers and transparency mode 22 42 LB command 23 3 23 59 example 23 60 Left Margin command 5 13 Left Offset Registration command 4 7 left offset character descriptor 11 56 legal vs letter page selection 24 4 LF Line F
332. er Reset Command Receipt of the Printer Reset command restores the User Default Environment deletes temporary fonts macros user defined symbol sets and patterns It also prints any partial pages of data which may have been received Ec E Notes Hewlett Packard strongly recommends the use of both the Ec E command and the c 12345X command Universal Exit Language Start of PUL also referred to as the UEL Command at the beginning and end of each job The order of these commands is critical Refer to Table 4 1 for an example The UEL Command amp c 12345X has the same effect as the Ec E command and also enters PUL Mode of operation for printers that support PJL refer to the next section Universal Exit Language Command for more information The Ec E command should be included to ensure backward compatibility the UEL command is ignored if received by a printer that does not support PJL 4 2 PCL Job Control Commands EN Universal Exit Language Command Notes EN The Universal Exit Language UEL command causes the PCL printer language to shut down and exit Control is then returned to the Printer Job Language PJL Both PCL 5 and HP GL 2 recognize this command Eo 12345X Default N A Range 12345 This command performs the following actions Prints all data received before the Exit Language command Performs a printer reset same effect as Ec E Shuts down the PCL 5 printer language processo
333. er each attribute Table 22 8 Attribute Kind Value Description Line Ends 1 Butt default Square Triangular 2 3 4 Round Line Joins Mitered default Mitered beveled Triangular Round Beveled oO oa AJ wy N No join applied Miter Limit 5 default refer to description under Miter Limit Lines with a width of 0 35 mm or less always have butt caps and no join regardless of the current attribute setting Full range is 1 to 32 767 but values less than 1 are automatically set to 1 22 16 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Note EN Labels are always drawn with rounded ends and joins Line Ends The value you specify for line ends determines how the ends of line segments are shaped The following illustration describes the four types of line ends End point _ 1 2 line width Butt ends 1 Terminate at the end point Square ends 2 Terminate one half line width beyond the end points 1 2 1 2 line width line width Triangular ends 3 Round ends 4 Terminate in Terminate one half line width semicircle with a diameter beyond the end points equal to the current line width Figure 22 11 Four Line Ends Line Joins The value you specify for the line joins attribute determines how connecting line ends corners are shaped The following illustration describes the five types of line joins If
334. er of the environment features set to the factory default values User Defined Pattern In addition to the eight shading patterns and six cross hatch patterns users can design their own patterns area fill These user defined patterns are downloaded to the printer and used in subsequent area fills See User Defined Pattern Graphics in Chapter 13 User Defined Symbol Sets User defined symbol sets are supported in some HP LaserJet printers Symbols are user selected from a Symbol Index Such as Unicode or MSL To specify a user defined symbol set use the symbol set ID value as defined by the Symbol Set ID Code Command See Chapter 10 for more information Vector Graphics A method of drawing lines area fills and other objects which is generally more efficient than raster graphics Also see HP GL 2 Glossary 15 Glossary 16 Vertical Motion Index VMI VMI vertical motion index VMI defines the distance between rows in 1 48th inch increments This command affects the Line Feed and Half Line Feed spacing The factory default VMI is eight which corresponds to six lines per inch A user default VMI can be selected from the control panel using the FORM menu item EN EN Index Symbols IIPCL 5 Comparison Guide x Software Application Notes vi TrueType Font File Specification x A Page Size 5 2 C Vertical Motion Index 5 22 D Line Spacing 5 24 E Top Margin 5 16 F Tex
335. erlay environment 12 4 matching coordinate system with PCL 19 15 omitting optional parameters 17 9 orientation 17 17 page size independent image 18 3 parameter formats 17 10 PCL picture frame 18 1 pen location 17 23 picture frame 2 6 picture frame scaling 18 3 Plot Horizontal Size 18 11 Plot Vertical Size 18 12 Polygon Group 17 4 21 1 print area limiting boundaries 17 19 print environment 19 3 printing text 23 1 23 59 programming languages 17 13 range of parameter values 17 10 reset 3 8 rotate coordinate system 19 34 scaling factor 18 2 selecting fonts 23 17 23 68 state variables 5 5 syntax 17 6 terminating labels 23 11 units of measure 17 20 using fonts 23 15 varying text line spacing 23 8 vector fill 22 39 vector graphics Glossary 15 vector graphics on PCL logical page 2 6 Vector Group 17 4 20 1 Vector Group commands summary 20 1 when to use HP GL 2 17 1 HT horizontal tab 6 9 l I O Glossary 6 buffer Glossary 6 status response 16 1 throughput 24 11 ID code symbol set 10 2 10 6 ID command Font 8 26 ID number 9 2 font selection 8 26 macro 12 3 12 6 ROM based macros 12 8 user defined pattern 13 16 IF Intellifont Face Data 11 42 Image area HP GL 2 18 2 image raster 15 1 importing images HP GL 2 17 25 initialization 19 3 Initialize IN command 17 10 19 3 19 15 19 21 Input P1 and P2 IP command 19 23 19 36 Input Window IW command 17 19 19 29 Inquire Status Readback Entity command 16 10 integ
336. erminator parameter the space becomes the label terminator 23 44 The Character Group EN e Mode Specifies whether the label terminator is printed 0 The label terminator prints if it is a printable character and performs its function if it is a control code 1 Default The label terminator does not print if it is a printing character and does not perform its function if it is a control code A DT command remains in effect until another DT command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions The following command shows how to define and print using a non printing label terminator DT LBThe label terminator WILL NOT print This command would print as The label terminator WILL NOT print This example shows how to define and use a printable label terminator DT 0 LBThe label terminator WILL print This command would print as The label terminator WILL print For another example using the DT command see the example in the Character Plot CP command discussion Table 23 23 Related Commands Group LB Label The Character Group TD Transparent Data DT Define Label Terminator 23 45 DV Define Variable Text Path This command specifies the text path for subsequent labels and the direction of Line Feeds as either right left up or down Use DV to stack characters in a column DV path line or DV Functional Parameter Format Ra
337. ermined by the default font The default font can be the factory default font or the user selected default font from the printer s control panel or from a font cartridge containing a default font 2 User default values may be selected by the user from the printer s control panel for these items 3 Selectable from the printer control panel if duplex is selected 4 Selectable from the printer s control panel if a fixed space scalable font has been selected as the user default 5 Selectable from the printer s control panel if a proportional scalable font has been selected as the user default Factory Default Environment 3 3 Table 3 1 Factory Default Print Environment Features PCL Context continued RECTANGULAR AREA FILL TROUBLESHOOTING Horizontal Rectangle Size Vertical Rectangle Size End of Line Wrap Display Functions Pattern Area Fill ID STATUS READBACK Current Location Type Current Location Unit 1 The font characteristics are determined by the default font The default font can be the factory default font or the user selected default font from the printer s control panel or from a font cartridge containing a default font 2 User default values may be selected by the user from the printer s control panel for these items 3 Selectable from the printer control panel if duplex is selected 4 Selectable from the printer s control panel if a fixed
338. ern ID Pattern ID Eo c G and Select Pattern Eo v T redefines current pattern Download Page Data Source Image data Raster image characters Return to regular print mode Default current pattern and transparency modes EQ vOT 10075 black panam selected e EQ vON c v0O transparency m des selected Download remaining page data Transfer data for regular printing or the above process may be repeated to produce another print model effect Command Sequence 13 5 Table 13 1 continued End of Page Data Source Transparency Mode Command The Select Source Transparency Mode command sets the source image s transparency mode to transparent or opaque EQ v N 0 Transparent 1 Opaque Default 0 Range 0 1 other values cause the command to be ignored With a transparency mode of 0 transparent the white regions of the source image are not be copied onto the destination With a transparency mode of 1 opaque the white pixels in the source are applied directly onto the destination Refer to the preceding definitions and the discussion of Figure 13 3 for an explanation of the effects of transparency 13 6 The PCL Print Model EN Pattern Transparency Mode Command The Pattern Transparency Mode command sets the pattern s transparency mode to transparent or opaque Fa v O 0 Transparent 1 Opaque Default 0 Range 0 1 o
339. erns raster images is rotated to coincide with the new print direction e Any current raster graphics end when the print direction changes e Print Direction does not default HMI Note The Print Direction Command does not affect HP GL 2 vector graphic images HP GL 2 graphics can be rotated only with the Orientation command Ec amp O0 or the HP GL 2 RO command EN Print Direction Command 5 9 8 0 LaserJet 2 lt gt z 90 2 270 u Ci O h ct 18PIOSe Q 180 Figure 5 3 Changing Print Direction on a Page 5 10 Page Control Commands EN Text Area Notes EN Text printing may be restricted to a specific area within the logical page using the Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Text Length and Perforation Skip Mode commands This area is known as the text area The left margin defines the distance between the left edge of the logical page and the left edge of the text area The right margin defines the distance between the left edge of the logical page and the right edge of the text area The width of the text area is the distance between the left and right margins The top margin defines the distance between the top of the logical page and the top of the text area The text length defines the length of the text area which in effect defines the bottom margin The perforation region is the distance from the bottom of the text area to the top of the text area top margin on the
340. es 0 3 contain the character descriptor Class 4 Intellifont Scalable Compound Character Data A class 4 character is a compound character and composition data follows The composition data is organized as described in Table 11 43 The compound descriptor allows combining two different characters to produce a single compound character Contour Data Size Ul The size of the contour data including the size of this field For a detailed description of this field refer to Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format Metric Data Offset SI The offset to the Metric Data relative to the address of the Contour Data Size field Character Descriptor Formats 11 63 Note Character Intellifont Data Offset SI The offset to the Character Intellifont Data relative to the address of the Contour Data Size field Contour Tree Offset SI The offset to the contour Tree Data relative to the address of the Contour Data Size field XY Data Offset SI The offset to the XY data relative to the address of the Contour Data Size field Metric Data For information about Metric Data refer to the ntellifont Scalable Typeface Format document Character Intellifont Scalable Data For information about Character Intellifont Scalable Data refer to Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format Contour Tree Data For information about Contour Tree Data refer to ntellifont Scalable Typeface Format XY Coordinate Data For information about XY
341. es of the character cell Refer to Working with the Character Cell later in this chapter Character Size and Slant You can change the size of the characters using the Absolute Character Size and the Relative Character Size SI and SR commands The Absolute Character Size SI command establishes the nominal character width and CAP height in centimeters and maintains this character size independent of the location of P1 and P2 or the page size The Relative Character Size SR establishes the nominal character width and CAP height as a percentage of the distance between P1 and P2 Subsequent changes in the location of P1 and P2 cause the character size to change with the SR command Changing the character size changes the size of the CP Character Plot cell and proportionally changes the line width used in labels refer to AD and SD Note When the Shift In SI or Shift Out SO control codes are used to select a font the font size reverts to that font specified using the AD or SD commands You can use the Character Slant SL command to slant the characters at a specified angle in either direction from the left vertical side of the CP Character Plot cell The CP cell is not altered Character Spaces and Text Lines You can use the Extra Space ES command to automatically increase or decrease spaces between all characters or lines For example ES can be used to increase space between every character in a label such as MEMORAN
342. es the number of bytes in the immediately following Data Segment The size for the Null Segment is 0 Formats of Data Segments AP Application Support Segment The definition of this segment is reserved CC Character Complement This field has the same form i e 8 unsigned bytes and function as does the Character Complement of Format 11 fonts The Character Complement field should be present with type 10 and 11 unbound fonts but has no role to play in type 0 1 and 2 bound fonts CP copyright This field will consist of ASCII data and is optional GI Global Intellifont Data Reserved for future use GT Global TrueType Data This data segment contains first a Table Directory then five or more tables used by the TrueType font scaler Every TrueType font needs to have this segment The Table Directory is patterned after the initial segment of the TrueType font file as described in True Type Font Files The Table Directory has a 12 byte header and 16 bytes per entry in the Table Directory The Table Directory is organized in alphabetical order by the 4 byte table names For each entry there is an offset relative to the beginning of the soft font s Global TrueType Data Segment The Global TrueType Data for every TrueType font entity must contain a head hhea hmtx and maxp table Another required table is the gdir table When the font header is downloaded the gdir table should have a size of 0 and an offset of 0 The gdir ta
343. es the number of character data blocks for Format and Continuation bytes Glyph ID UI This field is used by the TrueType font scaler as an ID number for the glyph data associated with the given character TrueType Glyph Data This field contains the data segment associated with the given character as found in the glyf table of the original TrueType font file See the description in True Type Font Files Checksum UB The value of this byte when added to the sum of all of the bytes in the Character Data Size Glyph ID and TrueType Glyph Data fields should equal 0 in modulo 256 arithmetic The Checksum is found only in the last character data block associated with a given character Character Descriptor Formats 11 69 Character Definition Examples Note Bitmap Portrait Character Example To download a bitmap character descriptor and data for a portrait 10 Pitch 12 point upright medium Courier lower case p send Eel 12E 112 is the decimal character code for an ASCII lower case p E s140W character descriptor and data Notice that the 140 appearing in the Character Definition Command accounts for 2 bytes of the Character Data Block Header 14 bytes of Character Descriptor and 124 bytes of Character Data Since the Character Width is 26 dots 4 bytes are needed per raster row Also since the Character Height is 31 dots 124 bytes of Character Data for a Class 1 character is needed 4 x 31 124 No c
344. es to P1 and P2 move the window in relation to the physical page but keep the same user coordinate locations However sending a subsequent SC command binds the window to its equivalent plotter units The window does not change with any subsequent IP or IR commands IW Input Window 19 29 When you turn on the printer the window is automatically set to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries You can define a window that extends beyond the picture frame however the printer cannot print vector graphics beyond the effective window All programmed pen motion is restricted to this area For more information refer to Windowing Setting Up Soft Clip Limits at the beginning of this chapter Edge of Printing eee Medium an Hard Clip Limits Picture Effective trame Window l User Defined Window IW Command Figure 19 12The Effective Window If the window falls entirely outside of the PCL Picture Frame no image is drawn The IW command remains in effect until another IW command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions The following example draws a label then establishes a window and again draws the label along with a line Notice how the line and label are clipped after the window is established but not before Table 19 15 Example The IW Command EGE Reset the printer E 1B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode 19 30 The Configuration and Status
345. escribes the thickness of the strokes that compose characters Medium and bold are examples of stroke weights Style Font style is defined by the angularity of the strokes of the characters with respect to the X axis Upright italic and condensed are examples of font styles Symbol Index This is a grouping of symbols An unbound font has the capacity to be bound to a set of symbols selected from a complementary Symbol Index such as the Unicode or the MSL symbol indexes Each symbol in the index is identified by a unique symbol index number Appendix D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide contains lists of MSL and Unicode symbol index characters and their numbers also see Unicode or MSL Glossary 13 Glossary 14 Symbol Set A symbol set is a unique ordering of the characters in a font Each symbol set is defined with a unique set of applications in mind Symbol sets are created for many purposes for example the PC 8 symbol set was designed to support US IBM PC applications Treatment Treatment is the combination of font style and or weight For example some treatments of Times Roman font include upright or bold or italic Typeface Typeface is a generic name for graphics symbols having common design features Each typeface has unique and distinguishing characteristics UEL Universal Exit Language Command The Universal Exit Language UEL command 12345X causes the PCL printer language to shut down and exit
346. establish character size independent of P1 and P2 SI width height or SI 7 Parameter Format Functional Range Default width clamped real 32768 to 32767 dependent height clamped real 32768 to 32767 dependent Dependent on the current pitch and font height set by the AD or SD commands While Sl is in effect with or without specifying parameter values the size of characters in the currently selected font are not affected by changes in P1 and P2 e No Parameters Character size is as specified by the SD Standard Font Definition and AD Alternate Font Definition commands e Width Specifies the width of the nominal character in centimeters A negative width parameter mirrors labels in the right to left direction Changing character size also changes the width of line used to draw Stick font characters e Height Specifies the cap height in centimeters A negative height parameter mirrors labels in the top to bottom direction Note that in most languages the width of a letter is typically less than the height If you set your characters to have a different aspect ratio they may look odd to your readers An SI command remains in effect until another SI command is executed an SR command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions 23 74 The Character Group EN Notes EN If the SB1 command is in effect an SI command may not be executed
347. esting a PCL status it is possible that PUL could return an unsolicited status response if PJL is enabled e All PCL status responses begin with the PCL header and end with the lt FF gt control code When reading PCL status responses your application should be able to read all the data between the PCL header and the lt FF gt control code It should ignore any other status response syntax e Lines within the PCL status response begin with a specific keyword those described in this chapter and end with the lt CR gt and lt LF gt control codes Future printers may support new keywords in the PCL status response Your application should be designed to ignore those lines which it does not understand e The first PCL status readback command an application should send is the PCL Echo command A random number should be generated for the value field each time the command is sent Your application should ignore all printer status readback data until the PCL Echo status readback response is received echoing the number the application sent e To clear any possible unread status responses from previous applications an application upon starting up may want to read any pending responses until they are cleared from the printer EN Status Readback Programming Hints 16 27 16 28 Status Readback EN Note EN An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics The PCL 5 printer provides the ability to print vector graphics usi
348. eturn to PCL mode from HP GL 2 mode Ec A 0 Position cursor at previous PCL cursor position 1 Position cursor at current HP GL 2 pen position Default Range 0 0 1 even values are mapped to 0 odd values are mapped to 1 Sending the Enter PCL Mode command causes the printer to stop interpreting the incoming data as HP GL 2 commands and to begin interpreting the data as PCL commands The value field specifies the cursor position when PCL mode is entered 0 A 0 parameter Ec 0A sets the pen position to the previous PCL position the cursor position before entering HP GL 2 mode 1 A 1 parameter Ec 1A sets the cursor position to the current HP GL 2 pen position If the current HP GL 2 pen position is outside the bounds of the PCL logical page the nearest point on the logical page boundary becomes the new PCL cursor position No PCL variables except the cursor position are affected by entering and exiting HP GL 2 mode Example To exit HP GL 2 mode using the current active cursor position CAP that existed before entering HP GL 2 mode send E 0A 18 14 The Picture Frame EN Default Settings EN When you enter HP GL 2 mode most vector graphics variables retain their previous HP GL 2 value However the following changes in the PCL environment can affect the HP GL 2 environment e Resetting the printer FE or control panel reset Executes an IN Initialize command Defaults the PCL Pi
349. eturn to their user default values and disables the automatic macro overlay All data received prior to this command is printed and a Form Feed and Carriage Return executed The cursor is moved to the left edge of the logical page at the top margin cursor position see Figure 5 5 The factory default orientation is portrait Landscape orientation may be selected as the user default orientation using the control panel The HP LaserJet 2000 LaserJet IID LaserJet IIP and all PCL 5 printers automatically rotate all fonts to the current orientation Table 5 1 shows how changing certain PCL features such as a reset orientation page size or page length or changing the HP GL 2 picture presentation directives picture frame width or height horizontal or vertical plot size or picture frame anchor point affect the HP GL 2 state variables Logical Page Orientation Command 5 5 Table 5 1 HP GL 2 State Variables EcE or Control Panel Reset executes IN command defaults picture frame defaults picture frame anchor point defaults HP GL 2 plot size Changing Orientation or Sending a Page Size Command Redefinition of the horizontal and or vertical picture frame Defaults picture frame anchor point Defaults picture frame Defaults HP GL 2 plot size Defaults P1 and P2 IP Defaults soft clip window IW Clears the polygon buffer PMO PM2 Updates the current position to the l
350. f the original HP GL 2 drawing is 7 inches tall send E to7L 18 12 The Picture Frame EN Enter HP GL 2 Mode This command causes the printer to interpret subsequent commands as HP GL 2 commands instead of PCL printer language commands Ec B 0 Position pen at previous HP GL 2 pen position 1 Position pen at current PCL cursor position Default 0 Range 0 1 even values are mapped to 0 odd values are mapped to 1 E B is the same as E 0B As soon as the printer receives this command it switches to HP GL 2 mode interpreting commands as HP GL 2 commands until it receives an Enter PCL Mode E E or UEL command or until the printer power is switched off and on For information on the effect of PCL settings on HP GL 2 mode see Default Settings later in this chapter The value field determines the cursor position once HP GL 2 mode is entered 0 This parameter option Ec 0B sets the pen position to the previous HP GL 2 position if this is the first time HP GL 2 mode is entered in the present print job assuming an ELE has been sent the pen position is at the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame 0 0 1 This parameter option F 1B specifies that the pen position be the same as the current PCL cursor position Example To set the pen position to the current PCL cursor position send E 1B EN Enter HP GL 2 Mode 18 13 Enter PCL Mode This command causes the printer to r
351. fault The CP Character Plot command includes an automatic pen up When the command is completed the original pen up down status is restored CP moves the pen position in relation to the current position CP is a movement command and does not affect the margin to repeat the same movement for subsequent labels you must issue new CP commands For information about the Carriage Return point see Moving to the Carriage Return Point in the Printing Labels discussion near the beginning of this chapter For more information on spaces lines and the character cell refer to Working with the Character Cell earlier in this chapter e No Parameters Performs a Carriage Return and Line Feed moves one line down and returns to the Carriage Return point e Spaces Specifies the number of spaces the pen moves relative to the current pen location Positive values specify the number of spaces the pen moves to the right of the current pen position negative values specify the number of spaces the pen moves to the left Right and left are relative to current label direction The space width is uniquely defined for each font use the ES command to adjust the width Note If you are using a proportionally spaced font the width of the Space control code is used 23 24 The Character Group EN EN e Lines Specifies the number of lines the pen moves relative to the current pen location Positive values specify th
352. field Master Underline Thickness Height UI The Master Underline Thickness field defines thickness of the floating underline in design units Font Scaling Technology UB For scalable fonts this field species the technology to be used for font scaling Table 11 24 Value Font Scaling Technology 0 Intellifont 1 TrueType 11 34 Soft Font Creation EN Note EN Variety UB The interpretation of this field depends on the value of the preceding Font Scaling Technology byte For TrueType fonts this field must be set to zero OR Threshold Ul Formerly called the LRE Threshold this is the pixel size in design units above which the missing pixel recovery process is switched on in Intellifont scaling and rasterization The size of a pixel in design units increases as point size and device resolution decrease Global Italic Angle Sl The Global Italic Angle field contains the tangent of the italic angle times 215 relative to the vertical Set this field to zero for upright fonts For detailed information on Global Italic Angle refer to Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format Global Intellifont Data Size UI The Global Intellifont Data Size identifies the size of the Global Intellifont data block For detailed information about Global Intellifont Data Size refer to Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format Global Intellifont Data For detailed information on Global Intellifont Data r
353. fill or PCL user defined patterns FT fill type option 1 option2 or FT 7 Parameter Format Functional Range Default fill type clamped 1 4 10 11 21 22 1 integer option1 option2 clamped type dependent type real dependent Refer to the table following the parameter descriptions There are eight forms of fill types as shown above The type parameter tells the printer which form you are using If the fill type is specified but the option and or option2 parameter is omitted values previously given for the specified fill type are assumed or the defaults are assumed if none have been specified e No Parameters Defaults all FT parameters and sets the fill type to solid fill Equivalent to FT1 e Type Selects the fill pattern The table below lists the parameter values and corresponding fill types e Option1 Option2 The definition of these optional parameters depends on the type of fill selected The following table lists the options available for each fill type Table 22 5 Fill Type Description Option1 Option2 1 and 2 solid black ignored ignored 3 or parallel spacing of lines angle of lines ines FT Fill Type 22 9 Table 22 5 continued 4 cross hatch spacing of lines angle of lines 10 shading shading level ignored 11 HP GL 2 raster fill index ignored user defined 21 PCL cross hatch pattern type ignored patter
354. fined pattern has been downloaded the fill procedure can be repeated as often as required Rectangular Area Fill Procedure 1 For user defined patterns if you have not done so already download the binary pattern data User Defined Pattern Command Ec cH W Chapter 13 2 Position the cursor choice of various cursor commands Chapter 6 Introduction 14 1 Note Specify width of rectangle Horizontal Rectangle Size Command Decipoints c H or PCL Units _ c A Specify height of rectangle Vertical Rectangle Size Command Decipoints c V or PCL Units c B Select specific shade cross hatch or user defined pattern Pattern ID Command EO c G Chapter 13 Fill rectangular area with pattern Fill Rectangular Area Command Ecc P This ends the procedure and prints the patterned area An area s width extends in the positive X direction of the PCL coordinate system and the height extends in the positive Y direction The Pattern Transparency Mode controls how a pattern fills a rectangular area Pattern Transparency Mode determines what effect transparent or opaque the white pixels of the pattern have on the rectangular area refer to Pattern Transparency Mode Command in Chapter 13 1 White 1 black 0 or current 5 pattern also can be specified using this command 14 2 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics EN Horizontal Rectangle Size Decipoints Command This Horizontal Rectangle
355. following results in your programs e Use absolute and relative coordinates when plotting e Draw lines arcs bezier curves and circles e Encode coordinates to increase your printer s throughput The following commands are described in this chapter Table 20 1 The Vector Group Commands Command Summary AA Arc Absolute Draws an arc using absolute coordinates AR Arc Relative Draws an arc using relative coordinates AT Absolute Arc Three Point Draws an arc from the current pen location through two absolute points BR Bezier Relative Draws a bezier curve using relative coordinates as control points BZ Bezier Absolute Draws a bezier curve using absolute coordinates as control points Cl Circle Draws a circle with a specified radius Introduction 20 1 Table 20 1 The Vector Group Commands continued PA Plot Absolute Enables movement to absolute coordinate locations with respect to the origin 0 0 PD Pen Down Lowers the pen to the page PE Polyline Encoded Increases throughput by encrypting common HP GL 2 commands PR Plot Relative Enables movement relative to the current pen location PU Pen Up Lifts the pen from the page RT Relative Arc Three Point Draws an arc from the current pen location through two relative points Drawing Lines You can draw lines between two points X Y coordinate pairs using the PD Pen Down co
356. font is compatible with Desktop Publishing character sets e g Windows 3 1 Latin 1 DeskTop MC Text 1 otherwise Font Header Format 11 37 Table 11 28 Unicode Symbol Index Character Complement Bits 26 0 if font is compatible with character sets requiring a wider selection of accents e g MC Text ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 1 otherwise 25 0 if font is compatible with traditional PCL character sets e g Roman 8 Legal ISO 4 United Kingdom 1 otherwise 24 0 if font is compatible with the Macintosh character set MC Text 1 otherwise 23 0 if font is compatible with PostScript Standard Encoding PS Text 1 otherwise 22 0 if font is compatible with Code Pages e g PC 8 PC 850 PC Turk etc 1 otherwise 2 1 0 110 if font is arranged in Unicode Symbol Index order There are no invalid Character Complement field values Examples of values for the field include Table 11 29 Bit Field Designated Use Value hex Meaning MSL 0000000000000000 Default complement font is compatible with any character set 7EFELFELELL ELL EL Font is indexed in MSL and is compatible only with standard West Latin character sets fffffffefffrfrftrt Font is indexed in MSL and is compatible only with ITC Zapf Dingbat character sets Unicode ffffffff3ffffffe Font is indexed in Unicode and is compatible only with standard West Latin character sets
357. fset in printers which do not have a mechanical offset mechanism but have dual paper trays In dual bin printers job offset can be performed by placing colored paper in the second tray and using Paper Source command to select the tray to feed a blank sheet of colored paper at the end of a job This method should only be used in special cases where the end user can control its use for example the program should only be available for a dual bin printer which can always contain colored paper in one tray Job Separation Command 4 11 Output Bin Selection Command The Output Bin Selection command selects either of the two output paper bins upper or lower rear for paper output Eo amp LHG 1 Upper Output Bin 2 Lower Rear Output Bin Default Upper Output Bin Range 1 2 Note If this command is received by a printer which does not contain the dual output bin feature it is ignored 4 12 PCL Job Control Commands EN Unit of Measure Command Note EN The Unit of Measure command establishes the unit of measure for PCL Unit cursor movements Ec amp u D Number of units per inch Default 300 Range 96 100 120 144 150 160 180 200 225 240 288 300 360 400 450 480 600 720 800 900 1200 1440 1800 2400 3600 7200 The value field defines the number of units per inch used in the following commands e Vertical Cursor Position PCL Units e Horizontal Cursor Position PCL Units e Vert
358. g illustration shows the four types of line segments you can specify from one point to another Table 19 6 The Four Types of Line Segments Type 1 From Last Point Inside window area To New Point Inside window area Inside window area Outside window area 2 3 4 Outside window area Outside window area Inside window area Outside window area PCL Picture Frame Type 1 Figure 19 8 The four types of line segments 19 18 The Configuration and Status Group Window Soft clip Limits Type 20r 3 EN The IW command lets you control the size of the HP GL 2 printing area so that you can draw a particular portion of a drawing You can leave the rest as white space or use the remaining area for labels or another drawing Refer to The Vector Graphic Limits in Chapter 17 and the IW command description later in this chapter CO Comment This command allows comments to be inserted within an HP GL 2 command sequence The comment string of the CO command must be delimited by double quotes CO text tex HP GL 2 comments are ignored by the printer DF Default Values EN This command returns the printer s HP GL 2 settings to the factory default settings Use the Default Values DF command to return the printer to a known state while maintaining the current locations of P1 and P2 unlike the IN command When you use DF at the beginning of a command sequence
359. g the binary pattern data that defines the user pattern Ta c W pattern data Number of pattern data bytes Default Range 0 0 32767 values outside the range are ignored The value field identifies the number of pattern data bytes that follow the User Defined Pattern command In addition to the binary pattern data there are eight bytes of pattern descriptor header information included in this pattern data The format for a 300 dpi resolution header is shown in Table 13 3 below Table 13 3 User Defined Pattern Header 300 dpi resolution Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Format 0 Continuation 0 Pixel Encoding 1 Reserved 0 Width in Pixels 2 4 Height in Pixels 6 8 Pattern image With the introduction of the LaserJet 4 printer user defined patterns can be printed either 300 or 600 dpi resolution X Resolution and Y Resolution fields have been added to the header information included in the previous header The format for the new header is shown in Table 13 4 below Table 13 4 Resolution Specified User Defined Pattern Header Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Format 0 Continuation 0 2 Pixel Encoding 1 Reserved 0 13 16 The PCL Print Model EN Notes EN Table 13 4 Resolution Specified User Defined Pattern Header 4 Height in Pixels 6 Width in Pixels 8 X Resolution 10 Y Resolution 12 Pattern image The M
360. ge of the previous parameter however all X coordinates must have a corresponding Y coordinate 17 8 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Note Notes EN Remember that while X Y coordinates are shown in parentheses in text for example 3 4 or 0 0 the parentheses are not part of the syntax Do not enter these parentheses in your commands 5 iCommand terminator In most HP GL 2 commands a semicolon is optional and is shown in parentheses in most command syntax Three exceptions to the optional use of the semicolon as a command terminator occur in the following commands Polyline Encoded PE Label LB and Comment CO PE must be terminated by a semicolon LB is terminated by the non printing end of text character ETX decimal 3 or a user defined character The comment string of the CO command must be delimited by double quotes A semicolon terminator is always required following the last command prior to leaving HP GL 2 mode A comma is always shown as the separator between parameters A space or is also valid although not preferred A or is a valid separator only for numeric parameters Omitting Optional Parameters Some commands have optional parameters that take on default values if they are omitted When you omit a parameter you must omit all subsequent parameters in the same command the Define Label Terminator DT command is an exception For example the Line Type LT command
361. generates a status response This response consists of ASCII data which is sent directly from the printer through the I O back to the host Status readback allows you to obtain information from the printer such as available printer user memory current available fonts and symbol sets and the ID numbers of downloaded macros and user defined patterns to verify their presence The contents of this chapter are listed below e Introduction e Memory Status Request e Entity Status Request Status Response Syntax Set Status Readback Location Type Command Set Status Readback Location Unit Command Inquire Status Readback Entity Command Entity Status Responses e Font e Font Extended e Macro e User Defined Pattern e Symbol Set e Entity Error Codes e Free Space Command e Memory Status Response e Memory Error Response Introduction 16 1 Note e Flush All Pages Command e Echo Command e Status Readback Programming Hints For status readback to work the host system must contain a bi directional driver to receive status response data In network operations some printing environments do not support bi directional communication such as many printer sharing devices which spool data and some network operating systems Applications designed to incorporate PCL status readback should be designed to function correctly in situations where no response is possible For the stand alone DOS personal computer bi directional driver ap
362. gnated by the AD command The SA command is equivalent to using the Shift Out control character SO decimal 14 within a label string The default designated alternate font uses symbol set 277 Roman 8 The alternate font remains in effect until an SS command is executed a Shift In control character SI decimal 15 is encountered or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Table 23 37 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The Character Group DT Define Label Terminator Fl Select Primary Font FN Select Secondary Font LB Label SD Standard Font Definition SS Select Standard Font 23 66 The Character Group EN SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts Note EN This command specifies which types of fonts are used for labeling commands It allows you to restrict font selection to only scalable fonts and the Stick and Arc fonts disregarding bitmap fonts SB n or SB Parameter Format Functional Range Default n clamped integer Oor 1 0 This command is defaulted by the Default Values DF command The SB command takes effect immediately changing both the standard primary and alternate secondary fonts to be scalable only or bitmap allowed as requested e No Parameter Defaults to scalable fonts Equivalent to SBO e n Determines the type of font according to the following parameter values 0 Scalable fonts only 1 Bitmap fonts allowed
363. gned using the Font ID Command Example To specify a font ID number of 1 send E elD 9 4 Font Management EN Font Control Command The Font Control command provides mechanisms for manipulating soft fonts EQ c F 0 Delete all soft fonts 1 Delete all temporary soft fonts 2 Delete soft font last ID specified 3 Delete Character Code last ID and Character Code specified 4 Make soft font temporary last ID specified 5 Make soft font permanent last ID specified 6 Copy Assign current invoked font as temporary last ID specified Default N A Range 0 6 values outside range are ignored Note If the primary or secondary font is deleted a new primary or secondary font is selected automatically from the remaining fonts Examples To remove all soft fonts from user memory send Es cOF To remove only those soft fonts that are temporary send Eo elF To delete the soft font with an ID of 1 send Eo eld2F EN Font Control Command 9 5 To delete the character p 112 decimal in a bitmap or bound scalable font with an ID of 1 send Eq eld112e3F A space is printed in place of the deleted character Also the E c E Character Code command used in the above sequence 112e is described in Chapter 11 To make the soft font with an ID of 2 temporary send Eo e2d4F To make the soft font with an ID of 2 permanent send Eo e2d5F To make a copy of the currently invo
364. graphic point which is approximately 1 72 inch Columns amp Rows The width of a column is defined by the current horizontal motion index HMI as described under Horizontal Motion Index HMI Command in Chapter 5 The distance between rows is defined by the current vertical motion index VMI as described under Vertical Motion Index VMI Command in Chapter 5 HMI is the distance between consecutive characters VMI is the distance between consecutive lines of text HMI and VMI are described in more detail in Chapter 5 HP GL 2 has its own coordinate system and units For additional information about the HP GL 2 coordinate system and units refer to Chapter 17 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics 6 4 Cursor Positioning EN Horizontal Cursor Positioning Columns Command This Horizontal Cursor Positioning command moves the cursor to a new column on the current line Ec amp a C Number of Columns Default NA Range 0 logical page right bound valid to 4 decimal places The width of a column is defined by the current HMI Note The current unit of measure setting affects how HMI values are rounded For example if the unit of measure is set to 96 one PCL Unit 1 96 inch then the HMI is rounded to the nearest 1 96 inch If the unit of measure is set to 300 one PCL Unit 1 300 inch the HMI is rounded to the nearest 1 300 inch A value field with a plus sign indicates the new position is to
365. graphics parameters such as character size slant or scaling are defaulted DF The DF command resets the printer to the conditions listed in Table 19 7 Table 19 7 Default Conditions Function Command Default Condition Anchor Corner AC Anchor corner not the same as the picture frame anchor point set to lower left corner of PCL Picture Frame relative to the current coordinate system Alternate Font AD Stick Font 11 5 pt 9 cpi Definition upright medium Character Fill Mode CF Solid fill no edging CO Comment 19 19 Table 19 7 Default Conditions continued Absolute Direction DI1 0 Character direction parallel to X axis Define Label DT ETX and non printing Terminator mode Define Variable Text DV Text printed left to right Path with normal Line Feed Extra Space ES No extra space Fill Type FT Solid fill Input Window IW Set equal to PCL Picture Frame Window Line Attributes LA Butt caps mitered joins and miter limit 5 Label Origin LO1 Standard labeling starting at current location Line Type LT Solid line relative mode pattern length 4 of diagonal distance from P1 to P2 Plotting Mode PA Absolute plotting Polygon Mode PM Polygon buffer cleared Raster Fill RF Solid black Scalable or Bitmap SBO Scalable fonts only Fonts Scale SC User unit scaling off Screened Vectors SV No screening Standard Font
366. h transparent print data byte is interpreted as a single character code The appropriate character is printed if one exists otherwise a Space is processed For example control codes such as LF CR FF are treated as print data while in Transparent Print Data mode Example Assuming the currently selected symbol set is PC 8 send the following to print musical notes decimal code 14 Ec amp p1X ASCII 14 The brackets J are provided for clarity and are not part of the command sequence In the ASCII symbol set decimal 14 is the Shift Out control code no printable character exists however in the PC 8 symbol set decimal code 14 is also the musical notes character printable from transparency mode Refer to Appendix A for character codes for the various symbol sets 8 28 PCL Font Selection EN Underline Command Note EN The Underline command controls automatic text underlining E amp d D Enable underline OQ Fixed position 3 Floating position Default 0 Range 0 3 values outside range are ignored FE amp d Disable underline Once underlining is enabled any positive horizontal movement causes an underline to be drawn Positive horizontal movement includes the printing of text and positive horizontal cursor motion When fixed position underlining is enabled the underline is drawn five dots below the baseline and is three dots thick The baseline is the dot row on which all of the characters
367. haracter such as its position and the cursor position after printing The character data which follows defines the shape of the character This chapter describes the font header and character definition formats for PCL Bitmap fonts Intellifont scalable and TrueType scalable fonts By formatting a font consistent with the header format requirements a user may download this information the font to the printer using the Font Header command and the Character Descriptor Data command One additional command the Character Code command required to identify the ASCII character code assigned to each character is also described in this chapter Introduction 11 1 Note The definition of a font with a quantity n characters would appear as shown below Table 11 1 Font ID Command Font Header Character Code Character Descriptor Character Data Character Codes Character Descriptors Character Data Character Coden Character Descriptor Character Data Font Classifications There are three basic classifications of fonts accepted by the HP LaserJet printer PCL bitmap Intellifont scalable and TrueType scalable Several different font header and character descriptor formats are available for the different font classifications All are presented in this chapter Not all font classifications are supported in all HP LaserJet Family printers Refer to the PCL 5 Comparison Guide or the printer User s Manual for specific
368. haracter data blocks 11 48 character descriptor field 11 57 compression 11 54 height 11 57 Intellifont 11 64 TrueType size 11 69 character definition command 11 50 examples 11 70 PCL 11 48 character descriptor 11 1 11 62 Glossary 2 bitmap example landscape 11 72 bitmap example portrait 11 70 character data 11 57 character data compression 11 54 character header 11 51 checksum 11 64 11 69 class 11 53 11 62 11 63 11 68 component list 11 65 compound 11 61 continuation 11 52 11 68 cursor positioning 11 57 data offset 11 63 11 64 data size 11 63 11 69 data types 11 51 delta 11 57 format 11 52 glyph ID 11 69 height 11 57 Intellifont scalable fonts 11 60 left offset 11 56 11 68 number of components 11 65 orientation 11 56 PCL bitmap fonts 11 51 scalable contour data format 11 61 size 11 53 11 62 11 68 top offset 11 56 11 68 tree data 11 64 tree offset 11 64 TrueType 11 65 width 11 57 11 68 xy coordinate data 11 64 Index 19 Index 20 xy data offset 11 64 character design 7 7 Character Fill Mode command 23 20 Character Group HP GL 2 23 1 commands list 17 5 commands summary 23 1 character orientation 7 8 character origin 23 63 Character Plot CP command 23 5 23 8 23 16 23 24 character positioning 6 1 character requirement MSL 10 7 number 9 10 Unicode 10 9 user defined symbol set header 10 7 character row height 5 22 character sets fonts 7 1 character size HP GL 2 23 8 23 74 Character Slant
369. haracter descriptor Intellifont 11 64 data processing suspending 16 24 data segments formats 11 41 data size Intellifont character descriptor 11 63 data type 10 5 11 14 data user defined pattern 13 18 decipoint 2 5 6 6 defined 2 5 6 4 Glossary 3 vs typographic point 6 4 default defined Glossary 3 HP GL 2 18 15 factory settings 3 2 HP GL 2 19 3 HP GL 2 settings 3 5 HP GL 2 table 19 19 label conditions HP GL 2 23 7 location P1 and P2 19 23 print resolution 2 3 setting 3 1 user environment 3 6 3 8 Default Values command 17 23 19 3 19 19 Default Values command 17 10 DEFID fontsinternallDnumber 16 15 Define Label Terminator command 23 11 23 44 Define Symbol Set command 10 4 Define Variable Text Path command 23 9 23 29 23 30 23 37 23 46 deleting fonts 9 3 macros 12 6 delta row compression adaptive compression 15 25 15 27 raster graphics 15 16 15 20 delta X character descriptor 11 57 descriptor character 11 1 font header 11 1 user defined pattern header 13 16 design units 11 4 design window Intellifont character cell 11 4 destination image 13 1 13 2 DF command 17 10 17 23 19 3 19 19 DI command 23 9 23 21 23 29 example 23 34 disk fonts 7 2 display functions command 24 12 example 24 13 document control 4 2 dot Glossary 3 dots vs PCL Units 2 3 4 15 dots printed 2 3 downloading Glossary 4 downloading fonts 9 2 bitmap example 11 43 Intellifont example 11 44 DR command 23 9 23
370. haracteristic is ignored Location if after performing all the preceding steps more than one font remains the available font from the highest priority font location is selected The priority of the font locations are Priority of Locations Soft Font Lowest ID first Highest Cartridge Font SIMM Font Internal Font Lowest 1 In printers with two cartridge slots one slot has priority over the other Refer to Appendix E of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for cartridge slot priority information for the different HP LaserJet printers 8 24 PCL Font Selection EN EN Orientation for bitmap fonts the last criteria considered for the selection is its orientation If two fonts still remain and match in all the above characteristics except orientation that font which matches the current page orientation is selected If there is a soft font highest priority location available that matches all selection characteristics but is not in the current orientation and there is an identical font available in a cartridge or internal font lower priority location that is in the current orientation the soft font is selected and rotated Summary of Font Selection by Characteristic 8 25 Font Selectionby ID Command Notes Soft fonts can be specified using their associated ID numbers ID numbers are assigned to soft fonts using the Font ID command described in Chapter 9 Font Management Eo X Designates
371. he EW command and the WG Fill Wedge command is that the EW command produces an outlined wedge and the WG commana a filled one Always use isotropic scaling in drawings that contain wedges unless you wish the wedges to stretch with changes in the aspect ratio of the drawing causing elliptical wedges For more information refer to the discussion of scaling and the Scale SC command description in Chapter 19 EN EW Edge Wedge 21 27 Anisotropic Isotropic scaling scaling Figure 21 17 Anisotropic and Isotropic Scaling e Radius Specifies the distance from the current pen location to the start of the wedge s arc Since the wedge is a portion of a circle this parameter is the radius of the circle It specifies the distance from the current pen location which becomes the center of the circle to any point on the circumference of the circle The radius is interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off The sign positive or negative of the radius determines the location of the zero degree reference point The illustration following the parameter descriptions shows the location of the zero degree reference point for a positive and a negative radius e Sweep Angle Specifies the number of degrees through which the arc is drawn A positive sweep angle is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis a negative sweep angle is in the direction of the X axis to the Y
372. he HMI affects only the space character HMI is defaulted when font orientation symbol set pitch spacing or height is specified and when switching between primary and secondary fonts with Shift In and Shift Out The default HMI is equal to the pitch value in the font header The factory default font s HMI is 12 which is 12 120 1 10 inch per character or 10 characters per inch HP GL 2 PCL 5 printers provide the ability to print vector graphics using the HP GL 2 graphics language commands HP GL 2 graphics may be created within application software or imported from existing applications For various types of images many technical drawings and business graphics for example it is advantageous to use vector graphics instead of raster graphics Advantages include faster I O transfer of large images and smaller storage requirements See Chapter 17 for more information I O I O is an acronym for input output I O and is used in this document when referring to hardware used to interface printers with computers 1 O Buffer The area within the printer s internal random access memory RAM where PCL commands and data are stored Interface Connector The LaserJet printer comes with two interface connectors serial and parallel located on the lower part of the back panel The cable that attaches the computer to the printer is connected here Also see Parallel I O or Serial I O EN EN Internal Fonts Internal fonts
373. he Vector Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group 22 28 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN PW Pen Width EN This command specifies a new width for the logical pen Subsequent lines are drawn in this new width Use PW to vary your lines and enhance your drawings Pen width can be specified as a fixed value or relative to the distance between P1 and P2 The pen width units are selected via the WU command the default is metric millimeters PW width pen or PW Parameter Format Functional Range Default width clamped real 32768 to 32767 Dependent pen integer Oori 1 Black 1 Dependent on the mode set by the Pen Width Unit Selection WU command if mode is metric default width is 0 35 mm if mode is relative default width is 0 1 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 You may change the pen width as often as you like without sending another SP command If the pen is down when you change the width the new width takes effect at the next line f you use WU to change the type of units used for the width parameter metric or relative send the WU command before PW e No Parameters Defaults the pen line width according to the current units set by WU 0 35 mm if metric 1 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2
374. he above plot the lines from 0 0 to 0 1500 and 0 0 to 2500 0 is clipped Drawing Circles The Circle Cl command uses your current pen position as the center of the circle you specify the radius of the circle The following example shows a simple command sequence using Cl to draw a circle with a radius of 500 plotter units Table 20 3 Example Drawing Circles EOE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing PA2400 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to position 2400 2500 C1500 Draw a circle with a radius of 500 plu plotter units the center of the circle is the current pen location 2400 2500 E A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 20 4 The Vector Group EN Current pen location 2400 2500 Radius 500 plotter units Figure 20 2 Drawing circles Drawing Arcs The Arc Absolute AA and Arc Relative AR commands use the following method for drawing arcs Your current pen location becomes one end of the arc you specify the center point with one parameter setting the radius and set another parameter to specify the number of degrees through which you want the arc drawn The following illustration shows a simple command sequence using the AA command to draw a circle and an arc Table 20 4 Example Drawing A
375. he printer ignores the last unmatched coordinate 20 30 The Vector Group EN Table 20 19 Related Commands Group PE Polyline Encoded The Vector Group PR Plot Relative PD Pen Down PU Pen Up LA Line Attributes Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width SM Symbol Mode PD Pen Down This command lowers the printer s logical pen and draws subsequent graphics commands PD X Y or PD Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates current 29 to 230 4 no default increments units This command emulates a pen plotter which must lower the pen to draw lines on the page e No Parameters Prepares the printer to draw subsequent graphics commands e X Y Coordinates Increments Draws in current units to the point specified You can specify as many X Y coordinate pairs as you want When you include more than one coordinate pair the printer draws to each point in the order given EN PD Pen Down 20 31 e Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Whether the PD command uses coordinates or increments depends on the most recently executed PA or PR command If no PA or PR command is issued absolute plotting PA is used e When you use the symbol mode SM command PD draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you use the polygon mod
376. he size of the original HP GL 2 image If you are creating a drawing within an application do not send these commands Enter HP GL 2 mode using the Ec B command Send HP GL 2 commands IN SP1 Exit HP GL 2 mode by sending the A Enter PCL Mode command Send more PCL commands if desired or issue an FE command to end the job and eject the page Whenever a printer reset FUE is sent at the beginning of a job precede it with a UEL Ec 12345X command whenever a printer reset is sent at the end of a job follow it with a UEL command Typical HP GL 2 PlotCommand Sequence 18 5 Table 18 1 E cE E c amp I2A E c amp I00 E c3060x3960Y E p565x600Y E cOT Eo c8 5k11L E 1B 18 6 The Picture Frame Example Creating and Using a PCL Picture Frame Reset the printer Set the page size to letter Specify portrait orientation Specify a 4 25 inch wide by 5 5 inch high PCL Picture Frame 4 25in x 720 decipoints in 3060 decipoints 5 5in x 720 decipoints in 3960 decipoints Move the cursor to the point you desire as the picture frame anchor point Set the picture frame anchor point to the current cursor position Specify that the original HP GL 2 plot size is 8 5 inches wide by 11 inches high This sets up a scaling factor of 2 1 because the original HP GL 2 plot size is twice as large as the PCL Picture Frame 4 25 x 5 5 inches f you are creating a drawing within an application
377. header It specifies the format for character downloading The number 15 designates the TrueType character format Table 11 50 Value Format 4 LaserJet Family Raster 10 Intellifont Scalable 15 TrueType Scalable These are described elsewhere in this chapter Character Descriptor Formats 11 67 Continuation B This is the second and last byte of every character data block header It specifies whether the following data is the first 0 data block of a new character definition or a continuation 1 block for a character definition which has already been received by the printer Because the value field in a Character Definition command is limited to 32767 bytes characters whose byte count exceed this must be sent in two or more blocks Descriptor Size UB This is the first byte of the character descriptor It specifies the size of the character descriptor in bytes The character descriptor includes everything that is both after the continuation byte and prior to the Character Data Size field The TrueType character descriptor includes this Descriptor Size byte plus the following Class byte The minimum value for Descriptor Size is therefore 2 Additional descriptor information if any can be added immediately after the Class byte Class UB This field is used to distinguish different character data types within a given character format For instance among Intellifont characters of format 10 th
378. hree Point RT Relative Arc Three Point The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group Cl Circle 20 29 PA Plot Absolute This command establishes absolute plotting and moves the pen to the specified absolute coordinates from the current pen position Note PA X Y or PA Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates currentunits 2 to 29 4 no default The printer interprets the parameters as follows No Parameters Establishes absolute plotting for subsequent commands X Y Coordinates Specify the absolute location to which the pen moves When you include more than one coordinate pair the pen moves to each point in the order given using the current pen up down status If the pen is up PA moves the pen to the point if the pen is down PA draws a line to the point Lines are drawn using the current line width type and attributes When you use the symbol mode SM command PA draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you use the polygon mode PM command the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer for use when the polygon is edged or filled Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If an odd number of coordinates is specified in other words an X coordinate without a corresponding Y coordinate t
379. hree forms of scaling anisotropic isotropic and point factor The Type parameter tells the printer which form you are using Refer to the following table Table 19 18 Scaling Form Type Description Anisotropic 0 Establishes standard user unit scaling allowing different unit size on X axis and Y axis Isotropic 1 Establishes standard user unit scaling with same unit size on X axis and Y axis Point Factor 2 Establishes P1 user unit location and a specific ratio of plotter units to user units e No Parameters Turns off scaling subsequent coordinates are in plotter units For Scaling Types 0 and 1 The following forms of scaling establish a user unit coordinate system by mapping user defined coordinate values onto the scaling points P1 and P2 The type parameter selects between anisotropic Type 0 and isotropic scaling Type 1 Table 19 19 Scaling Form Type Syntax Anisotropic 0 SCXMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX type Isotropic 1 SC X yin X MAX Y MIN Yuaxb typef left bottom SC Scale 19 41 Note e Xmins Xmax Yuins Ymax These parameters represent the user unit X and Y axis ranges respectively For example SCO 15 0 10 indicates 15 user units along the X axis and 10 user units along the Y axis As a result the first and third parameters Xyin and Y yin are the coordinate pair that is mapped onto P1 the second and fourth parameters Xanax and Ymax are th
380. ical Rectangle Size PCL Units e Horizontal Rectangle Size PCL Units In addition the current unit of measure setting affects the HMI setting which in turn determines how cursor movement values are rounded This affects the result of the following commands Horizontal Cursor Position Columns Horizontal Tab HT control code Space SP control code Backspace BS control code Bitmap Character Delta X Delta X SI Chapter 11 For example if the unit of measure is set to 96 one PCL Unit 1 96 inch then the HMI is rounded to the nearest 1 96 inch If the unit of measure is set to 300 one PCL Unit 1 300 inch the HMI is rounded to the nearest 1 300 inch HMI is set either as a result of font selection or through the use of the HMI command The rounding behavior just described only applies when the HMI is at its default setting derived from the currently selected font If the HMI Command was used to override the HMI setting the rounding behavior described above does not apply See Horizontal Motion Index HMI Command in Chapter 5 for more information Unit of Measure Command 4 13 Note The current unit of measure setting affects all PCL Unit moves horizontal and vertical rectangle size bitmap and scalable font metrics how the cursor moves after printing a character The Unit of Measure command does not affect the interpretation of binary raster data bitmap fonts raster graphics or pattern
381. ich the arc is drawn A positive angle draws an angle in the positive direction angle of rotation a negative angle draws the angle in the negative direction e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 degrees Refer to the Arc Absolute AA command discussion earlier this chapter for information on setting and determining the chord angle Table 20 8 Example Using Arc Relative to Draw Arcs EOE Reset the printer EL OB Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1500 1500 PD Specify the starting position as 1500 1500 and put the pen down ARO 2000 80 25 Draw an arc with a center point 0 plu in the X direction and 2000 plu in the Y direction from 1500 1500 Specify the arc section to be 80 positive angle with a chord angle of 25 AR2000 0 80 Draw an arc with a center point 2000 plu in the X direction and 0 plu in the Y direction from the current pen position Specify the arc section to be 80 positive angle with a default chord angle 5 E A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 20 14 The Vector Group EN Relative Move 1500 3500 2000 0 CO RS RS ee gt o A Chord age Default e of 25 angle of 5 Relative Move N
382. id Entity Invalid Location None Internal Error ERROR INVALID ENTITY If the entity type specified in the escape sequence is out of range or unsupported an invalid entity error is returned For example if the Inquire Entity command contained an out of range value of 8 Ec s8I the following error response would be generated PCL INFO ENTITY ERROR INVALID ENTITY ERROR INVALID LOCATION If the entity type is valid but the location either the type the unit or the combination is invalid or if the specified device is not installed an invalid location error is returned For example if you requested a status for a cartridge type but identified an out of range location unit of 9 Ec s5t9U the following error response would be generated PCL INFO FONTS ERROR INVALID LOCATION EN Entity Error Codes 16 19 Note ERROR NONE If the entity type and location are valid but there are no entities of the specified type in that location or if the type is inappropriate for the specified entity internal user defined pattern or currently selected macro then an error response is generated For example if you request the downloaded symbol sets and there are no downloaded symbol sets the following error response would be generated PCL INFO SYMBOLSETS ERROR NONE ERROR INTERNAL ERROR The status response for some requests can be fairly large Such as for fonts In processing status responses if the pr
383. ight or ES Parameter Format Functional Range Default width clamped real 32768 to 32767 0 height clamped real 32768 to 32767 0 The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameters Defaults the spaces and lines between characters to no extra space Equivalent to ESO 0 e Width Specifies an increase positive number or decrease negative number in the space between characters For maximum legibility do not specify more than one extra space or subtract more than half a space e Height Specifies an increase positive number or decrease negative number in the space between lines For maximum legibility do not specify more than two extra lines or subtract more than half a line An ES command remains in effect until another ES command is executed or until the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Table 23 26 Example Using the ES Command ELE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing ES Extra Space 23 51 Table 23 26 Example Using the ES Command continued PA2500 3200 Specify absolute plotting and move to SI 187 269 2500 3200 specify a relative character size of 187 cm wide by 269 cm high DT ES Define the character as the label terminator and set
384. illic Arabic Greek and Hebrew fonts 0 2 Symbol Index field 110 Unicode Symbol Index 11 36 Soft Font Creation EN EN Individually defined bits are shown in the following two tables Table 11 27 MSL Symbol Index Character Complement Bits Bit Value 63 0 if font is compatible with standard Latin character sets e g Roman 8 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 1 otherwise 62 0 if font is compatible with East European Latin character sets e g ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 1 otherwise 61 0 if font contains Turkish character sets e g ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 1 otherwise 34 0 if font has access to the math characters of the Math 8 PS Math and Ventura Math character sets 1 otherwise 33 0 if font has access to the semi graphic characters of the PC 8 PC 850 etc character sets 1 otherwise 32 0 if font is compatible with ITC Zapf Dingbats series 100 200 etc 1 otherwise 2 1 0 111 if font is arranged in MSL Symbol Index order Table 11 28 Unicode Symbol Index Character Complement Bits Bit Value 31 0 if font is compatible with 7 bit ASCII 1 otherwise 30 0 if font is compatible with ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 West Europe character sets 1 otherwise 29 0 if font is compatible with ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 East Europe character sets 1 otherwise 28 0 if font is compatible with Latin 5 Turkish character sets e g ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 PC Turkish 1 otherwise 27 0 if
385. in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide or the printer User s Manual for paper source feature implementation details for specific HP LaserJet printers The Paper Source command causes the current page to be printed and the cursor to be moved to the left edge of the logical page at the top margin position for the next page see Figure 5 5 Example To feed paper from the manual feed slot send Ec amp 22H If the selection requires operator action such as manually feeding paper a printer message appears in the display prompting for the appropriate action see the printer User s Manual for specific behavior 5 4 Page Control Commands EN Logical Page Orientation Command Notes Note EN Orientation defines the position of the logical page and the default direction of print with respect to the physical page as shown in Figure 5 1 Eo amp LH O OQ Portrait 1 Landscape 2 Reverse Portrait 3 Reverse Landscape Default 0 Range 0 3 Other values ignored This command can be used only once per page To print multiple directions per page use the Print Direction command This command affects the HP GL 2 environment refer to Table 5 1 and the HP GL 2 and PCL Orientation Interaction section in Chapter 15 for additional information The Orientation command causes the page length top margin text length left and right margins horizontal motion index HMI and vertical motion index VMI to r
386. in from the logical page top bound 3 reverse 50 dots in from the logical landscape page top bound Portrait Reverse Portrait X Print Direction O Mode 0 amp Mode 3 1 left graphics margin Xp Y1 cursor position prior to the raster data transfer Figure 15 5 Raster Graphics Presentation Mode for Portrait Orientation EN Raster Graphics Presentation Mode Command 15 9 X104 Raster Row X Figure 15 6 Raster Graphics Presentation Mode for Landscape 15 10 Raster Graphics Landscape Reverse Landscape Print Direction O Mode 0O Raster Row 5 a D g 2 Landscape Reverse Landscape Print Direction Q Mode 3 1 left graphics margin Xi Y1 cursor position prior to the raster data transfer Orientation X EN Raster Height Command Note EN The Raster Height command specifies the height in raster rows of the raster area Height is the direction perpendicular to the direction that raster rows are laid down hence height is subject to the current raster presentation mode and print direction see Figure 15 7 Ec r T Height in raster rows Default N A Range 0 to logical page length current Y position of the O cursor Greater values default to logical page length current Y position of the cursor This command fills the raster area to the full raster height with zeroed rows Unspecified rows map to either white or transparen
387. ing a font with the current logical page orientation saves RAM space on some printers 7 8 Fonts EN Bitmap Fonts and Scalable Typefaces Note EN There are two basic formats of fonts used by HP PCL 5 printers bitmap Figure 7 11 and scalable Figure 7 12 Earlier HP LaserJet printers supported only bitmap fonts Bitmap fonts have a fixed bit pattern for each character The size of the character is fixed depending on the bit pattern Scalable typefaces on the other hand provide an outline for the characters This outline can be scaled by the PCL 5 printers to produce a large range of character sizes There is a difference between a scalable typeface and a scalable font A bound scalable font is a group of outline characters limited to one specific symbol set For a scalable font the symbol set spacing style stroke weight and typeface characteristics are all fixed and size is variable since it is scalable A scalable typeface on the other hand is a grouping of outline characters of a specific typeface which can produce multiple symbol sets For a scalable typeface spacing style stroke weight and typeface characteristics of the font are all fixed symbol set and size are variable Scalable fonts and scalable typefaces are selected for printing in the same manner as bitmap fonts no additional selection is required refer to Summary of Font Selection by Characteristic for font selection information
388. ing an equal horizontal space or proportional each character occupying a space proportional to its size Refer to Using Fonts in the beginning of this chapter Table 23 40 Kind 2 Font Spacing Values Font SpacingValue Description 0 fixed spacing default 1 proportional spacing Kind 3 Pitch The pitch characteristic is a horizontal measurement defining the number of characters per inch for fixed spaced fonts When selecting proportional fonts do not include pitch in the font definition command SD or AD Table 23 41 Kind 3 Pitch Values Pitch Values Description 0 to 32 767 9999 characters per inch default 9 Fixed spaced fonts depend on pitch to determine character size Proportional fonts ignore pitch Note that with the SD and AD command you cannot create tall skinny characters or short wide characters the character aspect ratio is preserved unless an SI or SR command overrides it 23 70 The Character Group EN Note EN Kind 4 Height For proportional fonts the height characteristic defines the font point size the height of the character cell Fixed spaced fonts ignore height the point size is calculated using the font pitch There are approximately 72 points in an inch Note that with the font definition command SD or AD you cannot create tall skinny characters or short wide characters the character aspect ratio is preserved Table 23 42 Kind
389. ing font selection The factory default primary and secondary typefaces are Courier The user default primary and secondary typefaces are implicitly set by selection of a user default font from the printer s control panel refer to the printer User s Manual There is some variation in how font selection occurs between HP LaserJet models The typeface selection compatibility for two types of values is identified for various HP LaserJet printers in Chapter 2 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Use the typeface family values listed in Appendix C in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for future typeface selection 1 These values are not applicable to all HP LaserJet family printers See the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for specifics 8 18 PCL Font Selection EN Some typeface two byte family values are listed below For a complete listing of typeface family and base values refer to Appendix C inthe PCL 5 Comparison Guide Sample Typeface Values FamilyValue Typeface Family 0 Line Printer 16602 Arial 4168 Antique Olive 4127 ITC Avant Garde 4119 CG Century Schoolbook 4101 CG Times 4148 Univers Example To specify CG Times as the typeface family for the primary font send F s4101T To specify Line Printer as the typeface family for the secondary font send E s0T EN Typeface Family Command 8 19 Orientation The Orientation command Ec amp I 0 designates the position of the logical page with
390. ing the space character in the font results in a significant reduction in performance and inhibits the HMI command with proportional fonts Note Refer to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics later in the chapter for hints on using HP GL 2 text 24 6 Programming Hints EN PCL Raster Graphics EN To minimize I O transmission time and conserve memory avoid sending unnecessary raster data to the printer that represents white space This is accomplished using the raster compression modes and raster reduction techniques available with the raster picture area Set resolution prior to the start raster graphics command Once the start raster command is received the resolution cannot be set until after a subsequent end raster graphics command Set presentation mode prior to the Start Raster Graphics command Once the start raster command is received the presentation mode cannot be set until after a subsequent End Raster Graphics Command Some applications and I O drivers insert carriage returns or line feeds into the data stream sent to the printer This modification of the data stream must be suppressed for correct printer operation The most efficient way to draw lines horizontal and vertical is using graphics rules black fill rectangular areas The most efficient way to draw diagonal lines is using HP GL 2 vector graphics PCL Raster Graphics 24 7 Macros When a macro ID is specified for which no macro has been defined the macro in
391. ing then edging an object may produce different results from edging and then filling This is especially true when large pen widths are used The following example illustrates this Table 21 27 Example E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select printer logical pen number 1 TRO Set transparency mode OFF opaque PU4000 6000 Position pen EN WG Fill Wedge 21 49 Table 21 27 Example continued PW5 Select pen width of 5 units PMO Enter polygon mode C11000 Draw a circle with a radius of 1000 units PM2 Close polygon and exit polygon mode FT10 30 Select 30 shading fill type FP EP Fill then Edge polygon PU4000 3000 Select pen position 4000 3000 for second circle PMO Enter polygon mode C11000 Draw another circle with a radius of 1000 units PM2 Close polygon and exit polygon mode EP FP Edge then fill polygon circle 0A Enter the PCL mode 7E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Fill Then Edge Edge Then Fill Figure 21 29 The center of the left circle is located at 4000 3000 The center of the right circle is located at 4000 6000 21 50 The Polygon Group EN EN Table 21 28 Related Commands Group EP Edge Polygon The Polygon Group EW Edge Wedge SC Scale The Configuration Status Group Cl Circle The Vector Group
392. instead of importing an existing plot do not send this command Enter HP GL 2 mode with the pen HP GL 2 cursor at the PCL cursor position In this example the cursor would be at the picture frame anchor point 600 PCL Units down from the top of the logical page and 565 PCL Units to the right of the left logical page boundary EN EN Table 18 1 Example Creating and Using a PCL Picture Frame IN SP1 PU50 50 Send the HP GL 2 commands you desire to send The IN command defaults the pen position to the HP GL 2 origin the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame E m1 A Enter the PCL mode with the cursor at the current HP GL 2 pen position TextTextText Send some text or more PCL commands E E Reset the printer to end the job and eject a page Anchor Point PCL Picture 565x600Y Frame 4 25 x 5 5 oq __ N HP GU2 Origin 0 0 Figure 18 2 The previous example provides an idea of the commands involved in printing an HP GL 2 plot whether importing an existing drawing or creating one within an application The example describes one way to print a plot but many things can be varied such as the picture frame size and location and the cursor position when entering and leaving HP GL 2 mode Typical HP GL 2 PlotCommand Sequence 18 7 Note If you have a page size independent HP GL 2 image there is no need to set plot size otherwise it is good practice to set plot size The commands that allow y
393. int XenaYeng Specify the absolute location of the end point of the arc e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 The Arc Absolute AA command description earlier in this chapter contains more information on chords and chord angles Intermediate and end point coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If current scaling is not isotropic the arc drawn is elliptical rather than circular Note the following about locating the intermediate and end points e Ifthe intermediate point and end point are the same as the current pen location the command draws a dot e If the intermediate point is the same as either the current pen location or the end point a line is drawn between the current pen location and the end point 20 16 The Vector Group EN e If the end point is the same as the current pen location a circle is drawn with its diameter being the line from the current pen position to the intermediate point e Ifthe current pen position intermediate point and end point are collinear a straight line is drawn e If the intermediate point does not lie between the current pen location and the end point and the three points are collinear two lines are drawn one from the current pen location and the other from the end point leaving a gap between them Refer to the following illustra
394. inted in USA
395. inter runs out of memory an internal error is returned as shown below PCL INFO SYMBOLSETS ERROR INTERNAL ERROR The error conditions described above are the only conditions for which an error response is generated If you make a syntax error in the escape sequence or send a command which the printer cannot interpret the printer ignores the command and no error response is given 16 20 Status Readback EN Free Space Command Note EN The Free Space command returns the amount of available memory This response returns two values the total available memory and the largest available block of memory refer to the Memory Status Response section later in this chapter for additional information Ec s1M If a value other than 1 is sent this command returns an error ERROR INVALID UNIT refer to Memory Error Response section later in this chapter for additional information To identify whether the printer has enough memory available for a job you can send the Free Space command to compare the space available with that needed You can also identify how much memory an entity or any other data uses by checking the amount of free memory prior to downloading the data then downloading the data and checking memory again The difference in these values represents the approximate memory needed Many conditions can cause the available memory to change or appear different Some of these conditions ar
396. ions for P1 and P2 that create an area half as high and half as wide as the PCL Picture Frame in the center of the picture frame Refer to the following illustration of 0 0 Physical Page Border g 300 300 900 600 Logical Page lt paa ag 660 600 900 1100 gt Figure 19 10Example P1 and P2 command P1 or P2 can also be set outside the PCL Picture Frame by specifying parameters less than zero and greater than 100 For example sending IR 50 0 200 100 would set P1 and P2 as shown in the following illustration New P2 100 75 50 25 eels New P1 25 50 75 100 Figure 19 11Example P1 and P2 command IR Input Relative P1 and P2 19 27 If you specify P1 and P2 beyond the PCL Picture Frame your drawing is scaled with respect to those locations however only the portion of the drawing fitting within the effective window is drawn Note The specified P1 P2 percentages are converted to the equivalent plotter unit coordinates If the coordinate system orientation subsequently changes for example by sending an RO command the plotter unit position is maintained with respect to the new orientation If an IP command without parameters is executed after the axes have been rotated with the RO command P1 and P2 locations change to reflect the rotation The locations of P1 and P2 interact with the following commands Table 19 13 Commands Affected by P1 P2 Command Group IW Input
397. is transferred to the printer as a string of bytes containing a dot per bit representation of the row This Binary Data Prints This Row 1 000000000000000000000000 Row 2 000000000000000000000000 Row 3 000000001111111100000000 Row 4 000000001111111100000000 Row 5 000000001111111100000000 Row 6 000000001111111100000000 Row 7 000000000000000000000000 Row 8 000000000000000000000000 Not actual size Figure 15 1 Binary Raster Data Since it takes a considerable amount of data to create even a small raster image several methods are provided to reduce the amount of data needed to define an image Note that the above illustration creates a rectangle 0 013 by 0 027 inches a binary 1 1 dot 1 300 inch These reduction techniques include Introduction 15 1 several binary data compression methods and additional reduction techniques associated with the raster area feature see Figure 15 2 Raster g Area Y Offset Y Offset Saliha E Zeroed Trailing Rows Zeros Figure 15 2 Raster Area Data compression methods include run length encoding tagged image file format TIFF delta row and adaptive compression These techniques are described in detail later in this section under the Set Compression Method command In addition to the compression methods the raster area feature provides some other raster reduction techniques which utilize a defined raster area The raster area is defined by a width a
398. is drawn the previous pen up down status is restored To avoid leaving a dot at the center of the circle move to and from the circle s center with the pen up e Radius Measured from the current pen location Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 Refer to the Arc Absolute AA command discussion earlier in this chapter for an explanation of the chord angle Each chord of the circle is drawn using the currently defined line type width and attributes Refer to Chapter 22 The Line and Fill Attributes Group for more information Do not use an adaptive negative line type to draw a circle as the printer attempts to draw a complete pattern for every chord 72 with the default chord angle Always use isotropic scaling in drawings that contain circles unless you want your circles to stretch with aspect ratio changes of the drawing anisotropic scaling may produce an ellipse For more information refer to Chapter 19 for a scaling discussion and for the Scale SC command description EN Cl Circle 20 25 Anisotropic scaling Figure 20 15 isotropic scaling Table 20 16 Example Effects of Chord Angle on Circle Smoothness EOE Reset the printer EL OB Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black
399. is inside a region enclosed by a line path using the following steps 1 Draw a ray from the point across the path segment 2 Add 1 every time the line segment crosses the ray from left to right or bottom to top 3 Subtract 1 every time the segment crosses the ray from right to left or top to bottom 4 FP fills the enclosed area in question if the sum of steps 2 and 3 is non zero Figure 21 9 illustrates the non zero winding fill concept EN Drawing Polygons 21 13 TWO SUBPOLYGONS SINGLE POLYGON Subtract 1 0 Add 1 2 The enclosed Th 3 area is NOT e enclosed filled area IS filled Starting Point Starting Point Adai y Subtract 1 2 The enclosed area IS filled l Starting Point Subtract 1 1 Figure 21 9 Filling Polygons Non Zero Winding Fill Method Drawing Circles in Polygon Mode Polygon mode interprets the Circle CI command differently than the other HP GL 2 commands The printer treats a circle as a complete subpolygon The printer automatically closes the first polygon if any before starting the circle and uses the first coordinates if any after the circle is drawn to start a new subpolygon If you did not close your first polygon completely before sending the CI command the printer automatically closes the polygon by adding a point at the starting point of the previous subpolygon This can change your current pen location and the placement of the circle in your polygon
400. is to the Y axis Y axis can change as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes If a sweep angle greater than 360 degrees is specified a 360 degree angle is used e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to define the arc The default is 5 degrees Refer to the Chord Angle discussion in the Arc Absolute AA command discussion Chapter 20 for information on setting the chord angle P2 EW700 30 60 90 Positive sweep angle 60 7 a rA f Positive start angle 30 tse J 0 Zero degree a reference point Current pen location positive radius starting point NS Pd 700 plotter units S Pa r ev 270 P1 X Positive Radius P2 EW 700 45 90 270 pote Current pen location ra N starting point Zero degree reference point Negative radius 700 Plotter Units O ee Positive start angle 45 Positive Jey 90 sweep angle 90 P X Negative Radius Figure 21 27 EN WG Fill Wedge 21 47 Table 21 26 Example Filling then Edging vs Edging then Filling Chart E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SC 3000 3000 2000 2000 1 Set up user scaling with P1 being 3000 2000 and P2 being 3000 2000 Specify isotropic scaling PAO 0 FT3 75 45 WG 1000 90 180 Enter absolute plotting mode and
401. istics to the printer refer to Summary of Font Selection by Characteristic for detailed font selection information PCL 5 printers feature scalable fonts With the addition of this feature the printer has two font formats available bitmap and scalable A bitmap font is available in its one defined size only A scalable font on the other hand can be selected scaled for a range of sizes refer to Bitmap Fonts and Scalable Typefaces later in this chapter for additional information Font Sources A number of fonts and typefaces as described later are supplied with the printer These fonts reside in permanent ROM read only memory and are referred to as internal fonts Additional fonts can be added easily by inserting font cartridges or SIMM modules into the printer or downloading them from the host computer A cartridge font plugs into a font cartridge slot on the printer SIMM font modules plug into a printed circuit board inside the printer These ROM based fonts are always available as long as the cartridge or SIMM module is installed A variety of font products may be purchased from Hewlett Packard or other vendors Refer to your Hewlett Packard Accessories and Supplies Brochure for a list of HP s font products Soft fonts are supplied as files on flexible disk transferred downloaded into the printer s user RAM memory Once a soft font has been downloaded into the printer s RAM it may be selected for printing
402. ithin the range 33 47 decimal T through indicating that the escape sequence is parameterized y Group Character A character from the ASCII table within the range 96 126 decimal through that specifies the group type of control being performed Value Field A group of characters specifying a numeric value The numeric value is represented as an ASCII string of characters within the range 48 57 decimal 0 through 9 that may be preceded by a or sign and may contain a fractional portion indicated by the digits after a decimal point Numeric value fields are within the range 32767 to 65535 If an escape sequence requires a value field and a value is not specified a value of zero is assumed zi Parameter Character Any character from the ASCII table within the range 96 126 decimal through This character specifies the parameter to which the previous value field applies This character is used when combining escape sequences Zn Termination Character Any character from the ASCII table within the range 64 94 decimal through This character specifies the parameter to which the previous value field applies This character terminates the escape sequence data Binary Data is eight bit data for example graphics data downloaded fonts etc The number of bytes of binary data is specified by the value field
403. ition 21 is not shown in Figure 23 33 because the exact location is dependent on the PCL position 23 62 The Character Group EN EN 16 J Har 13 Bye 1 47 wi AN d 12 515 8118 Y a a 17 ig 16 19 14 11 14 17 Figure 23 33 Label Origin Positioning Each time an LO command is sent the Carriage Return point is updated to the location the pen was in when the LO command was received The current pen location but not the Carriage Return point is updated after each character is drawn and the pen automatically moves to the next character origin If you want to return a pen to its previous location prior to the next label command you can send a Carriage Return after the label text but before the label terminator When you embed Carriage Return characters in a label each portion of the label is positioned according to the label origin just as if they were written as separate label commands An LO command remains in effect until another LO command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Table 23 34 Example Using the LO Command ELE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 SC 4000 4000 Select pen number 1 5000 5000 specify scaling by assigning 4000 5000 to P1 and 4000 5000 to P2 LO Label Origin 23 63 Table 23 34 Example Using the LO Command continued SI 17 26 PA0 500
404. itten and stored in ROM read only memory such as font type cartridges or SIMM modules When ROM based macros are installed in the printer they become available for selection There is no need to download the macro and no user memory is consumed Introduction 12 1 12 2 Macros Hewlett Packard provides a service to assist you by developing these custom products For information contact Hewlett Packard Boise Printer Division Attention Product Specials 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise ID 83714 208 323 3684 EN Macro Creation EN Designate a unique identification ID number prior to the definition of a macro using the Macro ID command This number is assigned to the macro If a macro is already associated with this ID number the previously existing macro is deleted from user memory during the definition of the new macro Subsequent macro operations are accomplished using the macro ID number A macro is created in the printer in several steps First the start macro command is sent to the printer to indicate the start of a macro definition Next the printer commands control codes and data that constitute the macro are sent to the printer in the intended order of their execution Finally the End Macro command is sent to the printer to indicate the end of the macro definition Table 12 1 Assign ID Macro ID command Ec amp f14Y assigns a Number unique identification number 14 to the macro Start Macro Macro Contro
405. k response at the bottom Note that this example shows only one possible request response for more detailed information refer to the status readback command descriptions provided later in this chapter Table 16 2 Entity Status Request Example which initiates status readback Inquire Entity Example PCL Operation Command Comments Set location type Eo s4T This Set Location Type command sets the location type to downloaded Set location unit Eo s2U This Set Location Unit command sets the location unit to permanent Identify entity Eo s0I The Inquire Status Readback Entity command selects status for fonts and causes the printer to buffer the response Table 16 3 Printer PCL Two permanent status INFO FONTS downloaded tonis res exist in the printer ponse SELECT lt Esc gt 8U lt Esc gt sip__v0s0b4120T lt Esc gt 7X University Roman 4120T and Dom SELECT lt Esc gt 10U lt Esc gt __v0s0b4157T lt Esc gt 21X Casual 4157T In addition to the normal status responses if an invalid request is made the printer returns an error response Error responses are described under the Inquire Status Readback Entity command later in this chapter 16 4 Status Readback EN Note Note EN Status Response When the printer receives a status request command it processes that request and forms the response data This data is then stored in an I O status
406. ked selected font with an ID of 9 send Eo c9d6F The Copy Assign font control feature can be used to copy either ROM or RAM fonts into RAM assigning them ID numbers Note When the currently selected font is a scalable TrueType ROM font EU c d6F assigns a font ID number but makes no copy of the font in RAM Any attempts to download or delete characters within the font are ignored An attempt to delete the font merely results in the loss of the ID number 9 6 Font Management EN Font Management Example This example illustrates several typical font management operations It assumes a bitmap soft font is stored and available on an MS DOS based hard disk 1 Set the font ID number to 2 EU e2D 2 Download a soft font file using the MS DOS COPY command with the B option COPY B filename PRN Note that the soft font is associated with font ID 2 3 Make the soft font permanent to prevent its deletion during a printer reset Eo c5F 4 Designate the permanent soft font as primary E 2x EN Font Management Example 9 7 Unbound Scalable Fonts Prior to introduction of the HP LaserJet IIIP printer a downloaded scalable font was restricted to a single symbol set Now scalable fonts with no symbol set affiliation can be downloaded These new fonts are called unbound fonts To download unbound fonts the PCL Font Header for Intellifont Unbound Scalable Fonts or the Format 15 Font Header for Scalable Fonts TrueType
407. l Motion Index VMI command except that it identifies the VMI in lines per inch lpi The factory default lines per inch setting is 6 A user default line spacing can be selected from the control panel using the FORM menu item Example To select 12 Ipi send Ec amp 212D Note Once a PCL command sets a parameter that parameter remains in effect until another command changes it The most recently received command has precedence 5 24 Page Control Commands EN Cursor Positioning Introduction This section describes the cursor positioning commands Although the printer does not actually have a cursor the PCL cursor position refers to the Current Active Position CAP like the blinking underline character cursor used on most computers This cursor identifies the current position on the page the pointer where a printing command begins laying out page data The cursor can be moved anywhere within the logical page using a combination of horizontal and vertical cursor positioning commands and control codes In addition to cursor commands positioning the cursor the cursor is automatically positioned after certain operations such as printing characters and graphics After printing a character the cursor is positioned to the right at a distance equal to the width of that character This is controlled by the character design described under Character Width in Chapter 10 and allows printing characters without req
408. l another SM command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions EN SM Symbol Mode 22 35 Note The following example shows several uses of symbol mode with the pen down for a line graph with the pen up for a scattergram and with the pen down for geometric drawings Symbol mode works only with the PA PD PE PR and PU commands Notice that the circle and rectangle have symbols only for the PA command coordinate point Table 22 18 Example Using the Symbol Mode Command E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SM PA200 1000 PD200 1230 400 1560 Enter symbol mode using the asterisk as the symbol move to absolute location 200 1000 set the pen down and draw first to 200 1230 then to 400 1560 PD700 1670 1300 1600 1800 2000 PU SM3 PA700 500 900 450 1300 850 PA1750 1300 2500 1350 PU SM Place the pen down and draw from the current pen position 400 1560 to 700 1670 then to 1300 1600 then to 1800 2000 lift the pen Enter symbol mode again with 3 as the current symbol print a 3 in the following locations 700 500 900 450 and 1300 850 With the pen still up and 3 still the current symbol print a 3 at 1750 1300 and 2500 1350 lift the pen and exit sy
409. l command E amp f0X indicates the Definition following commands and data are to be stored as a macro Macro data Escape sequences control codes HP GL 2 commands and text required to perform the desired operation e e Macro data Stop Macro Control command Eo amp f1X identifies the MacroDefinition end of the macro data definition To invoke a macro send the Macro ID command with the ID number of the macro then send the Macro Control command with a value field of 2 3 or 4 F amp f2X Ec amp f3X or Fe amp f4X This performs the macro in the specified mode Execute value field 2 Call value field 3 or Overlay value field 4 Refer to the following section Macro Invocation for a description of these modes Macro Creation 12 3 Macros occupy a portion of user memory The number of macros that can be stored simultaneously in user memory is limited only by the amount of available user memory Macro Invocation Note 12 4 Macros There are three ways to invoke a macro execute call and overlay using the Macro Control command When a macro is executed it begins performing its commands using the current modified print environment Changes made to feature settings during macro execution are recorded in the modified print environment these changes are retained upon completion of the macro execution When a macro is called it begins performing its commands using the current modified print enviro
410. label Refer to the Label LB command in Chapter 23 for a complete description Numbers within the above mentioned ranges do not cause errors however the range may exceed the printer s physical printing area Numbers that move the pen position outside the effective window result in image clipping This topic is discussed in more detail later in this chapter under The Vector Graphics Limits When you see the term current units in a parameter table the unit system of that parameter depends on whether scaling is on or off When scaling is on the units are user units when scaling is off the units are plotter units described under Units of Measure later in this chapter The printer cannot use exponential format numbers for example 6 03E8 If you are using a computer or language that uses the exponential format you must use integer variables or a formatting technique to output fixed point real numbers Parameter values less than the range maximum are passed by the parser these values may subsequently be unscaled into resolution units e g 7200 units per inch that exceed the device dependent internally representable number range If this occurs the device enters a LOST mode all relative drawing commands are ignored until a command is received which specifies an absolute move to a point within the internally representable number range HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 11 Notes When LOST mode is entered the pe
411. le defined with absolute coordinates EP Edge Polygon Outlines the contents of the polygon buffer ER Edge Rectangle Relative Outlines a rectangle defined with relative coordinates EW Edge Wedge Defines and outlines a wedge shaped polygon FP Fill Polygon Fills the polygon shape specified in the polygon buffer PM Polygon Mode Allows you to create user defined polygons in the polygon buffer Introduction 21 1 Table 21 1 The Polygon Group Commands continued RA Fill Rectangle Absolute Fills a rectangle specified with absolute coordinates RR Fill Rectangle Relative Fills a rectangle specified with relative coordinates WG Fill Wedge Defines and fills a wedge shaped polygon Using the Polygon Buffer As mentioned a buffer is a temporary storage area for information The polygon buffer collects the commands and coordinates that define a polygon you want to print This polygon remains in the buffer until replaced by another polygon or until the buffer is cleared by initializing the printer Some commands use the polygon buffer automatically while other commands require that you enter the polygon mode The following commands use the polygon buffer but do not allow you to enter polygon mode first Table 21 2 Mnemonic Command Name EA Edge Rectangle Absolute ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge RA Fill Recta
412. lection value selected for this symbol set is 17Q then 17 32 81 64 561 The symbol set ID code is 561 Format UB Set this field to 1 for MSL Intellifont or 3 for Unicode TrueType Unrecognized values cause the symbol set definition to be ignored Symbol Set Type UB This field defines the printable and unprintable codes for the symbol set Bit Field Designated Use 0 7 bit 32 127 are printable 1 8 bit 32 127 and 160 255 are printable 2 8 bit 0 255 character codes are printable however to print codes 0 7 15 and 27 the printer must be in transparency mode 10 6 User Defined Symbol Sets EN First Code Ul Specifies the first character code in the set Last Code Ul The Last Code specifies the last character code in the set Together the First Code through the Last Code identify the range of character codes which map to the symbol index numbers characters in the Symbol Map field Character Requirements Array of UB and character requirement This 8 byte field works in conjunction with the Character Complement field in the header of a type 10 or 11 unbound font to determine the compatibility of a symbol set with an unbound font These two fields identify the unbound fonts in the printer which contain the symbol collections required to build a symbol set Refer to Unbound Scalable Fonts in Chapter 9 for a description of symbol collections and unbound f
413. llifont Data Size Size 2 80 Global Intellifont Data n Copyright optional Reserved 0 Checksum Table 11 5 Format 11 Font Header for Intellifont Unbound Scalable Fonts Byte 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 0 Font Descriptor Size minimum 88 2 Header Format 11 Font Type 10 4 Style MSB Reserved 6 Baseline Position 8 Cell Width 10 Cell Height 12 Orientation Spacing 14 Symbol Set EN Font Header Format 11 11 Table 11 5 Format 11 Font Header for Intellifont Unbound Scalable Fonts continued 16 Pitch default HMI 18 Height 20 x Height 22 Width Type Style LSB 24 Stroke Weight Typeface LSB 26 Typeface MSB Serif Style 28 Quality Placement 30 Underline Position Underline Thickness Distance 32 Text Height 34 Text Width 36 Reserved 38 Number of Contours Characters 40 Pitch Extended Height Extended 42 Cap Height 44 47 Font Number 48 63 Font Name 64 Scale Factor 66 X Resolution 68 Y Resolution 70 Master Underline Position 72 Master Underline Thickness 74 OR Threshold 76 Global Italic Angle 78 85 Character Complement 11 12 Soft Font Creation EN EN Table 11 5 Format 11 Font Header for Intellifont Unbound Scalable Fonts continued Desc Global Intellifont Data Size Size 2 Desc Global Intellifont Data Size n Copyright optional Reserved 0
414. lling Polygons eee ee ee ee Drawing Circles in Polygon Mode Approximating Polygon Buffer Use Counting the Points in a Polygon Counting the Points in a Circle or Arc EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon 5 ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge 5 FP Fill Polygon 000055 PM Polygon Mode Command PMO or PM 0055 PMI s cc22e85 208 ceded Miao PM2 cee eet eee kets eenea che et RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge The Line and Fill Attributes Group Using Line Attributes and Types Using Fill Types 0 055 Selecting a Pen and Changing Line Width AC Anchor Corner 20055 FT Fill Type 2 ee eee LA Line Attributes LING Ends esis eee ace a bw aa Line JOINS naau wae A ae Aa a Miter Limit 005 LT Line Type 00000 e eee PW Pen Width 005 RF Raster Fill Definition SM Symbol Mode 06 SP Select Pen 00000 ee SV Screened Vectors 4 TR Transparency Mode UL User Defined Line Type WU Pen Width Unit Selection EN Contents 11 The Character Group Printing Labels x2 ii 0 es anes dee vee Ghee ba ddaese
415. llowing illustrations show how the printer adjusts the location of XMIN YMIN and XMAX YMAX to create the largest possible isotropic area within the P1 P2 limits Remember the user units are always square regardless of the shape of the isotropic area 19 42 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN Hard clip SCO 10 0 10 1 limits P2 P1 lt n Hard clip limits SC0 20 0 10 1 Figure 19 18lsotropic Scaling Left Bottom Positions the isotropic area in the P1 P2 limits These parameters are always specified together and are valid for isotropic scaling only The left parameter indicates the percentage of the unused space on the left of the isotropic area the bottom parameter indicates the percentage of unused space below e The defaults for the left and bottom parameters are each 50 This centers the isotropic area on the page with the unused space equally divided between left and right or top and bottom as shown in the previous illustrations SC Scale 19 43 Although you must specify both parameters the printer applies only one the left parameter applies when there is extra horizontal space the bottom parameter applies when there is extra vertical space The following examples illustrate left and bottom parameters of 0 and 100 Left Bottom 0 0 P1 fi 0 0 0 0 SCO 10 0 10 1 0 0 SCO 20 0 10 1 0 0 Left Bottom 100 100 SCO 10 0 10 1 100 100 SCO 20 0 10 1 100 1
416. llowing the command byte is an additional offset byte which adds to the first 32 offset value This allows offset values larger than 31 Also if this second offset byte is set to 255 all ones additional offset bytes follow until the required offset value is obtained When the formatter detects an offset byte less than 255 it is assumed to be the last offset value and the offset bytes are then totaled added The following example shows an offset larger than 31 Replace 1 Byte Replacement Byte sl oO spain Wong i 111 n 111111 a Te 11 Relative Offset of 31 Means Next Byte is Offset Too Final Offset Byte Adds 128 Bytes 31 255 128 414 Bytes Additional 255 Byte Offset Means Next Byte is Offset Too Figure 15 10 The total offset 414 which is the sum of the three offset values 31 255 128 Seed Row The seed row is basically the current raster data row the row being printed It is maintained by the printer for use by delta row compression The delta compression replacement bytes are applied to the seed row to create the new row This new data row is printed and becomes the new seed row The seed row is updated by every raster graphic transfer regardless of the compression method This allows delta compression method to be mixed with other methods to achieve better compression performance 15 22 Raster Graphics EN Note EN Repeating a Row EQ bOW When using the delta
417. lossary 11 factory default 3 5 HP GL 2 19 3 modified 3 7 print job separation 4 11 print model 13 1 13 2 command sequence 13 5 current pattern 13 2 destination image 13 1 13 2 opaque mode 13 3 pattern 13 2 pattern ID area fill ID command 13 8 pattern transparency mode 13 1 13 2 13 7 rectangular areas pattern ID command 13 8 Select Current Pattern command 13 12 source image 13 1 13 2 source transparency mode 13 1 13 2 13 6 transparent mode 13 3 print overrun 24 10 print overrun ERROR 21 24 15 print resolution default 2 3 described 2 3 specifying 2 3 printable area 2 7 area defined Glossary 10 area raster graphics 15 5 area boundaries 2 7 2 8 area clipping 2 8 area limits HP GL 2 17 19 character codes 11 15 character range 11 30 EN EN characters 24 13 control codes 24 13 printed dots 2 3 printer commands defined Glossary 11 internal units 2 5 performance speed 24 10 program language 1 1 resets 3 8 printer commands combining 1 8 shortening 1 8 Printer Job Language PJL commands 1 4 Printer Reset command 4 2 printing a character 9 13 control codes 8 28 23 86 24 12 different characters 7 1 duplex 4 5 fixed spaced fonts 23 15 labels 23 3 menu defined Glossary 11 patterns shading 7 11 processing time 24 10 proportional fonts 23 15 raster graphic resolution 15 6 simplex 4 5 text at an angle 23 29 23 31 text in HP GL 2 mode 23 1 text with LB command 23 59 23 60 printing menu Glossar
418. lways has a size of 2 bytes The first data block of a character definition must always have a character descriptor immediately after its 2 byte header Character descriptor data is downloaded using the Character Definition command preceding every character see Character Definition Command A unique character code using the Character Code command must be designated prior to the download of a character descriptor and data If the font being downloaded already contains a character with this code the existing character is deleted during the download of the character descriptor and data Unless otherwise specified inappropriate values in a character descriptor field invalidates the character download process a character is not created and the associated descriptor and data are discarded An undefined printable character is one which is in the printable range of the font type but has no defined pattern Attempts to print an undefined printable character from a font result in the execution of a Space control code Character descriptor fields identified as reserved should be set to zero If the total byte count of the character descriptor and data exceeds 32767 bytes then the remaining data must be sent using the continuation descriptor 11 48 Soft Font Creation EN Character Code Command Notes EN The Character Code command establishes the decimal code that is associated with the next character downloaded This valu
419. m within PCL mode entering HP GL 2 mode using the FN command to select that font and printing a short line of text Table 23 30 Example Using the FN Command EE Reset the printer E C28D Specify a font ID number of 28 Ea S1 p18v0s3b4148T Select an 18 point Univers Bold font as the primary font E c6F Assign the currently selected font as a temporary font with the current ID number 28 E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1500 1500 Move to location 1500 1500 DT Define as a label terminator non printing FN Select Secondary Font 23 57 Table 23 30 Example Using the FN Command LBLaserJetPrinters CR LF Print LaserJet Printers in the currently selected font which is the default Stick font Carriage Return Line Feed AD4 18 FN28 SA Use the AD command to designate an 18 point font from within HP GL 2 mode then assign the PCL font with font ID number of 28 as the secondary font Then select the font LBLaserJetPrinters Print LaserJet Printers in the newly selected font EL 0A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page LaserJet Pr inters LaserJet Printers Figure 23 31 Table 23 31 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The
420. mation about creating user defined fill types If you have not issued an RF command the printer uses solid fill P HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP KP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP P HP HP KP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP NP HP HP NP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HPHP HP HP HPHP Figure 22 8 HP GL 2 User Defined Pattern 22 12 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN For fill type 21 the option parameter selects one of the six predefined PCL cross hatch patterns using a value between 1 and 6 The following illustration shows the six different PCL cross hatch patterns and their corresponding parameter numbers Figure 22 9 PCL Cross Hatch Patterns For fill type 22 the optional parameter selects the corresponding PCL user defined pattern specified by way of the c W command Option1 specifies the pattern associated with the user defined fill pattern Option2 is ignored if present See User Defined Pattern Graphics in Chapter 13 for a discussion of PCL user defined patterns Table 22 6 Example Using the FT Command E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN SP1 Initialize HP GL 2 mode Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing EN FT Fill Type 22 13 Table 22 6 Example Using the FT Command continued
421. mbol mode PA3300 1100 PD SMY PA4400 1890 SMZ Move to 3300 1100 set the pen down and enter symbol mode with Y as the symbol draw a line to 4400 1890 and print a Y re enter symbol mode with Z as the current symbol 22 36 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN Table 22 18 Example Using the Symbol Mode Command PA4600 1590 SMX PA3300 1100 PU Draw a line to 4600 1590 and print a Z specify X as the next symbol move to 3300 1100 and print an X lift the pen SMA PA4000 400 C1400 Specify A as the new symbol and move to 4000 400 draw a circle with a radius of 400 plu and print an A in the center SM PA2600 700 Specify as the new symbol and move to EA1500 200 2600 700 edge the outline of a rectangle and print an at the starting point 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 3 3 200 1000 38300 1100 3 700 500 l 2600 700 4000 400 Figure 22 21 Table 22 19 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up The Vector Group SM Symbol Mode 22 37 SP Select Pen This command selects the printer s logical pen for subsequent plotting An SP command must be included at the beginning of each command sequence to enable the printer to draw
422. mily printers Refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for specifics Default 0 no pattern Range 0 32767 values outside the range are ignored The value field identifies the level of shading the cross hatch pattern or the user defined pattern There are eight HP defined shading patterns defined within the PCL language To specify one of the eight shading patterns use any value within the value field range for the desired shade For example to select the 56 80 shade shown in Figure 14 1 use a value of 56 or 80 or any value in between such as 73 Pattern ID Area Fill ID Command 14 5 There are six HP defined cross hatch patterns To specify a cross hatch pattern type use a value between 1 and 6 to select a pattern as shown in Figure 14 2 For user defined patterns this command sent prior to downloading a user defined pattern assigns an ID pattern number to the downloaded pattern For more information see User defined Pattern Graphics in Chapter 13 Note This command works in conjunction with the Fill Rectangular Area Command described next in this section and the Select Current Pattern Command described in Chapter 13 14 6 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics EN EN oe Z a a 2 Se Ene ee en an Figure 14 1 Shading Patterns Pattern ID Area Fill ID Command 14 7
423. mmand and a series of absolute and or relative coordinate pairs The printer draws only the portion of the line that falls within the effective window Note When using HP GL 2 to draw lines you can increase your printer s throughput by using the Polyline Encoded PE command to send coordinates The PE command requires that you convert coordinates from decimal to base 64 or 32 This conversion especially increases throughput when using a serial interface The PE command with its parameters is used in place of the PA PD PR and PU commands 20 2 The Vector Group EN In the following example note that the PA Plot Absolute command specifies absolute plotting and the coordinate pair 0 0 sets the beginning pen location Table 20 2 Example Drawing Lines EOE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black You must use the SP command to be able to print HP GL 2 images PAO 0 Begin absolute plotting from coordinate 0 0 PD2500 0 0 1500 0 0 Specify Pen Down and draw lines between the points EK OA Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 0 1500 Start 0 0 2500 0 Figure 20 1 Drawing lines EN Drawing Lines 20 3 Note Any line drawn along the border of the effective window causes the line to be clipped producing a line width of one half of what it should be For example in t
424. mmand is ignored Margins represent a physical position and once set do not change with subsequent changes in HMI If the cursor is to the left of the new left margin the cursor is moved to the new left margin Example To set the left margin to column 5 send Ec amp a5L Left Margin Command 5 13 Right Margin Command The Right Margin command sets the right margin to the right edge of the specified column Ec amp a M Column number Default Logical Page right bound Range Current left margin Logical page right bound The maximum right column is located at the right edge of the logical page the HMI setting defines the distance between columns which thereby defines the maximum number of columns on the logical page If the value field specifies a column which is greater than the right edge of the logical page the right margin is set to the right edge of the logical page If the value field specifies a column less than the left margin the command is ignored Margins represent a physical position and once set do not change with subsequent changes in HMI If the cursor position is to the right of the new right margin the cursor is moved to the new right margin Example To set the right margin to column 45 send Ec amp a45M 5 14 Page Control Commands EN Clear Horizontal Margins Command The Clear Horizontal Margins command resets the left and right margins The left margin is set to the left
425. mmand you specify how many sections the rectangle divides into horizontally the X axis and how many sections the rectangle divides into vertically the Y axis With this process you have created your user units Scaling also allows you to enlarge or reduce your image by changing the locations of P1 and P2 P1 and P2 represent physical locations in relation to the PCL Picture Frame When the imaginary rectangle formed by P1 and P2 is enlarged or reduced with the IP or IR commands the HP GL 2 image is also enlarged or reduced to fit the new P1 P2 rectangle For a more detailed explanation of scaling and the Scale SC command see Chapter 19 For importing existing HP GL 2 images another method of enlarging or reducing drawings exists It involves varying the size of the PCL Picture Frame and is described next This method allows you to scale an image while maintaining the aspect ratio of all elements including fonts The Scale command does not affect the size of fonts 17 24 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Absolute and Relative Pen Movement EN The Plot Absolute PA and Plot Relative PR commands allow you to set whether you want to draw using absolute or relative pen moves Absolute pen movement uses X Y coordinates to specify an exact fixed point relative to the origin 0 0 In Figure 17 9 the coordinates 3 8 5 4 and 8 1 are always in the same place with respect to the origin no matter where the pe
426. mory whenever the printer s power is turned off Switching printer languages personalities changing resolution or changing the Page Protection setting also deletes temporary and permanent fonts from user memory in some printers refer to the appropriate printer User s Manual for specifics An existing font is deleted when a new font with the same ID number is downloaded The new font replaces the existing font whether temporary or permanent Deleting Fonts EN There are several mechanisms provided by PCL font management that delete soft fonts from user memory These include commands to delete all soft fonts all temporary soft fonts or an individual soft font by reference to its font ID number refer to the Font ID and the Font Control commands described on the following pages Temporary vs Permanent Fonts 9 3 Font ID Command Note The Font ID command is used to specify an ID number for use in subsequent font management commands The ID number of a font can be used to select the font for printing refer to Font Selection by ID in Chapter 8 Ea c D ID number 0 Range 0 32767 Default The font ID number is used during subsequent soft font downloads selections or deletions The factory default font ID is 0 if no Font ID command is sent an ID of 0 is assigned The font number assigned by the printer and used from the printer s control panel is not the same as the ID number assi
427. move Gap values are converted to percentages of the LT command s pattern length parameter A maximum of 20 gaps are allowed for each user defined line type Gap values must be non negative a gap value of zero produces a dot if specified for an odd numbered gap that is preceded or followed by a non zero even numbered gap The sum of the gap parameters must be greater than zero 22 44 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN The following example demonstrates redefining and printing a line type Table 22 24 Example Using the UL Command 7E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA4000 3000 Specify absolute plotting and move to 4000 3000 UL8 0 15 0 15 0 15 40 15 Redefine the user defined line type with an index number of 8 specify the lines and spaces as follows in percentages of the line distance gap1 as a dot 0 gap2 as a space 15 gap3 as another dot 0 gap4 as a space 15 gap5 as another dot 0 gap6 as a space 15 gap7 as a line 40 and gap8 as a space 15 LT8 10 PU2000 2500 PD5000 2500 Specify line type number 8 just defined with a pattern length of 10 of the distance between P1 and P2 in this case the lower left and upper right corners of the default PCL Picture Frame lift the pen and move to
428. mped integer the printer treats all numbers above 32 767 as 32 767 Certain commands have parameters which are restricted to a smaller range These ranges are listed in the parameter tables for each command Sending a number outside the reduced parameter range may produce unexpected results 3 Reat A number with an integer portion from 1 073 741 823 29 1 to 1 073 741 823 22 1 You are assured of at least 6 significant digits including integer and fractional portion You may omit the decimal point when no decimal fraction is specified Sending a number outside the parameter range may produce unexpected results 17 10 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Note Notes EN 4 Clamped Real A number with an integer portion from 32 768 to 32 767 you are assured of at least 6 significant digits including integer and fractional portion You may omit the decimal point when no decimal fraction is specified Sending a number outside this range does not cause an error but the number is clamped to the limits of the range For example the printer treats all numbers above 32 767 as 32 767 Certain commands have parameters which are restricted to a smaller range These ranges are listed in the parameter tables for each command Sending a number outside the reduced parameter range may produce unexpected results 5 LabetAny sequence of characters In the HP GL 2 language text is described using the term
429. mpression and adaptive compression These techniques are described in detail under Set Compression Method Command in Chapter 15 Configuration Configuration is the process of changing certain printer settings to allow a computer to communicate properly with the printer For example interface selection is part of printer configuration The printer is configured using the control panel configuration menu Configuration Menu Identifies printer features which are set from the printer s Operator Control Panel Configuration menu selections include such features as Auto Continue I O configuration and Resolution Enhancement setting The configuration menu includes features which are not part of the print environment features which can not be selected with printer commands EN EN Control Code A control code is a type of PCL language command that initiates a printer function for example CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed and FF Form Feed Control Panel The combination of keys LEDs and a display that allows an operator to communicate with a device and allows the device to communicate with an operator Current Active Position CAP See CAP Cursor Although the printer does not actually have a cursor the cursor position refers to the currently active printing position like the blinking underline character used on most computer terminals The cursor can be moved anywhere within the logical page using a combi
430. n type and unit cet 0 Font 1 Macro 2 User defined pattern 3 Symbol Set for unbound scalable fonts 4 Font Extended NA 0 4 Default Range The entity status responses for the value field parameters vary depending on the setting of the location type and location unit refer to the Set Location Type and Set Location Unit commands described on the preceding pages The entity status and error responses are described on the following pages 16 10 Status Readback EN Entity Status Responses EN The status response for an Inquire Status Readback Entity command varies depending on the type of entity requested The status responses for font font extended macro user defined pattern and symbol set are described below Font Response The status response information returned for font inquire entity value field 0 varies Depending on whether the printer s font is a bitmap unbound scalable or bound scalable different keywords are returned The response is also somewhat different if the location type is set to 1 currently selected as explained in more detail later The list of possible keywords for a font request is shown below SELECT SYMBOLSETS LOCTYPE LOCUNIT An example of an inquire entity font entity type 0 status response is shown below Notice the variation in the keyword lines for the three fonts listed in order below Internal bitmap Line Printer Internal unbound scalable CG Times
431. n Format Byte 15 MSB8 7LSB 0 0 Header Size 18 2 Encoded Symbol Set Designator 4 Format Symbol Set Type 6 First Code 8 Last Code 10 Character Requirements die Symbol Map Last Code First Code 1 Ize 10 4 User Defined Symbol Sets EN EN The following abbreviations are used to define the data type of each field in the symbol set header Font Header Field Data Type Notation B Boolean 0 1 UB Unsigned Byte 0 255 SB Signed Byte 128 127 UI Unsigned Integer 0 65535 SI Signed Integer 32768 32767 ULI Unsigned Long Integer 0 292 1 SLI Signed Long Integer 231 231 1 ASCxx ASCII string array 0 xx 1 of characters Header Size UI Set the header size to the size of the header data the number of bytes from Header Size byte 0 to the last byte just before the beginning of the Symbol Map data bytes This value is 18 or greater Define Symbol Set 10 5 Encoded Symbol Set Designator Ul This field must match the ID code in the Symbol Set ID code command This field contains the symbol set ID code The symbol set ID code is calculated from a symbol set ID selection value using the following formula Symbol Set ID Code 32 ID 64 where is the decimal number 0 to 1023 and ID is the ASCII character code of the letter For example Assume the ID se
432. n and Status Group EN For example to divide the X axis into 12 units and the Y axis into 10 units specify the X axis to scale from 0 to 12 and the Y axis to scale from 0 to 10 P1 becomes the origin with user unit coordinate 0 0 and P2 becomes 12 10 The entire plotting area is now divided into the desired units Subsequent plotting commands use these units see Figure 19 1 If you command the printer to move to the point 3 4 the printer moves to the location equivalent to 3 4 user units not 3 4 plotter units PCL Picture Frame Physical Page CO 12 0 10 IP or IP0 0 8128 10160 2 4 6 8 10 12 Figure 19 1 User Unit Scaling with Default P1 and P2 If you move the locations of P1 and P2 the size of the user units changes Assume that the previous illustration showed P1 and P2 in their default locations the lower left and upper right corners respectively of the PCL Picture Frame In Figure 19 2 P1 and P2 have the same user unit values set with the Scale command SC but their physical locations have been changed using Input P1 and P2 IP Note that the size of the user units decreased Using the Scale Command 19 5 PCL Picture Physical 10 Frame Page 246 81012 SCO 12 0 10 IP0 2032 4064 5080 Figure 19 2 Same User Unit Scaling with New P1 and P2 To further illustrate the flexibility of user unit scaling Figure 19 3 shows the P1 and P2 locations
433. n currently in the polygon buffer Use FP to fill polygons defined in polygon mode or with the Edge Rectangle or Edge Wedge commands EA ER EW RA RR or WG FP fill method or FP Parameter Format Functional Range Default fill method clamped Oori 0 odd even fill integer e Fill Method Specifies the algorithm used to determine which portions of the polygon are inside the polygon and therefore are to be filled e 0 Even odd fill algorithm default e 1 Non zero winding fill algorithm Even odd method 0 and Non zero method 1 winding fill methods are described in detail under Filling Polygons earlier in this chapter The FP command fills any polygon that is currently in the polygon buffer FP accesses the data in the polygon buffer but does not clear the buffer or change the data in any way FP Fill Polygon 21 31 The FP command fills between points defined with either the pen down or the pen up The polygon is filled using the current pen fill type line type and attributes if the fill type is not raster The FP command includes an automatic pen down When the command execution is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored The example on the next page creates a polygon composed of two subpolygons In this case the FP command fills alternating areas beginning with the outside area Table 21 17 Example E Reset the printer 0B
434. n is raised and the following commands are ignored AA AR AT Cl CP EA ER EW LB PE PM PR RA RR RT and WG The commands allowed in LOST mode are AC AD CF CO DF DI DR DT DV ES FT IN IP IR IW LA LO LT PA PD PG PU PW RF RO RP SA SB SC SD SI SL SM SP SR SS TD UL WU and the PM1 PM2 forms of PM The commands IN PG RP and PA with in range parameters clear LOST mode PD and PU in absolute plotting mode with in range parameters also clear LOST mode When PD clears LOST mode a line is drawn from the last valid current position to the first point in the PD parameter sequence If PA clears LOST mode the pen will not go down until a PD command is received 17 12 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Using HP GL 2 With Programming Languages The HP GL 2 examples included in this manual are given ina generic format they show the commands required to perform a specific function but usually do not use a specific programming language In most cases the commands are accompanied by a brief description of the command being used To see how HP GL 2 commands are used in BASIC and the C programming language see the following examples Example BASIC This example uses BASIC to print three lines forming a simple triangle shown below 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 CHRS CHR PD2 CHR CHRS T T T IN LPRINT SP1 T T T 27 E REM
435. n is when the coordinates are issued Y axis Figure 17 9 Absolute Coordinates Relative pen movement uses X Y increments to specify the number of units the pen moves from its current pen location All commands that use relative increments include relative in their name except the PE command An example is the Edge Rectangle Relative ER command In Figure 17 10 for example assume that the pen is currently at the origin 0 0 To move to the absolute points shown in Figure 17 9 using relative coordinates count 3 units to the right and 8 units up from the current pen location these are both positive directions with respect to the origin This is the relative location 3 8 Now move 5 positive X units and 7 negative Y units from this location to the lower point this is the relative location 5 7 From this location move to the last point by moving 3 negative X units and 3 positive Y units 3 3 Absolute and Relative Pen Movement 17 25 Note Y axis Starting pen location X axis 3 units Figure 17 10Relative Coordinates Relative movement is useful in many applications where you know the dimensions of the shape you want but do not want to calculate the absolute coordinates For example if you want a box 4 X units by 8 Y units you can use the Edge Rectangle Relative ER command to draw the box without having to calculate the absolute coordinates of the opposite corner The ER command dr
436. n of 0 0 The default HP GL 2 coordinate system is different than the PCL coordinate system Y is down in PCL and up in HP GL 2 In addition the default origin is at the lower left in HP GL 2 and at the upper left in PCL The HP GL 2 coordinate system can be set up to match the PCL coordinate system See the example entitled Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System in Chapter 19 Figure 17 4 The HP GL 2 Coordinate System To locate any point on the grid the printing area within the PCL Picture Frame move from the origin a number of units along the X axis then move a number of units parallel to the Y axis The number of units you move matches a coordinate location Each point is designated by the combination of its X coordinate and Y coordinate known as an X Y coordinate pair In positive X values are plotted to the right of the origin and positive Y values are plotted above the origin The HP GL 2 Coordinate System 17 15 Note Study Figure 17 4 to locate these points 0 0 2 2 6 2 6 3 10 0 6 3 6 2 2 2 0 0 Draw a straight line between each point in the order listed You should have drawn an arrow This is a simple demonstration of defining a vector image when in HP GL 2 mode To specify a point when programming an application you must always give a complete X Y coordinate pair the X coordinate is first and the Y coordinate second This manual shows coordi
437. nate pairs in parentheses X Y for clarity Do not use parentheses in your command sequence Using the default HP GL 2 coordinate system the origin is in the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame as shown in Figure 17 5 Using the IP or IR commands you can move the origin to other locations Then using the SC command you can define practically any unit coordinate system This process is discussed in more detail later in this chapter under Scaling and also in Chapter 19 Physical Page PCL Picture Frame The Default HP GL 2 Coordinate System is positioned so the PCL Picture Frame Lies in the Upper Right PCL Quadrant of the Cartesian Coordinate System Origin 0 0 Figure 17 5 The Default HP GL 2 Coordinate System 17 16 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN HP GL 2 amp PCL Orientation Interactions The relationship between the orientation of the HP GL 2 coordinate system and the PCL coordinate system is important Figure 17 6 illustrates this relationship for the default HP GL 2 orientation RO 0 and the PCL logical page orientation As shown in the illustration in the default HP GL 2 orientation the origin of the HP GL 2 coordinate system defaults to the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame HP GL 2 and PCL X coordinates increase in the same direction but the Y coordinates increase in opposite directions Notice that a change in the PCL logical page orientation changes the
438. nate system 11 4 designating HP GL 2 example 23 73 disk 7 2 downloading 7 2 9 2 entity 16 3 extended status readback 16 10 filling characters HP GL 2 23 20 fixed spaced 7 4 font type header field 11 15 formats 7 2 header see also font header 11 1 11 6 height HP GL 2 23 71 height PCL 7 5 height measured in PCL points 23 15 HP GL 2 alternate font selection 23 66 HP GL 2 font size 23 74 HP GL 2 fonts 23 15 HP GL 2 ID number selection 23 54 HP GL 2 selection using font ID 23 56 ID command 9 4 ID number 9 1 23 56 Intellifont scalable 11 2 internal 7 2 7 11 management 9 1 management example 9 7 master size 11 4 memory RAM usage 7 8 mirror images 23 74 number available 8 5 orientation 7 8 8 20 patterned and shaded 7 11 permanent 9 3 9 5 16 8 posture HP GL 2 23 71 primary and secondary 8 5 printed on angle 23 29 23 37 printing 23 15 proportionally spaced 7 4 RAM 7 2 resolution 8 5 ROM based 7 2 rotation 7 8 scalable 7 2 7 9 11 2 scalable in HP GL 2 mode 23 15 scalable or bitmap HP GL 2 23 67 scaling technology font header 11 34 secondary 8 5 select table 8 1 8 4 8 5 selection see also font selection 8 1 SIMM 7 2 size selection 8 9 soft 7 2 soft status readback 16 13 spacing HP GL 2 23 15 23 70 special effects 7 11 status readback 16 10 Stick Arc in HP GL 2 23 15 stroke weight 7 6 stroke weight HP GL 2 23 71 style 7 6 style values 8 14 style
439. nation of horizontal and vertical cursor positioning commands and control codes Decipoint A decipoint is a unit of measurement that equals 1 720th of an inch Default A value used instead of a programmatically selected value A factory default is a value programmed into the device at the factory this value is stored in read only memory ROM and cannot be changed by a user or operator A user default is a default which is selectable via the control panel Dot The dot is the smallest printable unit On HP LaserJet printers one dot can equal either 1 300th or 1 600 inch The number of dots printed per inch is referred to as the printers resolution Glossary 3 Downloading The process of transferring soft fonts macros or raster data from a host computer to the printer s user memory is called downloading DTR Polarity The configuration of DTR polarity determines whether pin 20 on the serial interface connector is high or low when the printer is ready If DTR polarity is HI pin 20 is high when the printer is ready If DTR polarity is LO pin 20 is low when the printer is ready Escape Character The first character of a PCL command or escape sequence is identified by the symbol ASCII decimal code 27 This character is a control code used specifically by the printer to identify a string of characters as a printer command As the printer monitors incoming data from a computer it is looking for this ch
440. nd allows you to define another font and its font characteristics e No Parameters Defaults the alternate font characteristics to that of the Stick font see the following table e Kind Specifies the characteristic for which you are setting a value see the following table Table 23 6 Kind Characteristic Default Value Description 1 Symbol Set 277 Roman 8 2 Font Spacing 0 fixed spacing 3 Pitch 9 characters per inch 4 Height 11 5 font point size 5 Posture upright upright 23 18 The Character Group EN Note Note EN Table 23 6 continued 6 Stroke Weight 0 medium 7 Typeface 48 Stick fixed vector e Value Defines the properties of the characteristic specified by the kind parameter When selecting fonts the different characteristics symbol set spacing pitch etc are prioritized as shown in the table above with symbol set being the highest priority and typeface being the lowest The font selection priority is the same for HP GL 2 as for PCL font selection For more information about the priority of font characteristics see the Font Selection by Characteristic discussion in Chapter 8 To avoid duplication of many pages of tables the tables listing the kind parameters symbol set spacing typeface etc are located with the description of the SD Standard Font Description command The following example shows the command used to
441. nd byte byte count For example the command E b2m3W binary data sets compression method 2 and sends 3 bytes of raster data for the row Suppose the binary data appears as follows 00000010 00000001 00000001 00000001 The control first byte value of 2 indicates that 3 bytes of literal unencoded raster data will follow The Transfer Raster Data command however specified only three bytes total including the control byte in the raster row The control byte and the following two data bytes are read and the remaining data byte is ignored Transfer Raster Data Command 15 29 Notes If the last byte indicated by the value field in the Transfer Raster Data command is a control byte that byte is ignored If a Transfer Raster Data command is received without an accompanying Start Raster Graphics command any preceding start raster values are used such as left graphics margin raster height and width etc End Raster Graphics Command Notes The End Raster Graphics command signifies the end of a raster graphic data transfer Fae e Receipt of this command causes 5 operations e Resets the raster compression seed row to zeros e Moves the cursor to the raster row immediately following the end of the raster area if a source raster height was specified e Allows raster commands which were previously locked out to be processed e Sets compression mode to 0 no compression e Defaults the left graphics margin to X po
442. nd height which are set using the Raster Width and the Raster Height commands Zeroed rows at the top and within the raster image can be eliminated by using the Y offset feature Y Offset identifies how many rows to skip zero fill The Y offset command specifies the Y offset or number of rows for the printer to fill with zeroed rows This provides a reduction in data for increased efficiency Trailing zeroed full rows at the end of the raster image need not be sent The printer automatically fills in any unsent zeroed rows from the end of the raster image last raster row with any 1 s to the bottom of the raster area 15 2 Raster Graphics EN EN The final data reduction technique provided by the raster area involves the printer s ability to fill in trailing zeros to the edge of the raster area Any zeros following the last 1 in the raster row to the edge of the picture area need not be sent The printer automatically fills them This technique eliminates the need to transmit raster data rows that are all the same length as required in a raster image which does not use the raster area feature The raster area represents a boundary Within this boundary the printer zero fills missing rows and fills in short rows to the edge of the raster area However in addition to filling to the boundaries of the raster area the printer also clips any raster line which extends beyond the boundary Thus if an image extends beyond the raster
443. nd provide a means to enter HP GL 2 mode The HP GL 2 commands are used within HP GL 2 mode They define the image that is printed and allow you to return to the PCL printer language mode The HP GL 2 language has its own syntax and each command is listed in this section of the manual The vector graphics commands have been grouped into functional categories The categories are designated as shown in Table 17 1 through Each of the command categories is discussed in its own chapter beginning with Chapter 19 The Configuration and Status Group Table 17 1 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 1 of 5 CONFIGURATION GROUP CO Comment DF Default Values IN Initialize IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window PG Advance Page RO Rotate Coordinate System RP Replot SC Scale 1 Ignored by HP LaserJet printers EN HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 3 Table 17 2 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 2 of 5 VECTOR GROUP AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up RT Relative Arc Three Point Table 17 3 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 3 of 5 POLYGON GROUP EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polyg
444. ndaries 19 6 creating a simple drawing example 18 16 example 18 6 scaling 18 3 scaling factor 18 1 Set Anchor Point command 18 10 size horizontal 18 8 size vertical 18 9 PCL HP GL 2 orientation interactions 17 17 PD command 17 21 20 2 20 31 PE command 20 34 example 20 41 pen absolute vs relative movement 17 25 automatic pen down 17 21 location 17 21 17 23 19 35 23 5 movement for labeling 23 24 selection 22 5 22 38 status 17 21 width 22 30 width unit selection 22 46 Pen Down PD command 17 21 20 2 20 31 example 20 32 Pen Up PU command 17 22 20 46 Pen Width PW command 22 5 22 29 23 21 perforation region Glossary 9 region 5 11 5 19 skip 5 11 Perforation Skip command 5 19 performance printer 24 10 permanent fonts 9 3 9 5 status readback 16 8 permanent macros 12 5 PF PS Compatible Font Name 11 42 PG command 19 33 phone support HP Customer Support 2 physical coordinate system 11 4 physical page defined 2 7 size in PCL Units landscape 2 8 size in PCL Units portrait 2 7 picture frame 18 1 anchor point 17 17 Index 31 Index 32 HP GL 2 2 6 size vertical 18 9 picture presentation directives 18 1 pie charts 21 27 21 45 pitch 7 5 23 70 23 73 Glossary 10 computing 8 11 extended font header 11 30 font header 11 21 font selection command 8 10 in font selection 8 23 selections range of valid 8 10 pixel 22 33 pixel encoding user defin
445. nderstand the differences between the coordinates used relative vs absolute Table 21 8 Example Using EA to Draw Rectangles E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode 21 18 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 8 Example Using EA to Draw Rectangles continued SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SCO 150 0 150 1 PA75 105 EA115 130 Set up user scaling with P1 being 0 0 user units and P2 being 150 150 user units Isotropic scaling is specified Specify absolute plotting mode and move to 75 105 Use EA to outline the shape of a rectangle that begins at 75 105 and has an upper right corner of 115 130 user units PA95 105 PD95 95 Draw a line from 95 105 to 95 95 PD65 95 65 90 Draw a line from the current pen location 95 95 to 65 95 and another line from there to 65 90 PU45 90 EA85 65 Lift the pen and move to 45 90 Draw the outline of a rectangle with an upper left corner of 45 90 and a lower right corner of 85 65 PU95 95 PD125 95 125 90 Lift the pen and move to 95 95 Lower the pen and draw a line to 125 95 then to 125 90 PU145 90 EA105 65 Lift the pen and move to 145 90 Draw the outline of a rectangle with the upper right corner at 145 90 and the lower left corner at 105 65 2 0A E En
446. ne in PCL coordinate system units The units of the X axis of the PCL coordinate system may be PCL Units decipoints or columns The units of the Y axis of the PCL coordinate system may be PCL Units decipoints or rows PCL Units The current unit size used in PCL Unit moves is determined by the value specified in the Unit of Measure command defining the number of units per inch used in the following commands Vertical Cursor Position PCL Units Horizontal Cursor Position PCL Units Vertical Rectangle Size PCL Units Horizontal Rectangle Size PCL Units In addition the current unit of measure setting affects how cursor movement values are rounded in turn affecting the result of the following commands Horizontal Cursor Position Columns Horizontal Tab HT control code Space SP control code Backspace BS control code Bitmap Character Delta X Delta X SI Chapter 11 For more information refer to the next section Horizontal Cursor Positioning Columns Command If no unit of measure value is specified the default number of units per inch for PCL Unit moves horizontal and vertical rectangle size etc is one Unit equals 1 300 inch This is true even when a different resolution Such as 600 dpi is selected on the printer EN Cursor Positioning Units 6 3 Decipoints In PCL terminology a decipoint is 1 720 inch or one tenth of a PCL point a PCL point is exactly 1 72 inch as opposed to a typo
447. ne to this value to produce 11111101 the twos complement The decimal value of this number 253 used in the control byte produces a repetition of 3 bytes for a total of 4 occurrences of the pattern Set Compression Method Command 15 17 Note The range of numbers for the control byte is shown below Table 15 3 Literal Pattern Values of Bytes Binary value Decimal value 1 0000 0000 to to 127 0111 1111 127 Table 15 4 No Operation Value NOP value Binary value Decimal value 1000 000 128 128 128 Table 15 5 Repeated Pattern Values of Repetitions Binary value Decimal value 1 1 11111111 255 to to to 127 127 1000 0001 129 1 These negative values are represented by taking the twos complement of the value of the number Another method to calculate the number needed in the control byte for some number of repetitions is to subtract the number of desired repetitions from 256 For example the control value for 3 repetitions 4 occurrences of a byte is 256 minus 3 253 A zero or positive value in the control byte means that the subsequent byte or bytes are non replicated bytes of data The value of the control byte plus one indicates the number of data bytes that follow For example a control byte of 0 means the following 1 byte is literal raster data A control byte of 6 indicates that the following 7 bytes are literal raste
448. negative angle of rotation Types 3 and 4 use the current pen and line type defined by the Line Type Pen Width and Line Attribute commands If the spacing between lines is defined in plotter units no Scale command used turning scaling on or changing the locations of P1 and P2 has no affect on the spacing If however the spacing is defined in user units the spacing fluctuates with changes in the location of P1 and P2 the Xmin Y min ANd Xmax Ymax Points if scaling is isotropic or subsequent scaling command changes Turning off scaling causes the spacing to be frozen in the plotter unit equivalent of the current user unit value If the spacing is a percentage of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 the percentage is maintained and spacing fluctuates with changes to P1 and P2 the Xmin Ymin and Xmax Ymax Points if scaling is isotropic The end points of HP GL 2 hatching fills are drawn with the current line cap Lines are not clipped to the polygon For fill type 10 the option parameter specifies the level of shading The level is specified as a percentage from 0 to 100 The following illustration shows the available shading patterns FT Fill Type 22 11 81 99 100 Figure 22 7 HP Defined Shading Patterns For fill type 11 the option parameter selects the corresponding HP GL 2 user defined raster fill using the index number specified in the RF command Refer to the Raster Fill Definition RF command for more infor
449. ng factor so existing HP GL 2 graphics can be scaled and placed anywhere on the PCL logical page Picture frame refers to the destination rectangle when transferring HP GL 2 graphics into the PCL logical page The PCL picture frame size commands specify the size of the destination rectangle Picture frame scaling factor is the ratio of the size of the picture frame to the size of the source HP GL 2 plot There may actually be two scaling factors one for the x direction and one for the y direction Picture frame anchor point refers to the upper left corner of the picture frame which is set to the current active position CAP in the PCL environment at the time the picture frame anchor point command is executed Introduction 18 1 Defining the Image Area PCL Picture Frame There is a group of commands that allows you to specify an area on the page for placing an HP GL 2 graphic image These commands are the Picture Presentation Directives and are used to define a bounding rectangle to contain the HP GL 2 image Figure 18 1 illustrates the Picture Presentation Directives The rectangular area surrounding the image is the PCL Picture Frame and the location on the page of the PCL Picture Frame is determined by the picture frame anchor point Refer to Figures 2 3 and 2 4 for the default picture frame size ___ Anchor Point Picture Frame iA caling Occurs HP GL 2 Plot Size Picture Frame
450. ng the HP GL 2 graphics language HP GL 2 graphics may be created within application software or imported from existing applications For various types of images many technical drawings and business graphics for example it is advanta geous to use vector graphics instead of raster graphics The advantages include faster I O transfer of large images and smaller disk storage requirements As a guideline use raster graphics for small complex images or those images that cannot be accomplished with HP GL 2 such as scanned photographs Use HP GL 2 for images that would involve a large amount of I O data transfer if printed using raster graphics or for drawings that are already in HP GL 2 format If the image is easier to describe using vectors instead of raster lines the image usually prints faster using HP GL 2 Printing with HP GL 2 requires leaving the PCL printer language mode and entering HP GL 2 mode Switching between modes involves only a few commands and software applications easily switch between the two modes as needed 17 1 Learning HP GL 2 Read through this chapter and Chapter 18 for a general overview of the HP GL 2 language and its relationship to the PCL printer language Then flip through the other HP GL 2 chapters until you see an example that interests you or fits your objective Read through the examples and try printing them using your choice of programming languages If you need help converting the generic comm
451. nge Default path clamped 0 1 2 or3 JO integer horizontal line clamped Oor1 0 integer normal Line Feed The DV command determines the text path the direction that the current location moves after each character is drawn and the direction that the Carriage Return point moves when a Line Feed is included in the label string e No Parameter Defaults the text path to horizontal not stacked with normal Line Feed Equivalent to DVO 0 e Path Specifies the location of each character with respect to the preceding character relative to the labeling direction defined by the DI or DR commands The text path set by DV is not affected by changes in P1 and P2 e 0 0 degrees Right Within a label each character begins to the right of the previous character This is a horizontal text path unless altered by DI or DR e 1 90 degrees Down Within a label each character begins below the previous character This is a vertical text path unless altered by DI or DR e 2 180 degrees Left Within a label each character begins to the left of the previous character This is a horizontal text path unless altered by DI or DR 23 46 The Character Group EN e 3 270 degrees Up Within a label each character begins above the previous character This is a vertical text path unless altered by DI or DR The following illustration shows the four text paths C U TFEL RIGHT 2 OO Figure 23 26Four Tex
452. ngle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge 21 2 The Polygon Group EN Drawing Rectangles You can draw a rectangle by outlining edging the defined area using the Edge Rectangle Absolute EA or Edge Rectangle Relative ER commands To draw a rectangle the printer uses the current pen location for one corner you give the coordinates for the diagonally opposite corner The printer draws the rectangle defined by these two points The following simple command sequence uses EA to draw a rectangle Table 21 3 Example Drawing Rectangles TE Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black You must select a pen to print HP GL 2 images PA10 10 Specify absolute plotting and move to 10 10 EA2500 1500 Draw the outline of a rectangle with the lower left corner being the current pen location 10 10 and the upper right corner being 2500 1500 2 0A Enter the PCL mode 2 E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page EN Drawing Rectangles 21 3 10 10 Figure 21 1 2500 1500 The Fill Rectangle Absolute RA and Fill Rectangle Relative RR commands both discussed later in this chapter fill their rectangles with the default or current fill pattern You may also want to edge or outline the rectangle for better image definition with some fill types The following command se
453. nment Before the macro is performed the current modified print environment is saved Changes made to feature settings during a macro call are recorded in the modified print environment however these changes are not retained upon completion of the macro call The modified print environment that existed prior to the macro call is restored When a macro is enabled for automatic overlay its execution is the final operation each time a page is printed Before the macro is performed the current modified print environment is saved and replaced with the overlay environment The overlay environment is a combination of the user default and the current modified print environments Changes made to feature settings during macro overlay are recorded in the modified print environment however these changes are not retained upon completion of the macro overlay The modified print environment that existed prior to the macro overlay is restored HP GL 2 commands are not supported within macros on all HP LaserJet printers Refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for specifics EN The overlay environment consists of the current settings for the following features with the remainder of the environmental features set to their user default values Table 12 2 PCL CONTEXT Page length Paper source Page size Number of copies Orientation Cursor position stack Registration HP GL 2
454. ns 22 PCL user defined pattern ID ignored For fill types 3 and 4 the option parameter specifies the distance between the lines in the fill This distance is specified in current units measured along the X axis Option must be a positive number if zero then 1 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 is used The default spacing is 1 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 Subsequent changes in the P1 P2 locations affect this distance only if the spacing is defined in user units an SC command is in effect For fill types 3 and 4 the option2 parameter specifies an angle in degrees for the lines of the fill This angle is a positive angle referenced from the positive plotter unit X axis as shown in the following illustration 0 and 180 are horizontal 90 and 270 are vertical The first set of lines for cross hatched fill are drawn at the specified angle and the next set are drawn at that angle plus 90 degrees Note A positive angle is an angle rotated from the X axis to the Y axis as shown below A negative angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis Y 90 an 180 0 X a 270 Figure 22 6 Positive Angle of Rotation 22 10 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Note Note EN The relationship of the X axis to the Y axis and the Y axis can be changed as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive and
455. nt selection priority considerations are shown in the following list Font Priority Considerations Symbol Set highest Spacing Pitch Height Style Stroke Weight Typeface Family Resolution Location Orientation lowest 1 Bitmap fonts designed at 600 dpi are not available for selection at 300 dpi In 600 dpi mode font priority is as follows 600 dpi bitmap scalable 300 dpi bitmap 2 Although location is not a font characteristic it is a font selection consideration When selecting a font the printer compares the highest priority characteristic in the font select table to the corresponding characteristic of the available fonts If only one font is available that matches that font is selected If several fonts match the printer compares the next highest priority characteristic to the corresponding characteristic of the available fonts and so on down the list When only one font remains that font is selected However if after comparison of all the font design characteristics more than one font still remains then the resolution and location are considered 8 2 PCL Font Selection EN Note EN There are four locations where a font may be stored printer ROM Read Only Memory SIMM module ROM cartridge ROM and printer RAM random access memory user memory These font locations are shown below listed from the highest to lowest priority The font that matches the characteristics is selected from the
456. ntage using a number from 0 to 100 For example to print vectors that are shaded 15 specify SV1 15 For Type 2 option specifies the index number of the fill pattern created using the RF Raster Fill Definition command Option2 specifies whether the pattern should be printed in the color of pen number 1 option2 0 parameter or the current pen option2 1 parameter The selected pen is applied to the 1 s pixels in the raster pattern For Type 21 the option1 parameter selects one of the six predefined PCL cross hatch patterns using a value between 1 and 6 Refer to the FT command for an illustration of the six different patterns and their corresponding parameter numbers 22 40 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN For Type 22 the optional parameter selects the corresponding PCL user defined pattern specified by way of the c W command Option1 specifies the pattern associated with the user defined fill pattern Option2 is ignored if present See User Defined Pattern Graphics in Chapter 13 for a discussion of PCL user defined patterns All parameters are optional If all parameters are omitted screening is turned off the vectors are solid If screen_type is present but option1 and or option2 are omitted values previously specified for the specified screen_type are used If none have been specified since the last power on IN DF or E Reset the defaults are assumed All screening patterns use the current anch
457. nter does not have a large enough block to store the data then the data is discarded and a memory error results 16 22 Status Readback EN EN LARGEST identifies the largest continuous block of available memory in bytes An example response is shown below PCL INFO MEMORY TOTAL 100000 LARGEST 25000 The above example indicates that the printer has 100 000 bytes of available memory and the largest continuous block is 25 000 bytes Memory Error Response If the Free Memory command value field is out of range not 1 then the memory status response returns an invalid unit error For example if the Free Space command with a value of 2 Ec s2M were sent the following error would be returned PCL INFO MEMORY ERROR INVALID UNIT Free Space Command 16 23 Flush All Pages Command Notes The Flush All Pages command suspends accepting input data until all pages currently in the printer are printed This gives the printer time to clear some memory Ec amp r F 0 Flush all complete pages 1 Flush all pages 0 0 1 Default Range A value of 0 indicates that only complete pages are to be processed If a partial page exists it is not processed A value of 1 indicates that all page data including the partial page will be processed For example if the printer contains two complete pages page A and page B and one partial page page C and receives a Flush All Pages comman
458. ny is printed as text The cursor is incremented e For method 3 if the row length is equal to one the current row is duplicated and the cursor is incremented 15 28 Raster Graphics EN Transfer Raster Data Command Note EN The Transfer Raster Data command is used to transfer a row of raster data to the printer ra b W raster data N A 0 32767 Default Range The value field identifies the number of bytes in the raster row These bytes are interpreted as one row of raster graphics data that is printed at the current Y position at the left raster graphics margin Upon completion of this command the cursor position is at the beginning of the next raster row at the left raster graphics margin Within the raster data each bit describes a single dot The most significant bit bit 7 is the most significant bit 0 is the least significant of the first byte of data corresponds to the first dot within the row If a bit is set to 1 the corresponding dot is printed Each dot of the raster data is expanded according to the specified raster resolution Raster graphics is independent of the text area and perforation skip mode these boundaries are ignored Raster graphic images raster height and raster width are limited to the printable area images that extend beyond the printable area are clipped The byte count of the value field in the Transfer Raster Data command has precedence over the literal or the comma
459. ode Reset the printer to end the job and eject the page IW Input Window 19 31 4500 3700 THIS IS 2000 3200 Pen stops 2000 1700 here Pen programmed to draw line here p and start label Pa N 7 e A Pen restarts here 3000 1300 X Window established by IW Figure 19 13Example IW command Table 19 16 Related Commands Group IP Input P1 and P2 The Configuration Status Group IR Input Relative P1 and P2 RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale 19 32 The Configuration and Status Group EN PG Advance Full Page Note EN This HP GL 2 command is ignored by the printer since it could cause undesirable results when importing plots A page eject can be accomplished only from the PCL printer language mode The following PCL commands cause a conditional page eject meaning that a page is ejected if there is any printable data in the print buffer e E E Reset e UEL Universal Exit Language e Flush All Pages e Page Length e Page Size e Orientation e Paper Source When a page is ejected using one of the above commands the PCL cursor position is set to the top of form on the new page The Top of Form is 3 4 of a line below the top margin An alternative method of ejecting a page from PCL is the Form Feed control code A Form Feed causes an unconditional page eject and advances the current active cursor position to the top of form on the next page The horizontal c
460. of the right margin When using fixed pitch fonts the Backspace distance is defined by the current print pitch HMI setting When using proportionally spaced fonts a single Backspace moves back to center the overstrike character After printing the overstriking character the cursor returns to its position prior to the Backspace Multiple backspaces each move back the distance of the last printed symbol or space For example if world was printed with a proportional font and then 5 backspaces were performed the distance moved back would be five times the width of the d HT Horizontal Tab Moves the current active position CAP to the next tab stop on the current line The tab stops are at the left margin and every 8th column between the left margin and the right bound of the logical page If the new horizontal position crosses the right margin the new horizontal position is set to the right margin If the current HMI value is 0 the command is ignored Horizontal Cursor Positioning Control Codes 6 9 Vertical Cursor Positioning Rows Command Note This Vertical Cursor Positioning command moves the cursor to a new line in the same column position Ec amp a R Number of Rows Default NA Range 32767 to 32767 valid to 4 decimal places A value field with a plus sign indicates the new position is downward from and relative to the current cursor position a minus sign indicates the new position is
461. of the escape sequence Binary data immediately follows the terminating character of the escape sequence 1 6 Introduction to HP PCL EN The following is an example of an escape sequence with a termination character and no parameter character This escape sequence performs a single function Ec amp 410 Escape Character Termination Character Parameterized Character Value Field Group Character Notes Some escape sequences shown in this manual contain spaces between characters for clarity Do not include these spaces when using escape sequences Also in the escape sequence a script 2 is used to indicate a lower case T for clarity The following is an example of an escape sequence with a parameter character and a termination character This escape sequence performs two functions It is the combination of two commands Ec amp 210 and c amp 2A m amp EL102A Termination Character Escape Character Parameterized Character Value Field Group Character Parameter Character Value Field Notice that the Ec and the amp 2 are dropped from the second printer command when the two commands are combined Also the upper case O that terminated the first command becomes a lower case o parameter character when these commands are combined EN Syntax of Escape Sequences 1 7 1 8 Use these three rules to combine and shorten printer commands 1 Introduction to HP PCL The first
462. oint 100 100 plu away with an ending point 0 200 from the starting point of the arc Lift the pen and move it 100 100 plu from the current pen position pen down and draw a line 200 plu in the X direction EL OA Enter the PCL mode ELE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 650 1150 3300 800 1000 100 Figure 20 22 RT Relative Arc Three Point 20 51 Table 20 32 Related Commands Group AA Arc Absolute The Vector Group AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width 20 52 The Vector Group EN EN The Polygon Group Introduction All of the commands in this group use the polygon buffer a temporary data storage area in your printer Using the polygon buffer is an integral part of drawing wedges rectangles and other types of polygons Some of the commands in this chapter define and draw complete shapes while others act only on the contents of the polygon buffer The information in this chapter enables you to achieve the following results in your programs e Draw circles wedges and rectangles e Use polygon mode for drawing polygons subpolygons and circles The following commands are described in this chapter Table 21 1 The Polygon Group Commands Command Summary EA Edge Rectangle Absolute Outlines a rectang
463. oint through an intermediate point to an end point Use RT when you know these three points of an arc RT X iner inter Yincr inter X incr end Yincr ena chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default Xiner inten Yiner inter Current units 230 to 29 4 no default Xiner ena Viner end current units 230 to 29 4 no default chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5 The RT command uses the current pen location and two specified points to calculate a circle and draw the appropriate arc segment of its circumference The arc starts at the current pen location using the current pen line type line attributes and pen up down status You specify the intermediate and end points After drawing the arc the pen location remains at the end of the arc Xincr Inters incr Inter Specify the location of an intermediate point of the arc in relative increments relative to the current pen location The arc is drawn in a negative or positive direction as necessary so that it passes through the intermediate point before the end point Xincr End Incr End Specify the location of the end point of the arc in relative increments relative to the current pen location Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 The Arc Absolute command description earlier in this chapter contains more information on chords and chord angles Intermediat
464. om of the text area to the top of the text of the next page When perforation skip is enabled a Line Feed or Half Line Feed which would move the cursor beyond the bottom of the text area moves the cursor to the top of the text area on the next page When perforation skip is disabled a Line Feed or Half Line Feed moves to the next line or half line within the perforation region Glossary 9 Glossary 10 Pitch Pitch describes the number of characters printed in a horizontal inch Pitch only applies to fixed spaced fonts since the number of characters per inch varies for proportionally spaced fonts PJL PJL Printer Job Language commands provide job level control such as the ability to switch printer languages or personalities such as PCL to PostScript between jobs PJL also provides two way communications with the printer PUL can also be used to change the printer s control panel settings and modify the message displayed on the control panel Point A PCL point is a unit of measurement that equals 1 72nd inch Font height is measured in points Positive angle of rotation An angle used to create a plot in HP GL 2 which is rotated in the direction from the X axis to the Y axis Note that the relationship of the X axis to the Y axis can change as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive angle of rotation See Drawing Arcs in Chapter 20 for more informati
465. oman font 8 8 PCL Font Selection EN Spacing Command Inter character spacing can be specified as either proportional or fixed ae s P Primary spacing Es s P Secondary spacing 0 Fixed spacing 1 Proportional spacing Default 0 Range 0 1 values outside the range are ignored When proportional spacing is specified and a proportionally spaced font is not available in the requested symbol set a fixed pitch font with the current pitch specification is selected If fixed spacing is specified but is not available a proportional spaced font is selected and the pitch characteristic is ignored For fixed spaced bitmap fonts both pitch and height point size are used for selection of font character size However for fixed spaced scalable fonts only pitch is used For proportional bitmap and scalable fonts only height is used for selection of font character size The user default primary and secondary spacings are implicitly set by selection of a user default font from the printer s control panel refer to the printer User s Manual Example To specify proportional spacing for the primary font send Ec s1P To specify fixed spacing for the secondary font send E s0P EN Spacing Command 8 9 Pitch Command The Pitch command designates the horizontal spacing of a fixed spaced bitmap or scalable font in terms of the number of characters per inch This characteristic is ignored when selecting a
466. ompuServe at 1 800 848 8199 operator 51 and take advantage of the Free Introductory Membership which includes e A 15 introductory usage credit to CompuServe e A private User ID number and Password e A complimentary subscription to CompuServe s monthly publication CompuServe Magazine HP Distribution Software drivers and application notes are also available through HP Distribution by calling at 303 353 7650 materials are mailed at no charge HP FIRST Faxback support Hewlett Packard has installed a faxback service called HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology A wealth of information on HP peripherals including the full line of HP LaserJet printers is available to anyone with access to a group 3 fax machine The phone number for the HP FIRST service is 208 344 4809 HP s Personal Peripherals Assist Line If your organization s support personnel or your dealer are unable to answer your question Hewlett Packard has a Personal Peripherals Assist Line available to you It is available from 7 AM to 6 PM Mountain Standard Time Monday Tuesday Thursday and Friday and 7 AM to 4 PM MST Wednesday 208 323 2551 Before you call the Personal Peripherals Assist Line do the following 1 Check the Troubleshooting Checklist section of your printer User s Manual 2 Use the printers control panel to print self test if possible 3 Check with you software vendor for help if you suspect a softwa
467. on Primary Secondary Font A PCL convention whereby two fonts can be defined internally simultaneously The primary font is accessed via the control code SI and the secondary font is accessed via the control code SO The factory default state is primary font designated Printable Area The printable area is the area of the physical page in which the printer is able to place a dot The physical page refers to the size of the media installed in the printer The relationship between physical page logical page and printable area is defined in Figures 2 2 and 2 3 EN EN Portrait See Orientation Print Environment The group of all the printer s current feature settings collectively is referred to as the print environment The printer identifies four levels of changes of this print environment the factory default environment the user default environment the modified print environment and the overlay environment Printer Commands See PCL Commands and HP GL 2 Printing Menu Identifies a few printer features which can be selected from the printers Operator Control Panel Menu key Print menu features select the user default items which are included in the print environment features which can be selected with printer commands Raster Graphics Images composed of groups of dots are raster images Pictures in newspapers or on televisions are examples of raster images PCL includes commands for prin
468. on PM Polygon Mode RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge 17 4 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Table 17 4 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 4 of 5 CHARACTER GROUP AD Alternate Font Definition CF Character Fill Mode CP Character Plot DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction DT Define Label Terminator DV Define Variable Text Path ES Extra Space FI Select Primary Font FN Select Secondary Font LB Label LO Label Origin SA Select Alternate Font SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SD Standard Font Definition SI Absolute Character Size SL Character Slant SR Relative Character Size SS Select Standard font TD Transparent Data 1 These commands are part of HP GL 2 s Dual Context Extensions EN HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 5 Table 17 5 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 5 of 5 LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP AC Anchor Corner FT Fill Type LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width RF Raster Fill Definition SM Symbol Mode SP Select Pen sv Screened Vectors TR Transparency Mode UL User defined Line Type WU Pen Width Unit Selection 1 These commands are part of the Palette Extensions to HP GL 2 As shown in the tables above each HP GL 2 command is a two letter mnemonic code designed to remind you of its function For example
469. on and using a CP command without parameters to emulate a CR LF Table 23 10 Example Using the CP Command ESE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black 23 26 The Character Group EN Table 23 10 Example Using the CP Command PA5000 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to PD1500 2500 5000 2500 set the pen down and draw PU a line to 1500 2500 lift the pen CP5 35 Move the pen 5 spaces to the right and 35 lines up so that the label is placed just above the line DT 1 Define a label terminator and specify that it does not print D1 21 2 1 4 14 5 0 6 3 7 4148 SS Designate a 14 point Univers Bold font and select it LBABOVE THE LINE Print the first line of text The label text is shown on two lines due to the column width restriction When coding a single line label it should all be placed on one line PA2500 2500 WG20 0 360 Move the pen to 2500 2500 and draw a dot marking the new Carriage Return point 360 black filled wedge with a diameter of 20 plu CPO 95LBBELOW THE LINECAR LF WITH A NEAT CP LBMARGIN Print the second line Carriage Return Line Feed print the third line Print the fourth line Notice how the CP command without parameters functions as a CR LF EQ 0A Enter the PCL mode EVE Send a reset to end the job and eject the
470. ong the length of the physical page It is not relative to the current location of the logical page The registration command may cause data loss by moving the logical page outside the printable area This command has the same effect regardless of orientation This command can be used in both simplex and duplex modes 4 8 PCL Job Control Commands EN PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE T0 10 TO 1 0 LO L0 LO LO L0 LO0 10 L0 Portrait Portrait E E Print Print L a 10 Front T 0 Back 41 0 2 0 TO 2 0 Side Side wo wo oo 9 T O Top Offset L O Left Offset Figure 4 4 Short Edge Binding Mode Offsets PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE T0 1 0 10 10 LO L0 10 L0 10 LO Portrait Portrait E E Print Print L L 41 0 Front T Back 0 20 0 20 Side Side da ae oO OO fe 3x ao E L mai T O Top Offset L O Left Offset Figure 4 5 Long Edge Binding Mode Offsets EN Top Offset Registration Command 4 9 Duplex Page Side Selection Command The Duplex Page Side Selection command causes a Form Feed and designates which side of the sheet to print The ability to skip a page while duplexing may be required at certain locations in a document For example a chapter typically begins on the front side of a page Ec amp a G O Select next side 1 Select front side 2 Select back side Default 0 Range 0 2 All
471. ons such as PC 8 the printer must be in Display Function Mode or be given a Transparent Print command Example To enable display functions mode send E c amp s0C Enables end of line wrap to prevent data truncation EcY Enable Display Functions Mode Data sent to the printer EZ Disable Display Functions Mode Most symbol sets do not have printable characters defined in the control code decimal range 0 to 31 and 128 to 159 If a printable character is not defined a Space control code is printed while in display functions mode The PC symbol sets do have printable characters defined in this range Troubleshooting Commands 24 13 Auto Continue Mode Automatic error clearing refer to the printer User s Manual for a list of clearable errors can be achieved by setting Auto Continue Mode to ON using the Operator Control Panel configuration menu When Auto Cont is set to ON the device displays a message for 10 seconds and then attempts to continue printing the job When Auto Cont mode is set to OFF all errors cause the device to stop printing 24 14 Programming Hints EN Common Errors EN 20 ERROR This error occurs when the printer runs out of memory during a font download macro creation raster graphic download or page composition To alleviate this error the quantity of data sent to the printer must be reduced This can be accomplished by eliminating unnecessary font
472. onse Syntax 16 7 Set Status Readback Location Type Command The Set Location Type command sets the status location type to the specified value Location type is used in conjunction with the location unit to identify an entity location for a status request Inquire Status Readback Entity command Eat s T 0 Invalid location 1 Currently selected 2 All Locations 3 Internal 4 Downloaded Entity 5 Cartridge 7 User installable ROM device SIMMs Default Range 0 5 7 If a value outside the range is received the location type is set to 0 When the location type is 0 and an Inquire Entity command is received an error response is generated refer to the Status Response Error Codes section later in this section for additional information A printer reset returns the location type setting to 0 The printer retains the location type setting If the Set Status Readback Location Type command is not sent to change the setting for an entity request then the existing location type setting is used 16 8 Status Readback EN Set Status Readback Location Unit Command The Set Location Unit command sets the status location unit to the specified value Location unit is used in conjunction with the location type to identify an entity location for a status request Inquire Status Readback Entity command Note that the unit value is interpreted differently depending on the location type specified Ec s U Table 16 4 Set
473. ont select table for later font selections but is ignored for this selection 4 Height the closest height available from the remaining fonts is selected The closest height is in terms of absolute difference All bitmap fonts whose heights are within a quarter point of the specified height are considered to have the specified height Summary of Font Selection by Characteristic 8 23 Note For proportionally spaced scalable fonts any specified height is available to the nearest quarter point For fixed spaced scalable fonts the designated height is recorded and the height is calculated from the requested pitch Style if the specified style is available in the remaining fonts that style is selected otherwise this characteristic is ignored Stroke Weight if the specified stroke weight is available in the remaining fonts that stroke weight is selected If the specified stroke weight is greater than or equal to 0 and is not available the next thicker available stroke weight is selected If no thicker stroke weight is available the closest available thinner stroke weight is selected If the specified stroke weight is less than 0 and is not available the next thinner available stroke weight is selected If no thinner stroke weight is available the closest available thicker stroke weight is selected Typeface Family if the requested typeface is available in the remaining fonts that typeface is selected otherwise this c
474. ontinuation block is to be expected Table 11 52 Character Format Continuation and Descriptor FIELD NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION Format 4 LaserJet Printer Family Continuation 0 Not A Continuation Record Descriptor Size 14 Bitmap Class 1 Normal Raster Orientation 0 Portrait Left Offset 2 dots Top Offset 22 dots Character Width 26 dots Character Height 31 dots Delta X 120 Quarter Dots 30 Dots 11 70 Soft Font Creation EN Table 11 53 Portrait Character Data Example Dot Row Bit Map Decimal Equivalent 01 00000000 00001111 11000000 00000000 0 15 192 0 02 11111100 01111111 11111000 00000000 252 127 249 0 03 11111100 11111111 11111100 00000000 252 255 252 0 04 11111101 11110000 00111110 00000000 253 240 62 0 05 00011111 11000000 00001111 00000000 31 192 15 0 06 00011111 10000000 00000111 00000000 31 128 7 0 07 00011111 00000000 00000111 10000000 31 0 7 128 08 00011110 00000000 00000011 10000000 30 0 3 128 09 00011110 00000000 00000011 11000000 30 0 3 192 10 00011100 00000000 00000001 11000000 28 0 1 192 11 00011100 00000000 00000001 11000000 28 0 1 192 12 00011100 00000000 00000001 11000000 28 0 1 192 13 00011100 00000000 00000001 11000000 28 0 1 192 14 00011100 00000000 00000001 11000000 28 0 1 192 15 00011110 00000000 00000001 11000000 30 0 1 192 16 00011110 00000000 00000011 11000000 30 0 3 192 17 00
475. onts Each bit in the field represents a specific collection Setting a bit to 1 indicates that collection is required setting the bit to 0 indicates that collection is not required Bit 63 refers to the most significant bit of the first byte and bit 0 refers to the least significant bit of the eight byte field The bit representations for the collections are shown below The symbols for each collection are shown in Appendix D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Define Symbol Set 10 7 MSL Symbol Index Character Requirements Bit Value Designated Use 63 1 Basic Latin required such as ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 0 Basic Latin not required 62 1 East European Latin required such as ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 0 East European Latin not required 61 1 Turkish required such as ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 0 Turkish not required 34 1 Math required such as Math 8 0 Math not required 33 1 Semi graphic required such as PC 8 D N 0 Semi graphic not required 32 1 Dingbats required such as ITC Zapf Dingbats series 100 series 200 etc 0 Dingbats not required 2 1 0 000 MSL Symbol Index 10 8 User Defined Symbol Sets EN EN Unicode Symbol Index Character Requirements Bits numbers values Bit Value Designated Use 31 1 ASCII required such as ISO 6 ASCII 0 ASCII not required 30 1 West Europe extensions required such as ISO 69 French West Europe ex
476. onts using Agfa s Font Access Interchange Standard FAIS This document can be obtained from Agfa Division Miles Inc by writing to the address below or by phone Agfa Division Miles Inc Typographic Systems OEM Technical Support 90 Industrial Way Wilmington MA 01887 508 658 5600 TrueType Font Files This document which provides information for designing scalable fonts using Microsoft Corporation s TrueType font scaling technology has been made available in downloadable form on both CompuServe and Internet Contact Microsoft Corporation for details Contents NOCE ghia b 2k Sed dea eb bak Sele ea ad das dF On ee ee ii Printing HIStOly seer iS ete w onde eich Sh we Oa we EE od Cee ea ee iii Trademark Credits 0 ee eee eens iv Inside This Manual 6 s aa 26 beats bo aw panne hbase bee ae eo v What You Can Learn From This Manual 0 00 0c eee uae v Related Documentation 0 0 00 eee ee ees x PCL 5 Comparison Guide 0 0 cc ttt EH X Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format saausaa anaana anaana x TrueType Font Files eerie riip pritini eE EEEE EEEE EEE EES X Introduction to HP PCL PCL Printer Language Architecture 0 0 0 0 cece nee 1 2 What are Printer Commands nnana aaaea 1 3 Control CdS eei enni irai eri e a E E eee Ea kde ed Be 1 3 PCL GommandS 3 2 vcit 54 4ch004 Yee ded ii do eee eae RA Sa 1 3 HP GL 2 Commands 0 00 0 e eee eee eee 1 4 PJL Comm
477. or corner see the AC command description Table 22 22 Related Commands Group AC Anchor Corner The Line and Fill Attributes Group FT Fill Type PW Pen Width RF Raster Fill Definition WU Pen Width Unit Selection Table 22 23 POSSIBLE ERROR CONDITIONS Condition Printer Response 1 or more parameters ignores parameter SV Screened Vectors 22 41 TR Transparency Mode This command defines how the white areas of the source graphics image affect the destination graphics image TR nf or TR Parameter Format Functional Range Default n clamped integer 0 or 1 1 on e No Parameters Defaults to transparency mode on TR1 e n Specifies whether transparency mode is on or off e 0 Transparency mode off e 1 Transparency mode on default When transparency mode is on default the portion of a source image which is defined by white pixels does not affect the destination whatever was already written to the page shows through the white areas in the new image Source Original Destination Destination Figure 22 22Transparency Mode ON 22 42 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN When transparency mode is off all source pixels are written to the destination obscuring any underlying images Source Original Final Destination Destination Figure 22 23 Transparency Mode OFF The transparency mode is defaulted by the
478. or their positions are specified with the IR Input Relative P1 and P2 command The default window is used or the window is specified in user units using the IW command e For labels only the SR Relative Character Size mode is used the SI Absolute Character Size mode is not used e The Pen Width selection mode WU is specified as relative instead of metric e The pattern length for the Line Type LT is specified as relative instead of metric e Scalable fonts are used exclusively e The default window is used or the window is specified in user units e The DR command relative direction is used for label direction not DI absolute direction Automatically Adjusting Image Size to Fit the PCL Picture Frame 18 3 Note If a drawing does not meet the above criteria and the drawing is not the same size as the picture frame the HP GL 2 plot size must be specified to accomplish the desired scaling If it is not specified the image is clipped to the effective window and no scaling occurs The above bulleted items are required for automatic scaling when the picture frame size changes without specifying the HP GL 2 plot size However if an HP GL 2 plot size is specified any unscaled HP GL 2 image any image created without the SC command is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the PCL Picture Frame the amount of enlargement or reduction is determined by the picture frame scaling factor the ratio of the HP GL 2
479. orientation of the PCL coordinate system and the HP GL 2 coordinate system X Y PCL Text Direction Logical Page HP GL 2 Default Label Direction Anchor Point Picture Frame Portrait Orientation PCL Text Direction HP GL 2 Default Label Direction 0 0 x Y Anchor Point Landscape Orientation Figure 17 6 Orientation Interactions Between PCL and HP GL 2 The relationship between the coordinate systems can be changed using the HP GL 2 Rotate RO command Rotations specified by the RO command are relative to the default HP GL 2 orientation which matches the PCL orientation Figure 17 7 shows how the RO command modifies the default HP GL 2 orientation Note A change in PCL print direction has no effect on the HP GL 2 orientation the physical position of the picture frame or the picture frame anchor point EN HP GL 2 amp PCL Orientation Interactions 17 17 Logical Page Picture Frame ROO RO 90 Logical Page Picture Frame RO 180 RO 270 Figure 17 7 Modifying HP GL 2 Orientation on a Portrait Page 17 18 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN The Vector Graphics Limits The area on the page where a vector graphics image can be printed is determined by the intersection of the following four boundaries Hard clip Limits Soft clip Window PCL Logical Page e PCL Picture Frame The hard clip limit refers to the boundaries resulting from the
480. ory default settings A Cold Reset is performed by power cycling the printer while holding ON LINE until a 08 COLD RESET is displayed Resetting the Print Environment 3 9 3 10 The Print Environment EN PCL Job Control Commands Introduction A job typically consists of three parts e Commands providing job control e Commands providing page control e Print data Table 4 1 Structure of a Typical Job Ec 12345X EcE Preamble Page 1 Page 2 Page n EcE Ec 12345X UEL Command exit language Printer Reset Command Job Control Commands Page Control Commands Data Page Control Commands 1 Data Page Control Commands Data Printer Reset Command UEL Command exit language 1 If a number of consecutive pages within a job have the same format such as margins VMI HMI etc the associated page control commands only need to be sent once for that group of pages EN Introduction 4 1 This chapter describes the commands providing job control Job control commands are usually grouped together and sent at the beginning of a job Page control commands and data are associated with each printed page of a job Job control commands include the following Printer Reset Universal End of Language Start of PJL Number of Copies Simplex Duplex Print Left and Top Offset Registration Duplex Page Side Selection Job Separation Output Bin Selection Unit of Measure Print
481. otation is not allowed in the RO command 19 34 The Configuration and Status Group EN Note EN 90 a 180 0 X Pa 270 Figure 19 14 Angle of rotations The relationship of the X axis to Y axis can change as a result of the scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive angle of rotation The physical location of the pen does not change when you rotate the coordinate system The printer updates the pen s X Y coordinate location to reflect the new orientation The scaling points P1 and P2 rotate with the coordinate system However they maintain the same X Y coordinate values as before the rotation This means that P1 and P2 can be located outside of the PCL Picture Frame Follow the RO90 or RO270 commands with IP or IR to relocate points P1 and P2 to the lower left and upper right corners of the picture frame When the RO command is used the soft clip window if defined is also rotated and any portion that is rotated outside of the picture frame is clipped to the picture frame boundaries The soft clip window can be set equal to the picture frame by issuing an IW command see Figure 19 17 RO Rotate Coordinate System 19 35 Note The RO command also rotates the contents of the polygon buffer The RO command remains in effect until the rotation is changed by another RO command or the printer is initialized Figure 19 15 shows the default orient
482. otection feature EN HP GL 2 Vector Graphics 24 9 Performance PCL Commands Since PCL printers are command driven devices and each command takes a finite amount of time to process pages composed of a large number of commands may not print at maximum speed Most commands can be used frequently on a page without adversely affecting the printer s performance however certain commands take more time to process and therefore if used frequently on a page may decrease printer performance An excessive number of font selections per page selection using font characteristic commands or selection by ID number may decrease printer performance Print Data There is a limit on the amount of data as well as the number of commands that the printer can process per page at maximum speed Print Overrun As data is received by the printer it is processed and stored in an intermediate format The intermediate data is later processed and printed During the physical printing of a page the page moves through the printer at a constant speed Thus some pages cannot be printed because the page s intermediate data cannot be processed fast enough to keep up with the physical speed of the page as it moves through the printer When this condition occurs an error number 21 ERROR 21 print overrun is displayed on the printer s control panel A page causing this error can be printed by setting the printer s page protection feature to ON s
483. other values ignored If this command is received by a printer which does not have duplex or if duplexing is not enabled these commands just eject the current page sheet positioning the cursor at the default position on the next page Example To print on the front side of a page regardless of the current side send the following Ec amp a1G In this example if the printer is currently formatting a front side it will stop formatting eject that page sheet skipping the back side and begin printing on the next front page 4 10 PCL Job Control Commands EN Job Separation Command Note EN Job separation provides a means of identifying one print job from others in the printer s output tray It usually does this by physically offsetting one print job from the next The Job Separation command toggles the printer s separation mechanism This command must be sent between each job to enable the separation mechanism Eo amp 21T HP recommends that the Job Separation command be included at the end of each job just before the Printer Reset command HP also recommends that this command be included in the programs even though printers with job separation are not currently being used This ensures that if a printer with job separation is eventually added job separation will be performed If this command is received by a printer which does not have job separation the command is ignored It is possible to perform job of
484. ottom direction SR Relative Character Size 23 81 The character size you specify with SR is a percentage of P2X P1X and P2Y P1Y The printer calculates the actual character width and height from the specified parameters as follows actual width width parameter 100 x P2x P1y actual height height parameter 100 x P2y Pty For example suppose P1 and P2 are located at 6956 4388 and 6956 4388 respectively If you establish relative sizing and specify a width of 2 and a height of 3 5 the printer determines the actual character size as follows width 2 100 x 6956 6956 278 24 plu or 0 695 cm height 3 5 100 x 4388 4388 307 16 plu or 0 768 cm If you changed P1 and P2 settings to 100 100 and 5000 5000 but did not change the SR parameters the character size would change as follows width 2 100 x 5000 100 98 plu or 0 245 cm height 3 5 100 x 5000 100 171 5 plu or 0 429 cm Note that in most languages the width of a letter is typically less than the height If you set your characters to have a different aspect ratio they may look odd to your readers Note Either negative SR parameters or switching the relative position of P1 and P2 produces mirror images of labels When P1 is in the lower left and P2 is in the upper right the SR command gives the same mirroring results as the SI command However if you move P1 to the righ
485. ou to set up a PCL Picture Frame and enter exit HP GL 2 mode are discussed in detail in the rest of this chapter By reading the following command descriptions you can see how changing command parameters can affect your printed output Horizontal Picture Frame Size Note This PCL command specifies the horizontal dimension of the window to be used for printing an HP GL 2 plot EA c X Horizontal size in decipoints 1 720th inch Default Range width of the current logical page 0 32767 valid to 4 decimal places The horizontal dimension specified is parallel to the PCL X axis when the print direction is set to 0 degrees the default Using this command defaults the location of P1 to the lower left corner of the picture frame and P2 to the upper right corner of the picture frame It also resets the soft clip window to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries clears the polygon buffer and updates the HP GL 2 pen position to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 as viewed from the current orientation If no horizontal picture frame size command is used the printer defaults the picture frame size to the logical page width A parameter value of 0 or the PCL reset UEL page length paper size or orientation commands default the horizontal picture frame size If an HP GL 2 plot size is specified the horizontal picture frame size is used to determine the horizontal scaling factor used for scaling the image to fit in the pic
486. ower left corner of the picture frame P1 Defaults P1 and P2 IP Defaults soft clip window IW Clears the polygon buffer PMO0 PM2 Updates the current position to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 Redefinition of the Picture Frame Anchor Point Defaults P1 and P2 IP Defaults soft clip window IW Clears the polygon buffer PMO0 PM2 Updates the current position to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 Specifications of a New HP GL 2 Plot Size 5 6 Page Control Commands Changes the picture frame scaling factor EN Top Margin Physical Page Physical Page 0 0 Logical Page 0 0 Portrait Landscape Physical Page Physical Page 0 0 Top Margin Logical Page 0 0 Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape Figure 5 1 Page Orientation With Default Print Direction The orientation of the HP GL 2 picture is also affected by the logical page orientation Figure 5 2 illustrates the effect of logical page orientation on the HP GL 2 picture orientation It is possible to alter the HP GL 2 picture orientation within the logical page using the HP GL 2 RO command refer to Chapter 21 for additional information Most HP GL 2 state variables retain their previous HP GL 2 value upon receipt of this command they are not affected by PCL mode However certain changes to the PCL state can affect the HP GL 2 stat
487. page CP Character Plot 23 27 ABOVE THE LINE BELOW THE LINE WITH A NEAT MARGIN Figure 23 14 Table 23 11 Related Commands Group DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction DV Define Variable Text Path ES Extra Space LB Label LO Label Origin SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SI Absolute Character Size SR Relative Character Size The Character Group 23 28 The Character Group EN DI Absolute Direction This command specifies the slope or direction at which characters are drawn independent of P1 and P2 settings Use DI to change labeling direction when you are labeling curves in line charts schematic drawings blueprints and survey boundaries DI run rise or DI Table 23 12 Parameter Format Functional Range Default run or cos 6 clamped real 32768 to 32767 1 rise or sin 6 clamped real 32768 to 32767 0 The DI command updates the Carriage Return point to the current location While DI is in effect with or without parameters the label direction is not affected by changes in the locations of P1 and P2 However the Define Variable Text Path DV command interacts with the DI command and DR as explained later in this section e No Parameters Defaults the label direction to absolute and horizontal parallel to X axis Equivalent to DI1 0 e Run or Cos Specifies the X component of the label direction e Rise or Sin
488. page If a request is made for a location outside the printer s logical page the current active position CAP is moved to the appropriate logical page limit Vertical Cursor Positioning Decipoints Command 6 11 Vertical Cursor Positioning PCL Units Command Note Note This Vertical Cursor Positioning command moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis Ec p Y Number of PCL Units Default NA Range 32767 to 32767 A value field with a plus sign indicates the new position is downward from and relative to the current cursor position a minus sign indicates the new position is upward from and relative to the current cursor position No sign indicates an absolute distance from the top margin The top position defined by the top margin is 0 and the bottom position is determined by the bottom of the logical page Since the top margin can be changed using a printer command the physical location of the point 0 0 may change This affects the cursor position on the page If a request is made for a location outside the printer s logical page the current active position CAP is moved to the appropriate logical page limit The current unit size used in PCL Unit moves is determined by the value specified in the Unit of Measure command If no other value is specified the number of units per inch for PCL unit moves is one unit equals 1 300 inch 6 12 Cursor Positioning EN Half Line F
489. pe sequences are decimal EN User Defined Pattern Command 13 21 Set Pattern Reference Point Command Notes The Set Pattern Reference Point command causes the printer to tile patterns with respect to the current cursor position This command also specifies whether the pattern rotates with the print direction or remains fixed 0 Rotate patterns with print direction 1 Keep patterns fixed Default Range 0 0 1 values outside the range are ignored A value field of 0 rotates the patterns with changes in the print direction see Print Direction command For a value field of 1 patterns remain fixed for changes in print direction The default pattern reference point is the upper left corner of the logical page at the top margin position 0 0 If the Set Pattern Reference Point command is not set the pattern is tiled with respect to the default reference point All patterns are rotated for changes in orientation refer to Logical Page Orientation Command in Chapter 5 of this manual This command applies to user defined shading and cross hatch patterns 13 22 The PCL Print Model EN Pattern Control Command The Pattern Control command provides a means for manipulating user defined patterns eater ae 0 Delete all patterns temporary amp permanent 1 Delete all temporary patterns 2 Delete pattern last ID specified 3 Reserved 4 Make pattern temporary last ID specified 5 Make pa
490. pecify absolute plotting and move to user unit location 0 0 EW 1000 90 180 Draw a wedge section with a radius of 1000 user units a start angle of 90 and a sweep angle of 180 The minus sign before the radius 1000 sets the zero degree reference point to the left side of the drawing EW Edge Wedge 21 29 Table 21 14 Example Using EW to Draw a Pie Chart EW 1000 330 120 Using the same center point and zero degree reference point draw a wedge section outline starting at 330 and sweeping 120 PR 60 110 Move the cursor 60 user units to the left and 110 user units up EW 1000 270 60 From the new center point location draw a wedge using a negative zero reference point starting at 270 and sweeping for 60 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Figure 21 19 Table 21 15 Related Commands Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Group EP Edge Polygon The Polygon Group LA Line Attributes FP Fill Polygon WG Fill Wedge SC Scale The Configuration Status Group CI Circle The Vector Group The Line and Fill Attributes Group 21 30 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 15 continued LT Line Type PW Pen Width Table 21 16 Possible Error Conditions Condition Printer Response polygon buffer overflow edges contents of buffer FP Fill Polygon Note EN This command fills the polygo
491. peration of the spacing feature available from Hewlett Packard s FontLoad Utility HP product number 33407B Since line spacing is independent of font height line spacing may require adjustment following font selection to ensure proper vertical alignment of text PCL Cursor Positioning 24 5 To ensure compatibility with future products select fonts by specifying all of the font characteristics If all of the characteristics are not designated the primary and secondary font tables in the printer may not contain the correct information to select the requested font from those available in the printer The shortcut method of font selection is not recommended as documented in some previous font product literature and may not result in the desired font change This is due to the increased number of available fonts in the printer The transparent print data command is required to access printable characters with character codes in the decimal range of 0 7 15 and 27 in the PC symbol sets All information about the design of a font as well as the design of its characters can be found in the font and character descriptors A Space control code is executed when an attempt is made to print a non existent character Using an ID number which has not been associated with a font results in no font change Font designers should not define the space character Use the printers Space control code should be used for character spacing Defin
492. physical limits of the printer in PCL mode this is referred to as the printable area The soft clip limit refers to the area defined using the HP GL 2 Input Window IW command The intersection of all these areas is the effective window An HP GL 2 graphic appears on the page only if it falls within the effective window Edge of Printing PCL Medium Logical age Hard Clip Limits PCL Picture Effective Frame Window Soft clip Limits IW Command Figure 17 8 The Effective Window Note For more information on the PCL coordinate system and the PCL 5 printer s printable limits see Chapter 2 EN The Vector Graphics Limits 17 19 HP GL 2 Units of Measure In HP GL 2 mode you can measure along the X Y axes and express coordinates using two types of units plotter units and user units Plotter Units One plotter unit equals 0 025 mm When specifying distances in plotter units the printer converts the number of plotter units to equivalent dot coordinates before printing Under default conditions the printer uses plotter units The following table lists equivalent measurements for plotter units Table 17 7 PlotterUnits EquivalentValue 1 plu 0 025 mm 0 00098 in 40 plu 1mm 1016 plu 1 in 3 39 plu 1 dot 300 dpi User units The size of units along the X and Y axes may be redefined using the Scale SC command User units allow you to customize the coordinate system to repre
493. ple cetera deehe eevee pa SRA REE ee oe SE Ree es 18 14 Default Settings 0 0 cette ees 18 15 EN Contents 9 The Configuration and Status Group Establishing Default Conditions 0 000 0c 19 3 The Scaling Points P1 and P2 0 00 c ce ee 19 4 Using the Scale Command 0 0 0c cee 19 4 Using Scaling Effectively 0 0 0 00 06 c cee 19 8 Enlarging or Reducing a Picture 0 eee eee 19 8 Drawing Equal Size Pictures on a Page 00ee cece eee 19 10 Creating Mirror ImageS 000 c cece eee 19 12 Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System 19 15 Windowing Setting Up Soft Clip Limits 0 0000005 19 18 CO Comment 2 0 0 0 ee eee ee eee eens 19 19 DE Detauilt VallGS lt lt 2 oder aaan bee aiens de ea da ded False tate Pad aw we 19 19 WIN ANI ZG aaaea Dace aba tee aiatts was g Bad ad Afavniwal ae EE Bale 19 21 IP Input PI and P2 gt see eee ca eee eee ke Pe OE Ra Lee Oke Ae eee 19 23 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 0 0 eee 19 26 IW Input Window 0 eee eens 19 29 PG Advance Full Page 0 0 0 cee 19 33 RO Rotate Coordinate System 0 0 0 eee 19 34 Angle of Rotation 0 00 c eee 19 34 RP REDO i acca ca avid tare pba asses iol ace E Pn ace a hak a Ona 19 39 SG Scale escheat aca a ce aca we ainda E waa kk en a ane ae 19 40 For Scaling Types 0 and 1 ccc nas 19 41 For Scaling Typ
494. plications are required to access the parallel serial I O communication data for not only sending to the printer but also receiving data status back from the printer FTo obtain status information you must initiate a request by sending either a request for memory status or a request for an entity status as described on the following pages Memory Status Request It is possible to identify the amount of available user memory using the memory status request Being able to identify the available memory enables a user to determine whether sufficient memory is available for the entity being downloaded potentially avoiding a printer memory overflow condition control panel error 20 memory overflow An example memory request with its associated response is shown below Table 16 1 Memory Status Request Example Description 1 O Data Memory request Free Space Eo s1M command sent to printer from host 16 2 Status Readback EN Table 16 1 Memory Status Request Example continued Status response sent from PCL printer to host INFO MEMORY TOTAL 100000 LARGEST 25000 Entity Status It is possible to request status for the printer s entities An entity is a font symbol set macro or user defined pattern stored in the printer Each individual entity request is limited to one specific entity and is further limited to a specific location To request entity status you must send the entity status readb
495. plot size to the PCL Picture Frame size See Chapter 19 to specify an HP GL 2 plot size 18 4 The Picture Frame EN Typical HP GL 2 PlotCommand Sequence Note EN Before we discuss the actual commands and how they operate we will demonstrate the general sequence in which these commands are used to print HP GL 2 files The following command sequence is usually followed when creating HP GL 2 images Send the job control and page control commands and any other PCL commands that you wish to send before drawing the HP GL 2 image See Chapters 3 4 and 5 for job control and page control information Specify the PCL Picture Frame dimensions using the EQtc X Picture Frame Horizontal Size and Ec c Y Picture Frame Vertical Size commands These commands determine the boundary of the window in which you place or draw your image The PCL Picture Frame represents the maximum boundary for your HP GL 2 drawing Specify the picture frame anchor point using the Ec c0OT Set Picture Frame Anchor Point command This command determines the position on the logical page where the upper left corner of the PCL Picture Frame is placed Receipt of this command establishes the PCL picture frame anchor point at the PCL current cursor position If importing an existing plot defined in absolute units specify the HP GL 2 plot size using the EcEc c K Horizontal HP GL 2 Plot Size and Eo c L Vertical HP GL 2 Plot Size This plot size represents t
496. plotter units when scaling is off The following illustration shows the current pen location in the lower left corner and the command s X Y coordinates in the upper right corner Depending on the X Y coordinates used these points can be in any two diagonally opposite corners X Y coordinate location Current pen location starting point Figure 21 22Fill Rectangle Absolute RA Fill Rectangle Absolute 21 39 The only difference between the RA command and the EA Edge Rectangle Absolute command is that the RA command produces a filled rectangle and EA an outlined one The RA command clears the polygon buffer and then uses it to define the rectangle before drawing Refer to Using the Polygon Buffer earlier in this chapter The following example uses RA with three different fill types to create rectangles such as those you might use in a bar chart The rectangles in the right bar are edged using the EA command For more information about fill types refer to the FT command description in Chapter 22 Table 21 22 Example Using the RA Command with Different Fill Types 7E Reset the printer 2 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA400 400 Enter absolute plotting mode and move to RA800 1200 400 400 Draw a rectangle with 400 400 as the lower left corner and 8
497. points command 14 3 PCL Units command 14 3 horizontal spacing 8 10 horizontal tab 6 9 HP customer support Customer Support 1 HP Distribution Customer Support 2 HP FIRST fax line Customer Support 2 HP Forum CompuServe Customer Support 1 HP Personal Peripherals Assist Line Customer Support 2 HP GL 2 Introduction 17 1 defined Glossary 6 adapting to match PCL 19 15 character cell 23 12 Character Group 17 5 23 1 character positioning 23 62 character size and slant 23 8 command sequence 18 5 commands see also commands HP GL 2 1 4 Configuration and Status Group 19 1 Configuration Group 17 3 coordinate system 2 6 17 15 19 15 cursor positioning 6 1 default conditions table 19 19 default conditions establishing 19 3 default settings 18 15 default values 17 9 defining the image area 18 2 designating a font example 23 73 drawing arcs 20 5 drawing Bezier curves 20 8 drawing circles 20 4 drawing lines 20 2 drawing polygons 21 10 drawing rectangles 21 3 drawing wedges 21 6 effective window 17 19 enlarging reducing images 19 8 Enter Mode command 18 13 environment 3 7 5 5 factory default settings 3 5 font selection 8 27 font spacing 23 15 font special effects 7 11 graphics limits 17 19 19 12 Index 27 Index 28 image creation hints 24 9 importing existing images 17 25 labels 23 1 Line and Fill Attributes Group 17 6 22 1 line segments four types 19 18 line types patterns 22 22 listing of commands 17 3 macro ov
498. quence draws two filled rectangles one edged and one not Table 21 4 Example Filled Rectangles 2 E Reset the printer 2 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PAO O Specify absolute plotting and move to location 0 0 FT3 Specify fill type 3 hatching parallel lines RR1500 1000 Fill a rectangular shape with the currently active fill pattern The lower left corner of the rectangle should be the current location 0 0 and the upper right corner should be 1500 plu in the X direction and 1000 plu in the Y direction from the starting location 21 4 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 4 Example Filled Rectangles continued EP Draw an edge around the rectangle that was just drawn Since the previous RR command leaves its definition in the polygon buffer 1500 1000 you do not need to specify the coordinates again PR2000 0 Specify relative plotting and move the cursor 2000 plu in the X direction from the current pen location FT4 100 45 Specify fill tyoe number 4 cross hatching set the spacing to 100 plu between fill lines and set the fill line angle to 45 RR1500 1000 Fill a rectangle with the currently specified fill type Use the current pen location 0 0 as the lower left corner of the rectangle and a point 1500 1000 relative plu awa
499. r Turns control over to PUL Hewlett Packard strongly recommends the use of both Ec E printer reset and Ec 12345X UEL command at the beginning and end of each job The order of these commands is critical Refer to Structure of a Typical JobTable 4 1 for an example The UEL Command amp c 12345X has the same effect as the Ec E command and also enters PUL Mode of operation for printers that support PUL The Ec E command should be included to ensure backward compatibility the UEL command is ignored if received by a printer that does not support PJL Universal Exit Language Command 4 3 Number of Copies Command Note The Number of Copies command designates the number of printed copies of each page Ec amp L X Number of copies 1 to 32767 maximum Default 1 Configurable from control panel Range 1 32767 Values 32767 execute as 32767 values 1 are ignored Maximum number of copies 99 for LaserJet II IIP Ill IIID HP and earlier LaserJet printers This command can be received anywhere within a page and affects the current page as well as subsequent pages Example To print 3 copies of a page send Ec amp L3X ele First P age Second Page Figure 4 1 Number of Copies The HP GL 2 Replot RP command is inactive for PCL 5 printers use the Number of Copies command for multiple HP GL 2 plots To be effective the Number of Copies command must be issued from PCL prior to closing
500. r Group EN DR Relative Direction This command specifies the direction in which labels are drawn relative to the scaling points P1 and P2 Label direction is adjusted when P1 and P2 change so that labels maintain the same relationship to the scaled data Use DR to change labeling direction when you are labeling curves DR run rise or DR Table 23 18 Parameter Format Functional Range Default run clamped 32768 to 32767 1 of P2y P1x real rise clamped 32768 to 32767 0 real The DR command updates the Carriage Return point to the current location While DR is in effect with or without parameters the label direction is affected by changes in the location of P1 and P2 DR is also affected by the Define Variable Text Path DV command Refer to the DI command earlier in this chapter for an explanation of this interaction e No Parameters Defaults the label direction to relative and horizontal parallel to the X axis Equivalent to DR1 0 e Run Specifies a percentage of the distance between P1y and P2y e Rise Specifies a percentage of the distance between P1y and P2y EN DR Relative Direction 23 37 You define the parameters of run and rise as shown in the following illustration oA te Figure 23 21 Rise and Run Parameters With the DR command the use of run and rise is somewhat different than with DI Run is expressed as a percentage of the horizontal distance betw
501. r data bytes 15 18 Raster Graphics EN TIFF encoding also allows you to include a non operative NOP control byte represented by the value 128 This byte is ignored and the subsequent byte is treated as the new control byte Note It is more efficient to code two consecutive identical bytes as a repeated byte If these bytes are preceded and followed by literal bytes however it is more efficient to code the entire group as literal bytes Examples Run length and TIFF Compression The following examples show how a raster row can be coded using run length and TIFF compression methods Note that the compression examples use characters to represent the binary data stream Table 15 6 Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Number Bits 01010101 01010101 01010101 01010101 01000001 01010100 01010100 ASCII U U U U A T T Unencoded Ec r1A E bOm7WUUUUATT Eo rC Run length Encoding Ec r1A E b1m6W 3 U 0 A 1 T EtG EN Set Compression Method Command 15 19 TIFF Encoding aaa A E b2m6W 3 U 0 A 1 T or E b2m6W 3 U 2 ATT Ec In the TIFF encoding example above parenthetical expressions are used to identify control bytes For example the byte 3 is shown to represent the control byte for a repetition minus value of 3 The actual value for this position is the decimal value 253 Additional encoded control bytes in this sequence include 0 for decimal 0 1 for decimal
502. r in this section Another more comprehensive method to clear memory is to send the Printer Reset FUE command This not only removes data deletes all temporary entities and the font cache but also restores the User Default Environment settings refer to the Printer Reset command in Chapter 4 Job Control Commands To print characters from a scalable font the printer converts the scalable character outlines into sized bitmaps These bitmapped characters are created on a character by character basis as they are needed for printing and are stored in memory As more pages are printed using more fonts the bitmaps consume more memory The bitmap characters used on the first page of a job can remain in memory until the end of a job These stored bitmap characters are referred to as the font cache When an HP LaserJet 4 printer or later reaches a memory low condition it automatically deletes all of the font cache It is possible to delete the cache immediately using a Printer Reset command A Printer Reset clears the font cache clears temporary entities and restores the user default environment Memory Status Response A Free Space status response returns two values TOTAL AARGEST TOTAL identifies the total available user memory in bytes This value includes the largest block available and all smaller blocks Data downloaded to the printer is stored in a block continuous section of free memory If the pri
503. r language mode The following commands cause a conditional page eject a page is ejected if there is any printable data in the print buffer e EE Reset e UEL Universal Exit Language e Flush All Pages e Page Length e Page Size e Orientation e Paper Source The PCL Form Feed control code causes an unconditional page eject and advances the cursor position to the top of form on the next page A page eject caused by any of the above commands except Paper Source defaults the HP GL 2 pen position To print more than one plot use the Number of Copies command For information about printing more than one copy of an HP GL 2 illustration see Number of Copies Command in Chapter 4 RP Replot 19 39 SC Scale This command establishes a user unit coordinate system by mapping user defined coordinate values onto the scaling points P1 and P2 SC XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX typef left bottom or SC XMIN XFACTOR YMIN YFACTOR type or SC Parameter Format Functional Range Default XMIN X MAX real 230 to 230 1 no default YIN Y MAX real 230 to 230 1 no default type clamped 0 1 0r2 0 integer left clamped 0 to 100 50 real bottom clamped 0 to 100 50 real XFACTOR YFACTOR real 230 to 230 1 no default For more information about the basic concept of scaling refer to The Scale Command earlier in this chapter 19 40 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN There are t
504. r to the host computer when the printers 1 Kbyte I O buffer has less than 128 data bytes remaining 896 bytes empty The printer must be in the on line state and not busy If no data is received additional Xon s are transmitted at one second intervals If ROBUST XON is OFF the printer sends one Xon signal when the printer is in the on line state and is not busy The printer does not send additional Xon signals Row The distance between rows is defined by the current vertical motion index VMI Rule A solid filled rectangular area Scalable PCL 5 printers can use either bitmap or scalable fonts A bitmap font is available in its one defined size only Scalable fonts on the other hand provide an outline for each character which can be scaled by the PCL 5 printers to produce a large range of character sizes EN EN Serial I O An input output I O interface that transmits information bit by bit in serial mode RS 232 is an industry wide standard form of a serial interface Soft Font Soft fonts are fonts stored on disks These fonts can be transferred to the printers memory and used the same way as cartridge or resident fonts Spacing Fonts have either fixed or proportional spacing Fixed spaced fonts are those for which the inter character spacing is constant In proportionally spaced fonts inter character spacing varies with the natural shape of a character Stroke Weight Stroke weight d
505. r within the logical page Chapter 7 Fonts This chapter describes basic font information including font characteristics Chapter 8 PCL Font Selection This chapter describes how to select a font for printing using the font characteristics commands The underline feature is described at the end of the chapter Chapter 9 Font Management This chapter describes font management which provides mechanisms for downloading and manipulating soft fonts Chapter 10 User Defined Symbol Sets This chapter describes the capability of some PCL 5 printers to enable users to define their own symbol sets for special needs Chapter 11 Soft Font Creation This chapter describes how to organize font character data for downloading to the printer Chapter 12 Macros This chapter describes macro commands which store a block of PCL commands and data which can be used repeatedly without redefining the block The macro function reduces the number of commands that must be sent to the printer vii viii Chapter 13 The PCL Print Model This chapter describes the PCL print model which allows for special effects when printing Chapter 14 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics This chapter describes how to define and fill a rectangular area with one of the predefined PCL patterns or with a user defined pattern Chapter 15 Raster Graphics This chapter describes how to download raster graphics to the printer and includes various
506. rJet series II printers The HP LaserJet IID IIP 2000 and PCL 5 LaserJet printers rotate the fonts to match the paper s physical coordinate system for the various paper sizes Spacing B Specifies the spacing of the font A value of zero 0 specifies fixed spacing and one 1 specifies proportional spacing Symbol Set Ul Specifies the symbol set for the font This value is computed by taking the value of the value field for the symbol set multiplying it by 32 adding the decimal ASCII value of the termination character the symbol set ID character value of the escape sequence and subtracting 64 Font Descriptor Symbol Set Value Escape Sequence 4 Decimal Value of Escape eee Value Field Value X 32 Termination Character 64 For example to compute the value for the ASCII ISO 6 symbol set Value 0 ID U OU 0x32 85 64 21 The legal range of symbol set escape sequence field values is 0 to 2047 Refer to Appendix C in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for the HP defined symbol set values for use in the font header HP reserves the right to define the symbol set escape sequence value field values of 0 to 1023 Symbol set escape sequence value field values 1024 to 2047 are available for use by independent font vendors 11 20 Soft Font Creation EN Notes Note EN Symbol set escape sequence termination characters can be any upper case ASCII character A through Z Q is reserved for
507. racter and greatest descender The legal range is 1 to 65535 11 18 Soft Font Creation EN EN Bitmap Font Specified in PCL coordinate system dots Scalable Font Specified in design units Cell Width od Cell Height E Hot L gegecece sees Baseline Position X Height 200 CHeCe tense APSO EALES PBA ROAD OD ag igap to 8 gt i a RA ii Underline peeceosboesgoed LEE Position bossesencegons l Di etesatottovstistporottoteste Underline Thickness OOROTODOEELEOEDOHEHOOODOOHOHS Baseline Dot Row orientation independent orientation dependent Figure 11 3 Character Cell Bitmap Orientation UB Specifies the orientation of the font All characters within the font must have the same orientation as those specified in the font header otherwise they are discarded as they are downloaded 0 portrait 0 degrees the orientation of the raster scan of the printer 1 landscape 90 degrees counterclockwise 2 reverse portrait 180 degrees counterclockwise 3 reverse landscape 270 degrees counterclockwise Font Header Format 11 19 Note Bitmap Font Unsupported values invalidate font creation Scalable Font set to zero Hewlett Packard recommends that bitmap soft fonts be designed in portrait 0 amp deg using the paper motion and raster scan direction of the HP LaserJet Plus and Lase
508. racter descriptor 11 51 signed integer SI 10 5 11 14 signed long integer SLI 10 5 11 14 SIMM fonts 7 2 macro storing 12 1 simplex printing 4 5 simplex duplex print command 4 5 size HP GL 2 drawing 19 9 SL command 23 8 23 78 example 23 79 slant character 23 8 23 78 SM command 22 35 SO Shift Out 8 5 soft font Glossary 13 soft fonts 7 2 creation 11 1 status readback 16 13 soft symbol sets 10 12 soft clip window 17 19 18 8 18 10 18 15 19 18 19 29 19 35 19 37 20 20 20 22 solid fill 22 9 source image 13 1 13 2 source transparency mode 13 2 Source Transparency Mode command 13 6 SP command 22 5 22 38 SP Space 6 7 Space SP control code 6 7 Space character 5 20 spacing 7 4 Glossary 13 character 8 9 24 4 24 5 font header 11 20 font selection command 8 9 8 23 HP GL 2 23 70 special effects fonts 7 11 specifications page boundaries 2 7 2 8 SR command 23 8 23 14 23 81 example 23 83 SS command 23 85 Standard Font Definition command 23 68 standard vs alternate fonts HP GL 2 23 17 start angle 21 6 Start Raster Graphics command 15 14 status readback 16 1 bitmap fonts 16 12 clearing status 16 5 currently selected 16 3 DEFID 16 15 Echo command 16 25 entity 16 3 entity request example 16 4 entity response 16 11 error entity 16 11 error location type 16 8 error codes entity 16 19 Error INVALID ENTITY 16 19 Error INVALID LOCATION 16 19 Index 35 Index 36 Error INVALID UNIT 16 23 Error
509. racters as well as ASCII characters 128 160 and 255 are ignored e No parameters Updates the Carriage Return point The PE command without parameters does not affect the pen s current location or up down status e Flag Indicates how the printer interprets subsequent values Flags are ASCII characters and are not encoded The printer disregards the eighth bit of a flag fro example a character code of 61 and a character code of 189 both send a the absolute flag Table 20 22 Flag Meaning Description Select Pen Indicates that the subsequent value is the desired pen number A PE command without pen select defaults to the currently selected pen lt Pen Up Raises the pen and moves to the subsequent coordinate pair value All coordinate pair values not preceded by a pen up flag are considered pen down moves gt Fractional Indicates that the subsequent value Data specifies the number of fractional binary bits contained in the coordinate data Default is zero Absolute Indicates that the next point is defined by absolute coordinates 7 7 bit Mode Indicates that all subsequent coordinate pair values should be interpreted in 7 bit mode Once you send a seven bit flag base 32 is used and eighth bits are ignored for the remainder of the command We recommend you always follow a pen up flag with a relative move of 0 0 This ensures that the next plotting coordin
510. rameters If you do not include enough pen number parameters the rest of the pixels are assumed to be white zero Patterns are printed in rows parallel to the plotter unit X axis Table 22 16 Example Creating and Printing a Fill Pattern E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PU5 5 Lift the pen and move to absolute position 5 5 PA3500 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to 3500 2500 RF2 8 4 Define a raster fill pattern index number 2 that 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 is 8 dots wide by 4 dots high 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FT11 2 Select the user defined pattern having an index number of 2 RF Raster Fill Definition 22 33 Table 22 16 Example Creating and Printing a Fill Pattern RR4000 800 EP Fill a rectangle with the fill pattern just specified with a lower left corner of 3500 2500 and an upper right corner 4000 plu to the right and 800 plu up edge the outline of the rectangle 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 5 5 Figure 22 20 Table 22 17 Related Commands Group AC Anchor Corner FT Fill Type SV Screened Vectors The Line and Fill Attributes Group 22 34 The Line and Fill Attribute
511. ransparency mode to 1 opaque applies the source image s white pixels to the destination image with a setting of 0 transparent these pixels have no effect on the destination 13 2 The PCL Print Model EN EN Pattern Transparency Mode The transparency or opaqueness of the white pixels in the pattern When set to 0 transparent these pixels have no effect on the destination when set to 1 opaque they are applied through the black pixels of the source pattern to the destination N SN Transparent Pattern N Figure 13 2 Opaque and Transparency Modes Figure 13 3 illustrates the effects of the source and pattern transparency modes on the final image In the first example 1a the transparency mode for both the source image and the pattern is transparent Since the source mode is transparent only the black pixeled region the circle of the source image is overlaid on the destination Since the pattern mode is also transparent the patterned source image is applied only to the white areas of the destination image In the second example 1b the source mode is still transparent but the pattern mode is opaque so the pattern s white pixels are applied to the destination The resulting image shows the entire circle region visible and patterned In the third example 1c the source mode is opaque and the pattern mode is transparent Since the source mode is opaque the entire source imag
512. raster data 15 29 Transparent Print Data 8 28 typeface font selection 8 18 Underline command 8 29 Unit of Measure 4 13 Universal Exit Language 4 3 user defined pattern 13 16 Vertical Cursor Position decipoints 6 11 Vertical Cursor Position PCL Units 6 12 vertical cursor position rows 6 9 Vertical Motion Index VMI 5 22 Vertical Picture Frame Size 18 9 Vertical Rectangle Size 14 4 Vertical Rectangle Size decipoints 14 4 Comment CO command 19 19 compatibility 1 1 component list 11 65 components Intellifont character descriptor 11 65 compound character 11 62 compound character descriptor scalable 11 61 compound character escapement 11 65 compound scalable character 11 63 compression Glossary 2 adaptive 15 25 adaptive operation hints 15 27 bitmap character data 11 53 11 54 byte counts 15 29 delta row 15 16 15 20 15 24 raster data 15 13 15 16 15 19 run length 15 16 TIFF 15 17 TIFF raster data 15 16 CompuServe HP Forum Customer Support 1 configuration Glossary 2 Configuration and Status Group 19 1 Configuration Group HP GL 2 commands 17 3 Configuration Menu Glossary 2 continuation character descriptor 11 53 11 62 11 68 user defined pattern descriptor 13 17 control user defined symbol sets 10 12 control bytes adaptive compression 15 25 control characters printing 23 86 control codes 1 3 Glossary 3 character printing 8 28 horizontal cursor positioning 6 7 in labels 23 6 printing 24 12 Space character
513. ratio of the miter length the length of the diagonal line through the join of two connecting lines to the line width For example with the default miter limit of 5 the miter length can be as long as 5 times the line width miter length Miter Length Line Width Miter Limit Figure 22 14Miter Limit When the miter length exceeds the miter limit the point of the miter is clipped to the miter limit the clipped miter is equivalent to a beveled join The default miter limit is usually sufficient to prevent clipping except at very narrow join angles gt miter limit miter limit Clipped mitered join Maximum clipped mitered join beveled join Figure 22 15 Miter Limit Clipping An LA command remains in effect until another LA command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions LA Line Attributes 22 19 The following example draws an electrical ground symbol using the LA command Table 22 9 Example Using the LA Command E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA4000 3000 Specify absolute plotting and move the pen to 4000 3000 PW2 LA1 3 PD3500 2500 4000 2000 Set the pen width to 2 mm specify a triangular line end place the pen down and draw from the current location to 3500
514. rcentages of the pattern length the first percentage is always pen down 99 LT99 restores the previous line type and residue if itis a fixed line type Note If a solid line type is selected LT when the LT99 command is issued and the current pen position has not changed the previously selected line type can be invoked using LT99 LT99 is ignored when a non solid line type is in effect or if the pen is in a different position than when the previous non solid line ended An example using this command is to print a line in a non solid line type followed by a rectangle in solid black beginning at the end point of the previous line use LT99 to print another line in the previous non solid line type Sending any of the following commands while plotting with a solid line type clears the previous line type and a subsequent LT99 has no effect Table 22 12 Commands that Affect LT99 Command Group AC Anchor Corner The Line and Fill LA Line Attributes Attributes Group LT Line Type except LT and LT99 PW Pen Width RF Raster Fill Definition 22 24 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Table 22 12 Commands that Affect LT99 continued SP Select Pen TR Transparency Mode UL User Defined Line Type WU Pen Width Unit Selection DF Default Values IN Initialize IPInput P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale The Configuration and Stat
515. rcs EGE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA4200 2900 PD Set starting point to 4200 2900 and set pen down EN Drawing Arcs 20 5 Table 20 4 Example Drawing Arcs AA4600 2500 180 Using the Arc Absolute command specify the pivot point of the arc thereby setting the radius draw the arc for 180 in a negative angle of rotation Ec A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Current pen location starting point 4200 2900 AN 4600 2500 Figure 20 3 Drawing arcs 1 of 3 20 6 The Vector Group EN NoteS Note EN Angle of Rotation A positive angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis as shown below A negative angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the amp minus Y axis Y 90 iia 180 O X an 270 Figure 20 4 Drawing arcs 2 of 3 The relationship of the X axis to Y axis and Y axis can change as a result of the scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive or negative angle of rotation You can also draw arcs using the Absolute Arc Three Point AT and Relative Arc Three Point RT commands These commands use three known points
516. re problem Customer Support 2 EN EN When you call the Personal Peripherals Assist Line please have the following information available to help us answer your questions Identify which computer you are using Identify any special equipment or software you are using for example spoolers networks switch boxes modems or special software drivers Identify the cable you are using and who sold it to you Identify any special interface I O or RAM boards installed in your printer Identify the software names and versions you are currently using Customer Support 3 Customer Support 4 EN EN Glossary Auto Continue Auto Continue mode can be configured using the printer s control panel refer to the printer User s Manual Aspect Ratio The ratio of the width to height of an image Baud Rate Baud rate is the rate at which information is transferred between the computer and the printer To communicate properly the computer and printer must both be configured to the same baud rate Bound and Unbound Fonts A bound font is a font which contains a pre specified set of symbols such as Roman 8 PC 8 etc An unbound font or more accurately unbound typeface has the capacity to be bound to a set of symbols selected from a complementary Symbol Index such as HP s Master Symbol List MSL or the Unicode symbol list See Chapter 10 User Defined Symbol Set for more information CAP Current Active
517. respect to the physical page Earlier printers could only print bitmap fonts and raster graphics in the orientation for which they were designed However the HP LaserJet IID IIP 2000 and all PCL 5 HP LaserJet printers have the capability to automatically rotate bitmap fonts and raster graphics to match the page orientation therefore all fonts are available in all four page orientations and print directions Whenever a scalable font is selected it is created in the current orientation for printing Refer to Logical Page Orientation Command and Print Direction Command in Chapter 5 for more information 8 20 PCL Font Selection EN Font Selection Examples Bitmap Fixed Spaced Font This example illustrates how to select a primary bitmap Line Printer fixed spaced font with the following characteristics note that all of the font characteristics are specified Table 8 3 CHARACTERISTIC VALUE ESCAPE SEQUENCE Symbol set ASCII E OU Spacing Fixed E c s0P Pitch 16 66 cpi Ec s16 66H Height 8 5 point E c s8 5V Style Upright E c s0S Stroke weight Medium E c s0B Typeface family Line Printer Ec s0T The following escape sequences can be sent to the printer to select a primary font with the above characteristics E 0UEc s0PEc s16 66HEc s8 5VEc s0SEc s0B c s0T The previous sequence can be shortened by combining sequences that have the same two characters following the character E 0UF
518. revents drawing subsequent graphics commands unless the command contains an automatic pen down X Y Coordinates Increments Move to the point s specified You can specify as many X Y coordinate pairs as you want When you include more than one coordinate pair the printer moves to each point in the order given 20 46 The Vector Group EN Note EN e When you use the Symbol Mode SM command PU draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you use the polygon mode PM command the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer for use when the polygon is edged or filled e Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Whether the PU command uses absolute coordinates or relative coordinates increments depends on the most recently executed PA or PR command If you have not issued a PA or PR command absolute plotting PA is used If an odd number of coordinates is specified in other words an X coordinate without a corresponding Y coordinate the printer ignores the last unmatched coordinate Table 20 30 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative The Vector Group SM Symbol Mode Line and Fill Attributes Group U Pen Up 20 47 RT Relative Arc Three Point This command draws an arc segment using relative coordinates from a starting p
519. rform no other function except the currently defined label terminator which terminates the label The printer prints a space for non printing or undefined characters Transparent data mode must be enabled to access printable characters which have character codes with an associated functionality in normal mode For example the left arrow in the PC 8 symbol set has a character code of 27 In normal mode a character code of 27 is interpreted as an escape character Eo in transparent data mode a character code of 27 prints a left arrow 23 86 The Character Group EN EN Table 23 55 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition DT Define Label Terminator LB Label SA Select Alternate Font SD Standard Font Definition SS Select Standard Font The Character Group TD Transparent Data 23 87 23 88 The Character Group EN EN A Programming Hints Introduction This chapter provides information for use during the development of PCL software Introduction 24 1 PCL Command Parsing A job stream may contain commands that are device specific If these commands are not supported by the PCL device they are ignored For example a Duplex Print command has no effect on the HP LaserJet III IIP or LaserJet 4 printers since these are non duplexing printers However on printers which support duplex printing such as the HP LaserJet IIID and LaserJet IIISi the job is printed in duplex mode
520. rgin This positions the cursor at the relative base line position of a character cell for correct character positioning Example To set the top margin to line 4 send Ec amp L4E 5 16 Page Control Commands EN Note The first line of the logical page is line 0 m Left Margin Top of Page gt ee te ee ae VMI Distance Ches eee Oe eee ee Top Margin _ _t _ _ 75 of VMI a Default Cursor CAP Position Figure 5 5 Margin Cursor Positioning EN Top Margin Command 5 17 Text Length Command Note The Text Length command designates the number of lines at a given VMI within the logical page available for printing text the text area This effectively defines the bottom margin ECR LHF Number of lines Default 1 2 inch less than maximum text length1 Range Logical page length minus top margin 1 Maximum text length INT logical page length top margin However if the max text length is less than inch the text length is set to the maximum allowable The value field sets the text length in lines referenced from the top margin If a value greater than the logical page length minus the top margin is specified or if the current VMI is 0 the command is ignored The user default text length is invoked whenever the orientation page length page size or top margin is changed The user default text length is computed as follows Integer portion of 48
521. rging reducing drawings and enlarging reducing relative character size or changing label text direction IR Xp7 Yp1 XpP2 Y poi or IR 7 Functional Parameter Format Range Default Xp1Yp XpoYp2 clamped real 0to0 100 0 0 100 100 When P1 and P2 are set using IR the scaled area is page size independent As the PCL Picture Frame changes size P1 and P2 keep the same relative position within the PCL Picture Frame boundaries e No Parameters Defaults P1 and P2 to the lower left and upper right corners of the PCL Picture Frame respectively e X Y Coordinates Specify the location of P1 and optionally P2 as percentages of the PCL Picture Frame limits specifying P2 is not required If P2 is not specified P2 tracks P1 the P2 coordinates change so that the distances of X and Y between P1 and P2 remain the same This tracking process can cause P2 to locate outside the effective window Used carefully the tracking function can be useful for preparing more than one equal sized drawing on a page For an example refer to Drawing Equal Sized Pictures on a Page earlier in this chapter e Neither X Y coordinate of P1 can equal the corresponding coordinate of P2 If either coordinate of P1 equals the corresponding coordinate of P2 the coordinate of P2 is incremented by 1 plotter unit 19 26 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN Sending the command IR25 25 75 75 establishes new locat
522. rinter uses to select a font Selection by characteristic is an elimination process The nine steps are performed in the following order When the printer is in 300 dpi mode any 600 dpi bitmaps are eliminated before the selection process begins 1Symbol Set if the specified symbol set exists that symbol set is selected otherwise Roman 8 is selected 2 Spacing if proportional spacing is specified and available proportional spacing is selected If proportional spacing is specified but is not available fixed spacing is selected in the current pitch A proportionally spaced font is always available in PCL 5 printers but it may not be available in the specified symbol set 3 Pitch applies only to fixed spaced fonts If fixed spacing is specified and available fixed spacing in the specified pitch is selected Bitmap Fonts For a fixed space bitmap font if the specified pitch is not available the next greater available pitch is selected If no greater pitch is available the closest available lesser pitch is selected If fixed spacing is specified but is not available a proportional spaced font is selected and the pitch characteristic is ignored Scalable Fonts For a fixed spaced scalable font the pitch is used to calculate the appropriate height The Height selection command is not required The printer calculates the appropriate height to correspond to the pitch The user s height request is recorded in the printer s f
523. rmined by the current setting of the Unit of Measure command see Unit of Measure Command in Chapter 4 PCL Units were formerly referred to as PCL Dots They were renamed PCL Units to prevent confusion with the printer s physically printed dots which are determined by the printer s resolution Decipoints In PCL terminology a decipoint is 1 720 inch or one tenth of a PCL point a PCL point is 1 72 inch as opposed to a typographic point which is 1 72 inch Columns amp Rows The width of a column is defined by the current horizontal motion index HMI The distance between rows is defined by the current vertical motion index VMI or lines per inch Ipi HMI VMI and lpi are described in Chapter 5 Page Control Commands Printer Internal Units Internally the printer uses a different unit of measure It maps PCL Units decipoints and columns and rows to this unit of measure This internal unit is 1 7200 inch All positioning is kept in internal units and rounded to physical dot positions when data is printed Units of the PCL Coordinate System 2 5 HP GL 2 Picture Frame Note 2 6 The Page In addition to text and raster graphics HP GL 2 vector graphics can be placed on the PCL logical page HP GL 2 vector graphics are incorporated using the concept of the HP GL 2 picture frame see Figure 2 3 Within this picture frame HP GL 2 uses its own coordinate system and units of measure The HP GL 2
524. rms of the directions of raster scan X and paper motion Y as illustrated in the following figure Logical Page Top Margin A Physical Page Figure 11 1 Bitmap Physical Coordinate System The LaserJet IID IIP 2000 and all LaserJet PCL 5 printers rotate fonts to match the paper s physical coordinate system Intellifont Scalable Fonts Characters of an Intellifont scalable font are designed within a rectangular area known as the Agfa Design Window Figure 11 2 The units of this coordinate system are 01mm square 11 4 Soft Font Creation EN The master font design size is 250 points a CG point 01383 inches There are 8782 units per Em at the Master Font Size m Characters extending into this area have negative left side bearings 15599 13718 Standard Design Size 250 points Data Resolution 2540 X 2540 inch Data Unit Dimension 01 X 01 mm Left Reference X 2980 Baseline Y 5380 Y 785 2663 X Figure 11 2 Agfa Design Window TrueType Scalable Fonts TrueType scalable font character coordinates are typically based on a system of 2048 units per Em The baseline is defined by y coordinate 0 The left reference is usually defined by x coordinate 0 although there is some variation among fonts To determine the left reference line for an individual TrueType character subtract the LSB value found in the hmtx table from the xMin value found in the glyf table See True Type Font
525. roup EN Note EN Table 23 5 continued Cap Height The distance from the baseline to the top of a capital letter Character The point at which the baseline meets the left edge Origin of the character cell Character The lateral area allocated for character rendering Width Character The distance from the left edge of one character to Plot CP the beginning of the next character Cell Width Character A rectangular area with the height of a linefeed and Plot CP a width extending from the beginning of one Cell character to the beginning of the next The printer implements the following different types of fonts e Scalable outline font e Bitmap font e HP GL 2 Stick and Arc font These are described in more detail in Using Fonts later in this chapter Figure 23 6 and Figure 23 7 show each type of font in relation to its character cell Proportional fonts do not actually have a fixed character cell The width occupied by each character depends on the character s shape Scalable Outline Bitmap H Line Feed _ Line Feed So S gt a ao 5 E T E g Ls 18 Q oO ao ae Character e aseli Character Character Pi Piot Baseline Width Baseline Cell dth Character aa Cell Wid Figure 23 6 Scalable and Bitmap Character Cell Working with the Character Cell 23 13 Stick definition grid 64 48 al oO u 2 T I g E
526. rt the wedge at 330 with a sweep of 120 PA3500 2500 WG400 0 360 Select absolute plotting and move to 8500 2500 Create a filled circle using the current fill type cross hatching specifying a start angle of 0 and a 360 sweep PA4500 2500 FT Move to 4500 2500 select a solid WG400 0 360 fill and fill a 360 wedge circle 2 0A Enter the PCL mode 2 E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page EN Drawing Wedges 21 9 1400 2500 Figure 21 6 Drawing Polygons A polygon consists of one or more closed sequences of connected line segments which may cross each other Drawing polygons requires the use of the polygon mode The Polygon Mode PM command tells the printer to store subsequent commands and coordinates in the polygon buffer before printing the shape Rectangles and wedges are polygons which have their own drawing commands the printer automatically generates and stores the coordinates in the polygon buffer You can use the following commands in polygon mode to create polygons These commands are stored in the polygon buffer until they are replaced with another polygon or the printer is initialized Table 21 7 Polygon Definition Commands Group AA Arc Absolute The Vector Group AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded
527. ry whenever the printer s power is turned off Macro ID The Macro ID command specifies an ID number for use in subsequent macro commands EL amp fH Y Macro ID number Default Range 0 0 32767 This number is used in subsequent macro operations The factory default macro ID is 0 Example To establish a macro ID number of 5 send EL amp f5Y 12 6 Macros EN Macro Control Notes EN The macro control command provides mechanisms for definition invocation and deletion of macros E c amp f xX Table 12 3 0 Start macro definition last ID specified 1 Stop macro definition 2 Execute macro last ID specified 3 Call macro last ID specified 4 Enable macro for automatic overlay last ID specified 5 Disable automatic overlay 6 Delete all macros 7 Delete all temporary macros 8 Delete macro last ID specified 9 Make macro temporary last ID specified 10 Make macro permanent last ID specified A macro may call or execute another macro which in turn may call or execute another macro two levels of nesting are allowed Other than call and execute no macro control operations may occur within a macro A printer reset command FOE or UEL is not allowed in a macro HP GL 2 commands are not supported within macros on all HP LaserJet printers Refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of
528. ry Font by ID c c6F Font Control Copy Assign FN Select Secondary Font This command allows any accessible font that has been assigned a font ID number to be selected as the secondary alternate font the font characteristics are assigned to the secondary font The font must be accessible to the printer as either a resident font a downloaded font or a loaded cartridge font To be selected the font must have been previously assigned a font ID number in PCL mode Also the FN command must be accompanied by an AD command specifying the font s point size see the Using the FI Command example FN font_ID Parameter Format Functional Range Default font_ID integer 0 to 32767 no default 23 56 The Character Group EN Notes EN When the printer receives this command and the requested font is present the secondary font characteristics are set to those of the requested font If the selected font is proportionally spaced the pitch characteristic is not changed This command does not select the font for label printing if you are currently using the standard font The Fl and FN commands implicitly change the value of SB For example if SB 0 and FI selects a bitmap font SB is set to 1 This affects the performance of certain HP GL 2 commands Refer to SB command later in this chapter Example Using the FN Command The following example demonstrates assigning a font ID number fro
529. s Once the units of measure is changed it stays in effect until another is selected or the printer is reset A control panel or Ec E reset returns the current unit of measure setting back to the device default setting 300 The units value is part of the modified print environment As such it is saved and restored whenever a macro is called or an overlay invoked and defaulted when establishing the overlay environment in preparation for an overlay Values out of range are mapped to the supported value with the minimum relative error For example a unit selection of 4801 would be mapped to 7200 since the relative error 0 3332 is less than the relative error when mapped to 3600 0 3336 14801 7200 _ 0 3332 lt 4801 3600 _ 9 3336 7200 4801 7200 over 7200 0 3332 lt 4801 3600 over 3600 0 3336 Figure 4 6 compares a 4 unit vertical and horizontal cursor move with a unit of measure setting of 100 versus 200 units per inch Note that the cursor move distance is halved when the Units per inch is doubled 4 14 PCL Job Control Commands EN Unit of Measure 100 Unit of Measure 200 c amp ul00B c amp u200B 0 10 inch 0 10 inch _ 0 0 oN 4 4 4 4 Cursor move 4X 4Y Cursor move 4X 4Y S
530. s 1 Normal Raster Orientation 1 Landscape Left Offset 22 dots Top Offset 27 dots Character Width 31 dots Character Height 26 dots Delta X 120 Quarter Dots 30 dots 11 72 Soft Font Creation EN Table 11 55 Landscape Character Data Example Dot Row Bit Map Decimal Equivalent 01 00000000 01111110 00000000 00000000 0 126 0 0 02 00000011 11111111 11000000 00000000 3 255 192 0 03 00001111 11111111 11110000 00000000 15 255 240 0 04 00011111 10000001 11111000 00000000 31 129 248 0 05 00111110 00000000 01111100 00000000 62 0 124 0 06 00111000 00000000 00111100 00000000 56 0 124 0 07 01111000 00000000 00011110 00000000 120 0 30 0 08 01110000 00000000 00001110 00000000 112 0 14 0 09 11100000 00000000 00001111 00000000 224 0 15 0 10 11100000 00000000 00000111 00000000 224 0 7 0 11 11100000 00000000 00000111 00000000 224 0 7 0 12 11100000 00000000 00000111 00000000 224 0 7 0 13 11100000 00000000 00000111 00001110 224 0 7 14 14 11100000 00000000 00000111 00001110 224 0 7 14 15 01110000 00000000 00001110 00001110 112 0 14 14 16 01110000 00000000 00001110 00001110 112 0 14 14 17 00111000 00000000 00011100 00001110 56 0 28 14 18 00111100 00000000 00111100 00001110 60 0 60 14 19 00011110 00000000 01111000 00001110 30 0 120 14 20 00001111 10000001 11110000 00001110 15 129 250 14 21 01111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 127 255 255 240 22 01111111 11111111 1111111
531. s pictured 8 15 symbol set HP GL 2 23 69 symbol set PCL 7 3 temporary 9 3 9 5 16 8 TrueType 11 3 TrueType character coordinates 11 5 typeface HP GL 2 23 72 typeface designs pictured 7 7 unbound see also unbound font 9 8 Index 25 Index 26 Font Control command 9 5 font header 11 1 Glossary 5 baseline position 11 18 bitmap 11 7 bitmap character cell 11 19 bitmap example 11 43 calculating symbol set value 11 20 cap height formula 11 31 cell height 11 18 cell width 11 18 character complement 11 35 checksum 11 39 11 42 command 11 6 copyright 11 39 examples 11 43 11 44 first code 11 30 font naming ASC16 11 33 font number 11 32 font scaling technology 11 34 font type 11 15 format byte 11 15 formats 11 7 formats of data segments 11 41 global Intellifont data 11 35 global italic angle 11 35 height 11 22 height extended 11 31 Intellifont bound 11 10 Intellifont unbound 11 11 last code 11 30 master underline position 11 34 master underline thickness 11 34 MSL symbol index 11 35 number of characters 11 30 OR threshold 11 35 orientation 11 19 pitch 11 21 pitch extended 11 21 11 30 placement 11 28 quality 11 28 resolution specified bitmap 11 8 scalable example 11 44 scale factor 11 34 segment size Format 15 11 41 segmented font data Format 15 11 39 segmented font identifier 11 40 serif style 11 27 size 10 5 spacing 11 19 11 20 stroke weight 11 23 style LSB 11 23 style MSB 11 16 style word
532. s to each other is more important than the actual numbers The table below lists three common label angles produced by using ones and zeros Table 23 19 DR Command Label Direction DR 1 0 horizontal DR 0 1 vertical DR 1 1 or DI 0 7 0 7 diagonal from P1 to P2 any parameters equal to each other The relative size and sign of the two parameters determine the amount of rotation If you imagine the current pen location to be the origin of a coordinate system for the label you can see that the signs of the parameters determine in which quadrant the label is in 23 40 The Character Group EN Note EN D Saadani I O7 D a Guadrant 1 rise O rise Quadrant III O ip Quadrant IV Figure 23 24Varying Print Direction with DR Command Parameter Sign A DR command remains in effect until another DR or DI command is executed or until the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Example Using the DR Command This example illustrates the use of positive and negative parameters how the LB command updates the current pen location and how DR updates the Carriage Return point Note that this is the same example shown with the DI command The only changes are switching the DI to DR and using the 1 0 ratio instead of the sine and cosine However if you print them both and measure them you ll discover that they are slightly different sizes The size difference results from the DR command s use of the percentag
533. s Group EN SM Symbol Mode This command draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate point using the PA PD PE PR and PU commands Use SM to create scattergrams indicate points on geometric drawings and differentiate data points on multiline graphs SM character or SM 7 Parameter Format Functional Range Default character label most printing characters decimal codes 33 58 60 126 161 and 254 Decimal code 59 the semicolon is an HP GL 2 terminator and cannot be used as a symbol in any symbol set Use it only to cancel symbol mode e g SM The SM command draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate point for subsequent PA PD PE PR and PU commands The SM command includes an automatic pen down after the symbol is drawn the pen position and any dashed line residue are restored e No Parameter Terminates symbol mode e Character Draws the specified character centered at each subsequent X Y coordinate The symbol is drawn in addition to the usual function of each HP GL 2 command e The character is drawn in the font selected at the time the vectors are drawn If you change to a new symbol set the character changes to the corresponding character from the new symbol set The size SI and SR slant SL and direction DI and DR commands affect how the character is drawn Specifying a non printing character cancels symbol mode An SM command remains in effect unti
534. s Manual Common Errors 24 15 24 16 Programming Hints EN EN Customer Support Support services are available to help you in case you have a question about your HP LaserJet printer Following are some places to turn for this support Help From Your Organization If you organization has many HP printers the best source of assistance may be within your own company Many organizations designate central support personnel to help when you have any problems with your computer system or when you need consumable items such as toner cartridges or paper These support personnel in turn can call special resources within HP when necessary Help From Your Dealer If you purchased your printer from an HP dealer or system vendor your dealer is the best source of assistance Your salesperson should be familiar with your needs equipment configuration and software and should be able to provide you with the information you need Your dealer can also access special support resources and programs within HP Contact your dealer for details on available support options Help from HP The CompuServe HP Forum The HP Forum on CompuServe is a fast and easy way to get drivers and updated application notes for HP LaserJet printers As soon as printer drivers and notes are available they are uploaded to HP Forum for instant access by CompuServe members Customer Support 1 If you are not a member of CompuServe but would like to join call C
535. s or macros reducing the raster graphics white space sent to the printer or selecting a lower resolution for the raster graphics An alternative solution is to install additional memory Additional memory is available from your Hewlett Packard Sales Representative or authorized dealer 21 ERROR This error results when a page is too complex to print The error can be corrected by reducing the complexity of the page or by enabling Page Protection mode from the control panel Refer to the Print Overrun section described earlier in this chapter for additional information 22 ERROR This error indicates an I O protocol problem between the printer and the host system Make sure the printer and the host system protocol hardware handshake or Xon Xoff handshake correspond and that your cable is correct for your host printer configuration 40 ERROR An error occurred while transferring data from the computer to the printer This error occurs if the computer is turned ON and OFF while the printer is on line or if the printer s baud rate parity or data character size are not the same as the computer s To clear the error message press CONTINUE RESET refer to the printer User s Manual Make sure the printer is set to the same baud rate as the computer and that your host I O has been configured for your printer If the error continues call your HP Service Representative For additional printer errors refer to the printer User
536. s the Printable Area Pattern Reference Point The pattern reference point is a position on the logical page at which the base pattern is positioned for tiling The upper left corner of the base pattern is positioned at this point see The default pattern reference point is position 0 0 However it is possible to set the pattern reference point to the current cursor position This allows the pattern to be positioned or adjusted for fill areas The pattern reference point may be shifted more than once for as many fill areas as there are on a page the area must be filled before the tile point is moved for the next fill area Figure 13 8 shows two areas filled with the pattern reference point fixed at the default 0 0 position The lower portion of the illustration shows two areas in which the pattern reference point was moved to the upper left corner of each area and the area filled separately 13 14 The PCL Print Model EN Pattern Reference Point at Default Position 4 XY a A aa 4 Nyx Pattern Reference Point Position at upper left corner of area before tiling filling each area Pattern Reference Point Figure 13 8 Moving Pattern Reference Point for Pattern Filling Ne 4 i 7 of OY 4 User Defined Pattern Graphics 13 15 User Defined Pattern Command The User Defined Pattern command provides the means for downloadin
537. s used If more than one font remains the printer continues comparing font selection characteristics eliminating fonts until only one remains Whenever only one font remains it is selected for printing Symbol Set Mapping Table The printer receives character codes in the range 0 255 which depending on the selected symbol set identify the symbols to print or control codes to execute There are hundreds of symbols available in unbound fonts in HP LaserJet printers more than can be identified by the character code range 0 255 A list of these symbols is provided in the symbol indexes such as the Master Symbol List MSL and the Unicode list In Appendix D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide Each symbol in the list is identified by a unique MSL or Unicode number Symbols in unbound fonts are identified by this number Unbound Scalable Fonts 9 11 Since the printer identifies symbols by their symbol index number range from 0 to 65535 but receives character codes range 0 255 a relation must be made between the character codes and the larger range of symbol index numbers This relation is defined by the symbol set mapping table The printer contains a symbol set mapping table for each available symbol set These tables list the character code range and corresponding list of symbol index numbers Using this mapping the printer identifies which indexed character is printed for the character code in the current symbol set A partial
538. sary 9 EN EN parameters formats HP GL 2 17 10 HP GL 2 syntax 17 7 scaling 19 45 user units in scaling 19 41 parentheses 17 9 parsing PCL commands 24 2 Pattern 13 8 14 5 pattern black fill 14 9 cross hatch 14 8 cross hatch fill 14 9 current 13 2 erase fill 14 9 fonts 7 11 line 13 11 raster fill 22 9 reference point 13 14 shaded fill 14 9 shading 13 9 14 6 transparency mode 13 2 user defined Glossary 15 user defined also see user defined pattern 13 13 Pattern ID Area Fill ID command 13 8 14 5 Pattern Transparency Mode command 13 7 PCL adapting to match HP GL 2 19 15 architecture 1 2 bitmap fonts 11 51 character definition 11 48 command processing time 24 10 commands 1 3 Glossary 9 commands unsupported 1 2 coordinate system 2 1 2 4 2 5 19 15 coordinate system width and height 14 2 coordination system units Glossary 9 default settings 3 2 Enter PCL Mode command 18 14 escape sequences 1 3 history 1 1 job control commands 4 1 levels 1 2 macro overlay environment 12 4 12 5 matching HP GL 2 coordinates 17 17 19 15 page control 24 4 PCL point vs typographic point 2 5 PCL Units vs printed dots 2 3 2 5 point 7 5 print model 13 1 printer program language 1 1 printer reset command 4 2 status readback see also status readback 16 1 unit of measure for cursor movements 4 13 units 6 3 Glossary 9 PCL picture frame 17 19 18 1 adjusting image size scaling 18 3 anchor point 18 1 bou
539. se of the user control panel selected default font Ea 3 Default primary font characteristics Pe 3 Default secondary font characteristics If the user default font is a proportionally spaced font the pitch characteristic is not affected by the default font command HP GL 2 Font Selection EN In addition to selecting fonts using the PCL font selection commands fonts can also be selected and printed in HP GL 2 mode using the HP GL 2 label commands refer to Chapter 23 Character Group The HP GL 2 font selection commands allow you to label vector graphic images and to create some special effects with fonts not otherwise available These special effects include printing outline fonts from fonts which are not outline style printing mirror images of fonts and printing fonts on any angle on the logical page Fonts can also be scaled using HP GL 2 vector graphics however this font scaling method is rather program intensive and not the recommended method refer to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics in Chapter 25 for additional information Select Default Font Command 8 27 Transparent Print Data Command Note The Transparent Print Data command provides printing access to those characters which the printer normally defines as unprintable These characters include decimal character codes 0 7 15 and 27 Es amp p X Transparent Print Data Number of bytes of transparent print data Default N A Range 0 32767 Eac
540. sent any value For example you could plot the moon cycle for the year by dividing the X axis into 31 units for days of the month and the Y axis into 12 units for months of the year To mark a point on December 25 you would give the coordinate 25 12 rather than calculating the exact location in plotter units Before printing the printer internally converts user units to dot locations 17 20 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Pen Status and Location Note EN Since printing vector graphics has traditionally been performed with plotters the terms pen and pen position are used to described the HP GL 2 cursor the current active position CAP when in HP GL 2 mode Like a physical pen this imaginary pen must be selected if you want to draw images Commands such as Pen Up PU or Pen Down PD and phrases such as current pen position or moving the pen apply to the imaginary pen just as they would a physical pen on a plotter Pen Status Pen status refers to whether the pen is up or down Use the Pen Up PU command with X Y coordinates to move the pen to the desired printing location without drawing a line Use the Pen Down PD command with X Y coordinates to lower the pen and begin drawing from the current location to the first specified X Y coordinate Upon entering HP GL 2 mode for the first time following a reset FE command no pen has been selected and the pen is up This means that no lines
541. ser selected default font from the printer s control panel or from a font cartridge containing a default font 2 User default values may be selected by the user from the printer s control panel for these items 3 Selectable from the printer control panel if duplex is selected 4 Selectable from the printer s control panel if a fixed space scalable font has been selected as the user default 5 Selectable from the printer s control panel if a proportional scalable font has been selected as the user default 3 2 The Print Environment EN EN Table 3 1 Factory Default Print Environment Features PCL Context continued PAGE CONTROL FONT MANAGEMENT Print Direction Font ID Orientation Character Code Page Size Symbol Set ID Paper Source RASTER GRAPHICS Vertical Motion Index Left Graphics Margin Horizontal Motion Index Resolution Top Margin Compression Mode Text Length Raster Height Left Margin Raster Width Right Margin Raster Graphics Presentation Mode Perforation Skip PICTURE FRAME Line Termination Picture Frame Width PRINT MODEL Picture Frame Height Current Pattern Picture Frame Anchor Point Source Transparency Mode HP GL 2 plot Horizontal Size Pattern Transparency Mode HP GL 2 Plot Vertical Size Pattern Reference Point MACRO Pattern Rotation Macro ID 1 The font characteristics are det
542. sign units For example a 17 pitch font designed at 300 dpi has a Pitch field of 70 17 5 dots or 17 1429 cpi and a Pitch Extended field of 150 0 1465 dots additional which adds to 17 6465 dots or 17 0005 pitch An example for calculating the Pitch and Pitch Extended fields is provided in the Pitch field description above 11 30 Soft Font Creation EN Scalable Font Set Pitch Extended field to zero Height Extended UB Bitmap Font This is an addition to the Height field which extends the height an extra eight bits The value of this field is in font design units For example a 10 point font designed at 300 dpi would have a Height field of 166 41 5 dots or 9 96 points and a Height Extended field of 170 0 1660 dots additional which adds to 9 9998 points This field is calculated similar to the Pitch Extended field Refer to the Pitch description above Scalable Font Set The Height Extended field to zero Cap Height Ul Cap Height is a percentage of the Em of the font and is used to calculate the distance from the capline top of an unaccented uppercase letter such as an H to the baseline Bitmap Font Fonts containing a 0 in this field are assumed to have a cap height percentage of 70 87 of Em Em being a measure in points of the height of the body of the font The Cap Height data is represented as the product of the cap height percentage and the maximum unsigned integer 0 7087 x 65535 46 445
543. sion 15 16 seed row 15 22 Set Compression Method command 15 16 Start command 15 14 Termination command 15 30 termination implied 15 15 throughput 24 7 TIFF data compression 15 16 Transfer Raster Data command 15 29 vs HP GL 2 graphics when to use 17 1 Width command 15 13 zeroed rows 15 2 Raster Height command 15 11 raster image 15 1 Raster Width command 15 13 Raster Y Offset command 15 15 Index 33 Index 34 real number 17 10 rectangle drawing HP GL 2 mode 21 3 effect of transparency mode 14 11 fill 14 1 fill examples 14 13 fill transparency mode 14 11 Fill command 14 9 fill procedure 14 1 Horizontal Size command 14 3 pattern transparency mode 14 2 position 14 10 rectangular area definition 14 1 transparency mode 14 10 Vertical Size command 14 4 reducing enlarging HP GL 2 images 19 8 registration text 4 7 Top Offset command 4 8 related manuals x Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format x PCL 5 Comparison Guide x Software Application Notes vi TrueType Font File Specification x Relative Arc Three Point command 20 48 Relative Character Size command 23 8 23 14 23 81 relative cursor positioning 6 2 24 5 Relative Direction command 23 9 23 21 23 37 relative vs absolute pen movement 17 25 Replot command 19 39 reset 24 3 Glossary 11 cold 3 9 key 3 8 margins 5 15 printer 3 8 Reset command 19 3 resetting environments 3 8 resolution 14 2 defined Glossary 12 defined 2 3 fonts 8 5 print defa
544. sition 0 This command is a modified version of the rB End Raster Graphics command This new version Ec rC performs two additional operations 1 it resets the compression mode to 0 and 2 it defaults the left graphics margin to 0 This command Ec rC is not supported by the HP LaserJet III or the HP LaserJet IIID printers Use the ETB End Raster Graphics command to terminate raster graphic data transfers for these printers Refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for specific printers which support these commands 15 30 Raster Graphics EN Raster Graphics Example To transfer an unencoded raster graphic image see Figure 15 11 in the shape of an arrow perform the following steps Table 15 10 1 Position the cursor E p300x400 This moves the cursor to PCL Unit position Y 300 400 within the PCL coordinate system 2 Specify the raster graphics resolution EGM75R This sets the raster graphics resolution to 75 dots per inch 3 Specify the raster graphics presentation method EOF This specifies that the raster graphics is printed in the orientation of the logical page 4 Specify the left raster graphics margin EArt This sets the left graphics margin to the current X position 300 5 Transfer the raster data to the printer Divide the image into dot rows and transfer each dot row to the printer as a string of bytes as illustrated on the following p
545. space scalable font has been selected as the user default 5 Selectable from the printer s control panel if a proportional scalable font has been selected as the user default 3 4 The Print Environment EN Table 3 2 Factory Default Print Environment Features HP GL 2 Context CHARACTER GROUP POLYGON GROUP Character Width Symbol Set Polygon Buffer Font Spacing Polygon Mode Pitch LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTE GROUP Height Line Type Posture Line Type Repeat Length Stroke Weight Line Cap Typeface Line Join Character Direction Miter Limit Character Direction Mode Pen Turret Character Size Mode Pen Width Pen Width Selection Mode Character Height Selected Pen Character Slant Symbol Mode Extra Horizontal Space Fill Type Extra Vertical Space Character Fill Mode User defined Line Type Anchor Corner Label Origin User defined Fill Types Label Terminator PALETTE EXTENSION Transparent Data Mode Number of Pens Primary Font ID Transparency Mode Secondary Font ID Screened Vector Scalable or Bitmap Font CONFIGURATION amp STATUS GROUP VECTOR GROUP Scale Mode Plotting Mode Window Pen State Coordinate System Orientation P1 P2 EN Factory Default Environment 3 5 User Default Environment Notes There are several PCL features in the printer for which user defaults may be selected
546. specifies the orientation of the raster image on the logical page Ec r F 0 Raster image prints in orientation of logical page 3 Raster image prints along the width of the physical page Default 3 Range 0 3 A value of 0 indicates that a raster row will be printed in the positive X direction of the PCL coordinate system The print direction translates the PCL coordinate system A value of 3 indicates that the raster graphics will be printed along the width of the physical page regardless of logical page orientation In portrait orientation a raster row is printed in the positive X direction of the PCL coordinate system and a subsequent raster row is printed beginning at the next dot row position in the positive Y direction In landscape orientation a raster row is printed in the positive Y direction of the PCL coordinate system and a subsequent raster row is printed beginning at the next dot row position in the negative X direction Figure 15 5 illustrates presentation mode 0 and 3 Table 15 2 Raster Presentation Mode Orientation Default Graphics Margin 0 portrait logical page left bound 0 reverse portrait logical page left bound 0 landscape logical page left bound 0 reverse logical page left bound landscape 3 portrait logical page left bound 3 reverse portrait logical page left bound 15 8 Raster Graphics EN Table 15 2 continued 3 landscape 50 dots
547. ssable area 2 2 Advance Full Page command 19 33 alternate Secondary font 23 56 alternate font HP GL 2 selection 23 66 Alternate Font Definition command 23 18 alternate vs standard fonts HP GL 2 23 17 Anchor Corner command 22 5 22 6 anchor corner changing example 22 6 anchor point picture frame 18 1 18 10 angle of rotation 20 7 21 6 angle of rotation negative Glossary 8 angle of rotation positive Glossary 10 angles measuring 23 31 angularity 7 6 anisotropic scaling 19 4 19 41 19 42 AP Application Support Format 15 11 41 AR command 20 13 Arc Absolute command 20 5 20 9 Arc Relative AR command 20 5 Arc Relative command 20 13 arcs drawing 20 5 area fill ID command see also pattern ID command 13 8 14 5 area fill user defined patterns also see user defined patterns 13 13 ASCxx 10 5 11 14 aspect ratio 19 8 Glossary 1 assigning font ID numbers 9 4 assist line HP Customer Support 2 AT command 20 7 20 16 auto continue 24 14 Glossary 1 automatic macro overlay 12 4 24 8 automatic pen down 17 21 auto rotation font 8 20 Backspace 6 7 base pattern 13 13 baseline position font header 11 18 BASIC HP GL 2 example 17 13 baud rate Glossary 1 Bezier Absolute BZ command 20 8 20 22 Bezier curves HP GL 2 20 8 Bezier Relative BR command 20 8 20 19 bi directional 0 16 2 binary data 1 6 15 1 binding modes 4 5 bitmap fonts 7 2 7 9 11 2 character descriptor format 11 51 EN EN
548. ssed formats Run length encoding tagged imaged file format TIFF rev 4 0 delta row compression and adaptive compression The choice of compression methods affects both the amount of code needed to generate a raster graphic image and the efficiency with which the image is printed E c amp b M 0 Unencoded 1 Run length encoding 2 Tagged Imaged File Format TIFF rev 4 0 3 Delta row compression 4 Reserved 5 Adaptive compression Default Range 0 0 5 values outside the range are ignored Unencoded Method 0 This is a simple binary transfer of data no compression Each bit describes a single dot Bit 7 of the first byte corresponds to the first dot within the raster row bit 0 corresponds to the eighth dot and so on Compressed data formats allow for efficient transfer of data from the host system to the printer However compressed data formats do NOT reduce the amount of printer memory required to produce an image Run length Encoding Method 1 Run length encoding interprets raster data in pairs of bytes The first byte of each pair is the repetition count for the data in the second byte The second byte is the raster data to be printed A repetition count of 0 signifies the pattern in the data byte is not repeated it occurs only once A repetition count of 1 signifies the pattern occurs twice The repetition count can range from 0 to 255 for a repetition of 1 to 256 times Repetition count by
549. symbol set mapping table is shown in Table 9 1 for the Roman 8 symbol set Table 9 1 Roman 8 Symbol Index Mapping MSL Index Unicode Index Character Code decimal hexadecimal 32 0 33 1 0021 34 2 0022 35 3 0023 36 4 0024 37 5 0025 38 6 0026 39 8 2019 40 9 0028 41 10 0029 252 189 25a0 253 190 00bb 254 191 00b1 9 12 Font Management EN EN Printing a Character When an unbound font is selected for printing and a character code is received the printer accesses the requested symbol set mapping table to identify the MSL or Unicode number For example if the Roman 8 symbol set is selected and the printer receives character code 254 the printer accesses the Roman 8 symbol set mapping table Table 9 1 In the Roman 8 mapping table character code 254 is mapped to MSL number 191 or Unicode number 00b1 plus over minus symbol Thus to print character code 254 the printer searches the selected unbound font for the correct MSL or Unicode number and prints that character Unbound Scalable Fonts 9 13 9 14 Font Management EN User Defined Symbol Sets Introduction User defined symbol sets are used with unbound scalable fonts Three new commands provide for the implementation of user defined symbol sets Symbol Set ID Code c R Define Symbol Set Eo f W symbol set data Symbol Set Control Po c S To define a symbol set you must first designate a symbol set I
550. t 20 x Height 22 Width Type Style LSB 24 Stroke Weight Typeface LSB 26 Typeface MSB Serif Style 28 Quality Placement 30 Underline Position Underline Thickness Height Distance 32 Text Height 34 Text Width 36 First Code 38 Last Code 40 Pitch Extended Height Extended 42 Cap Height 44 47 Font Number 48 63 Font Name 64 X Resolution 66 Y Resolution n Copyright optional Font Header Format 11 9 Table 11 4 Format 10 Font Header for Intellifont Bound Scalable Byte 15 MSB 8 17 LSB 0 0 Font Descriptor Size minimum 80 2 Header Format 10 Font Type 4 Style MSB Reserved 6 Baseline Position 8 Cell Width 10 Cell Height 12 Orientation Spacing 14 Symbol Set 16 Pitch default HMI 18 Height 20 x Height 22 Width Type Style LSB 24 Stroke Weight Typeface LSB 26 Typeface MSB Serif Style 28 Quality Placement 30 Underline Position Underline Thickness Distance Height 32 Text Height 34 Text Width 36 First Code 38 Last Code 40 Pitch Extended Height Extended 42 Cap Height 44 47 Font Number 11 10 Soft Font Creation EN Table 11 4 Format 10 Font Header for Intellifont Bound Scalable continued 48 63 Font Name 64 Scale Factor 66 X Resolution 68 Y Resolution 70 Master Underline Position 72 Master Underline Thickness Height 74 OR Threshold 76 Global Italic Angle Desc Global Inte
551. t Unicode requires the ASCII and East Europe Collections such as ISO 8859 2 0000000088000001 Symbol set Unicode requires the ASCII and Desktop Publishing Collections such as Ventura US 10 10 User Defined Symbol Sets EN EN Symbol Map Array of Ul The symbol map contains a list of symbol index numbers This list identifies symbols for the symbol set Refer to Appendix D in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for a MSL and Unicode symbol indexes The symbol map pairs maps a character code to a symbol index number The range of character code numbers paired with symbol index numbers is the range from the First Code through the Last Code fields in the header The first symbol index number in the Symbol Map field is mapped to the character code whose value is that of the First Code field the second symbol index number is mapped to the First Code 1 character code the third symbol index number is mapped to the First Code 2 etc through the last symbol index number which is mapped to the value in the Last Code field The number of symbol index characters in the array must match the number of character codes in the range First Code through Last Code If no printable symbol symbol index number is associated with a given character code as with codes 128 through 160 of Roman 8 the corresponding entry in the Symbol Map should be 65535 FFFF Hex Define Symbol Set 10 11 Symbol Set Control Command This
552. t symbol set and orientation For example the name of the font used for this text is Helvetica its height is 10 point its style is upright and its stroke weight is medium Font Cartridge A removable media containing multiple fonts When a cartridge is plugged into the printer the printer has access to the fonts contained in the cartridge Font Header The font header and character definitions contain all the information needed to format a font for use in the HP LaserJet printers Every PCL font header begins with a font descriptor which identifies the basic characteristics common to all characters of a font such as font type baseline position character cell width and height character orientation symbol set etc Chapter 11 describes the font header and character definition formats for PCL bitmap fonts as well as Intellifont and TrueType scalable fonts Height The height of a font is the measurement of the body of the type in points A PCL point is 1 72nd inch The body of the type is slightly greater than the distance from the bottom of a descender such as the tail of lower case p to the top of an unaccented capital letter Glossary 5 Glossary 6 Horizontal Motion Index HMI HMI defines the distance between columns in 1 120 inch increments When fixed pitch fonts are selected all printable characters including the space and backspace characters are affected by HMI When proportional fonts are selected t
553. t Length 5 18 G Output Bin Selection 4 12 H Paper Source 5 4 L Perforation Skip 5 19 O Page Orientation 5 5 S Simplex Duplex Print 4 5 U Left Offset Registration 4 7 X Number of Copies 4 4 Z Top Offset Registration 4 8 amp minus 4 3 amp amp amp ell 4 4 4 5 4 7 4 8 4 11 4 12 5 4 5 5 5 16 5 18 5 19 5 22 5 24 amp amp a C Horizontal Cursor Positioning Columns 6 4 amp amp a G Duplex Page Side Selection 4 10 amp amp a H Horizontal Cursor Positioning Decipoints 6 6 amp amp a L Left Margin 5 13 amp amp a M Right Margin 5 14 amp amp a P Print Direction 5 9 amp amp a R Vertical Cursor Positioning Rows 6 9 amp amp a V Vertical Cursor Positioning Decipoints 6 11 amp amp d D Enable Underline 8 29 amp amp d Disable Underline 8 29 amp amp f S Push Pop Cursor Position 6 14 amp amp f X Macro Control 12 7 amp amp f Y Macro ID assign 12 6 amp amp k G Line Termination 6 13 amp amp k H Horizontal Motion Index 5 20 amp amp p X Transparent Mode 8 28 amp amp r F Flush All Pages 16 24 amp amp r T Inquire Status Readback Entity 16 10 amp amp r T Set Status Readback Location Type 16 8 amp amp r T Set Status Readback Location Unit 16 9 amp amp s C End Of Line Wrap 24 12 amp amp u B Unit Of Measure 4 13 amp sp 6 13 B Primary Stroke Weight 8 16 X Primary Font Selection by ID 8 26
554. t Paths e Line Specifies the location of each character with respect to the preceding character relative to the labeling direction defined by the DI or DR commands e 0 90 degrees Normal Line Feed Sets the direction of Line Feeds 90 degrees with respect to the text path EN DV Define Variable Text Path 23 47 TRH2m NWMMoO LAMRON NORMAL LINE FEED rrexzxnoz omm MAH Figure 23 27 DV Command Character Position for Normal 0 Parameter e 0 90 degrees Reverse Line Feed Sets the direction of Line Feeds 90 degrees with respect to the text path D Ep EE EG A EE N V IE LR LINE FEED DE SREVER REVERSED DEEF ENIL AL EI VN E E A SF EE 5 E 5 Figure 23 28DV Command Character Position for Normal 90 Parameter 23 48 The Character Group EN EN Example Using theDV Command The following example illustrates how Line Feeds and Carriage Returns affect vertical labels Horizontal labels are shown for comparison Table 23 24 Example Using the DV Command EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA2000 3000 DV1 Specify absolute plotting and move to 2000 3000 Define the text path so that each character begins below the previous character vertical text path DT Define the character as the label
555. t depending on the source transparency mode When a Transfer Raster Data command is received that causes any raster row to extend beyond the row boundary set by the Raster Height command the row outside the boundary is clipped This includes the case where the cursor is moved beyond the height boundary with a Raster Y Offset command and the printing of raster data is attempted If you have specified either a raster height or a raster width of 0 and a Start Raster Graphics or Transfer Raster Data command is received then the entire raster graphic is clipped If both a raster height and a raster width are specified non zero and a Start Raster Graphics or Transfer Raster Data command is received then the raster area is guaranteed to be logically zeroed out If the raster height is not set the raster height is ignored so that no padding or clipping of rows takes place This command is ignored after the Start Raster Graphics or Transfer Raster Data commands until the next End Raster Graphics command Only raster data appearing within the intersection of the logical page the printable area and if set the raster width and height is printed Data outside the intersection is clipped Raster Height Command 15 11 Upon receiving an End Raster Graphics Ec rC command the cursor position is set to the left graphics margin of the next raster row after the raster height boundary Portrait Mode 0 amp 3 Landscape Mode 0 Print Dire
556. t it into its symbol set ID code 5 Designate the ID code using the Symbol Set ID Code command 6 Download the symbol set header data and MSL or Unicode numbers using the Define Symbol Set command To print using the symbol set it must be selected using the Select Symbol Set command EVD where ID is the symbol set ID selection value used to calculate the symbol set ID code Symbol Set ID Code Command 10 3 Define Symbol Set Note This command defines the characters and character mapping for a user defined symbol set Fe f W symbol set definition data Number of bytes in symbol set definition Default n a Range 0 32767 If a user defined symbol set is already present in the printer and a new valid symbol set is downloaded with the same Symbol Set ID Code then the old symbol set is deleted If an internal symbol set with the same ID code exists it is overridden by the new symbol set If the symbol set definition is invalid the command is ignored If there is insufficient memory to create the symbol set the symbol set is discarded Send the Symbol Set ID Code command prior to the Define Symbol Set command to assign an ID code for the user defined symbol set If the Symbol Set ID Code command is not sent the last code sent is used If none have been sent then the default 0 is assigned The data format for the user defined symbol set is shown in Table 10 1 Table 10 1 User Defined Symbol Set Defintio
557. t line The residue is saved when any of the following commands are received Cl EA EP ER EW FP PM RA RR or WG The residue is restored when the current pen position is restored upon completion of these HP GL 2 commands e The following commands clear current residue and vector end points Table 22 11 Commands that Affect LT1 LT8 Command AC Anchor Corner LA Line Attributes LT Line Type except LT and LT99 PW Pen Width RF Raster Fill Definition SP Select Pen TR Transparency Mode UL User Defined Line Type WU Pen Width Unit Selection Group The Line and Fill Attributes Group DF Default Values IN Initialize IPInput P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale The Configuration and Status Group LT Line Type 22 23 A zero line type 0 draws only a dot at the X Y coordinates for AA AR AT Cl PA PD PR and RT commands Zero pen down values and zero length lines also produce dots A dot is a one plotter unit long vector drawn using the current line end and pen width Dots within lines are drawn at the correct angle but zero length vectors are drawn along the user s current X axis Negative line types 1 8 are adaptive line types The pattern length is automatically adjusted so that each line contains one or more complete patterns Line patterns are composed of alternate pen down and pen up moves which are pe
558. t of P2 characters are mirrored right to left when you move P1 above P2 characters are mirrored top to bottom When both of these situations occur using negative parameters in the SR command with an unusual P1 P2 position double mirroring may result in either direction in which case the two inversions cancel and lettering appears normal An SR command remains in effect until another SR command is executed an SI command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions 23 82 The Character Group EN EN Example Using the SR Command The following example first shows a label with a character size relative to P1 and P2 SR Next the locations of P1 and P2 are changed then the character size percentages are specified Notice that the new character size has equal parameters of 2 5 because the P1 P2 area is square the resulting characters are square Table 23 51 Example Using the SR Command EVE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing IP 6956 4388 Move P1 to 6956 4388 and P2 to 6956 4388 6956 4388 DT Specify as the label terminator SR PA0 2700 Default the character size as a percentage LBRELATIVE of the P1 P2 rectangle move the pen to LABEL SIZE 0 2700 and print RELATIVE LABEL SIZE IP0 0 5500 5500
559. t specified for printing bold the response would be returned as shown below PCL INFO FONTS EXTENDED SELECT lt Esc gt 8U lt Esc gt s0p18 00h0s3b4101T EFID I 002 NAME CG Times Bd LOCTYPE 3 LOCUNIT 1 iw Macro Response The status response for macros inquire entity value field 1 lists all of the macro IDs IDLIST for the macros in the specified location Note Status location type 1 currently selected is an invalid location for macros and returns an error ERROR NONE 16 16 Status Readback EN A macro status response might appear as shown below PCL INFO MACROS IDLIST 1 3 8 29 32 User Defined Pattern Response The status response for user defined patterns inquire entity value field 2 lists all of the user defined pattern IDs IDLIST for the patterns in the specified location A user defined pattern response might appear as shown below PCL INFO PATTERNS IDLIST 1 2 9 13 27 456 If the location type is set to 1 currently selected then LOCTYPE and LOCUNIT lines are added LOCTYPE is returned for a status location type 1 request only It identifies the location type of the currently selected pattern LOCUNIT is returned for a status location type 1 request only It identifies the location unit of the currently selected pattern A user defined pattern response for the currently selecte
560. t with the current ID number 15 E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1500 1500 Move to location 1500 1500 DT LBLaserJet Printers CR LF Define as a label terminator non printing Print LaserJet Printers in the currently selected font which is the default Stick font Carriage Return Line Feed Note label text should not contain carriage returns or any control codes unless specifically desired for plotting It is shown here on two lines with a Carriage Return for convenience only SD4 18 F115 SS Use the SD command to designate an 18 point font from within HP GL 2 mode then select the PCL font with font ID number of 15 as the primary font Then select the primary font for printing LBLaserJetPrinters Print LaserJet Printers in the newly selected font EL 0A Enter the PCL mode EOE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Fl Select Primary Font 23 55 LaserJet Pr inters LaserJet Printers Figure 23 30 Table 23 29 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The Character Group LB Label SA Select Alternate Font SD Standard Font Definition SS Select Standard Font ae X Select Primary Font by ID PCL Commands E c D Assign Font ID E E4 X Select Seconda
561. tallation of a paper tray of the specified size The Page Size command is not supported on the HP LaserJet LaserJet or the LaserJet 500 printers Example To select a legal size page send Ec amp 23A If the current source paper tray is LETTER and the requested page size is not currently available in another non secure source the following attendance message is displayed xx LOAD LEGAL 1 xx A two letter mnemonic depending on the printer When the printer senses the existing paper supply has been removed and replaced with the requested paper size the print job continues automatically Page Size Command 5 3 PAPER SOURCE COMMAND Note The Paper Source command designates the location to feed paper or it prints the current page Ec amp L H OQ Print the current page paper source remains unchanged 1 Feed paper from the a printer specific tray 2 Feed paper from manual input 3 Feed envelope from manual input 4 Feed paper from lower tray 5 Feed from optional paper source 6 Feed envelope from optional envelope feeder 1 Must be used in conjunction with Page Size command envelope selection Default Printer Dependent Configurable from Control Panel Range Printer Dependent Not all HP LaserJet printers support all possible paper sources The implementation of paper source locations varies slightly from printer to printer Refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix
562. te 0 255 pattern byte 15 16 Raster Graphics EN EN Tagged Image File Format Encoding Method 2 Tagged image file format encoding interprets raster data as TIFF Packbits This format combines features of methods 0 and 1 A control byte precedes the raster data pattern bytes The control byte identifies whether the pattern byte s represent a byte that is to be repeated some number of times up to 127 or represent some number of bytes up to 127 which are to be printed as is literal The sign of the number in the control byte identifies whether the byte or bytes that follow represent a literal pattern or byte to be repeated A positive number 1 to 127 indicates that the bytes are literal A negative number 1 to 127 represented by the twos complement indicates a repeated byte The value of the number if positive literal identifies the number of pattern bytes which follow the control byte if negative repeated identifies the number of times to repeat the following byte A pattern byte may be repeated up to 127 times or up to 127 literal bytes may follow the control byte As mentioned for a byte to be repeated the control byte must be a negative value as represented by the twos complement For example to repeat a pattern three times would require the twos complement of the number 3 The twos complement is computed as follows The binary of 3 is 00000011 Complement each bit to get 11111100 then add o
563. techniques for reducing the amount of data needed to define the raster image Chapter 16 Status Readback This chapter describes the PCL status readback features Status readback enables you to obtain PCL status information from the printer such as available printer user memory a list of fonts and symbol sets and the ID numbers of macros and user defined patterns Chapter 17 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics This chapter introduces basic information for HP GL 2 It lists the vector graphics commands and describes the HP GL 2 command syntax An overview of several important topics is also provided such as the PCL Picture Frame concept scaling pen status and location and absolute vs relative pen movement Chapter 18 The Picture Frame This chapter describes how to set up an area on the page for printing vector graphics the PCL Picture Frame It discuses the commands necessary to define and position the picture frame along with the commands used to enter and exit HP GL 2 mode EN Chapter 19 The Configuration and Status Group This chapter describes the commands used to set default conditions and values for programmable HP GL 2 features It also explains the commands used for scaling establishing a soft clip window and rotating the HP GL 2 coordinate system Chapter 20 The Vector Group This chapter provides information about pen movement and drawing lines arcs and circles It also covers a way to
564. tensions not required 29 East Europe extensions required such as ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 East Europe extensions not required 28 Turkish extensions required such as ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 Turkish extensions not required 27 Desktop Publishing extensions required such as Windows 3 1 Desktop Publishing extensions not required 26 Accent extensions required such as ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 Accent extensions not required 25 PCL extensions required such as Roman 8 24 PCL extensions not required Macintosh extensions required such as MC Text Macintosh extensions not required 23 PostScript extensions required such as PS Text PostScript extensions not required 22 Code Page extensions required such as PC 8 2 1 0 001 Code Page extensions not required Unicode Symbol Index Define Symbol Set 10 9 Examples of values for the field include Bit Field Designated Use Value Hex Meaning 0000000000000000 Default requirement MSL symbol set can be used with any typeface indexed bu MSL 8000000000000000 Symbol set MSL requires only the Basic Latin Symbol Collection such as Roman 8 0000000100000000 Symbol set MSL requires only the Dingbat Collection 0000000000000001 Default requirement Unicode symbol set can be used with any typeface indexed bu Unicode 00000000A0000001 Symbol se
565. ter the PCL mode Send a reset to end the job and eject the page EN EA Edge Rectangle Absolute 21 19 Start 75 105 65 95 65 90 45 90 85 65 Figure 21 13 Table 21 9 95 105 95 95 115 130 125 95 125 90 145 90 105 65 Related Commands Group EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative The Polygon Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group 21 20 The Polygon Group EN EP Edge Polygon EN This command outlines the polygon currently stored in the polygon buffer Use EP to edge polygons that you defined in polygon mode and with the Fill Rectangle and Wedge Commands RA RR and WG EP The EP command outlines any polygon that is currently in the polygon buffer This includes wedges and rectangles defined using the EA ER EW RA RR and WG commands EP accesses the data in the polygon buffer but does not clear the buffer or change the data in any way The EP command only edges between points that were defined with the pen down using the current pen line type and attributes When the command execution is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored The following example creates a shape in polygon mode then uses EP to outline it Table 2
566. ter the Start Raster Graphics or Transfer Raster Data commands until the next End Raster Graphics command Only raster data appearing within the intersection of the logical page the printable area and if set the raster width and height is printed Data outside the intersection is clipped Raster Width Command 15 13 Portrait Mode 0 amp 3 Print Direction 90 270 Landscape Mode 0 Print Direction 0 180 Landscape Mode 3 Raster width width of Logical Page Raster width Raster width height of width of Logical Page Logical Page 8 Portrait Mode O Print Direction 90 270 Figure 15 8 Maximum Raster Width Start Raster Graphics Command The Start Raster Graphics command identifies the beginning of the raster data and also specifies the left graphics margin Ec r A 0 Start graphics at default left graphics margin X position 0 1 Start graphics at current cursor position current X position 0 0 1 values outside the range default to 0 Default Range A value of 0 specifies that the left graphics margin is at the default left margin of the page X position 0 A value of 1 specifies that the left graphics margin is at the current X position In presentation mode 3 the location of the left graphics margin varies depending on the orientation Once a Start Raster Graphics command is received by the printer raster graphics resolution raster graphics presentation mode raster height r
567. terchangeably throughout this manual Once a PCL command sets a parameter that parameter remains set until that PCL command is repeated with a new value or the printer is reset to its user default environment For example if you send the printer a command to set line spacing to 3 lines inch each page prints 3 lines inch until the printer receives a different Line Spacing command or the printer is reset What are Printer Commands 1 3 1 4 HP GL 2 Commands HP GL 2 vector graphic commands are two letter mnemonic codes designed to remind you of the function name such as IN for Initialize Following the two letter mnemonic may be one or more parameters which identify details of how to process the command For additional information on HP GL 2 commands refer to Chapters 17 through 23 PJL Commands PJL Printer Job Language commands provide a different type of printer control Unlike PCL and HP GL 2 which control the placement of dots on the printed page PUL supplies job level control One of the main features PJL offers is the ability to switch printer languages personalities between jobs For example applications supporting PJL can print one job using PCL and then print the next job using PostScript or another printer language without any operator intervention PJL also provides two way communications with the printer For example PJL can request information from the printer such as printer model configuration printer
568. terminator DIO 1 LB___1990 Set the label direction to print at 90 and print 1990 DI1 1 LB_1991 Set the label direction to 45 and print 1991 DI1 0 LB_1992 Set the label direction to 0 and print 1992 DI 71 71 Change the label direction using the cosine LB1993 and sine of 315 and print __ 1993 DI 0 1 LB__ 1994 Change the label direction using the cosine CR and sine of 270 and print __ 1994 Carriage Return Dl 71 71 Set the label direction using the cosine and LB 1995 sine of 270 and print __ 1995 Carriage CR Return DI 1 0 LB__ 1996 Set the label direction using the cosine and CRH sine of 180 and print __1996 Carriage Return E 0A Enter the PCL mode EE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page DI Absolute Direction 23 35 op 1990 x 3500 2500 Figure 23 20 Table 23 16 n 1992 Nz o R 9661F i a return Ay oe YOGI Related Commands Group CF Character Fill Mode CP Character Plot DR Relative Direction DV Define Variable Text Path LB Label SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SI Absolute Character Size SL Character Slant SR Relative Character Size The Character Group Table 23 17 POSSIBLE ERROR CONDITIONS Error Condition Printer Response both parameters 0 or number out of range ignores command 23 36 The Characte
569. tern Image 0 c ce eee 13 18 Master X Resolution Ul 00000 ee 13 18 Master Y Resolution Ul 0 0 00 ce ee 13 18 User defined Pattern Example 0 0 cece eee eee 13 19 Set Pattern Reference Point Command 00200 eee eae 13 22 Pattern Control Command 000 ccc eet eee 13 23 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics Rectangular Area Fill Procedure 0 0 cece eee eee 14 1 Horizontal Rectangle Size Decipoints Command 14 3 Horizontal Rectangle Size PCL Units Command 14 3 Vertical Rectangle Size Decipoints Command 2 000 14 4 Vertical Rectangle Size PCL Units Command 200005 14 4 Pattern ID Area Fill ID Command 00000 cee eee 14 5 Fill Rectangular Area Command 000 cee eee 14 9 Pattern Transparency for Rectangular Area Fill 0055 14 11 Rectangular Area Fill Examples 0 00 0 cece eee eee 14 13 Pre defined Pattern Examples 00 00 e eee eee eens 14 13 User defined Pattern Example 00 ccc eee eee eee 14 17 Raster Graphics Raster Graphics Command Sequence 000 0c eee eee 15 4 Raster Graphics Resolution Command 000000 eee eee 15 6 EN Contents 7 Raster Graphics Presentation Mode Command 20 000 15 8 Raster Height Command 0000 ccc eee 15 11 Raster Width Command l
570. terns Fill patterns remain fixed with respect to the current coordinate system The CF command remains in effect until another CF command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions The edge pen width is not specifiable its thickness automatically increases in proportion with the point size CF Character Fill Mode 23 21 The thickness of fill lines for hatching and cross hatch is selected using the PW Pen Width command Due to the way hatching and cross hatch lines are drawn they may extend beyond the character outline by up to 1 2 of the current pen width When using a small pen width and specifying a black edge pen the edging covers up hatching lines that extend outside the character outline However as the pen width increases the edge pen may not be wide enough to compensate for this resulting in a fill that overlaps the character edges To ensure that the character fill looks correct when using hatching patterns use a narrow pen width especially for small point sizes see illustration below Aw Figure 23 10Character Fill Overflowing Table 23 8 Example Using the CF Command EOE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black SD1 21 2 1 4 140 Specify a 140 point Univers Bold font and 5 0 6 3 7 4148 SS select it for printing PA1000 3000 DT Specify absolute plotting and move to 1000 3000 specify
571. ters as graphics commands If the command had been defined otherwise you wouldn t be able to print semicolons in your text The default label terminator is the non printing ASCII end of text character ETX decimal code 3 You must use the label terminator or the printer prints the rest of your file as text instead of executing the commands You can change the label terminator using the Define Label Terminator DT command Enhancing Labels 23 11 Working with the Character Cell In each font the basis for each character or space is the character cell Think of the character cell as a rectangular area around a character that includes blank areas above and to the right of the character Refer to the Figure 23 5 Line Feed iT E 3 cj z li Character wah 1 Origin H Character Plot Baseline Cell Width Figure 23 5 The Character Cell and HP GL 2 Table 23 5 Term Description Baseline The imaginary line on which a line of text rests A characters descender such as the bottom of a lowercase g extends below the baseline Linefeed The distance from the baseline of a line of text to the baseline of the next character line above or below For most fonts the linefeed is about 1 2 times the point size 1 33 times the point size for Stick fonts Point Size Traditional character measure roughly equivalent to the height of a capital letter M plus the depth of a descender 23 12 The Character G
572. ters or any unique area and exits for subsequent filling and or edging Fill polygons using the Fill Polygon FP command and or outline them using the Edge Polygon EP command PM polygon definition or PM Parameter Format Functional Range Default polygon clamped 0 1 and 2 0 definition integer In polygon mode you define the area of the polygon s using graphics commands These commands and associated X Y coordinates are stored in the polygon buffer The polygon is not printed until you exit polygon mode and fill and or outline the area e No Parameters Clears the polygon buffer and enters polygon mode Equivalent to PMO e Polygon Definition Defines polygon mode status as follows e 0Q Clears the polygon buffer and enters polygon mode e 1 Closes the current polygon or subpolygon and remains in polygon mode all commands sent following PM1 but before a PM2 or the next PM1 are stored as one subpolygon e 2 Closes current polygon or subpolygon and exits polygon mode The following paragraphs explain how to use each parameter The order in which you use these commands is very important PMO or PM Use PMO to clear the polygon buffer and enter polygon mode While in polygon mode only certain commands are allowed The following list contains these commands 21 34 The Polygon Group EN Note EN Table 21 19 Polygon Mode Allowable Commands Group D
573. the following features with the remainder of the environment features set to their user default values Paper source Page size Number of copies Orientation Cursor position stack EN Note EN Parallel I O An input output I O interface that transmits more than one bit of information simultaneously in a parallel mode Centronics is an industry wide parallel interface standard Also see Serial I O PCL Commands PCL commands provide access to printer features Once a PCL command sets a parameter that parameter remains set until the same PCL command is repeated with a new value or the printer is reset There are three types of PCL commands control codes two character escape sequences and parameterized escape sequences Also see escape sequences PCL Coordination System Units The units of the X axis of the PCL coordinate system may be dots decipoints or columns The units of the Y axis may be dots decipoints or rows PCL Units These are user definable units of measure which are used in PCL commands affecting various PCL cursor moves The number of units per inch used in PCL cursor moves is determined by the current setting of the Unit of Measure command see Unit of Measure Command in Chapter 4 PCL Units were previously referred to as PCL dots but should not be confused with the printer s physically printed dots Perforation Region The perforation region is the distance from the bott
574. the Polygon Mode PM command discussed in this chapter In polygon mode you can define points with the pen up or down However the Edge Polygon EP command only draws between points defined when the pen was down In contrast the Fill Polygon FP command fills between all points regardless of whether they were defined when the pen was up or down Exception the line connecting two subpolygons is never drawn and is not a fill boundary Filling Polygons There are two methods which can be selected for filling polygons the even odd fill method and the non zero winding fill method Even Odd Fill Method There is a simple way to determine which portions of a single polygon or series of subpolygons is filled when you send a Fill Polygon FP command using the default method 0 fill using even odd rule Draw a straight line extending from any point within an enclosed area of the polygon to a point outside the polygon FP fills the enclosed area in question only if the line you have drawn intersects the edges of the polygon an odd number of times Figure 21 8 illustrates this odd even rule 21 12 The Polygon Group EN The line intersects the polygon once odd filled The line intersects the polygon twice even not filled Single polygon Two subpolygons Figure 21 8 Filling Polygons Even Odd Fill Method Non Zero Winding Fill Method The non zero winding fill algorithm fill method 1 determines whether a point
575. the first and last points of a series of lines are the same they join according to the current line join and miter limit LA Line Attributes 22 17 miter lt miter miter gt miter miter length length limit length limit Mitered Join 1 Mitered beveled Join 2 Formed by two Formed by two lines extending from lines extending from the outer edge of each the outer edge of each vector until vector until they meet If the miter length ex they meet The miter limit applies ceeds the miter limit a beveled join is used to this join 1 2 line width Triangular join 3 Formed by Rounded Join 4 Formed Beveled join 5 two lines extending from the by an arc with a diameter Formed by a line connecting outer edge of each vector to a equal to the current line the outer edge of one vector point 1 2 line width beyond the width to the outer edge of the end Intersection of the vectors other vector Figure 22 12Five Line Joins When you select no join LA2 6 the currently selected line ends for the two lines merely overlap Refer to the following illustration No Join No Join Butt End Square End No Join No Join Triangular End Round End Figure 22 13 Overlapping Line Ends without Line Join Selection 22 18 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Miter Limit The value you specify for miter limit determines the maximum length of a mitered join as shown in the following illustration The miter limit is the
576. the primary font send E s0S To specify an italic style for the secondary font send E s1S AAAAAA Upright Italic Condensed Expanded Outline Inline Pir ae Figure 8 1 Common Font Styles Style Command 8 15 Stroke Weight Command The Stroke Weight command designates the thickness of the strokes that compose the characters of a font Ea s B Primary stroke weight EF s B Secondary stroke weight Default 0 Range 7to 7 less than 7 maps to 7 greater than 7 maps to 7 The value field specifies the thickness of the strokes used in the design of the font The supported stroke weight values are 7 through 7 The thinnest font available is 7 the thickest font available is 7 The standard stroke weight for a medium font is 0 the standard stroke weight for a bold font is 3 the standard stroke weight for a light font is 3 Table 8 2 Stroke Weights Value Typeface 7 Ultra Thin 6 Extra Thin 5 Thin 4 Extra Light 3 Light 2 Demi Light 1 Semi Light 0 Medium Book or Text 1 Semi Bold 2 Demi Bold 3 Bold 4 Extra Bold 5 Black 6 Extra Black 7 Ultra Black 8 16 PCL Font Selection EN Note EN If the specified stroke weight is greater than or equal to 0 and is not available the next thicker available stroke weight is selected If no thicker stroke weight is available the closest available thinner stroke weight is selected If the specifi
577. the user defined pattern associated with that ID number 1 Position the cursor E p300x400Y Moves the cursor to PCL Unit position 300 400 within the PCL coordinate systems 2 Specify the width and height of the rectangle E c600a600B Rectangular Area Fill Examples 14 17 Sets the rectangle width and height both to 600 PCL Units 2 x 2 inches at 300 Units inch 3 Specify the Pattern ID EUtc3G Sets the Pattern ID to 3 4 Print the user defined pattern filled area Eutc5P This example prints as shown in Figure 14 7 N 600 Units ___ i its i 600 Units 2 in 300 Units inch Figure 14 7 User Defined Pattern Fill Example 14 18 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics EN EN D Raster Graphics Introduction A raster image is an image composed of dots Pictures in newspapers or on television screens also a page printed by this printer are examples of raster images The PCL language includes commands for printing raster graphic images These commands enable the LaserJet printer to receive binary data and print it as a raster image The binary data used to create a raster image is divided into dot rows a row describes a one dot high strip of the image Each dot position within a row is represented by a binary data bit If a bit in a row is set to one a dot is printed if the bit is set to zero no dot is printed for that position A dot row of raster image data
578. ther values cause the command to be ignored A transparency mode of 0 transparent means that the white regions of the pattern image are not copied onto the destination A transparency mode of 1 opaque means that the white pixels in the pattern are applied directly onto the destination Note When printing white rules the pattern transparency is treated as if it were opaque white rules erase black rules regardless of the transparency mode Refer to the preceding definitions and the discussion of Figure 13 3 and Figure 14 3 for an explanation of the effects of transparency EN Pattern Transparency Mode Command 13 7 Pattern ID Area Fill ID Command The Pattern ID command formerly called Area Fill ID identifies the specific shading cross hatch or user defined pattern This command is also used for rectangular area fill Refer to Chapter 14 PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics EB c G Table 13 2 Selecting Cross Hatch Selecting Shaded patterns patterns 1 thru2 1 2 shade 1 Pattern 1 3 thru 10 3 10 shade 2 Pattern 2 11 thru 20 11 20 shade 3 Pattern 3 21 thru 35 21 35 shade 4 Pattern 4 36 thru 55 36 55 shade 5 Pattern 5 56 thru 80 56 80 shade 6 Pattern 6 81 thru 99 81 99 shade 100 100 shade Selecting User Defined patterns ID number of user defined pattern 1 Not supported on all LaserJet family printers
579. tialize IN command moves it to the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame You should specify your beginning pen location for each HP GL 2 drawing Pen Status and Location 17 23 Scaling When you scale a drawing you define your own units of measure ment instead of using plotter units the printer converts your units user units to dot positions for placing the image on the page Scaling allows control of the printer using units that are easy for you to work with For example you can scale your drawing to divide the drawing area into 100 squares As you plan the drawing you can think in terms of 100 squares rather than plotter units Here is another example of scaling since 400 plotter units equals 1 centimeter you can establish this scale to print in user units equal to 1 centimeter each Scaling begins with the scaling points P1 and P2 P1 and P2 act as two points marking opposite corners of a rectangle You can make this rectangle any size and place it anywhere in relation to the origin depending on the plotter unit coordinates you specify for P1 and P2 P1 and P2 default to the lower left and upper right corners of the picture frame respectively but you can change their locations using the Input P1 and P2 IP or Input Relative P1 and P2 IR commands After you have defined the positions for P1 and P2 or have accepted the default use this imaginary rectangle to set up scaling for your drawing With the Scale SC co
580. ting a value Table 23 39 Kind Characteristic Default Value Description 1 Symbol Set 277 Roman 8 2 Font Spacing 0 fixed spacing 3 Pitch 9 characters per inch 4 Height 11 5 font point size 5 Posture upright upright 6 Stroke Weight 0 medium 7 Typeface 48 Stick fixed vector e Value Defines the properties of the characteristic specified by the kind parameter When selecting fonts the different characteristics symbol set spacing pitch etc are prioritized as shown in the table above with symbol set being the highest priority and typeface being the lowest The font selection priority is the same for HP GL 2 as for PCL font selection For more information about the priority of font characteristics see the Font Selection by Characteristic discussion in Chapter 8 The following tables list the kind parameters with their associated values note that these tables are also valid for the AD Alternate Font Definition command Kind 1 Symbol Set The symbol set characteristic defines the set of characters to be used in the alternate font For a complete list of symbol set values refer to Appendix C of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide SD Standard Font Definition 23 69 Note Note Stick font is available only in ASCII Roman 8 and Roman Extension symbol sets Kind 2 Font Spacing The font spacing characteristic defines whether the spacing is fixed all characters occupy
581. ting raster images Reset Resets are used to return the printer to a known environment Depending on the type of reset performed the printer returns to either the User Default Environment or the Factory Default Environment A Printer Reset restores the User Default Environment and deletes temporary fonts macros user defined symbol sets and patterns A Printer Reset is performed by sending the E command or through the printer s control panel see the printer User s Manual Glossary 11 Glossary 12 Resolution The high quality output achieved by HP LaserJet printers is due in part to the ability to lay down a fine grid of dots on the page The density of this grid is referred to as the printer s resolution Resolution is expressed as a value of dots per inch Until recently all HP LaserJet family printers printed at a resolution of 300 dots per inch In a one inch square the printer could print a dot anywhere in a grid of up to 300 dots horizontally by 300 dots vertically for a total of 90 000 possible dot locations per square inch 300 x 300 90 000 The LaserJet 4 printer is capable of printing at either 300 or 600 dpi resolution At 600 dots per inch it becomes possible to print up to 360 000 dots per square inch 600 x 600 360 000 Robust Xon The configuration of ROBUST XON determines the method by which Xon signals are generated on the interface If ROBUST XON is ON an Xon is transmitted from the printe
582. tion Both lines extend to the PCL Picture Frame limits or current window X _ Pb Intermediate point PCL Picture location wa Frame Figure 20 11 Table 20 10 Example Using the AT Command EOE Reset the printer EL OB Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black PA1000 100 Specify 1000 100 as the starting PD2500 100 location place the pen down and draw a line to 2500 100 PU650 1150 Lift the pen move to 650 1150 PD1000 1150 place the pen down and draw a line to 1000 1150 EN AT Absolute Arc Three Point 20 17 Table 20 10 Example Using the AT Command continued PU650 450 PD1000 450 Lift the pen move to 650 450 place the pen down and draw a line to 1000 450 PU1000 100 PD1000 1500 2500 1500 Lift the pen move to 1000 100 place the pen down draw a line to 1000 1500 then to 2500 1500 AT3200 800 2500 100 Print an arc starting at current pen position 2500 1500 passing through 3200 800 and ending at 2500 100 PU3200 900 PD AT3300 800 3200 700 Lift the pen move to 8200 900 and set the pen down Print an arc starting at the current pen position passing through 3300 800 and ending at 3200 700 PU3300 800 PD3500 800 Lift the pen move to 3300 800 pen down and draw a line to 3500 800 E A Enter the PCL mode EE Send a reset
583. tion CAP is moved to the appropriate logical page limit The value field is valid to two decimal places 6 6 Cursor Positioning EN Horizontal Cursor Positioning PCL Units Command Note EN This Horizontal Cursor Positioning command moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis Ec p X Number of PCL Units Default NA Range 0 logical page right bound A value field with a plus sign indicates the new position is to the right of and relative to the current cursor position a minus sign indicates the new position is to the left of and relative to the current cursor position No sign indicates an absolute distance which is referenced from the left edge of the logical page The left most position is 0 and the right most position is the right bound of the logical page If a request is made for a location outside the printer s logical page the current active position CAP is moved to the appropriate logical page limit The current unit size used in PCL Unit moves is determined by the value specified in the Unit of Measure command If no other value is specified the number of units per inch for PCL Unit moves is one unit equals 1 300 inch Horizontal Cursor Positioning PCL Units Command 6 7 Horizontal Cursor Positioning Control Codes Four control codes can be used to position the cursor horizontally on the current line These control codes are explained below Note The distance
584. tion Command byte values are shown below Table 15 9 Value Compression Operation 0 Unencoded 1 Run Length Encoding 2 Tagged Image File Format TIFF rev 4 0 3 Delta row 4 Empty row 5 Duplicate row Set Compression Method Command 15 25 For command byte values 0 3 the two lt of bytes rows gt bytes specify the number of bytes row length for the row For command byte values 4 and 5 these bytes identify the number of empty or duplicate rows to print The maximum value for these two bytes is 65 535 however the image is clipped to the logical page Thus the value of these bytes should not exceed the maximum number of bytes rows that can be printed on the current logical page size If an out of range command byte is encountered the remainder of the block is skipped the cursor is not updated and the seed row is cleared Compression methods 0 3 are the compression methods used by the Set Compression Method command Value fields 4 and 5 are features for the adaptive compression method and are explained below Empty Row A command byte of 4 empty row causes a row of zero s to be printed The number of rows printed depends on the value contained in the two lt of bytes rows gt bytes following the command byte The empty row operation resets the seed row to zero and updates the cursor position Duplicate Row A command byte of 5 duplicate row causes the previous row to be
585. tion to the start of the wedge s arc Since the wedge is a portion of a circle this parameter is the radius of the circle It specifies the distance from the current pen location which becomes the center of the circle to any point on the circumference of the circle e The radius is interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off The sign of the radius or determines the location of the zero degree reference point The illustration following the parameter descriptions shows the location of the zero degree reference point for a positive and negative radius e Start Angle Specifies the beginning point of the arc as the number of degrees from the zero degree reference point A positive start angle positions the radius in the positive direction the direction from the X axis toward the Y axis from the zero degree reference point a negative start angle positions the radius in a negative direction from the zero degree reference point If you specify a start angle greater than 360 a start angle equal to the remainder of the start angle 360 is used 21 46 The Polygon Group EN e Sweep Angle Specifies in degrees the angle through which the arc is drawn A positive angle draws the angle in the positive direction angle of rotation X axis to the Y axis a negative angle draws the angle in the negative direction X axis to the Y axis Note the relation of the X ax
586. tion and popped in another can result in a position that is outside the logical page If the position popped is outside the current logical page the position is moved to the appropriate logical page limit Push Pop Cursor Position Command 6 15 6 16 Cursor Positioning EN Fonts Introduction A font is a group of symbols that have similar characteristics A font is described by its symbol set spacing height pitch style stroke weight typeface and orientation A typical document is printed using several fonts A large font may be used for the title and chapter headings of a document a standard size font may be used for the body of the document and key words or phrases may be highlighted using a bold or italic font For example this text is printed using a Century Schoolbook typeface its height is 10 point its style is upright and its stroke weight is medium Examples of different fonts are shown in Figure 7 1 Courier 12 pitch 10 point abcde fABCDEF12345 amp CG Times 12 point abcdefABCDEF 12345 amp CG Times Bold Italic 14 point abcdefABCDEF12345 amp Univers Medium 14 point abcdefABCDEF12345 amp Univers Bold 24 point abcdefABCDEF12345 amp Figure 7 1 Font Samples Introduction 7 1 A font must be selected for printing by the user One font is selected at a time It is selected by identifying the specific characteristics of the font Font selection commands identify font character
587. tion and up down status are restored e X Y Coordinates Specify the opposite corner of the rectangle from the current pen location The current pen location is the starting point of the rectangle Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Note The following illustration shows the current pen location in the lower left corner and the command s X Y coordinates in the upper right corner Depending on the coordinate values the points can be in any two diagonally opposite corners EN EA Edge Rectangle Absolute 21 17 Note 2500 1500 0 0 Figure 21 12 Any line drawn along the border of the effective window causes the line to be clipped producing a line width one half of the defined pen width For example all the lines drawn in the above example are half the width of the other lines since they are clipped at the window borders The only difference between the EA command and the RA Fill Rectangle Absolute command is that the EA command produces an outlined rectangle and RA a filled one The EA command clears the polygon buffer and then uses it to define the rectangle before drawing Refer to Drawing Polygons at the beginning of this chapter for more information The following example uses absolute coordinates to draw some rectangles The same image is drawn later using the ER command instead Compare this example with the ER example to u
588. tion identifiers are printer specific Refer to Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for printer specific values for n Since temporary soft fonts do not have an internal ID number they cannot be selected as the default from the control panel or PJL NONE is returned as their DEFID NONE The font s internal ID number is assigned to fonts by the printer This number is different than the soft font download ID number assigned to a downloaded font using the Font ID Ee c D command Entity Status Responses 16 15 NAME is returned for font extended status requests only It identifies the name of the font such as Courier Times Roman Univers etc and its treatment such as Balt bold italic as listed in the font printout For example the font extended response for the printer s internal bitmap Line Printer font and a downloaded unbound CG Palacio temporary font would be returned as shown below PCL INFO FONTS EXTENDED SELECT lt Esc gt 8U lt Esc gt s0p10 00h12 0v0sOb0T DEFID I 45 NAME Line Printer SELECT lt Esc gt slp__v1ls3b4111T lt Esc gt 7X S D N S YMBOLSETS 0D 01 0N 0S 0U 1E 1F 1G EFID NONE AME CG Palacio Bd It ELECT 0 Or for example a font extended response with the location type set to 1 currently selected where the currently selected font is the internal CG Times 18 poin
589. tmap 2 Compressed Bitmap 3 Contour Intellifont Scalable 4 Compound Contour Intellifont Scalable 15 TrueType Scalable These are described later in this chapter Character Descriptor Formats 11 53 Class 1 Bitmap Data Class 1 or bitmap raster character data is a string of bytes containing the dot per bit image of the character no data compression If a bit is set to one the corresponding dot is printed The data is grouped in dot rows A row describes a one dot high strip of the character from left to right in the direction of the printer s raster scan see the Portrait Bitmap Character Data Example at the end of this chapter Zeroed bits must be added to the end of each row to make it contain an integral number of bytes The dot rows are organized from top to bottom of the character For example the first dot row of data corresponds to the top dot row of the character The number of bytes of the character data should be exactly Character Width in bytes times Character Height If more data is received it is discarded if less data is received the character consists of only the data downloaded Class 2 Compressed Bitmap Data For a compressed bitmap character the data is composed of a string of bytes using a run length encoding with line repetition compressed format see Figure 11 2 The first byte indicates the number of times the first raster row is repeated after its initial occurrence It is assume
590. to end the job and eject the page 650 1150 3300 800 1000 100 Figure 20 12 20 18 The Vector Group EN Table 20 11 Related Commands Group AA Arc Absolute The Vector Group AR Arc Relative BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width BR Bezier Relative EN This command draws bezier curves using relative coordinates This command uses the current pen position as the first control point and specifies the other three control points as relative increments from the first point BR X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 Parameter Format Functional Range Default X4 Y4 control points current 2 5 to 293 1 no default units The BR command uses the current pen location and three specified control points to draw a bezier curve After each new Bezier the last control point of the previous curve becomes the first control point of the next Bezier All curve control points are relative to the first control point of that curve For example points 1 2 and 3 of the example are relative to the starting point while points 4 5 and 6 are relative to point 3 BR Bezier Relative 20 19 Bezier curves are drawn with the current pen line type current line attributes and pen state up down The curve is clipped to the hard clip limits and th
591. tor Group EN Table 20 28 Example Using the PR Command EGE Reset the printer EL B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing PA10 10 PD Move to absolute position 10 10 and put the pen down PR2500 0 2500 Specify relative plotting and draw lines 1500 0 1500 beginning at 10 10 and then moving the relative coordinate distances indicated E A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 2500 1500 Start Figure 20 20 Note If an odd number of coordinates is specified an X coordinate without a corresponding Y coordinate the printer ignores the last unmatched coordinate EN PR Plot Relative 20 45 Table 20 29 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width SM Symbol Mode Line and Fill Attributes Group U Pen Up This command moves to subsequent points without drawing Use PU to move to another location without drawing a connecting line PU X Y or PU Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates current increments units 230 to 230 _ 4 no default The PU command emulates a pen plotter which must raise the pen to prevent drawing stray lines on the page e No Parameters P
592. ts or rows and columns do not use margins Margins are intended for print and space i e CR LF FF applications Vertical decipoint dot and row positioning allows the cursor to be moved into the perforation region The top margin is the reference point for absolute vertical positioning The left edge of the logical page is the reference point for absolute horizontal positioning The current active position CAP is the reference point for relative vertical and horizontal positioning Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on cursor positioning Character spacing information for proportionally spaced fonts can be obtained in several ways The preferred method is using Hewlett Packard s AutoFont Support AutoFont Support is a standard method for identifying font information It provides basic font information including spacing information in AutoFont format in a file with a TFM tagged font metric extension AutoFont support files can be created for any soft font using Hewlett Packard s Type Director 2 0 and later AutoFont support for Hewlett Packard s newer font cartridge products are furnished as TFM files on a disk Character spacing information for proportionally spaced fonts is available from Hewlett Packard Spacing information can be obtained from Hewlett Packard s Type Director 2 0 typeface and font management program Character spacing information can also be obtained from listings generated through the o
593. ttern permanent last ID specified 0 0 5 values outside the range are ignored Default Range For value fields 2 4 and 5 the Pattern ID Ec c G command is sent prior to the Pattern Control command to identify the specific pattern for the Pattern Control command action EN Pattern Control Command 13 23 13 24 The PCL Print Model EN Note EN PCL Rectangular Area Fill Graphics Introduction The PCL language includes commands for filling or shading rectangular areas on the page with pre defined patterns and allows creation and use of user defined patterns Pre defined patterns include eight shading patterns and six cross hatch patterns User defined patterns are not supported on all LaserJet family printers Refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in the PCL 5 Comparison Guide The first step in filling an area if using a user defined pattern is to download the pattern see Chapter 13 Next position the cursor using cursor move commands and specify the dimension of the area using the horizontal and vertical rectangle size commands The cursor identifies the upper left corner of the rectangular fill area Once the rectangle size and position are identified select the specific pattern shading level Figure 14 1 cross hatch pattern Figure 14 2 or user defined pattern to be used for filling the rectangular area Finally the command is issued to fill the defined rectangular area Once a user de
594. ttern was designed Master Y Resolution Ul The Master Y Resolution field is the pixel resolution in the Y scan direction at which the pattern was designed 13 18 The PCL Print Model EN User defined Pattern Example This example shows how the user defined pattern command is used to create a user defined patterns For this example a pattern of triangles is used The first step is to design the base pattern triangle in this case using 64 bytes of data The base pattern binary data is shown below 1121211111111111111111111111111111 01111111111111111111111111111110 00111111111111111111111111111100 00011111111111111111111111111000 00001111111111111111111111110000 00000111111111111111111111100000 00000011111111111111111111000000 00000001111111111111111110000000 00000000111111111111111100000000 00000000011111111111111000000000 00000000001111111111110000000000 00000000000111111111100000000000 00000000000011111111000000000000 00000000000001111110000000000000 00000000000000111100000000000000 00000000000000011000000000000000 This translates into the following 64 bytes in hexadecimal values Table 13 5 FF FF FF FF 7F FF FF FE 3F FF FF FC 1F FF FF F8 OF FF FF FO 07 FF FF EO 03 FF FF CO 01 FF FF 80 00 FF FF 00 00 7F FE 00 00 3F FC 00 00 1F F8 00 00 OF FO 00 00 07 EO 00 00 03 Co 00 00 01 80 00 User Defined Pattern Command 13 19 When using the 300 dpi User Defined Pattern header
595. ture frame 18 8 The Picture Frame EN Example To specify a horizontal picture frame size of 5 inches send E c3600X 5 in x 720 decipoints in 3600 decipoints Vertical Picture Frame Size Decipoints This PCL command specifies the vertical dimension of the window used for printing an HP GL 2 plot Ea cHY Vertical size in decipoints 1 720th inch Default The distance between the default top and bottom margins the default text length Range 0 32767 valid to 4 decimal places Note The vertical dimension specified is parallel to the PCL Y axis when the print direction is set to 0 degrees the default Example To specify a vertical picture frame size of 6 5 inches send E c4680Y 6 5 in x 720 decipoints in 4680 decipoints EN Vertical Picture Frame Size Decipoints 18 9 Set Picture Frame Anchor Point Note This command sets the location of the PCL Picture Frame anchor point to the PCL cursor position Ee ooT Default 0 Range 0 The position of the picture frame anchor point defines the location of the upper left corner of the PCL Picture Frame The upper left refers to the corner for which X and Y coordinates are minimized when the print direction is 0 A parameter value of zero Ec c0T specifies that the picture frame anchor point should be set to the cursor position Sending a cursor move command prior to sending this command places the picture frame anchor in the desired
596. ue of the font A PCL point is 5 0 01389 inch It combines with Height Extended to specify the design height of the font in 1024 dot fonts designed at 300 dpi For example a 10 point font at 300 dpi has a height of 166 quarter dots radix dots 1200 quarter dots inch 5 inch point as calculated 10 point 1 inch 300 dots 4 quarter dots 72 point inch dot e 69 061 The remainder 0 667 is converted back to dots and then to 1024t dot for a value of 170 1024 dot for the Height Extended field similar to that shown in the example for Pitch above Intellifont Scalable Specifies the master design height of the font in points A typical value for this field is 2000 TrueType Scalable Set the Height field to zero xHeight Ul Bitmap Font Specifies the height of the lower case x in quarter dots radix dots Scalable Fonts Specifies the distance from the baseline to the lower case x height in design units 11 22 Soft Font Creation EN EN Width Type SB Specifies the proportionate width of characters in the font Table 11 13 Width Type Values Value Width Type 5 Ultra Compressed 4 Extra Compressed 3 Compressed or Extra Condensed 2 Condensed 0 Normal 2 Expanded 3 Extra Expanded Additional width types may be added by HP Style LSB UB The least significant byte LSB of the Style word Refer to Style MSB for a description of the Styl
597. ued PRO 800 FT3 50 RR400 400 Enter the relative plotting mode and move 800 plu in the Y direction and select fill type 3 parallel lines Draw a rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner the upper right corner is 400 plu to the right and 400 plu up from the lower left corner PRO 400 FT4 RR400 400 Move 400 plu up and select fill type 4 cross hatching Draw a rectangle using the current pen position as the lower left corner and a point 400 plu to the right and 400 plu up as the upper right corner PA1200 400 FT RR400 800 ER400 800 Move to absolute location 1200 400 and select the default fill type solid black Draw and edge a rectangle that begins at the current pen position and extends 400 plu to the right then 800 plu up from there PRO 800 FT3 50 Move 800 plu up from the current position 21 44 The Polygon Group RR400 400 and select fill type 3 parallel lines with 50 plu ER400 400 between each line Draw a rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner and a point 400 plu up and 400 plu to the right as the upper right corner Edge the rectangle PRO 400 FT4 Move 400 plu up from the current pen position RR400 400 Select fill type 4 cross hatching Draw a ER400 400 rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner the right corner being 400 400 relative plotter units away 0A Enter the PCL mode 2 E S
598. uiring a cursor position command for each character printed When printing graphics the cursor can also be positioned at a new location These new positions are identified in the graphics sections HP GL 2 vector graphics has its own HP GL 2 cursor referred to as the pen that can be positioned within the HP GL 2 addressable area For additional information on HP GL 2 pen positioning refer to Chapter 17 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics Introduction 6 1 Absolute vs Relative Cursor Positioning Either absolute or relative motion can be specified Absolute motion always specifies the distance to move referenced from the top margin at the left bound of the logical page 0 0 regardless of the current active position CAP see Figure 6 1 An unsigned value field in a cursor position command indicates absolute cursor movement Relative motion specifies the distance to move referenced from the current active position CAP see Figure 6 1 A signed value field in a cursor position command indicates relative cursor movement 0 0 a a eee Kivi ya OXF AaYe Y Absolute Movement _ i X1 X2 Y1 Y2 Relative Movement Horizontal Cursor Value X2 Vertical Cursor Value Y2 X1 Y1 initial cursor position before the move Figure 6 1 Absolute and Relative Cursor Positioning 6 2 Cursor Positioning EN Cursor Positioning Units Cursor positioning is do
599. ult 2 3 raster graphics printing 15 6 response status see also status readback 16 11 16 22 reverse landscape orientation 5 5 reverse portrait orientation 5 5 RF command 22 32 Right Margin command 5 14 RO command 17 17 19 24 19 34 RO command 19 28 robust Xon Glossary 12 ROM based font 7 2 8 3 macros 12 8 Rotate Coordinate System RO command 17 17 19 24 19 28 19 34 rotation fonts 7 8 row Glossary 12 row height 5 22 rows and columns 2 5 6 4 rows zeroed in raster graphics 15 2 RP command 19 39 RR command 21 4 21 42 RT command 20 7 20 48 example 20 49 rule Glossary 12 black 13 12 white 13 12 run and rise measuring 23 31 run length adaptive compression 15 25 encoding character data 11 54 raster graphics compression 15 16 S SA command 23 66 SB command 23 31 23 67 SC command 17 20 17 24 19 4 19 15 19 40 SC possible error conditions table 19 46 scalable defined Glossary 12 bound font header 11 10 character descriptor 11 62 compound character 11 62 fonts 7 2 7 9 11 2 23 20 fonts status readback 16 12 typeface 7 9 unbound font also see unbound font 9 8 unbound font header 11 11 Scalable or Bitmap Fonts command 23 31 23 67 Scale command 17 20 17 24 19 4 19 15 19 40 scale factor font header 11 34 scaling 17 24 effect on current units 17 11 parameters 19 45 picture frame scaling factor 18 1 points P1 and P2 17 24 19 4 possible error conditions for SC table 19 46
600. umbers for TrueType unbound scalable fonts Note Access to those codes which are unprintable yet have a character defined requires the use of the Transparent Print Data command refer to Chapter 8 for more information Style MSB UI The Style MSB byte 4 is combined with the Style LSB byte 23 to make the style word The contents of the style word are described below The Style word decimal is calculated using the formula Style Word Posture 4 x Width 32 x Structure The binary structure of the Style word is shown below 7 Style MSB 0 7 Style LSB 9 15 9 4 1 0 Table 11 10 Value Posture StyleWord partial sum 0 Upright 1 Italic 2 Alternate Italic 3 Reserved 11 16 Soft Font Creation EN EN Table 11 11 Value Appearance Width multiply by 4 for StyleWord partial sum 0 Normal os Condensed Compressed or Extra Condensed Extra Compressed Ultra Compressed Reserved Extended or Expanded NIOJ oO BR wy Table 11 12 Extra Extended or Extra Expanded Value Structure multiply by 32 for StyleWord partial sum 0 Solid 1 Outline Inline Contour Distressed edge effects Solid with Shadow Outline with Shadow oOo oa BR OJN Inline with Shadow Contour with Shadow 8 11 Patterned complex patterns subject to type
601. und font has the capacity to be bound to a set of symbols selected from a complementary symbol index such as the MSL or Unicode symbol indexes Each symbol in the index is identified by a unique MSL number Appendix D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide contains the MSL symbol index Negative angle of rotation An angle used to create a plot in HP GL 2 which is rotated in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis Note that the relationship of the X axis to the Y axis can change as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a negative angle of rotation See Drawing Arcs in Chapter 20 for more information Non volatile RAM Random Access Memory whose contents are preserved following a power failure volatile RAM is memory whose contents are not preserved when the device is powered off Non volatile RAM is generally used to preserve configured vs programmed device state information Off line On line On line is a condition when the printer will accept data from the host computer When the printer is on line the ON LINE lamp is lit When off line the printer will not accept data from the host Orientation The orientation of characters on a page if the print is across the width of the page it is portrait oriented if the print is across the length of the page it is landscape oriented Overlay Environment The overlay environment consists of the current settings for
602. ure 21 11 Counting the Points in a Circle or Arc When a circle or arc defines a polygon the number of points depends on the number of chords in the arc There is always one more point than the number of chords because the starting location is counted again as the ending location Use the following formula to determine the number of points used to draw a circle or arc Arc Ang of Points tc Angle degrees Chord Angle degrees Using this formula a full circle with the default chord angle of 5 consists of 73 points 360 5 1 73 and a 45 arc with a chord angle of 3 consists of 16 points 45 3 1 16 If the chord angle does not divide evenly into the arc round up to the next integer before adding one 45 2 1 23 1 24 In polygon mode the smaller a circle s chord angle the more chords will be stored in the polygon buffer to draw it 21 16 The Polygon Group EN EA Edge Rectangle Absolute This command defines and outlines a rectangle using absolute coordinates Use EA when drawing charts or schematic diagrams that require rectangles EA xX Y Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates current units 230 to 230 1 no default The EA command defines and edges a rectangle using absolute coordinates and the current pen line type and line attributes The EA command performs an automatic pen down When the command execution is complete the original pen loca
603. ursor position remains the same as before the page eject The HP GL 2 pen position is not affected by a Form Feed it occupies the same position on the next page PG Advance Full Page 19 33 RO Rotate Coordinate System This command rotates the printer s coordinate system relative to the default HP GL 2 coordinate system in the following increments of rotation 90 180 and 270 Use RO to orient your drawing vertically or horizontally or to reverse the orientation RO angle or RO 7 Parameter Format Default Functional Range angle clamped integer 0 90 180 or 270 0 The printer interprets the command parameters as follows e No Parameter Defaults the orientation of the coordinate system to 0 Equivalent to ROO This is the same as PCL s current orientation e Angle Specifies the degree of rotation 0 Sets the orientation to PCL s current orientation 90 Rotates and shifts the coordinate system 90 degrees ina positive angle of rotation from PCLs current orientation 180 Rotates and shifts the coordinate system 180 degrees ina positive angle of rotation from PCLs current orientation 270 Rotates and shifts the coordinate system 270 degrees ina positive angle of rotation from PCLs current orientation Angle of Rotation Note A positive angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis as shown below A negative angle of r
604. urve is clipped to the hard clip limits and the soft clip window Following the command execution the current pen position is updated to the end point of the curve The BZ command is allowed in Polygon Mode The first chord after PM1 is not treated as a pen up move e X4 Y4 Specify the location of the second X4 Y4 third Xo Yo and fourth X3 Y3 control points as absolute coordinates Table 20 14 Example Using the BZ Command Bezier Absolute EOE Reset the printer EL OB Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing 20 22 The Vector Group EN EN Table 20 14 Example Using the BZ Command Bezier Absolute PA1016 5080 Specify the absolute point 1016 5080 as the starting location PR PD Specify relative plotting and pen down BZ1016 8128 5588 5080 4572 7112 4064 8128 7112 7620 7112 2032 Draw a Bezier using the current position 1016 5080 as the first control point The specified control points for the first curve are 1016 8128 5588 5080 and 4572 7112 The second curve uses the last control point of the previous curve as the first control point 4572 7112 The other three control points for the second curve are 4064 8128 7112 7620 and 7112 2032 EQ OA Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job an
605. us Group Figure 22 17 first shows the line type patterns then gives the pattern percentages Note Do not use an adaptive line type when drawing circles arcs wedges or polygons The printer attempts to draw the complete pattern in every chord there are 72 chords in a circle using the default chord angle EN LT Line Type 22 25 No Parameter Default Value 8 7 Fixed 8 line A type ypes 3 2 1 g 1 2 Adaptive 3 line 4 types 5 6 7 8 ey yommancaemas One Pattern Length 8 50 10 O 10 10 10 O 10 7 70 10 0 10 O 10 6 50 10 10 10 10 10 5 70 10 10 10 4 80 10 0 10 3 70 30 2 50 50 1 0 100 0 Pattern Percentages 4 0 100 0 9 25 50 25 3 35 30 35 40 10 O 10 40 4 35 10 10 10 35 5 25 10 10 10 10 10 25 6 35 10 0 10 0 10 35 af 25 10 O 10 10 10 O 10 25 Figure 22 17Line Type Patterns and Pattern Percentages e Pattern Length Specifies the length of one complete line pattern either as a percentage of the diagonal distance between the scaling points P1 and P2 or in millimeters see mode below You must specify a length greater than zero or the printer ignores the command If you do not specify a length the printer uses the last value specified e Mode Specifies how the values of the pattern length parameter are interpreted If you do not specify a mode the printer uses the last value specified Values other than 0 or 1 invalidate the command e 0 Relativ
606. users can design their own patterns area fill These user defined patterns are downloaded to the printer and controlled using three new commands e User Defined Pattern c W data e Set Pattern Reference Point p R e Pattern Control p Q lt Unknown gt lt list gt gt User Defined Pattern Implementation To create a user pattern a user defines a binary raster data image as a base pattern This base pattern is downloaded to the printer using the User Defined Pattern command Prior to downloading the pattern a Pattern ID command is sent to assign the user pattern an ID number This ID number is used to select the pattern for printing and for pattern management To apply the pattern to an image the printer duplicates or tiles like placing ceramic tiles the pattern across and down the page This pattern can be applied to any image or used as rectangular area fill Width _ Height Figure 13 6 User Defined Base Pattern Example A user defined pattern may be applied to any image in the same manner as the internal cross hatch or shade patterns EN User Defined Pattern Graphics 13 13 Left Printable Area Boundary Top of Physical Page Left Logical Page i Boundary Page Default Pattern Reference Point 0 0 Top Margin To Logical Page Boundary To Logical Page Boundary Figure 13 7 Pattern Layout Acros
607. ven though an E command automatically executes an IN command Once HP GL 2 mode is entered and commands are issued the HP GL 2 conditions are no longer initialized To place HP GL 2 into the default state send the IN command IN Initialize 19 21 The IN command sets the printer to the same conditions as the DF command plus the following Raises the pen PU Returns the pen location to the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame PAO 0 Cancels drawing rotation RO Sets P1 and P2 to the lower left and upper right corners respectively of the PCL Picture Frame IP Sets pen width mode to metric units are millimeters WU Sets the pen width to 0 35 mm PW Sets number of pens to 2 black 1 and white 0 Table 19 9 Affected Commands Group DF RO IP Configuration Status Group PD PU Vector Group WU PW Line and Fill Attributes Group Table 19 10 Related Commands Group DF Default Values Configuration Status Group 19 22 The Configuration and Status Group EN IP Input P1 and P2 This command establishes new or default locations for the scaling points P1 and P2 P1 and P2 are used by the Scale SC command to establish user unit scaling You can also use IP in advanced techniques such as printing mirror images enlarging reducing drawings and enlarging reducing relative character size or changing label direction see the previous discussion in this chapter
608. verage width may be weighted on the basis of relative frequency Bitmap Font Specified in quarter dots radix dots Scalable Font Specified in design units Font Header Format 11 29 First Code Ul First Code specifies the character code of the first printable character in the font This value is between 0 and 255 inclusive The Space Character may be printable and will print an image if one is defined otherwise a Space control code is executed Currently PCL 5 LaserJet printers use the Font Type field to determine the first and last codes of the symbol set as shown below Table 11 22 Font Type First Code Last Code 0 32 127 1 32 127 160 255 2 0 255 10 Set to 0 for unbound font 11 Set to 0 for unbound font Last Code Number of Characters UI Bound Font Specifies the last code in the font This value may be greater than the last code of the symbol set as implied by the font type because there may be components of compound characters that are not part of the symbol set but must be downloaded The printable codes are implied by the font type refer to first code described above Unbound Font For an unbound font type 10 or 11 this field specifies the maximum number of characters that can be down loaded into the font Pitch Extended UB Bitmap Font This is an addition to the Pitch field which extends the pitch an extra eight bits The value of this field is in font de
609. vocation macro deletion and make macro permanent or temporary commands are ignored The macro enabled for auto macro overlay is executed on each page until the macro is disabled or deleted a reset occurs EcE UEL or control panel or the page length page size or orientation is changed When the modified print environment is restored upon exiting a called or overlaid macro if the page length page size or the orientation has changed or the primary or secondary font has been deleted the following occurs 1 Ifthe original page length or page size is different than the current page length and page size the current page is closed and printed the page length and page size are changed to their original value and the cursor is positioned at the left edge of the logical page at the top margin on the following page 2 Ifthe primary or secondary font is deleted a new primary or secondary font is automatically selected from the remaining fonts using the current font characteristics HP GL 2 is supported within a macro on some printers refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide HP GL 2 implementation within macros matches that of PCL Macro problems can often be avoided by first ensuring that the data formats outside the macro environment 24 8 Programming Hints EN HP GL 2 Vector Graphics There are different approaches commands and techniques that can be used to create an
610. ween Edge of the Physical Page and Edge of Default HP GL 2 Picture Frame Width of the Printable Area A 2 G Length of the Printable Area B 2 G Table 2 1 Portrait Logical Page amp Printable Area Boundaries DIMENSIONS at 300 DPI double for 600 DPI PAPER SIZE A B C D E F G H LETTER 2550 3300 2400 3300 75 0 50 150 Legal List 1 2550 4200 2400 4200 75 0 50 150 LEDGER 3300 5100 3150 5100 75 0 50 150 EXECUTIVE 2175 3150 2025 3150 75 0 50 150 A4 2480 3507 2338 3507 71 0 50 150 A3 3507 4960 3365 4960 71 0 50 150 COM 10 1237 2850 1087 2850 75 0 50 150 MONARCH 1162 2250 1012 2250 75 0 50 150 C5 1913 2704 1771 2704 71 0 50 150 B5 2078 2952 1936 2952 71 0 50 150 DL 1299 2598 1157 2598 71 0 50 150 EN Printable Area 2 7 Printable Area I Physical Page Logical Page HP GL 2 Default Picture Frame Physical Page Width Physical Page Length Logical Page Width Maximum Logical Page rage Distance Between the Side Edge of the Physical Page and the Logical Page F Distance Between the Top Bottom Edge of the Physical Page and the Logical Page G Distance Between the Edge of the Physical Page and the ae Area H Distance Between Edge Physical Page and Edge wh Default HP GL 2 Picture Frame moov nannan Width of the Printable Area A 2 G Length of the Printable Area B 2 G Table 2 2 Landscape Logical Page amp Printable Area Boundaries
611. when a line of text reaches the right margin E amp s C 0 Enables End of Line Wrap 1 Disables End of Line Wrap When end of line wrap is enabled a character or space that moves the cursor to the right of the right margin executes a CR LF prior to the printing of the character or space When end of line wrap is disabled a character or space that would move the cursor to the right of the right margin may be clipped refer to Chapter 2 When a character is clipped the cursor is set to the right margin The primary use of this command is with display functions mode The factory default is end of line wrap disabled Example To enable end of line wrap mode send E amp S0C Display Functions Mode The Display Functions Mode command allows all escape sequences and control codes to be printed instead of being executed Pa Y Enables Display Functions Mode Ec Z Disables Display Functions Mode 24 12 Programming Hints EN Note Note EN When the printer is in display functions mode all control codes and escape sequences are printed and not executed with the following exceptions e CR is printed and executed as CR LF e EoZ is printed and executed Display functions mode instructs the printer to display rather than execute the data it receives The data is printed using the current text area and selected font To print characters 0 7 15 and 27 in fonts which have printable characters in these positi
612. which the cursor is moved by the Space SP Backspace BS and Horizontal Tab HT control codes is defined by the current HMI value The current unit of measure setting affects how HMI values are rounded For example if the unit of measure is set to 96 one PCL Unit 1 96 inch then the HMI is rounded to the nearest 1 96 inch If the unit of measure is set to 300 one PCL Unit 1 300 inch the HMI is rounded to the nearest 1 300 inch CR Carriage Return Moves the current active position CAP to the left margin on the current line Refer to Line Termination Command later in this chapter SP Space Moves the current active position CAP to the right by one column position Space may be a printable character or a control code Ifa character is defined for the Space code Space is printable otherwise it is a control code For proportionally spaced fonts a Space control code moves the cursor by the current HMI value however a printable space moves the cursor the width of the character For fixed pitch fonts a space whether control code or printable moves the cursor according to the HMI value 6 8 Cursor Positioning EN EN BS Backspace Moves the current active position CAP left a distance equal to the width of the last printed symbol or space If the active position is already at the left margin no action is taken If the cursor is currently beyond the right margin BS positions the cursor just to the left
613. y 11 printing patterns shading 13 8 priority characteristics 8 1 font location 8 24 programming errors common 24 15 hints 24 1 languages with HP GL 2 17 13 status readback 16 27 proportion maintaining in scaled plots 19 8 proportional fonts 23 13 23 15 23 73 HP GL 2 23 74 defined 7 4 proportional spacing 8 9 proportional spacing font selection 8 23 PU command 20 46 Push Pop Cursor Positioning command 6 14 PW command 22 5 22 29 23 21 Q quality font header 11 28 R RA command 21 4 21 39 radius in drawing arcs 21 28 RAM fonts 7 2 8 3 Raster Fill Definition RF 22 32 raster graphics 15 1 15 5 defined Glossary 11 adaptive compression 15 25 binary data 15 1 clipping 15 11 command sequence 15 4 compression 15 16 15 23 Glossary 2 compression example 15 19 15 24 compression coding efficiency 15 19 compression TIFF Encoding 15 17 compression byte counts 15 29 data block 15 25 data compressions reduction 15 13 delta row compression 15 16 15 20 End command 15 30 example 15 31 Height command 15 11 image 15 1 left margin 15 14 memory usage 15 6 orientation 15 8 presentation 15 14 Presentation command 15 8 presentation mode 15 15 24 7 printable area 15 5 printing zeroed row 15 23 raster area 15 2 raster area height 15 11 raster fill 22 9 Raster Fill Definition RF 22 32 Raster Y Offset command 15 15 repeating row 15 23 resolution 15 14 15 15 24 7 Resolution command 15 6 run length data compres
614. y for the upper right corner 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 1500 1000 3500 1000 SKK KKK KKK QPP KO NNN SO SS 0 0 2000 0 Figure 21 2 EN Drawing Rectangles 21 5 Drawing Wedges Note Note A wedge is a section of a circle Wedges are commonly used to draw pie charts You can draw a wedge by outlining edging the defined area using the Edge Wedge EW command or you can create filled wedges using the Fill Wedge WG command The wedge commands use your current pen location as the center point you specify the radius the start angle and the sweep angle The radius determines the length of the two sides of the wedge The sign positive or negative of the radius determines the location of a zero degree reference point The start angle is the number of degrees from the zero reference point at which you want to draw the first radius The sweep angle is the number of degrees through which you want to draw the arc To draw or fill a circle simply specify a 360 degree sweep angle Figure 21 4 shows the different parameters of a wedge with a positive radius A positive angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis as shown below A negative angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis Y 90 ab 180 O X a 270 Figure 21 3 The relationship of the X axis to Y
615. ymbol set but are instead composed of a range of compatible symbol collections This font header is shown in Format 15 TrueType Scalable Font Header This new font header supports TrueType scalable fonts bound or unbound This font header is shown in Table 11 6 11 6 Soft Font Creation EN Note Notes EN Use the Font ID command to designate a unique ID number prior to the download of a font header If an existing font is already associated with this ID the existing font is deleted upon the download of the font header Unless otherwise specified inappropriate values in a font header field invalidates the font download process a font is not created and the associated font data is discarded Intellifont scalable font formatting also requires the Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format document which supplements the information provided here For information on how to obtain this document refer to Related Documents in the front of this manual The figures that follow illustrate the font header formats for the various font classifications The individual fields for the font headers are described following the figures Although some LaserJet printer models do not use all of the data in the font header and thus ignore many of the fields a font creator should use valid values in all of the font header fields This ensures font compatibility across the LaserJet printer family and with future printers which may use these fields

PCL 5 Printer LanguageTechnical

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents